LIBRAEY 

OP  THE 

Theological   Seminary, 

PRINCETON,    N.  J. 

C€isey_^^r^^T^.Ji).i  vis  i  o  n 

Shelf.     /s^^W   Section 

Booh,  No, 


/ 


i^ftftM^.,^4Xt 


^  *»,M*t*V  "5  *,  -^H*^i  \  *oM|  **\  $ 


>\H  « 


UW*^^*i  ^ 


J5&S& 


V 

36 


fl^/Zfadw*/ 


THE 
PROPHETIC  HISTORY 

OF   THE 

CHRISTIAN  RELIGION 

EXPLAINED;  OR 

A  BRIEF  EXPOSITION 

OF  THE 

REVELATION  OF  St.  JOHN5 

ACCORDING 

TO  A  NEW  HIS  Cot  ERY  OP  PROPHETICAL  TIME,  BY  WHICH 
THE  WHOIE  CHAIN  OF  rKOFHECTKS  IS  ARRANGED,  AND 
THEIR  CERTAIN  COMPLETION  PROVED  FROM  HISTORY 
DOWN  TO  THE  PRESENT  PERIOD — WITH  SUMMARY 
VIEWS  OF  THOSE  NOT  YET  ACCOMPLISHED.. 


By  the  Rev.  J.  GEORGE  SCHMUCKER, 

Pastor  of  the  Evangelic  Isutheran  Church,  York-Town,  Penh, 


VOL.  I. 


Tempora  distingue  et  concordat  Domini  Verbuu?. 
BALTIMORE: 

S RIJJTEB  AND  PUBLISHED  by  SCH4EFFER  JUld  3UT71SP 

1817. 


"hi 


COPY  BIGHT   SECURED  ACCORDING  TO  IAW. 


RECOMMENDATIONS. 


The  attentive  reader  will  find  abundance  of  entertainment,  instruction 
and  edification  in  the  perusal  of  this  work.  The  prophetic  chronology  by 
which  the  different  prophecies  are  arranged  into  one  continual  series,  and 
which  seems  tu  accyid  su  well  with  history,  merits  the  particular  attention 
of  the  learned.  I  have  no  doubt,  the  Lord-will  graciously  bestow  his  bles- 
sing upon  it,  especially  in  the  present  critical  juncture  of  times.  The 
long  and  intimate  friendship  existing  between  the  author  and  myself,  pre- 
vents me  from  saying  more,  than  to  express  my  wish,  that  his  learned  la- 
bours may  meet  with  that  success,  which  they  so  eminently  and  deserv- 
edly merit. 

J.  HENRY  CH.  HELMUTH,  D.  D. 
Senior  Reverendi  Ministerii  of  the  Evangelic  Lutheran  Church  in 
Pennsylvania  and  the  adjoining  States,  and  Pastor  of  the 
Lutheran  Church  in  Philadelphia. 
Philadelphia,  Oct.  11,  1816. 


Reverend  and  Respected  Sir, 
I  have  read  with  attention  and  pleasure,  your  "  Prophetic  History,  &c." 
In  a  style  easy  and  luminous,  and  with  a  train  of  illustration  purely  evan- 
gelic, you  have  prepared  a  pleasing  and  edifying  entertainment  for  your 
future  readers.  I  am  aware  o  the  difficulties  that  have  offered  themselves 
to  the  Commentator  on  the  Revelation  of  John.  Every  endeavour  tojele- 
y#te  the  veil,  by  which  its  prophecies  as  to  import  and  period,  are  con- 


eiealed  from  public  view,  deserves  commendation.  I  shall  be  happy  to  see 
the  principles  contained  in  your  introduction,  employed  in  elucidating  the 
Tatter  chapters  of  the  Apocalypse. 

I  am,  Reverend  Sir, 

Your  attentive  Fellow  Servant, 

In  the  Kingdom  and  Patience  of  Jesus, 

W.  STAUGHTON,  D.  D. 
Castor  qf  the  Baptist  Church  in  the  city  of  Philadelphia. 


That  the  prophecies  of  the  Apocalypse,  are  progressing  in  their  accom- 
plishment, by  the  events  of  our  own  days,  is  an  interesting  truth ;  and 
that  its  credibility  is  abundantly  established  by  the  history  of  the  ages, 
isince  its  publication  in  the  world,  is  clear  to  every  well  instructed  and 
unprejudiced  mind  The  partial  conflict  of  interpreters,  are  so  far  from 
invalidating,  that  their  discrepancies  of  sentiment  on  minor  points,  have 
exhibited  the  prophecy  itself,  in  a  clearer  light,  and  given  it  a  more  con- 
vincing efficacy.  Of  these  the  Reverend  Mr.  Schmucker,  has  availed  him- 
self; his  knowledge  of  the  subject,  and  his  piety,  will  strike  every  reader. 
Bengelius,  he  most  prefers,  whose  discrimination  and  pungency  are  seen 
in  his  Gnomon.  Mr.  Schmucker's  Prophetic  History,  &c.  merits,  and  it 
is  hoped,  will  receive  the  attention  and  gratitude,  both  of  the  Student,  and 
the  Christian. 

JAMES  P.  WILSON,  D.  D. 

Pastor  of  the  First  Presbyterian  Church  in  Philadelphia, 

ROBERT  CATHCART,  D.  $, 
Pastor  of  the  Presbyterian  Congregation  of  York-Town, 


My  Dear  Friend  and  Brother, 
You  have  been  so  good  as  to  send  me  the  manuscript  of  your  work,  enti- 
tled "  Prophetic  History,"  See.  I  had  not  time  to  read  the  whole  of  it ; 
but  what  I  did  read,  pleased  me  much.  I  have  no  doubt  of  its  being  a  use- 
ful work,  and  have  no  hesitation  in  recommending  it  to  the  public.  May 
your  labours  in  the  Vineyard  of  the  Lord,  not  be  in  vain!  And  may  this 
work  of  yours,  be  the  means,  in  the  hands  of  Providence,  to  bring  many  to 
the  knowledge  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  and  to  strengthen  the  faith  of  the  weak. 
Your's  sincerely, 

GEORGE  LOCHMAN,  A.  M. 
Minister  of  the  Lutheran  Church  in  Harrisburg,  Pennsylvania,  and 
President  cf  the  German  Lutheran  Synod  of  Pennsylvania. 


Baltimore,  Nov.  20,  1816. 
Reverend  Sir, 

I  have  attentively  read  your  Exposition  of  the  Apocalypse.  The  new 
plan  which  you  have  adopted  to  elucidate  the  Prophetical  Chronology,  is 
a  proof  of  ingenuity  and  deep  research.  Every  attempt,  by  a  discerning 
mind,  to  explain  this  prophetic  Book,  which  certainly  is  drawing  near  its 
fulfilment,  deserves  commendation.  Your  readers  will  be  gratified  with 
many  historical  facts,  and  pious  reflections. 

I  sincerely  wish  the  public  may  be  favoured  with  a  continuation  of  this 
interesting  work,  and  solicit  you  to  lose  no  time  in  its  completion. 

I  am,  very  respectfully, 
Yours,  &c. 

DANffiL  KURTZ,  D.  D. 
Minister  of  the  Lutheran  Congregation  in  the  city  of  Baltimore. 


Meverend  Sir, 

I  have  only  had  time  to  take  a  cursory  view  of  the  work  of  the  Reverend 
Mr.  Schmucker,  which  you  were  so  good  as  to  put  into  my  hands ;  and 
consequently,  I  am  not  able  to  speak  with  confidence  of  its  merit.  But  it 
appears  to  me  to  be  a  performance  of  great  ingenuity,  and  deep  research. 
Whether  he  has  discovered  the  true  key  to  the  Revelation  of  St.  John,  I 
would  not  venture  to  say ;  but  his  arguments  and  illustration,  seem  to 
throw  additional  light  on  this  difficult  subject. 

lam,  Reverend  Sir, 
Yours,  &c. 

JAMES  KEMP,  D.  D. 
Bishop  of  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Ghurch  of  Maryland' 
Doctor  Kurtz.,, 


TO  THE  REVEREND 

J.  HENRY  CH.  HELMUTH,  D.  D. 

Settlor  Severendi  MRnisterii  of  the  Evangelic  Lutheran  Church,  and  Min- 
ister of  the  Gospel  at  Philadelphia. 

SEAR   SIR, 

To  live  retired  from  the  bustle  of  the 
world  has  always  been  my  delight,  and  the 
study  of  the  Holy  Scriptures  my  greatest 
pleasure;  ever  since  I  had  the  honour  of 
studying  ^divinity  under  your  care,  and  of  be- 
ing inducted  a  fellow  labourer  by  you,  into 
the  vineyard  of  our  Lord.  Many  of  my  lei- 
sure hours  from  official  duty,  have  particu- 
larly been  devoted  to  a  more  close  investiga- 
tion of  the  prophecies  and  their  completion. 
The  Apocalypse  of  St.  John  had  long  been 
impenetrable  to  my  Yiew,  and  the  authors 


which  I  read  on  that  subject,  left  me  in  doubt 
and  perplexity.  But  at  last  I  obtained  an 
insight,  which  to  me  appears  fully  satisfac- 
tory. My  eye  was  attracted  by  the  true  key 
to  this  Divine  treasure — A  prophetical  chro- 
nology, or  calculation  of  the  different  deno- 
minations of  time  in  this  book,  not  yet  no- 
ticed by  the  writers  on  this  subject.  By 
this  key  the  whole  number  of  predictions  ar- 
range themselves  into  a  long  chain,  shewing 
the  beginning,  connexion  and  length  of  every 
link,  and  the  extent  of  the  whole  system. 
My  joy  was  truly  great,  when  by  the  help 
of  this  key,  I  compared  the  prophecies  with 
history ; — conviction  broke  in  on  the  mind 
like  a  torrent — doubt  and  hesitation  disap- 
peared. The  light,  which  has  discovered 
itself  to  me ;  the  conviction  which  it  afford- 
ed my  mind,  of  the  credibility  of  the  gospel; 
the  confident  rest  in  our  glorious  and  ever 
blessed  Redeemer,  with  which  I  was  com- 
forted ;  may,  under  the  Divine  auspices  of 
an  all  ruling  Providence,  also  convince  and 
comfort  others.  These  are  my  motives,  my 
object  and  apology  for  publishing  this  small 


work  on  the  Revelation ;  though  I  confess^ 
I  do  it  with  unaffected  diffidence,  when  I 
consider  the  high  importance  of  my  subject^ 
and  my  own  fallibility. 

I  rejoice  at  this  opportunity  to  make  you 
a  public  tender  of  the  gratitude  of  my  heart, 
for  the  many  favors  which  you  have  bestowed 
on  me,  during  an  uninterrupted  friendship  of 
twenty -four  years*  Be  assured,  sir,  I  should 
suspect  my  own  heart,  if  among  the  many 
pupils,  which  you  so  successfully  prepared 
for  the  gospel  ministry  in  the  Evangelic  Lu- 
theran Church  in  this  country,  there  was 
one,  who  actually  entertained  more  respect 
for  your  character,  and  a  higher  esteem  for 
your  inestimable  labours  in  the  Lord.  It 
will  continue  to  be  a  large  part  of  my  earthly 
happiness,  to  enjoy  your  friendship,  your 
counsel,  your  confidence  and  comfort,  during 
the  shadowy  path  of  my  life  through  the 
valley  of  this  world ;  as  I  often  ask  myself 
in  cases  of  difficulty,  how  you  would  proba- 
bly act  in  the  same  situation,  and  still  look 
up  to  you  as  an  example,  worthy  the  iniita^ 
tion  of  all  your  brethren, 


You  will  excuse  the  liberty  I  have  taken 
of  publishing  this  treatise  under  your  name 
and  protection ;  which  I  hope  may  not  be 
displeasing  to  you,  It  is  not  that  I  think 
any  name  of  renown  will  screen  the  faults 
that  may  be  found  in  it ;  but  in  order  that 
it  may  find  unprejudiced  minds,  and  may 
not  be  condemned  without  a  reading — espe- 
cially in  those  parts,  which  might  be  branded 
with  the  terrible  imputation  of  novelty, 

I  have  the  honour  to  be, 
Rev'd  Sir, 
Your  attentive  fellow  servant,  in 
the  kingdom  and  patience  of  Jesus* 

J.  GEORGE  SCHMUCKER. 


CONTENTS. 


I.  Dedicatory  Epistle. 

II.  Preliminary  Observations : 

1.  The  present  state  of  the  world. 

2.  The  study  of  the  Prophecies,  a  Christian  and  necessary  duty, 

3.  Observations  on  the  Revelation  in  particular. 

a.  Difficult  to  explain. 

b.  Causes  of  obscurity. 

c.  Benevolent  intention  of  these  obscurities. 

HI.  Introduction  concerning  the  calculation  of  prophetic  times. 
1    Abuses  of  these  calculations. 

2.  Objections  to  them  answered. 

3.  Arguments  against  that  common  opinion,  that  a  day  in  the  Revels 

tion  signifies  a  year. 

4.  The  Revelation  contains  two  kinds  of  prophetic  times. 

,  5.  The  pious  prelate  Bengelius's  system  of  computing  the  extraordi- 
nary prophetic  times. 

6.  A  new  system  of  ordinary  prophetic  times,  by  which  Bengelius's 

system  is  rectified  and  confirmed. 

7.  Prospective  view  of  the  whole  system  of  the  prophecies  in  the  Re- 

velation, with  historical  notes  of  their  completion. 

8.  Remarks  on  this  system. 
IV.  Exposition  of  the  Revelation. 

1.  Title  of  the  Book Chap.  I.  1—3 

2.,  Dedication       -        - „        4 — 6 

3.  General  sum  of  its  Contents      ....  „        7 — 8 

4.  Glorious  appearance  of  Jesus  Christ  -    "  ."-  „        9 — 50 

5.  Seven  charges  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  great  shepherd 

and  bishop  of  souls,  to  seven  distinct  successions 
of  his  gospel  ministry : 

a.  Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Ephesus,  „  II.  1 — 7 

b.  Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Smyrna,  „         8— 11 

c.  Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Pergamos,  „       12—17 

d.  Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Thyatira,  „       18—29 


ft   Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Sardis,  Chap.  IE.    1—6 

/  Pastoral  Charge  to  the  Angel  at  Philadelphia,  „        7—13 

g.  Pastoral  Clurge  to  the  Angel  of  the  Laodiceans,        „       14—22 

6.  The  great  theatre  of  Heavenly  Visions,  Chap.  IV. 

T.  The  Lamb  assumes  the  government,  and  all  Beings  in  heaven  and 
on  earth  voluntarily  vow  allegiance.  Chap.  V. 

8,  The  Lamb  exercises  all  power  in-  heaven  and  earth  by  opening  the 

Seals Chap.  VI. 

a.  The  first  Seal  -        -        -        „        _  v.    1.  2. 

b.  The  second  Seal v.    3.  4. 

c  The  third  Seal v.    5  6. 

d.  The  fourth  Seal  V.    7.  8. 

e.  The  fifch  Seal  ....  v.    g  10 

f.  The  sixth  Seal  -  .        .        .  -     v.  12.  17 

9.  The  seventh  Seal  comprises  the  Trumpets. 

a.  Two  Visions,  preparatory  to  the  seventh  Seal,     Chap.  VH. 

b.  Special  execution  of  the  Divine  decrees  against  the 

kingdoms  of  this  world,  in  order  to  make  room  for 
the  kingdom  of  Christ,  proclaimed  by  the  trum- 
Pets> Chap.  VIII.    1.  6. 

a.  Trumpet     .>  v.    7 

b.  Trumpet      «-.-.  v.    12 

c.  Trumpet       -  v  jq.  H. 

d.  Trumpet     -  v.  12. 

Proclamation  of  three  woes,  under  the  fol- 
lowing Trumpets  :  v.  13. 

e.  Trumpet Chap_  Ix    v      j   12> 

/.  Trumpet     -        .        .        .        .  v.  13  21. 


PRELIMINARY  OBSERVATIONS. 

THE  christian  world  has  arrived  at  a  very  porten- 
tous period,  full  of  great  ahd  alarming  events.  Most  per* 
sons  of  reflection  will  allow,  from  the  interesting'  and  aw- 
ful scenes  carried  on  in  the  most  civilized  countries,  that 
the  end  of  the  present  form  of  civil  and  ecclesiastical  eco- 
nomy is  near  at  hand.  1  Pet.  iv.  7.-^1  Cor.  x.  11. — . 
Every  century  has  been  characterized  by  a  peculiar  spirit 
of  its  own,  modelling  every  thing,  more  or  less,  in  a  new 
mould,  and  often  making  inroads,  even  into  the  sanctuary 
of  the  Lord.  But  the  spirit  of  the  present  time  stands  dis- 
tinguished from  all  former  periods,  by  a  character  of  pe- 
culiar innovation  in  church  and  state.  No  doubt  these 
singular  events,  so  unparralleled  in  the  page  of  history,  are, 
according  to  certain  prophecies  both  in  the  Old  and  New 
Testament,  yet  only  the  prognostics  of  a  scene  of  things 
still  more  extraordinary  j  and  resolved  upon  in  the  coun- 
cils of  the  Most  High. 

Behold  the  spirit  of  the  nineteenth  century !  It  rose  up 
like  a  lion,  in  the  midst  of  a  grazing  flock — displeased 
With  every  thing,  which  did  not  bear  its  own  image. 
When  it  first  appeared  towards  the  close  of  the  last  cen- 
tury, boasting  of  reason*  philosophy  and  a  discovery  of 
the  fatal  consequences  of  superstition,  it  obtained  many 
votaries  ,•  but  when  it  assumed  the  garb  of  the  rights  of 
man,  it  was  hailed  by  millions.  Its  triumph  seemed  more 
certain  every  day,  until  it  was  perceived  by  the  wise  and 
considerate,  that  its  final  aim  was,  to  establish  infidelity, 
and  make  the  world  a  general  plunder  and  a  wreck.  And 
alas !  Their  anticipation  of  ensuing  horror  proved  too 
true.     Every  enclosure  was  broken  down— the  stately 

A 


2  PRELIMINARY 

edifices  of  former  centuries  demolished ;  all  Christendom 
shivered  at  its  approach,  as  in  the  presence  of  a  being  from 
the  other  world.  The  rulers  of  the  earth  began  to  lose 
the  balance  of  government,  against  the  internal  weight  of 
state ;  their  kingdoms  were  threatened  with  destruction, 
like  decayed  castles  at  the  approach  of  a  storm.  Battles 
were  fought,  cities  and  kingdoms  won  or  lost,  kings  de- 
graded or  restored  ;  and  all  the  splendid  ranks  and  orders 
of  men,  that  supported  them,  extinguished  or  established. 
Whole  countries  were  turned  into  a  slaughter  house,  where 
the  unburied  bones  of  thousands  yet  lie  bleaching,  and  whiten 
those  fields,  so  lately  smoking  with  human  gore.  Millions 
of  souls  have  rushed  from  the  field  of  battle,  in  a  few  years, 
into  the  world  of  spirits;  angels  bemoan  their  untimely 
end  with  compassion,  and  would  fain  comfort  the  widow 
and  the  fatherless. 

These  awful  scenes  touch  every  trembling  fibre  of  sen- 
sibility— the  heart  sickens  in  contemplating  the  misery  of 
millions,  and  the  subterraneous  waves  of  this  vast  ocean 
of  nations,  are  not  yet  commanded  to  rest.  The  prime 
cause  of  all  this  evil  was  infidelity,  the  partizans  of  which 
marshalled  themselves  in  the  order  of  the  Illuminatl.  This 
numerous  society  first  formed  and  propagated  itself  in  the 
secret  lodges,  and  under  the  garb  of  freemasonry,  since 
the  middle  of  the  last  century ;  but  soon  assumed  the  names 
of  almost  every  other  society,  to  carry  on  its  diabolical  de- 
signs, and  extend  its  banners  into  all  the  countries  of  Eu- 
rope and  America.  The  dark  plans  of  this  order  are  not 
even  yet  fully  developed.  That  murderous  revolution  in 
France,  was  the  first  fruit  of  their  exertions ;  whose  leaders 
apostatized  from  Christianity,  and  unblushingly,  in  the 
most  public  manner,  avowed  Atheism;  whilst  the  inferior 
adherents  exhibited  scenes  of  contempt  and  aversion  to  the 
very  name  of  Christ.  The  lurking  places  of  these  mon- 
sters of  unrighteousness,  are  not  yet  deserted ;  they  still 
go  on,  to  poison  the  sources  of  education,  and  to  persuade 


OBSERVATIONS.  3 

the  world,  that  the  restraints  of  religion  and  civil  govern- 
ment, are  but  an  intolerable  imposition;  endeavouring 
thereby  to  undermine  the  very  pillars  of  civil  society. — 
To  this  purpose  thousands  of  books  were  circulated,  writ- 
ten by  men  of  the  first  talents,  in  a  most  subtle  and  artful 
manner,  to  unhinge  public  opinion,  and  make  it  run  with 
loose  reins  through  every  field  of  moral  science.  Their 
success  was  astonishing,  even  to  themselves.  So  corrupted 
is  the  present  state  of  the  world;  so  panting  the  vitiated 
heart  of  man  for.  liberty,  to  follow  its  depraved  inclina- 
tions without  restraint  or  remorse;  that  in  France,  no  less 
than  twenty  thousand  new  proselytes  were  made  in  one 
year.  From  this  we  may  guess  at  their  progress  in  other 
countries,  and  know  the  fountain  of  that  insatiable  thirst? 
in  our  days,  for  lawless  liberty,  as  the  right  of  man. 

Political  confusions  naturally  produce  moral  corrup- 
tion. The  religious  institutions  became  involved  in  the  fate 
of  the  kingdoms  and  empires,  in  which  they  had  been  es- 
tablished. In  France  and  Germany  the  Church  of  God 
presents  little  more,  than  the  fragments  of  a  mighty  wreck. 
We  may  reasonably  conclude  from  this  state  of  the  chris- 
tian world,  that  peace  and  happiness  cannot  be  of  long  du- 
ration, where  the  sunshine  of  religious  hope  and  comfort 
has  vanished;  where  truth  is  controverted  with  all  the 
"charms  of  wit  and  elegance ;  the  honour  of  Christianity 
insulted  5  and  the  shadowy  path  of  life  made  dreary  and 
dismal,  by  doubt  and  despair.  Its  natural  course  would 
work  the  dissolution  of  all  civil  society,  without  a  special 
interference  of  Providence  in  behalf  of  his  church.  But  no, 
the  world  was  not  made  to  be  the  prey  of  infidels ;  God 
suffers  them  to  bring  judgment  on  themselves,  that  they 
may  either  turn  to  their  Father,  or  work  their  own  destruc- 
tion. Many  thousand  learned  and  serious  christians  this 
day  read  the  prophecies,  to  know  the  probable  future  pros- 
pects of  church  and  state ;  and  to  those  a  treatise  on  this? 
subject  cannot  fail  to  be  welcome. 

A  2 


4  PRELIMINARY 

The  study  of  the  prophecies  and  their  accomplishments  in 
the  signal  events  of  past  ages,  is,  more  or  less,  the  duty  of 
every  christian.  But  it  is  no  less  incumbent  on  us  also, 
attentively  to  consider  those  predictions,  which  may  now  be 
in  a  train  of  fulfilment ;  particularly  when  the  signs  of  the 
times  seem  very  interesting,  and  indicative  of  great  peril 
and  temptation.  The  Word  of  God  is  an  important  trea- 
sure indeed.  We  are  not  only  assured  by  it  in  general,  that 
the  grace  and  faithfulness  of  the  Lord  shall  never  fail ;  but 
we  are  there  also  provided  with  particular  instructions,  an- 
nexed to  each  prophecy,  by  which  believers  may  know  their 
duty  in  every  state  of  trial  and  discipline  to  which  they  may 
be  exposed.  In  this  the  provident  care  and  kindness  of 
God,  has  ever  been  apparent.  The  attacks  of  our  enemies 
are  often  powerful,  concealed,  and  subtile ;  and  we  are  in 
need  of  superior  direction  for  our  defence;  here  then 
divine  advice  straightens  our  path,  and  supplies  the  den-? 
ciency. 

I.  It  is  therefore  incumbent  on  the  people  of  God,  with 
the  faithful  Boereans,  to  search  the  Scriptures,  that  they 
may  know  the  signs  of  the  times,  and  observe  the  particular 
instructions  given  them  for  each  period.  To  this  they  are 
animated  and  directed  in  those  prophetic  declarations,  as 
the  most  wise  and  certain  rule  of  conduct  for  their  safety 
and  happiness.  The  secret  things  belong  unto  the  Lord 
our  God ;  but  those  things  which  are  revealed  belong  unto 
us,  and  to  our  children  forever,  that  we  may  do  them : 
Deut.  xxix.  29.  When  you  see  these  things  hegin  to 
come  to  pass,  then  look  up,  and  lift  up  your  heads ;  ior  your 
redemption  is  drawing  nigh  :  Luke  xxi.  28. 

2.  Prophecies  reach  but  to  the  grave;  all  their  contents 
only  affect  and  concern  the  living;  they  are  objects  of 
faith,  to  excite  our  attention  to  Providence,  and  to  the  Holy 
Scriptures.  For  here  we  walk  by  faith,  and  there  by  sight. 
II.  Cor.  v.  7.  As  all  are  more  deeply  interested,  it  becomes 
all  seriously  to  consider,  and  carefully  to  compare  the 


OBSERVATIONS.  £ 

signs  of  the  times,  with  the  prophecies  of  Christ  and  his 
inspired  servants.  Not  only  the  watchmen  on  the  walls  of 
Zion  should  feel  concerned,  to  form  correct  ideas  of  the 
prophetic  declarations  ;  but  ally  who  may  be  taken  una- 
wares, as  a  thief  in  the  night.  The  children  of  God  will 
always  have  their  share  in  the  sufferings,  inflicted  on  an 
unbelieving  world.  They  shall  be  purified  and  tested;  but 
the  wicked  shall  not  understand,  and  shall  fall,  by  think- 
ing themselves  secure  and  strong,  without  knowing  their 
weakness  and  danger.     Dan.  xii.  10. 

ill.  Our  Lord  reproved  the  Jews  of  his  days,  for  not 
taking  notice  of  the  prophecies  then  receiving  their  comple- 
tion before  their  eyes.  "  0  ye  hypocrites,  ye  can  discern 
the  face  of  the  sky  and  of  the  earth,  but  can  ye  not  discern 
the  signs  of  the  times  ?"  Matth.  xvi.  3.  He  charges  his 
disciples,  John  xvi.  14.  ''These  things  have  I  told  you,  that 
when  the  time  shall  come,  ye  may  remember  that  I  told 
you  of  them."  "  For  false  Christs  and  false  prophets  shall 
rise,  and  shall  shew  signs  and  wonders,  to  seduce,  if  it 
were  possible,  even  the  elect."     Mark  xiii.  2  2. 

IV.  The  beloved  apostles  of  Christ,  believed  it  a  duty 
incumbent  on  them,  to  give  solemn  warning  to  the  churches 
of  perilous  times  and  great  temptation ;  wherefore  they 
often  speak  of  the  latter  times.  Now  the  Spirit  speaketh 
expressly,  "that  in  the  latter  times  some  shall  depart  from 
the  faith,  giving  heed  to  seducing  spirits  and  doctrines  of 
devils."  1  Tim.  iv.  1.  and  2  Tim.  iii.  1.  «'  This  know  also,, 
that  in  the  latter  days,  perilous  times  shall  come."  And 
2  Pet.  ii.  and  Jude  17.  these  apostles  speak  in  the  same 
maimer  concerning  the  last  times,  as  being  dangerous,  and 
give  forewarning  of  heretical  doctrines,  which  should  then 
be  brought  in  by  false  prophets.  2  Pet.  iii.  1 — 4.  "  This  is 
the  second  epistle  I  now  write  to  you,  that  you  may  be 
mindful  of  the  words,  which  were  spoken  before,  by  the 
holy  prophets  :  that  there  shall  come  in  the  last  days  scof- 
fers, saying,  where  is  the  promise  of  his  coming?"  And 


6  PRELIMINARY 

2  Thess.  ii.  5.  u  Remember  ye  not,  that  I  told  you  these 
things,  when  I  was  yet  with  you."  And  St.  John  says, 
1  Epist.  ii.  18.  "  Ye  have  Aeartf,  that  Antichrist  shall  come," 
chap.  iv.  2.  "  Ye  have  heard,  that  the  spirit" of  Antichrist 
shall  come."  From  these  testimonies  we  may  safely  con- 
clude, that  the  apostles  gave  solemn  warning  to  the  Chris- 
tians of  their  days  generally,  of  perilous  times,  both  in  pub- 
lic discourses  and  private  converse ;  exhorting  every  one, 
carefully  to  discern  and  compare  the  signs  of  the  times  with 
the  prophecies,  and  to  observe  their  duty.  Though  we 
ought  always,  to  consider  it  our  first  obligation,  to  seek  the 
kingdom  of  God,  and  his  righteousness — to  be  reconciled 
through  the  blood  of  the  everlasting  covenant ;  yet,  if  the 
apostles  believed  it  necessary  for  the  Christians  of  their 
days,  to  consider  this  word  of  prophecy,  how  much  more 
will  it  be  our  duty,  who  live  in  those  very  times— in  the  last 
and  most  perilous  part,  of  which  they  have  spoken. 

V.  Of  all  the  books  of  the  New  Testament,  the  Reve- 
lation is  alone  expressly  prophetic,  and  prefaced  with  this 
animating  admonition  :  "  Blessed  is  he  that  readeth,  and 
they  that  hear  the  words  of  this  prophecy,  and  keep  those 
things,  which  are  written  therein ;  for  the  time  is  at  hand." 
Repeatedly  we  are  called  upon  throughout  this  whole  pro- 
phecy ;  "  he  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear — let  him,  that 
readeth  understand — blessed  is  he,  that  keepeth  the  say- 
ings of  the  prophecy  of  this  book — seal  not  the  sayings  of 
the  prophecy  of  this  book."  Here  then  it  is  made  our  so- 
lemn duty  and  interest,  to  attend  to  the  words  of  the  pro- 
phecy, and  their  accomplishment  in  the  signs  of  the  times, 
more  particularly  to  the  Revelation. 

The  Revelation  of  St.  John  has  in  all  ages  of  the  Chris- 
Man  sera,  been  the  wonder  and  mystery  of  the  world.  Its 
language  and  style,  constructed  on  the  symbolic  principles 
of  the  ancient  hieroglyphics,  replete  with  sublime  and  figu- 
rative terms,  will  always  fill  the  mind  with  amazement. 
The  deep  interest  of  all  in  these  predictions,  concerning  the 


OBSERVATIONS.  7 

prosperous  and  calamitous  events  of  the  church,  and  of 
those  kingdoms  and  empires  connected  with  her,  attracts 
the  attention  of  the  thoughtful  in  an  imperious  manner  to 
the  sense,  which  these  lofty  images  are  intended  to  convey. 
Great  minds  are  naturally  inclined  to  inquire  into  ohjects  of 
importance,  however  intricate  or  profound  they  may  be; 
and  here  they  were  presented  with  a  world  of  matter, 
which  will  employ  all  their  powers  in  its  investigation. 

This  subject  however,  has  always  proved  to  be  an  ardu- 
ous undertaking.  It  is  certainly  of  all  scriptural  prophe- 
cies the  most  intricate,  and  the  most  difficult  to  explain. 
We  have  many  works  extant,  in  every  language  of  Christen- 
dom, on  this  important  revelation  of  Jesus  Christ  to  his 
church.  And  though  I  feel  a  sincere  respect  for  the  learned 
labours  of  those  profound  scholars,  both  professional  di- 
vines and  laymen ;  yet  I  humbly  conceive,  only  a  few  of 
those  authors,  have  written  from  an  entire  conviction  of 
the  truth  and  certainty  of  their  own  explanations,  and  to 
the  satisfaction  of  judicious  readers.  It  was  not  for  want 
of  abilities,  natural  or  acquired,  that  those  great  and 
good  men  remained  in  the  morning  dawn  of  light.  The 
signs  of  the  times  had  not  yet  appeared,  which  have  since 
thrown  more  light  on  some  of  the  principal  prophecies, 
by  which  others  of  inferior  magnitude  are  regulated,  as 
to  the  time  and  manner  of  their  completion. 

The  Lord  has  caused  a  cloud  of  obscurity  to  rest  on  this 
book,  in  order  to  hide  his  eternal  counsels  from  the  scruti- 
nous  eye  of  vain  curiosity.  Its  profound  contents  are  sure- 
ly a  river  of  living  water,  flowing  from  the  throne  of  God ; 
where  a  lamb  may  drink  and  be  satisfied,  and  where  the 
stature  of  an  elephant  would  be  insufficient  to  pass  over. 
As  all  souls  are  his,  Ezek.  xviii.  4.  He  has  also  in  this  me- 
morial of  his  love  provided  nourishment,  comfort  and  advice 
for  all ;  whatever  their  different  states  and  ages  in  grace 
may  require.  1  John  ii.  12 — 13.  The  Epistles  to  the  seven 
churches  in  Asia  minor,  are.  easy  to  be  understood,  and 


8  PRELIMINARY 

have  been  of  general  utility  to  many  souls.  How  often 
have  they  roused  the  lukewarm,  confirmed  the  pious,  and 
strengthened  the  weak !  Even  Martyrs  have  called  them 
to  remembrance,  as  matter  of  great  comfort  in  their  dying 
agonies,  under  the  axe,  the  cross,  and  the  stake. 

This  degree  of  obscurity,  which  attends  the  major  part 
of  the  Revelation,  proceeds  in  some  measure,  from  the  na- 
ture and  circumstances  of  prophecy ;  and  partly  from  the 
highly  figurative  language,  in  which  the  prophecies  are 
conveyed.  In  some  parts  of  this  book,  it  may  also  pro- 
ceed from  the  spiritual  sense  of  the  letter,  referring  to 
objects  in  the  invisible  world,  above  the  sphere  of  our  com- 
prehension. 

The  language  is  hieroglyphic  and  emblematical.  By 
using  this  expression,  I  do  not  mean  to  conduct  my  rea- 
ders to  the  secret  language  of  the  Egyptian  priests,  who 
governed  both  church  and  state,  and  kept  their  records,  in 
delineated  characters,  drawn  from  the  figures  of  animals, 
or  other  objects  in  nature  to  express  their  ideas,  which 
none  except  themselves  understood.  They  retained  this 
mode  of  writing  from  a  high  reverence  for  Hermes  Tris- 
megistus,  who,  they  say,  was  the  inventor  of  it;  and 
whose  disciples  they  acknowledged  themselves  to  be.  In 
the  same  manner  as  the  Roman  Catholics  retain  the  Latin 
language ;  the  Nestorians  and  Monophisites ;  the  Syriac  ; 
the  modern  Egyptians ;  the  Coptic ;  the  Abyssinians ; 
the  Ethiopic,  as  the  languages  of  worship  and  religion ; 
because  they  had  become  sacred  among  them,  by  being  in 
use  for  many  centuries. 

No,  the  symbolic  is  not  exclusively  the  style  of  the  Egyp- 
tians. It  never  claimed  Egypt  for  its  fountain  head ;  since 
the  Egyptian  hieroglyphics  in  general,  bear  litle  resem- 
blance to  those  of  other  nations,  and  therefore  ought  not  to 
be  explained  solely  from  that  source.  It  is  the  style  of  all 
Asia ;  the  most  ancient  literature ;  and  we  may  say,  the 
language  of  nature.     Every  thing  in  antiquity  was  symbo- 


OBSERVATIONS.  9 

lie  and  allegorical  ;  and  this  style  delights  the  imagina- 
tion, pleases  and  improves  the  mind  of  even  the  weakest 
capacities,  more  than  any  other.  A  lion,  is  the  hieroglyr 
phic  of  strength  and  fortitude ;  a  steer  of  agriculture  ;  a 
horse,  of  liberty  and  speed;  a  sceptre,  of  royalty  ;  an  eye, 
of  the  Deity ;  a  serpent,  in  a  circle  with  variegated  spots, 
of  the  universe.  So  the  symbol  of  two  hands  united,  signi- 
fies peace,  darts,  denote  war;  and  the  lines  which  joined 
these  figures,  express  short  words  and  phrases. 

Besides  this  simple  mode  of  hieroglyphics,  the  Asiatics 
also  had  a  mixed  sort  of  emblematical  representation  of  en- 
larged and  extensive  import ;  by  which  they  implied  whole 
countries,  kingdoms,  empires,  and  the  character  of  nations, 
religions  and  governments.  They  would  draw  a  compound 
figure,  from  the  outlines  of  different  animals  or  other  ob- 
jects in  nature,  to  express  historical  facts,  or  convey  infor- 
mation of  doctrines  and  morals.  Thus  the  principal  cha- 
racters of  church  and  state,  are  called  by  the  names  of  the 
heavenly  luminaries ;  empires,  kingdoms  and  republics,  are 
signified  by  mountains,  hills  and  islands  ;  all  mankind,  by 
the  ocean;  and  commotions  of  nations,  by  the  waves  of  a 
tempestuous  sea,  or  by  the  eclipses  and  extinctions  of  celes- 
tial bodies.  Of  all  the  prophets,  St.  John  makes  the  most 
frequent  use  of  this  language  in  his  Revelation. 

But  besides  this  emblematical  style  in  a  general  view, 
the  natural  signification  of  many  words  in  this  prophecy 
alludes  to  customs,  tenets,  and  manners  of  times  and  places 
of  remote  antiquity ;  which  are  now  either  obliterated  by 
time,  or  rarely  understood,  except  by  men  versed  in  that 
kind  of  literature.  By  far  the  greater  part  of  the  figures, 
and  images  of  the  Revelation,  are  borrowed  from  the  sa- 
cred writings  of  the  prophets;  particularly  of  those,  who 
have  written  during  the  captivity  of  the  Jews,  and  since 
their  return  to  the  holy  land.  At  the  waters  of  Babylon,  the 
Israelites  had  access  to  the  religious  and  philosophical  te- 
nets of  ChaMean  wisdom ;  where  Daniel  held  the  first  sta- 


IQ  PRELIMINARY 

tion,  as  chief  of  the  Magi,  the  wise  men  of  the  East.  The 
nation  returned  to  their  own  land,  strongly  tinctured  with 
the  Chaldean  tenets;  customs  and  character ;  and  those 
born  in  the  land  of  captivity,  had  entirely  lost  the  language 
of  their  ancestors,  and  almost  the  spirit  of  Moses ;  viewed 
every  thing  with  Chaldean  eyes,  and  touched  the  holy  ves- 
sels with  Chaldean  hands.  This  change  of  the  nation  al- 
so had  a  great  influence  on  the  style,  and  manner  of  ex- 
pression of  the  latter  prophets.  The  style  of  Daniel  is 
wholly  Chaldean,  and  part  of  his  book  in  that  dialect.  The 
visions  of  Ezekiel,  which  he  saw  at  the  river  Chebar,  are 
descriptive  of  the  situation  of  those  countries.  And  the 
views  and  figures  of  Zechariah,  accord  with  the  Chaldean 
customs  and  character. 

When  St.  John  wrote  the  Revelation,  the  walls  of  nations 
had  been  broken  down  by  the  Romans,  and  the  different 
religious  opinions  and  philosophical  tenets  of  every  country 
within  their  grasp,  were  perfectly  afloat.  From  the  river 
Cyrus,  to  the  Nile;  from  the  Caucasus  to  the  Alps,  all  was 
an  ocean  of  floating  ideas,  tenets,  customs,  dialects,  and 
languages.  Judea  in  particular  stood  in  connexion  with  the 
sebomenois  with  the  scattered  Hellenistic  Jews,  from  Egypt 
to  the  Parthians,  Medes,  Elamites,  and  Mesopotamians, 
Acts  ii.  9,  10,  11;  who  from  time  to  time  brought  home, 
and  blended  with  their  own,  the  languages,  rites,  opi- 
nions and  fictions  of  other  nations.  The  Asiatics  began 
since  Alexander's  time,  to  speak  the  Greek  language ;  but 
they  only  made  it  the  vehicle  of  oriental  ideas.  The  reli- 
gious tenets  of  Zoroaster,  the  great  reformer  of  Sabseism, 
among  the  Medes  and  Persians,  which  Cyrus  brought  with 
him  to  Babylon,  when  he  established  his  empire  there  ; 
had  swayed  the  sceptre  for  many  centuries,  in  conjunction 
with  the  wisdom  of  Chaldsea,  from  the  Araxas  to  the  Medi- 
terranean sea.  This  mixture  of  religious  tenets,  and  rites 
of  worship,  assumed  the  Hellenistic  form,  under  the  Gre- 
cian kingdoms  in  Asia ;  and  the  doctrines  of  the  oriental 


OBSERVATIONS.  II 

sages,  furnished  the  ground  works  to  the  Jewish  Cabhala, 
the  Platonic  philosophy,  and  at  last  to  the  Gnostic  sect. 
What  a  powerful  and  extensive  influence  all  thes  sources  of 
knowledge  had  on  the  Greek  language,  during  the  time  of 
all  these  political  changes,  must  be  obvious  to  every  dis- 
cerning mind.  The  words  remained  Greek,  but  the  style 
ot  this  language  in  Asia;  the  meaning  and  signification  of 
words,  became  in  a  great  measure  Asiatic. 

For  this  reason,  thelanguageof  the  New  Testament,  and 
more  particular  that  of  the  Revelation,  cannot  be  Athenian; 
and  therefore  the  first  and  natural  signification  of  its 
words  should  only  be  studied  from  pure  Grecian  authors;  but 
more  especially  their  sense  and  meaning  from  Asiatic  wri- 
ters, who  have  lived  and  written  in  the  same  countries  with 
the  apostles.  Such  a  critical  knowledge  of  this  language, 
as  spoken  and  understood  in  Asia,  would  make  a  successful 
expositor  of  many  passages  of  the  New  Testament,  which 
have  hitherto  remained  obscure,  and  doubtful.  For  it  is  a 
monument,  which  evidently  bears  the  marks  of  that  time, 
and  the  evidence  of  the  different  manner  of  thought  and  use 
of  words  in  Asia,  from  writers  in  Europe.  How  much  more 
Asiatick  for  instance,  are  the  epistles  of  Paul  to  the  Ephe- 
sians  and  Colossians,  than  those  which  he  has  written  to  the 
Romans  and  Corinthians  ?  His  epistle  to  the  scattered  He- 
brews, is  a  living  memorial  of  their  manner  of  thought  and 
method  of  teaching.  The  language  of  St.  John  in  the  first 
chapters  of  his  Gospel,  and  more  especially  in  the  Revela- 
lation,  is  altogether  Asiatic.  He  lived  in  Ephesus,  then  a 
centre  point  of  the  remains  of  the  Persian  and  Chaldsean 
philosophy,  and  the  followers  of  John  the  Baptist;  and 
from  those  sources,  as  well  as  from  the  writings  of  the  pro- 
phets, the  style  of  the  Revelation,  and  the  current  significa- 
tion of  his  words  must  be  studied* 

But  the  obscurity  of  the  Revelation  also  proceeds  from 
the  nature  and  circumstances  of  prophecy  itself;  for  which 
many  reasons  might  be  assigned,  to  evince  the  divine  wis. 

B  2 


n  PRELIMINARY 

dom,  displayed  in  accomplishing  his  eternal  councils  on 
earth.  A  certain  degree  of  obscurity  is  necessary  to  some 
prophecies,  in  order  to  prevent  the  enemies  of  the  Lord, 
from  a  discovery  of  his  plan  of  proceeding.  In  case  of  a 
disclosure  before  their  accomplishment,  the  voluntary  in- 
struments of  wrath  might  shrink  back,  and  delay  the  designs 
of  heaven;  the  great  enemy  of  man  might  change  his  mea- 
sures ;  and  the  agents  in  Zion  disorder  their  aid,  and  loose 
their  reward  by  preciptancy  and  pride.  It  is  even  impos- 
sible that  those  prophecies,  relative  to  events  still  future, 
should  be  clear.  For  some  of  the  principal  outlines,  and 
many  of  the  particular  circumstances,  which  throw  most 
light  on  the  accomplishment,  so  as  to  identify  the  predic- 
tion, do  not  yet  exist.  We  may  fox'm  a  general  idea  by 
them,  of  the  designs  of  Heaven,  and  more  would  little  con- 
tribute to  our  happiness.  If  we  could  not  understand  their 
general  tenor,  why  would  the  Lord  reprove  the  Jews  of  his 
days,  for  their  ignorance  and  want  of  discernment.  D aniel 
understood  those  of  Jeremiah,  concerning  the  end  of  the 
captivity  of  the  Israelites  at  Babylon :  and  the  Scribes, 
those  of  Micah,  where  the  Messiah,  should  be  born,  and  told 
it  to  Herod.  A  full  insight  into  the  particular  circum- 
stances of  their  completion,  is  intended  only  for  cotemporary 
believers;  who  will  also  stand  in  need  of  additional 
strength,  for  the  severe  contest  of  those  days. 

This  obscurity  no  doubt,  proceeds  from  consummate  wis- 
dom and  a  most  benevolent  intention  towards  man.  Jt  in*, 
duces  the  children  of  God,  to  implore  the  Father  of  light 
for  the  illumination  and  wisdom  from  above;  it  excites  cu- 
riosity, industry,  and  attention  to  the  Word  of  God ;  con- 
vinces proud  reason  of  its  ignorance  in  matters  of  a  divine 
nature,  that  we  may  humble  ourselves  before  him ;  and 
prevents  disgust  and  weariness  in  the  study  of  these  divine 
oracles.  All  these  objects  would  not  have  been  obtained, 
if  the  language  of  prophecy  had  been  clear,  and  in  words 
-of  a  more  obvious  signification. 


OBSERVATIONS.  13 

A  great  part  of  the  Revelation  is  now  fulfilled,  and  a  suf- 
ficient acquaintance  with  history,  and  the  language  and 
style  of  prophecy,  is  all  that  is  necessary,  in  order  to  un- 
derstand it,  But  the  time  is  near  at  hand,  when  this  Book, 
by  a  most  evident  accomplishment  of  some  of  its  princi- 
pal predictions,  will  prove  to  be  the  greatest  comfort  and 
treasure  of  the  whole  church  of  Christ  on  earth, 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  calculation  of  prophetical  time  is  of  the  greatest  im- 
portance in  explaining  the  Revelation.  It  is  even  impossi- 
ble without  this  knowledge,  either  to  arrange  the  different 
prophecies  contained  in  this  hook,  into  their  genuine  order; 
or  to  shew  their  accomplishment  with  certainty,  and  to  the 
satisfaction  of  judicious  readers.  We  often  meet  with  it 
here,  even  more  frequently  than  in  all  the  rest  of  the  pro- 
phetic writings  of  the  OM -Testament.  If  the  computa- 
tion of  an  expositor  is  erroneous  in  principle,  or  defective 
in  its  progression,  he  will  necessarily  deceive  himself  and 
others,  hy  applying  the  prophecies  to  events,  which  infinite 
wisdom  never  intended  them  to  signify.  Hence  many  ahle 
and  good  men  have  failed  in  their  conjectures,  by  trusting 
too  much  to  the  strength  of  their  own  understanding;  and 
injudicious  enthusiasts,  neglecting  to  improve  on  those 
parts  already  accomplished,  have  attempted  to  dive  into  fu- 
turity, and  alarmed  the  world  by  a  false  interpretation  of 
times  and  events,  as  if  God  designed  to  make  them  pro- 
phets. Such  proceeding  is  daring  apd  impious.  For 
when  the  events  prove  the  falsity  of  their  predictions,  a 
,part  of  the  contempt  and  ridicule,  which  so  deservedly  fall 
on  the  author  of  them,  will  also  bring  the  Word  of  God  into 
disrepute  with  the  ignorant.  Hence  that  guilty  backward- 
ness of  many  in  our  days,  to  study  this  book  at  all,  and  to 
apply  these  strong  holds  of  faith,  contained  therein,  to  the 
advancement  of  the  church,  of  which  in  our  days  of  infide- 
lity she  stands  so  much  in  need. 

The  prophet  Daniel  was  expressly  commanded  to  shut 
up  and  seal  (conceal  the  sense  of)  liis  prophecy,  relative 


16  INTRODUCTION* 

to  the  suffering  state  of  the  church  in  the  latter  time.  He 
has  however  given  us  a  series  of  prophetic  numbers,  to 
compute  the  long  interval  of  time,  between  the  date  of  his 
prophecy  and  its  final  accomplishment ;  if  we  have  the  key 
to  unlock  this  divine  treasure,  which  we  are  directed  in 
confidence  to  expect  in  due  season.  It  is  promised,  the 
industrious  searcher  of  the  prophetic  word,  Chap.  xii.  4. 
"  Many  shall  run  to  andfro,  read  and  study  the  prophecies, 
desirous  of  knowledge  and  comfort  in  those  days  of  peril, 
and  knowledge  shall  be  increased."  But  St.  John  was  inter- 
dicted in  direct  terms  to  do  so.  Rev.  xxii.  10.  "  And  he 
saith  unto  me,  seal  not  the  sayings  of  the  prophecy  of  this 
book;  for  the  time  is  at  hand."  Rev.  i.  3.  *'  Blessed  is  he 
that  readeth,  and  they  that  hear  the  words  of  the  prophecy." 
The  Revelation  therefore,  not  withstanding  the  height  and 
depth  of  its  prophetic  contents,  is  yet  of  such  a  nature,  that 
it  may,  and  shall  be  understood.  It  is  not  a  sealed  book, 
covered  over  with  an  impenetrable  cloud ;  no,  it  is  an 
Apocalypsis,  a  Revelation,  a  discovery  of  Jesus  Christ  to 
his  servants ;  a  commentary  on  the  prophecies  of  the  Old 
Testament,  and  a  key  to  the  disclosure  of  its  prophetical 
time,  concerning  the  gospel  dispensation. 

But  perhaps  some  of  my  readers  may  have  a  conscientious 
scruple,  to  enter  into  investigations  of  this  kind.  They  be- 
lieve to  have  found  a  prohibition  to  all  calculations  of  this 
nature  in  that  memorable  passage.  Matt.  xxiv.  36.  Where 
the  Son  of  God  says :  "But  of  that  day  and  hour  knoweth 
no  man,  no,  not  the  angels  of  heaven,  neither  the  Son 
(Markxiii.  32)  but  my  Father  only."  This  passage  truly 
has  the  appearance  of  a  negative  prohibition.  But  the 
Lord  cannot  allude  here  to  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem; 
for  he  has  determined  the  time  of  that  catastrophe,  to  takfr 
place  before  that  generation  should  pass  away,  and  repeat- 
edly advised  Ms  disciples  to  escape,  and  save  themselves  by 
flight,  which  they  actually  did.  Neither  can  these  words 
apply  to  our  Lord's  second  advent,  at  the  approach  of  the 


INTRODUCTION.  1? 

Millennium ;  for  also  this  period  is  determined  by  limits  and 
numbers,  both  in  Daniel  and  the  Revelation.  Our  Lord 
then  actually  here  refers  to  what  the  disciples  originally 
inquired  after,  namely,  the  end  of  the  world.  Now  of  this 
period  our  Lord  and  Saviour  saith:  neither  He,  nor  the 
angels  had  any  special  knowledge,  as  to  the  day  and  hour. 
But  this  he  spoke  of  his  mediatorial  character,  and  even  in 
that  respect,  it  was  only  the  case  during  his  pilgrimage  on 
earth.  He  is  now  exalted  to  the  right  hand  of  the  eternal 
Father,  and  has  opened  the  book  of  seven  seals,  in  which 
all  the  councils  of  the  Almighty  are  disclosed  to  his  view, 
concerning  the  plan  of  government  in  his  Church  and  the 
consummation  of  all  things. 

The  apostles  in  a  general  meeting,  inquired  of  the  Lord 
after  his  resurrection,  saying,  "  Lord,  wilt  thou  at  this  time 
restore  again  the  kingdom  to  Israel  ?"  And  He  said  unto 
them,  «4  it  is  not  for  you  to  know,  (chronous  or  kairous)  li- 
mited terms  or  times,  which  the  Father  hath  determined  in 
his  own  authority."  This  answer  has  also  been  urged  as  a 
general  interdiction  to  all  inquiries  of  this  sort ;  although  it 
is  limited  by  the  very  words,  only  to  the  apostles,  »^  Cpwv 
kgrt  (sc.  iqyov)  yvuvoti  non  est  vestrum  (opus)  scire ;  it 
does  not  belong  to  your  ministry  and  time  to  know,  ^ovov? 
v\  kcii(>ov?}  ye  shall  be  witnesses  unto  me,  to  the  uttermost 
part  of  the  earth.  But  the  Lord  does  not  deny  in  these 
words,  that  it  is  the  duty  of  others  who  live  after  the  time 
of  the  apostles,  to  know  these  limited  terms  and  times.  He 
rather  asserts  it,  by  distinguishing  between  those  who 
ought,  and  who  ought  not  to  make  it  their  business  to  in- 
quire. No,  if  the  original  is  closely  inspected*  the  words 
of  the  Lord  will  yet  prove  an  answer  to  the  inquiry  of  the 
apostles.  They  had  used  the  word,  ^povo?,  time,  in  the 
singular  number,  and  no  doubt  also  in  its  common  accepta- 
tion; but  the  Lord  answers  in  the  plural,  and  with  an  em- 
phatical  difference  of  the  words,  p^ovovf  #  Koueovg;  and 
these  epochs  and  times  are  enigmatical  expressions  in  hte 

c 


18  INTRODUCTION. 

lips,  denoting  limited  times  and  periods,  the  length  of 
which  will  hereafter  be  determined. 

Prophecies  are  objects  of  faith,  whether  they  relate  to 
time,  place,  or  events ;  and  it  is  equally  laudable  to  credit 
one  and  the  other,  on  the  authority  of  God.  The  an- 
cient patriarchs  could  not  wait  in  expectation  of  the  pro- 
mised Messiah,  without  conjecture  as  to  tiie  time  of  his 
coming ;  or  unless  they  also  believed  the  prediction  con- 
cerning the  time  of  his  appearance  in  the  flesh  ?  When  the 
Lord  promised  Sarah  a  son  in  a  short  time,  would  it  have 
been  proper  in  her,  to  confide  in  this  divine  declaration  on- 
ly concerning  the  son,  and  not  also  as  to  the  time  of  his 
birth  ?  If  Hezekiah  had  only  believed  the  promise  of  his 
recovery,  and  under  a  pretence  of  modesty,  not  of  the  fifteen 
years  also,  which  the  Lord  added  to  his  days,  his  gratitude 
Would  no  doubt  have  been  defective.  If  the  men  of  Nine- 
veh had  only  believed  the  prophecy  of  Jonah,  concerning 
the  destruction  of  their  city,  and  not  likewise  relative  to 
the  forty  days,  their  repentance  would  surely,  have  been 
far  less  prompt  and  ardent  than  it  was.  When  the  noble 
Lord  in  Samaria,  would  not  believe  Elisha  concerning  the 
great  plenty  in  twenty-four  hours,  his  unbelief  cost  him  his 
life.  2Kingsvii.  1.  Had  the  Israelites  at  Babylon  not 
been  attentive  to  the  seventy  years  of  their  captivity,  fore- 
told by  Jeremiah,  they  would  either  by  impatience  have 
brought  themselves  into  troubles  while  there,  or  probably 
never  have  returned  to  the  land  of  promise  from  Chaldsea. 
It  is  even  more  congenial  to  our  age  in  grace,  under  the 
gospel  dispensation,  that  our  faith  should  comprise  the 
whole  Word  of  God ;  and  not  neglect  any  part,  which  the 
Lord  may  have  judged  proper,  (semel  pro  semper)  to 
reveal  to  his  Church. 

The  way  being  thus  prepared,  I  shall  now  speak  more 
directly  to  the  professed  point  of  my  subject.  But  before 
I  explain  that  highly  probable  system  of  prophetical  chro- 
nology, discovered  by  that  learned  and  pious  prelate  Ben- 


INTRODUCTION.  19 

gelius,  A.  D.  1742,  which  is  now  generally  received  and 
followed  in  Germany ;  it  will  be  necessary  for  the  reader 
to  observe,  what  I  would  presume  a  grand  mistake  in  some 
of  the  beloved  Apocalyptical  systems  of  our  days.  This 
error  consists  in  taking  a  day  in  the  Revelation  to  signify  a, 
year.  It  is  argued  from  the  following  passages,  that  days, 
mean  years :  Numbers  xiv.  33,  34.  Ezekiel  iv.  5,  6. 
Daniel  ix,  24,  25,  26.  Luke  xiii.  33;  and  these  proofs  are 
sti  ong  and  conclusive  evidence,  of  this  having  been  an  an- 
cient mode  of  calculation ;  but  it  certainly  would  be  a  weak 
and  premature  conclusion,  to  say,  that  hence  it  must  also 
be  followed  in  the  Revelation  of  St.  John  ?  No,  the  contra- 
ry is  evident  from  the  following  reasons. 

I.  The  defenders  of  this  mode  of  calculation  confuse  the 
whole  internal  order  and  method  of  this  book,  which  in  it- 
self is  more  regularly  written,  to  assist  our  weak  under- 
standing, than  any  other  scriptural  prophecy.  Some 
throw  its  whole  contents  into  seven  periods,  so  that  each 
period  shares  one  of  the  seals,  one  trumpet  and  one  vial  j 
and  all  the  rest  of  heterogeneous  matter  is  forced  into  them, 
as  into  a  case  of  drawers,  wherever  it  may  suit.  Others, 
to  uphold  their  beloved  system  of  calculation,  have  rent  the 
prophecy  in  two,  and  begin  anew  with  the  twelfth  chapter 
and  the  birth  of  the  man-child.  This  proceeding  is  arbi- 
trary and  unwarrantable  :  the  Word  of  God  deserves  to  be 
studied  with  more  deference  and  respect.  It  is  not  with 
the  Revelation  as  with  other  prophecies,  where  perhaps 
you  may  say,  the  method  and  style  is  not  of  divine  origin ; 
for  here  the  order  and  method  of  the  whole  vision  is  not 
to  be  ascribed  to  the  manner  or  choice  of  the  apostle. 
He  has  written  it,  as  it  was  emblematically  exhibited 
to  him  from  that  heavenly  book  with  seven  seals,  of 
which,  even  as  to  order  and  method,  the  Apocalypse  is  a 
copy. 

II.  If  a  day  be  taken  for  a  year,    the  times  of  the  three 
woes  alone,  will  amount  to  sixty  months,  or  eighteen  hun* 


20  INTRODUCTION. 

dred  years.  Where  will  room  be  found  for  all  the  events, 
which  are  to  proceed  the  first  woe  ?  for  the  three  different 
cessations  or  pauses,  which  the  text  calls  for,  before  the 
first,  second  and  third  woes  ?  for  those  events  in  the  third 
woe,  which  are  to  take  place  both  before  and  after  the 
forty -two  months  of  the  power  of  the  beast  ?  and  for  the 
important  contents  of  the  xx.  chapter  ?  It  would  be  incom- 
patible with  the  express  words  of  the  prophecy,  to  let 
either  of  these  woes  run  parallel  to  each  other,  for  any 
space  of  time.  The  effects  of  the, first  woe  must  necessarily 
have  ceased,  at  least  in  the  church,  before  the  second  can 
begin ;  and  so  the  second,  before  the  commencement  of 
the  third;  though  they  may  continue  in  other  parts  of  the 
world.  Chapt.  ix.  12.  xi.  14. 

III.  How  could  the  Devil's  stay  on  earth  be  called  a 
short  time,  which  yet  begins  a  considerable  time  before  the 
forty -two  months  of  the  beast,    and  only  closes  some  time 
after  it  is  destroyed,  if  these  forty -two  months,  amount  to 
twelve  hundred  and  sixty  years  ?  Surely,  this  short  time  of 
Lis  continuance  on  earth,  cannot  be  as  long,  as  the  follow- 
ing one  thousand  years  of  his  confinement  in  the  bottom- 
less pit  ?    The  expression,  "  a  short  time,"  is  certainly  a 
comparative  form  of  language,  to  which  the  positive  must 
somewhere  be  found.     And  why  would  these  two  numbers, 
relative  to  the  same  object,  be  expressed  in  this  manner ; 
if  the  diminutive  and  undetermined  number,  wag  not  to  be 
compared  to  the  following  one  settled  and  fixed  ?  The  very 
first  sight  of  them  ought  to  strike  conviction  into  every 
mind,  and  no  doubt,  if  closely  examined,  will  prove  the  in- 
consistency of  the  yearly  day  in  this  place. 

IV.  The  advocates  for  the  yearly  day,  have  thrown  the 
forty -two  months  of  the  beast,  the  twelve  hundred  and  six- 
ty days  of  the  witnesses,  the  twelve  hundred  and  sixty 
days  and  the  time,  times  and  half  a  time  of  the  woman 
all  into  one  calamitous  epoch  of  twelve  hundred  and  sixty 
years  ',  for  which  at  last  they  have  neither  a  certain,  nor  a 


INTRODUCTION.  21 

suitable  commencement.  Before  the  year  A.  D.  1736, 
they  mostly  dated  from  A.  D.  476,  and  some  even  before 
that  year  :  but  since  nothing  remarkable  has  terminated 
that  period,  they  have  begun  to  change  to  later  dates,  still 
less  remarkable  on  the  page  of  history,  and  of  course  less 
probable  to  begin  so  important  a  train  of  events.  Late 
writers  have  since  adopted  the  dates  A.  D.  500,  and  606, 
when  the  emperor  Phocas,  declared  the  bishop  of  Rome 
universal  bishop.  But  the  first  foundation  for  the  papal 
power  and  grandeur,  had  been  laid  before  that  time; 
the  emperor's  declaration  gave  this  title  little  or  no 
effect,  for  the  Eastern  churches  never  consented  to  this 
decree.  ' 

V.  Another  argument  against  the  yearly  day,  is  the 
measure  used  in  the  Revelation,  chapter  xxi.  which  is  evi- 
dently different  from  that  of  Ezekiel  xl.  This  difference 
grounds  a  supposition,  that  the  mode  of  calculation  here, 
may  also  be  of  a  peculiar  form,  different  from  that  in  the 
Old  Testament. 

VI.  He  who  minutely  studies  chap.  xiii.  of  the  Revela- 
tion, with  all  the  attention  it  so  well  deserves,  will  there 
meet  with  a  new  key,  for  the  computation  of  the  prophetic 
times,  peculiar  to  this  prophecy ;  which  certainly  would 
not  have  been  given,  if  the  ancient  mode  of  calculation 
had  been  used  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy  in  this  book.  This 
key  only  must  be  employed  here,  and  no  other  will  verify 
itself  on  the  page  of  history ;  as  evinced  by  so  many  weak 
and  inconclusive  essays,  where  the  authors,  otherwise  re- 
spectable, have  followed  an  erroneous  mode  of  calculation, 
and  involved  themselves  in  clouds  and  darkness,  as  well  as 
the  subject  which  they  laboured  to  elucidate. 

VII.  The  very  title  of  this  book,  and  the  introduction  to 
the  seven  churches  indicate,  that  its  peculiar  contents  con- 
vey something  new  and  unknown  before.  It  is  a  Revela- 
tion, a  discovery  of  those  unfathomable  designs  in  the  divine 
plan  of  government,  reserved  an<jphid  from  the  foundation 


22  INTRODUCTION. 

of  the  world  in  the  councils  of  the  Almighty  Ruler  of  the 
Universe.  In  such  a  work  we  may  expect  to  find  many 
things  new;  a  new  computation  of  time,  and  the  promised 
key  to  the  hidden  numbers  in  Daniel ;  a  new  arrangement 
and  method,  in  which  important  and  numerous  subjects  are 
presented  to  the  worjd :  a  new  collection  of  the  scattered 
rays  of  the  Old  Testament  prophecies,  relative  to  the 
church  of  Christ,  more  completely  delineated  and  decked 
by  the  finishing  hand,  to  answer  the  purposes  of  Heaven 
with  his  militant  people  on  earth. 

The  Revelation  contains  two  kinds  of  prophetic  time, 
the  one  ordinary  and  methodical,  and  the  other  extraordi-" 
nary ;  which  last  numbers  are  introduced  to  protract  the 
periods  of  the  first  and  methodical  time,  wherever  they  oc- 
cur. Of  the  extraordinary  time,  that  pious  prelate  Ben- 
gelius,  has  discovered  the  true  length  and  duration ;  and 
the  ordinary  and  Tnethodical  time,  under  which  this  series 
of  prophecies  arrangeth  itself  into  one  coherent  system,  is 
wholly  my  own.  I  shall  first  give  an  account  of  Benge- 
lius's  system,  which  he  has  rendered  such  eminent  services 
to  the  church,  and  then  illustrate  the  one  I  avow ;  since 
both  schemes  are  necessary,  in  order  to  understand  the 
Revelation,  and  used  in  the  following  treatise. 

The  prophetic  times  of  the  Revelation  are  either  ex- 
pressed by  the  same  terms  of  natural  time,  although  they 
are  much  longer  as  for  instance,  the  forty-two  months  of 
the  beast ;  or  they  are  denominated  by  indeterminate  terms, 
which  yet  have  a  certain  duration  here"  in  the  order  of 
prophecies :  as  for  instance,  the  time,  times  and  half  a  time 
of  the  woman  in  the  wilderness,  and  that  period  during 
which  the  souls  under  the  altar  were  yet  to  rest,  called  a 
Chronos.  But  there  are  also  natural  times  in  this  pro- 
phecy, Which  are  not  prophetic,  to  wit,  the  six  hundred  and 
sixty-six  years  of  the  power  and  duration  of  the  beast,  and 
the  one  thousand  years  of  the  Millenium  on  earth:  both 


INTRODUCTION.  23 

> 

are  either  expressly  determined  as  such,  or  limited  by  cir- 
cumstances, which  will  not  admit  them  prophetic. 

Now,  we  all  know  the  length  of  natural  time,  and  shall 
thereby  be  able  to  determine  the  periods  of  prophetic  time, 
if  a  key  be  given,  by  which  to  find  the  proportion  of  the  one 
to  the  other.  This  key  must  be  somewhere  in  the  Revela- 
tion. For  if  the  true,  length  of  these  times  could  not  be, 
at  least  nearly  determined,  these  numbers  would  be  here  to 
no  purpose  at  all.  The  learned  prelate  Bengelius,  found 
this  key  in  the  Chap.  xiii.  and  if  it  is  not  there,  it  is  no 
where  else.  There,  the  words  of  the  fifth  verse  run  thus ; 
"  And  power  was  given  to  Him  (the  beast)  ttoAsjuov  tvqiy\5oi,i 
bellum  gcrere,  to  make  war  forty  and  two  months."  Accor- 
ding to  the  natural  measure  of  time,  this  would  be  three 
years  and  a  half;  a  time  too  short  for  this  beast,  to  per- 
form all  ascribed  to  it  by  the  prophecy.  We  must  there- 
fore take  these  forty-two  months,  to  be  a  prophetic  time. 
Now  in  the  18th  verse  of  this  chapter,  we  read  these  me- 
morable words :  "  Here  is  the  wisdom — let  him  that  hath 
understanding  f'o  \%m  rov  v£v,  qui  intelligentia  estpraedu 
tusj  count  the  number  of  the  beast ;  for  it  is  the  number  of 
man;  and  his  number  is  six  hundred  threescore  and  six" — 
i.  e.  these  are  the  years  of  his  reign,  according  tq  the  natural 
manner  of  counting.  As  he  who  has  judgment,  is  here 
advised  to  calculate  by  this  number — and  since  the  text 
expressly  directs  our  attention  to  this  number :  here  is 
wisdom ;  this  passage  most  assuredly  contains  this  key. 
And  since  the  Orientals  counted  their  year  by  the  moon, 
this  key  will  stand  thus : 

Ifforty-two  prophetic  months  give  six  hundred  and  sixty- 
six  lunar  years,  what  will  be  a  prophetic  Aowr,  a  day,  a 
weeky  a  month,  a  year?  For  this  number  six  hundred  and 
sixty-six,  cannot  be  taken  to  run  parrallel  with  the  forty* 
two  months,  neither  can  it  be  considered  as  a  protraction 
ef  that  time ;  because  in  either  case  none  of  these  two  num~ 


24  INTRODUCTION, 

bers  could  be  compared  with  the  other  by  calculation,  as 
the  spirit  of  prophecy  here  directs. 

The  solution  of  this  problem  produces  the  following  ag- 
gregate, in  which  I  shall  not  take  notice  of  those  divisions 
of  time,  less  than  a  day, 

Prophetic  time.  Common  time. 

$  an  hour  chap.  viii.  1.    =  about  4  days. 

1  hour     chap,  xh .  15.  =  8  days. 

1  day     ...,;=  196  days. 

1260  days      chap,  xii.  6.    ==         677  years,  97  days. 

1  month    chap.  ix.  15.    =  13  years,  318  days. 

5  months  ....        =  79yrs.  19  wks.  lday. 

1  year =         196  years  117  days. 

1  h.  1  day,  1  m.  1  year  =  212  years  275  days. 
The  learned  prelate  Bengelius,  has  also  attempted  to  de- 
termine the  length  and  duration  of  those  indetermined 
terms  of  times,  found  in  the  Apocalypse,  by  a  profound 
mathematical  operation,  which  solves  some  of  the  most 
critical  and  intricate  questions  in  Astronomy,  concerning 
the  revolutions  of  the  Heavenly  bodies ;  but  to  me,  his  so- 
lutions on  this  head,  have  always  appeared  too  far  fetched, 
fanciful,  and  defective  in  their  application  to  the  prophe- 
cies. Those  who  wish  to  examine  him  on  this  subject,  and 
understand  the  German  and  Latin  languages,  may  satisfy 
themselves,  by  reading  his  inestimable  commentary  on  the 
Revelation  of  St.  John ;  his  Gnomon,  and  notse  in  Apoca- 
lypsin ;  and  his  Cyclus,  or  singular  investigation  of  the 
great  year  of  the  world.  Bengelius  is  without  doubt  the 
most  able  expositor  on  this  important  book,  of  all  German 
authors;  and  in  my  opinion  the  first  of  all  I  have  read  on 
this  subject.  His  profound  judgment,  his  extensive  know- 
ledge of  history,  and  his  great  proficiency  in  every  other 
branch  of  literature,  requisite  in  order  to  understand  this 
book,  enabled  him,  although  in  want  of  the  knowledge  of 
the  ordinary  and  methodical  prophetic  time  in  this  pro- 
phecy, to  strike  the  true  point  of  accomplishment  in  very 


INTRODUCTION.  fifr 

many  of  these  prophecies.  And  his  expositions  of  those 
predictions,  carry  a  degree  of  eyidence,  which  forces  the 
mind  to  acquiesce.  The  author  of  this  treatise  has  availed 
himself,  on  many  occasions,  of  his  assistance,  as  well  as  of 
the  exposition  of  Doctor  Yung. 

I  will  now  attempt  to  illustrate  my  own  system  of  pro- 
phetic chronology,  concerning  the  ordinary  and  methodi- 
cal times  used  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy  in  the  Apocalypse ; 
as  also  of  those  indetermined  terms  of  time,  in  the  limita- 
tion and  adjustment  of  which,  I  humbly  assume  to  differ 
from  the  decision  of  the  great  Bengelius.  The  author  en- 
ters on  this  subject  with  unaffected  diffidence— he  treads 
on  holy  ground  with  awe.  Yet  a  conscious  rectitude  of  in- 
tention, a  hope  of  obtaining  the  reader's  indulgence,  and  a 
conviction  of  this  subject,  being  peculiarly  seasonable  at 
this  perilous  time,  have  animated  him  in  this  undertaking, 
to  Which  he  otherwise  avows  himself  unequal.  He  would 
therefore  entreat  all,  who  honour  this  treatise  with  any  de- 
gree of  attention,  duly  to  consider  his  arguments  on  so  im- 
portant a  subject.  As  he  shall  do  little  more,  than  draw 
the  reader's  mind  to  notice  the  internal  method,  and  tire 
contents  of  the  Revelation  itself,  his  authorities  cannot  be 
invalidated,  if  once  firmly  established. 

The  Apocalypse  is  a  series  of  prophecies,  arranged  by 
the  Divine  hand  into  an  admirable  system,  which  consti- 
tutes it  one  great  whole.  It  cannot  be  explained  by  de- 
tached pieces,  like  other  prophetical  books  of  the  holy 
scriptures.  Its  general  design  must  be  known,  the  har- 
mony of  the  different  parts,  and  their  dependence  on  eacji. 
other  understood,  to  warrant  an  author  in  this  enterprise. 
No  book  of  the  Old  or  New  Testament  is  so  designedly 
written  with  art  and  wisdom,  as  to  general  method  and  ad- 
justment of  all  its  particular  parts,  as  these  sacred  oracles; 
and  this  internal  method  of  the  prophecy  itself,  into  which 
its  whole  contents  are  adjusted,  constitutes  and  expresses,  a 


35  INTRODUCTION. 

prophetic  chronology,  or  computation  of  times,  and  periods, 
in  which  these  predictions  are  to  meet  their  completion. 
Not  only  the  contents  of  this  book  are  prophetic,  but  also 
the  order  and  method  in  which  its  contents  are  presented 
to  us,  is  expressive  of  the  times  and  periods  of  the  church 
of  Christ,  under  the  New  Testament  dispensation.  Some 
of  my  readers  will  take  this,  to  be  no  more  than  a  hypo- 
thesis as  yet;  however  a  series  of  signal  events  will  soon 
convince  them,  that  it  is  a  well  established  truth. 

The  prelate  Bengelius's  system  of  calculation  on  the  de- 
termined prophetic  times,  is  neither  erroneous  nor  defec- 
tive ;  if  those  numbers  which  it  comprises,  are  taken  to  be 
no  more,  than  what  the  spirit  of  prophecy  intended  them 
to  be,  to  wit,  extraordinary  numbers,  to  enlarge  the  me- 
thodical periods  of  time  in  this  book.  But  if  we  attempt 
to  arrange  the  whole  series  of  prophecies  by  them,  this 
system  is  certainly  very  imperfect,  and  by  no  means  sa- 
tisfactory to  an  inquisitive  mind.  It  only  touches  some 
particular  links  in  this  extensive  chain  of  predictions,  and 
leaves  all  the  rest  without  a  proper  chronological  adjust- 
ment. Hence  the  learned  prelate's  system  has  neither  a 
certain  date,'  nor  a  perfectly  important  fact,  from  which  to 
commence  the  train  of  accomplishments ;  and  in  all  those 
points,  which  it  does  not  immediately  regulate  and  deter- 
mine, there  is  too  much  room  for  the  ingenuity  of  man. 
Although  he  has  marked  the  greater  part  of  the  accom- 
plishments of  these  prophecies  with  a  lucky  and  firm  hand; 
yet,  by  reason  of  these  imperfections  of  his  system  of  cal- 
culation, the  mind  will  barely  yield  him  a  high  degree  of 
probability.  They  always  induced  me  to  search,  in  ex- 
pectation of  another  key  to  a  new  system  of  prophetic 
time,  as  a  main  basis  to  the  numbers  of  his  computation. 
Such  a  one  would  be  desirable  and  necessary,  as  would 
supply  all  those  deficiencies,  arrange  the  whole  series  of 
prophecies,  shew  the  length  of  every  link  in  this  chain. 
the  period  of  every  prediction,  in  which  it  is  to  be  accom- 


INTRODUCTION.  27' 

.plished,  and  determine  its  precise  point  of  beginning  and 
end ;  and  such  a  one  could  not  fail  of  producing  effects, 
worthy  of  this  Revelation.  For  it  is  the  concatenation  of 
a  series  of  prophecies,  and  their  completion  in  the  signal 
events  of  many  centuries,  which  furnishes  an  argument  of 
such  strength  and  force,  as  even  to  awe  infidelity  into  si- 
lence and  dismay.  A  system  of  prophetic  chronology 
of  this  kind,  the  spirit  of  prophecy  has  certainly  given 
somewhere,  for  it  is  promised  in  Daniel  xii.  and  such  a 
one,  I  humbly  conceive  to  have  discovered  in  the  Apocalypse. 
The  general  design  of  the  Revelation  is,  a  prophetic 
history  of  the  triumph  of  the  Christian  Religion,  or  in 
other  words,  of  the  great  conflict  between  the  Redeemer  of 
the  world  and  the  prince  of  darkness,  from  its  commence- 
ment to  its  final  termination.  Every  emblematical  pre- 
sentation in  the  order  of  the  whole  vision,  has  its  appropri- 
ated place  in  this  plan  of  action — -and  only  there,  and  no 
where  else  will  it  meet  its  genuine  completion.  A  pro- 
phetic chronology  therefore,  by  which  the  whole  series  of 
predictions  is  arranged  and  adjusted  in  due  order,  must 
begin  in  the  same  moment  of  time,  with  the  prophecy, 
otherwise  its  dates  would  not  accord  with  the  history  of 
the  church,  and  of  nations.  Most  authors  begin  the  ac- 
complishment of  these  prophecies  from  the  year  '96,  in 
which  the  apostle  received  the  Revelation  in  the  island  of 
Patmos ;  but  this  is  surely  a  mistake,  for  both  the  church 
and  the  great  conflict  commenced  before  that  time.  It 
would  have  been  most  agreeable,  to  affix  the  first  link  of 
this  chain  to  the  week  of  our  Lord's  passion;  but  it  can- 
not be  extended  to  that  point.  The  prophecy  itself  also 
presupposes  in  its  five  first  chapters,  the  Lamb  of  God  as 
slain,  and  the  seven  churches  in  Asia  minor  as  planted. 
Daniel  affixes  chapter  ix.  26,  27.  the  final  doom  of  his  na- 
tion, to  the  expiration  of  his  seventy  weeks  of  years. 
There  the  church  of  the  Old  Testament  had  been  visibly 
and  forever  razed  and  abolished ;  and  precisely  to  the 


£B  INTRODUCTION, 

year  of  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  A.  D.  T2,  the  pro- - 
phetic  chronology  of  the  Apocalypse  affixes  its  commence- 
ment. 

I  have  no  reason  to  fear  a  clashing  of  history  with  the 
dates  of  my  computation — I  only  apprehend,  my  first  prin- 
ciple will  be  found  too  simple,  and  artless  with  those,  who 
perhaps  have  all  this  time  been  expecting,  to  meet  with  a 
concealed  and  profound  system.  But  this  simplicity  and 
plainness  ought  not  to  be  considered  a  defect,  it  should  in- 
duce us  more  readilyto  receive  It ;  for  it  is,  no  doubt,  the 
will  of  God,  that  this  important  Revelation  should  be  of 
benefit  to  all,  as  it  imports  all  to  know  it;  and  that  this 
calculation  of  prophetic  time  should  be  intelligible,  even  to 
the  weakest  capacity. 

The  seventh  number  has  been  consecrated  as  sacred, 
from  the  beginning  of  the  world.  An3  although  infidelity 
has  levelled  many  a  sneer  at  it,  yet  in  that  measure  of  time, 
God  finished  the  creation  of  heaven  and  earth.  Moses 
and  the  prophets  make  a  frequent  use  of  it ;  and  here  in 
the  Apocalypse,  the  frequent  occurrence  of  this  number,  is 
even  remarkable  and  striking.  There  can  be  no  doubt, 
but  it  is  a  very  secret,  profound  and  important  measure  of 
time,  since  the  whole  economy  of  the  Old  Testament  dis- 
pensation, both  in  its  civil  and  ecclesiastical  depart- 
ments, was  thereby  regulated.  The  great  Creator  mea- 
sures it  out  by  the  motions  of  the  heavenly  bodies ;  since 
this  is  the  general  valid  measure  of  time  in  our  solar  sys- 
tem, by  which,  according  to  Bengelius,  all  their  revolu- 
tions are  determined  without  a  fraction ;  from  all  of  which 
we  may  safely  conclude,  that  it  has  its  sure  foundation  in 
the  eternal  councils  of  Heaven.  The  prophet  Daniel  ha* 
it  in  his  seventy  prophetic  weeks,  by  which  he  determines 
the  duration,  and  destinies  of  the  Jewish  church  :  and  we 
have  reason  to  believe,  that  it  may  also  be  the  key- 
number  to  the  times  of  the  New  Testament  church,  and 
that  it  may  run  on  even  to  the  consummation  of  all  things 


INTRODUCTION.  29 

An  attentive  reader  of  the  Apocalypse,  must  at  least, 
find  it  striking  and  remarkable,  to  meet  so  frequently  with 
this  number  here.  We  read  of  seven  spirits  before  the 
throne  of  God;  of  a  Lamb,  having  seven  horns  and  seven 
eyes ;  of  seven  Thunders ;  of  a  Dragon  with  seven  heads ; 
a  beast,  witli  seven  heads,  and  one  with  the  same  number 
from  the  bottomless  pit.  But  still  more  remarkable  are  the 
seven  seals,  the  seven  trumpets,  and  the  seven  vials,  by 
which  this  series  of  prophecies  is  evidently  arranged  into  a 
methodical  order  of  time  and  periods.  All  these  terms  are 
surely  founded  on  a  certain  measure  of  time,  by  which  the 
prosperous  and  calamitous  events  of  the  church  are  limited 
to  numbers  and  periods ;  and  whoever  discovers  that  mea- 
sure, has  found  the  key  to  a  full  assurance  and  certainty, 
in  the  exposition  of  this  prophecy. 

With  this  key  I  will  acquaint  my  indulgent  reader; 
though  with  all  due  deference  to  the  judgment  of  the  wise, 
the  abilities  of  the  able,  and  the  labours  of  the  learned.  It 
consists  in  a  peculiar  application  of  the  (Hebdomadse)  pro- 
phetic weeks  of  Daniel,  to  the  Apocalypse.  There  are  seven 
seals,  and  the  seventh  contains  the  seven  trumpets.  Eve- 
ry  seal  and  every  trumpet,  comprises  a  period  of  seven  pro- 
phetic weeks,  or  forty-nine  years  ;  and  the  prophecy  under 
these  seals,  discloses  the  most  interesting  and  remarkable 
events,  which  are  to  happen  to  the  church  of  Christ  during 
that  time.  This  is  signified  by  the  seventh  number.  But 
since  the  Revelation  contains  the  history  of  the  triumphs 
of  the  Son  of  God,  over  the  powers  of  darkness,  the  fifti- 
eth year,  or  the  year  of  Jubilee,  should  every  time  be 
counted  in ;  which  caused  such  remarkable  Epochas  in 
the  Jewish  church  and  state,  Leviticus  xxv.  27.  The 
seventh  seal  however  cannot,  consistently  with  the  order 
of  the  prophecy,  be  taken  into  the  computation,  for  itself, 
as  it  comprises  the  seven  trumpets ;  which  are  a  new  con- 
tinuation of  periods  and  events,  of  the  same  length  with 


SO  INTRODUCTION. 

the  seals.  And  before  the  woes,  three  pauses  of  cessations 
must  be  admitted  of  which  the  third  is  of  much  shorter  du- 
ration than  the  first  and  second,  as  expressly  demanded  by 
the  words  of  the  prophecy.  At  the  beginning  of  the  woes 
this  prophetic  chronology,  moreover  divides  itself,  by  the 
internal  order  of  the  book,  into  two  remarkable  columns  ; 
one  of  which  advances  the  lineage  of  the  church  of*  Christ, 
the  other  marks  the  progression  of  the  woes,  and  their 
pauses  of  cessation.  These  two  notable  columns  run  on 
into  the  sound  of  the  seventh  trumpet,  where  again  they 
furnish  the  exact  dates,  to  a  new  succession  of  prophecies 
in  four  lines  of  periods  and  numbers,  which  are  terminated 
by  the  seven  vials,  and  the  commencement  of  the  happy 
Millennium.  The  reader  perhaps  may  find  this  descrip- 
tion dark  and  intricate,  I  will  therefore  give  him  a  pros- 
pective view  of  this  admirable  fabric ;  the  sight  of  which 
has  brought  full  conviction  to  my  mind,  and  comfort  to  my 
heart.  Let  serious  and  considerate  lovers  of  the  prophetic 
word,  determine  its  real  value. 

But  in  order  to  complete  the  solution  of  this  divine 
scheme,  or  internal  prophetic  chronology  of  this  prophecy, 
we  are  yet  to  settle  those  terms  of  time,  which  we  have 
denominated  indeterminate.  These  are  the  times  of  the 
woman;  the  short  time  of  the  dragon;  the  little  season  of 
the  souls  under  the  altar ;  the  time,  to  which  the  angel 
swore;  and  the  little  season,  in  which  the  Devil  is  loose 
again,  after  the  thousand  years.  These  are  the  terms  of 
time,  in  the  solution  of  which,  I  humbly  presume  to  differ 
from  the  learned  Bengelius,  and  many  other  authors  on 
this  important  subject.  The  accomplishment  alone,  as 
recorded  on  the  page  of  history,  can  determine  between 
us,  what  degree  of  credibility  may  be  due  to  each  of  our 
labours. 
No  doubt,  all  the  periods  of  time,  designated  by  these 
terms,  have  a  reference  to  each  other ;  and  as  they  are  all 
of  the  same  undetermined  kind,  stand  in  a  comparative  re- 


INTRODUCTION.  31 

fation  among  themselves,  as  to  the  exact  quantity  of  time 
belonging  to  each  period.  If  therefore  a  key  could  be  dis- 
covered to  determine  one  period  precisely ;  the  whole  num- 
ber might  be  adjusted  into  a  scale  of  time,  at  least  highly 
probable,  if  not  certain  and  conclusive.  And  as  these 
times  also  stand  connected  with  the  whole  body  of  prophe* 
cies,  arranged  by  methodical  periods,  and  extraordinary, 
determined  numbers;  their  lengths  are  moreover  regu- 
lated by  circumstances,  and  the  limits  of  others.  I  pre- 
sume to  have  found  this  key  in  the  periods  of  the  methodi- 
cal times,  and  after  mature  consideration  formed  the  fol- 
lowing scale,  which  is  verified  by  history,  and  accords 
with  th|  scheme  and  connection  of  the  whole  book.  I 
take  a  hundred  years  to  be  a  time,  and  fifty  years  to  be 
half  a  time  ;  as  it  is  expressly  laid  in  Genesis,  chapter  xv. 
13,  16.  That  this  is  the  time  of  man,  and  of  a  generation 
of  men.  See  also,  Job  xxii.  16.  Isa.xxxviii.12.  Where 
THORI  signifies  both. 

I  must  however  previously  inform  the  common  reader, 
that  some  of  these  terms  of  time,  are  very  imperfectly 
translated  in  our  English  version.  My  scale  will  there- 
fore exhibit  them  in  the  original  language,  and  after  an  im- 
proved translation. 

SCALE  OF  TIME. 

|    l 

50  years,  ij'pjvj  >t#»§oV,  half  a  timeof  the  woman.  Chapl 

xii.  14. 
a  time, 
times. 
kx)k»iq>4$,  kx)  y[M$v  kouqov-    A  time i, 
times  and  half  a  time. 
800  'ihtyov  KMiqov     The  original  is   not  jujx^ov, 

parvum  a  little  time,  which  would 
make  it  shorter  than  a  whole  time; 
it  is  'ohlyov,  a  few,  not  many,  and 
must  be  taken  for  a  rfumerical 
w©rd,  to  signify  some  times,  but 


100 

3t#/£(K 

200 

%<£<£6J, 

350 

ZXlgQVf 

S2  introduction; 

not  many  times,  during  which  the 

dragon  is  to  stay  on  earth.  Chap. 

xii.  12. 
950   years,  psc^ov  %§ovov,   A  little  epocha,  when  Satan  is 

loose  again,  after  the  Millennium. 

Chap.  xx.  3. 
1000  ;^»A»<*  irtj      A  thousand  years  common  time, 

of  the  kingdom  of  Christ  on  earth. 

Chap.  xx. 
1078  oti  %$ovo5  ov'jt  tiron  in,   That  it  will  not  be 

a  chronos  more,  to  the  finishing  of 

the  mystery  of  God.     Chap.  x.  6. 
1100  X<t°v*vt  Epocha,  during  which  th^  souls  of 

the  martyrs  are  to  rest  under  the 

altar.     Chap.  vi.  2.  Aliqui  Codd. 

habent  £§ovov  juho^ov.    Bengelius 

prsefert    XZ°V0V'      Lectio  jwoc^ov 

rejicitur. 
The  following  treatise  will  shew,  how  well  this  measure 
of  time  verifies  itself  on  the  page  of  history.  Some  of  these 
dates  have  already  heen  proven  by  a  most  clear  accom- 
plishment of  those  prophecies,  to  which  they  stand  con- 
nected ;  and  others  are  now  in  a  state  of  an  inceptive  ful- 
filment before  our  eyes ;  which  raises  the  whole  scale  to  at 
least,  a  high  dfegree  of  probability.  There  is  however  one 
item  in  this  rising  series  of  time,  which  I  suppose  will  meet 
with  many  objections.  Those  of  my  readers,  who  have 
already  laid  it  down,  as  a  settled  point,  that  the  duration 
of  the  world,  or  at  least  of  this  our  solar  system,  is  limited 
to  7000  years,  will  find  that  little  epocha,  during  which  Sa- 
tan is  set  at  liberty  again,  after  the  Millennium,  very  im- 
probable. But  when  the  Word  of  God  is  under  considera- 
tion, all  prejudices  should  be  laid  aside.  The  order  of  the 
book  has  placed  it  there — the  spirit  of  prophecy  has  as- 
signed it  that  space ;  and  he  is  a  teacher,  whose  instruc- 
•  tions  are  entitled  to  unreserved  consent.    It  is  evident  from 


INTRODUCTION.  S3 

a  multiplicity  of  expressions  in  the  writings  of  the  apos- 
tles, that  the  times  of  the  New  Testament  will  not  he  longer, 
than  the  times  of  the  Old  Testament.  The  disciples  of  our 
Lord  often  term  them,  "  the  latter  daijs"  "  the  last  days" 
with  other  diminishing  expressions  annexed  thereto,  indi- 
cative of  a  shorter  continuance  in  comparison  with  the  time 
before  the  birth  of  Christ.  St.  John  even  calls  it  "  the 
last  hour."*  But  we  are  not  only  sure,  that  the  time  of 
the  present  ecclesiastical  economy  will  not  be  more  than 
the  former  one ;  we  also  have  sound  and  substantial  testi- 
mony, even  the  Word  of  God,  to  prove  that  the  two  points, 
the  creation  and  consummation  of  the  world,  are  at  equal 
distances  from  the  time  of  Christ's  death.  The  prophet 
Habakkuk,  chap.  iii.  2.  Prophecying  concerning  the 
time  of  the  first  advent  of  our  Lord,  and  of  his  great  work 
of  redemption,  has  these  memorable  words  in  the  original : 
"  Thou  revivest  thy  work  in  the  midst  of  the  ages  of  the 
world,  in  the  midst  of  the  ages  of  the  world  hast  thou  made  it 
known.]"  And  in  the  epistle  of  Paul  to  the  Hebrews, 
chap.  ix.  26.  But  now  once  hath  he  appeared  in)  swrtKiix 
rav  aiwuv,  upon  the  confine  of  the  ages  of  the  world;  or  in 
the  midst  of  the  ages,  in  the  second  age  of  the  world,  or 
upon  the  confine  of  the  ages  of  the  Old  and  New  Testa- 
ments,- all  which  significations  of  this  expression  in  the  ori- 
ginal Greek,  upon  the  whole,  are  tantamount  to  the  same 
object.:}:    I  might  produce  more  testimony  in  justification 

*  1  John  xi.  18.  Our  English  translation  is  incorrect  in  this  place.  The 
original  is  w^oby  hour,  twice,  in  the  begmning  and  end  of  this  verse,  and 
not   KXlPQg,   time. 

f  Coccajiis  has  it :  operatio  tua  est  in  medio  annorum  vita  ejus,  quern  in 
medio  annorum  notijicasti,  aut  cognoscendum  proposuisti,  qui  ante  finem 
anni  prioris,  ingruente  anno  alio,  anno  seil,  acceptations,  et  Christum 
cognoscendum  proposuisti  et  ex  mortuis  excitasti. 

*  Hoc  acciiratissime  in  tempus  Messix  nostri  congruit.  Cum  enim  ille 
veniret,  finis  aderat  tS?  HAVEH  OLAM,  (he  was  from  eternity)  et  initium 
ffS  HABBA  OLAM  (he  will  be  to  eternity.)    JgitUl-duo   tIXjj,    dux 

E 


Si.  INTRODUCTION. 

of  this  point  of  doctrine,  concerning  the  age  of  the  world, 
where  I  write  more  expressly  on  this  subject.  But  I  will 
leave  this  matter  here,  and  unfold  that  more  interesting 
scheme  of  the  Revelation  itself. 

Thus  I  have  laid  before  my  reader  the  proper  and  pecu- 
liar order  of  this  book — the  body  and  branches  of  this 
whole  system  of  prophecies,  as  it  presents  itself  to  a  dis- 
cerning mind.  In  this  symmetrical  harmony  of  the  dif- 
ferent parts  to  the  whole,  the  accomplishment  of  one  se- 
ries of  prophecies  commences  after  the  other,  and  all  go 
on  in  symphony,  pause,  rise  again,  and  stop ;  as  the  differ- 
ent parts  in  a  well  performed  piece  of  music,  in  order  to 
produce  a  general  effect  on  the  trembling  fibres  of  sensi- 
bility— so  here  on  the  states,  kingdoms  and  empires  of  the 
world,  as  evinced  by  the  seven  trumpets. 

As  to  the  precise  time-,  when  the  seven  vials,  containing 
the  wrath  of  God  against  the  worshippers  of  the  beast, 
shall  begin  to  be  poured  out,  I  am  not  perfectly  certain ; 
but  when  I  consider  the  different  stages  of  this  prophecy, 
and  the  proportion  of  this  part  to  the  whole,  I  feel  inclined 
to  fix  their  commencement  at  the  conclusion  of  the  shf 
hundred  and  sixty-six  years  of  the  power  of  the  beast, 
For  after  the  fifth  vial,  although  his  power  is  broken,  and 
his  kingdom  full  of  darkness,  yet  it  remains  a  kingdom, 
and  its  entire  annihilation  is  reserved  for  the  seventh 
vial,  and  the  rage  of  the  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit. 
However  it  appears  from  the  description  of  his  worship- 
pers under  the  first  vial,  as  if  no  mark  or  image  of  the 
beast,  such  as  now  exists  was  intended,  but  others  more 
expressive,  which  the  second  beast  from  the  earth  will 
cause  to  be  received,  during  the  inaction  of  the  first.     Ne- 

ejtremitates  et  termini  horum  OLAMIM  (to  all  eternity,)  sive   oilcovuv 

semet  invicem  contingebant.     Sic  Job  xxvi.  10.     M£VP»  JVVTgAg/otf 

<P«to»  Jt#)  skotxs   usque  ad  confmiuan  lucis  et  tenebrarum.    Hypom; 
ijemata  of  Kiittuer. 


INTRODUCTION,  33 

vertheless,  as  to  the  time  in  which  they  are  to  be  accom- 
plished, they  stand  in  the  same  relation  to  the  seals  and 
trumpets*  as  Joshua's  taking  the  city  of  Jericho,  chap.  vi. 
3,  4,  5.  He  compassed  the  city  six  days,  each  day  once, 
and  on  the  seventh  day  seven  times,  and  took  the  city  by  a 
general  shout.  It  is  also  manifest  from  the  resemblance 
of  the  vials  to  the  trumpets*  and  the  different  effects  which 
they  produce,  that  they  do  not  comprise  equal  periods  of 
time.  The  three  last  trumpets  take  up  much  more  time 
in  their  accomplishments,  than  the  four  first  j  and  this 
also  is  the  case  with  the  vials ;  however  the  great  events^ 
which  have  occurred  in  Europe  these  last  t\Venty-five 
years,  made  it  appear,  that  the  duration  of  each  of  the 
three  last  vials,  will  not  be  more  than  fifteen  years.  Cer- 
tain it  is,  that  they  are  not  yet  poured  out,  if  it  has  not 
been  done  since  the  beginning  of  the  revolution  in  France; 
and  in  that  case  they  would  comprise  a  shorter  time  still, 
than  above  expressed. 

The  fifth  vial  of  wrath  has  probably  been  poured  out 
A.  D.  1798,  and  the  kingdom  of  the  beast  has  already 
stood  in  a  state  of  darkness  during  fifteen  years.  The 
great  whore  mounted  and  curbed  it,  as  she  pleased, 
During  the  time  in  which  the  sixth  vial  is  poured  out,  on 
the  nations  upon  the  river  Euphrates.  Popery  will  proba- 
bly revive  by  the  assistance  of  the  second  beast,  and  regain 
in  some  measure,  its  first  poWer  and  grandeur.  This  se> 
oond  beast  will  bring  all  the  horrors  of  persecution  on  the 
Protestants;  first  in  Roman  Catholic  countries,  and  af-« 
terwards  in  those  places  of  security,  to  which  they  shall 
have  fled.  And  a  bloody  one  it  will  be,  indeed,  During 
the  sixth  vial  it  also  changes  its  character,  and  appears  on 
the  stage  of  action  as  the  false  prophet  for  the  first  time; 
and  like  the  dragon,  and  the  first  beast,  breathes  out  of 
its  mouth  one  of  those  three  unclean  spirits  like  frogs, 
Which  go  forth  to  gather  the  kings  of  the  eaHh  to  the  bat'- 
tie  cf  the  great  day  of  God  Almighty. 


Sfe  INTRODUCTION. 

Though  popery,  as  established  by  Hildebrand,  has  done 
immense  injury  to  the  Church  of  Christ  on  earth— and  is 
even  now  preparing,  to  fill  up  its  measure  to  the  brim,  by 
the  abominations  of  the  second  beast ;  yet  it  has  only  been 
the  beast  from  the  sea.  Those  calamities  and  corruptions, 
which  the  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit  will  cause  over  all 
Christendom,  far  exceed  the  Papal  tyranny.  As  the  Apo- 
calypse saith  but  little  of  the  doctrine  of  this  Antichristian 
power,  whose  element  is  Atheism ;  I  will  here  supply  the 
reader  with  some  of  his  most  prominent  tenets  from  other 
parts  of  the  Holy  Scriptures. 

Daniel  chap.  vii.  25.  He  shall  speak  great  words 
against  the  most  HighT  and  shall  wear  out  the  Saints  of 
the  most  High,  and  think  to  change  times  and  laws.  Chap, 
si.  36 — 45.  He  shall  exalt  himself,  and  magnify  himself 
above  every  God,  and  shall  speak  marvellous  things 
against  the  God  of  gods.  Neither  shall  he  regard  the 
God  of  his  fathers,  nor  the  desire  of  women,  nor  regard 
any  God :  for  he  shall  magnify  himself  above  all.  But  in 
his  estate  shall  hejionour  his  God  Mozim  (in  the  Heb.) 

2  Tliessal.  ii.  The  day  of  Christ  shall  not  come,  except 
there  come  a  falling  away  first,  and  that  man  of  sin  be  re- 
vealed, the  son  of  perdition  ;  who  opposeth  and  exalteth 
himself  above  all  that  is  called  God,  or  that  is  worshipped  ; 
so  that  he,  as  God,  sitteth  in  the  temple  of  God,  shewing 
himself  that  he  is  God.  His  coming  is  after  the  working 
of  Satan,  with  all  power,  and  signs,  and  lying  wonders,, 
ami  with  all  decch  eableness  of  unrighteousness  in  them 
that  perish. 

1  Epist.  John,  chap.  xi.  22.  He  is  Antichrist,  that  de- 
nieth  the  Father  and  the  Son.  Chap.  iv.  3.  And  every 
spirit  that  confesseth  not,  that  Jesus  Christ  is  come  in  the 
flesh,  is  not  of  Gfod  :  this  is  that  Antichrist. 

0  God !  These  things  are  so  near  at  hand,  and  we  con- 
tinue so  careless  and  unconcerned  for  ourselves  and  our 
children; — they  are  so  certain  and  important,  and  we  an> 


INTRODUCTION.  3" 

30  unprepared  to  meet  them,  as  our  Heavenly  calling  re- 
quires ;  they  are  not  yet  passed  by,  and  the  third  angel 
shall  now  soon  rouse  our  slumbering  hearts  to  action,  by 
his  terrible  denunciation  against  those,  who  worship  the 
beast  and  his  image. 

May  the  Spirit  of  the  Father,  and  of  Jesus  Christ,  be 
the  guide  and  comfort  of  alt  who  read  and  hear  this 
treatise. 


THE  FIRST 

SERIES  OF  PROPHECY. 


I 


1    stw 

1-" 


Prospective  View  of  thProplietic  Chronology  and  Prophecies  of  the  Apocalypse. 


die  rider 


i  jn  of  Jerusalem 

Seal— A  white  ha 

rider  liud  i  DOW  .md  crown, 

and  went  forth  conquering, 

and  to  conquer  • 

SW — A    I  • 

,  vcr  to  ultc  peace 
from   the  earth,  and  tint 
tumid  kill  one  ano- 
ther) end  -i  ^rcut   iword 
n  iiiiii    . 
teal — A  black  bone,  the  rider 

had  a   pair  of  balance*    to 

weigh  grain  for  bread  ;  and 

lii  was  not  to  hurl  oil  and 

vim     .    .    .    . 

\  pah   hone,  tii 

■  . ■■ 

ed  witii  him.    He  had  pi 
<  i  to  kill  the  fourth  pat 

ih   th    and    the 


This  conqueror  ia  '«  Chritl  in  his  Church  and  Religion.       lie  is  dignified  with 
[kingdoms  of  this  world,  frake  room  for  Uic  kingdom  of  God.     He  rides  on  the  victories  of  the  Horn 


,  because  of  liis  victory  over  Judaism,  has  a  6ow,  to  wound  at  a  distance  and  subdue  the 


iii        *•  niMiirin  A«a     The  ixws  with  Barkochebas  at  their  head,  rose  into  open  rebellion  throughout 

land  six  thousand  Jews  losteu- 


I       „  I  IS    I... i  more  esueciallv  inllic  Bast.       Move  Ulan  htiv  cities,  ana  nine  "unureu  aim cij,.i.; ......  ..... .  o  .,.  ..- . __. 

rtadS^rS  u£n  during  this period  in  the  Roman  empu-e-and  the  Uurd  and  fourth  persecution  raged  notartlj  ...  Aaa 


n.u-kable  for  its  degree,  as  duration.        All  this  befell  the  Ro 


Sr<i>— The  Martyrs  cried  under 
lli<       \lt:.r,    and 
wliitt    In 

to  - 1  '  ■  ohronos  -  - 
Seal — A  >triking  reprcst  nta 
Uon  of  the  Lasl  daj  <>i  juds 
mi  hi  |  thi  dai  ofthewrati 
.,i  i  i.  Umb  '--... 
Four    angth  holding  ib» 

(but  \\  ni'ls  of  Hi'    eartl 

till    the    in;   I 

n  iled 


<i<  in  a  hiti  rob 
the  tlironc 
foal    BUi  m  <  in  he  ivi  d  tor  b  ill 

....  boor 

7\-i//fi/«*/ — llnil  and  fire  mingled 
with  blood,  U  i  i  .1  on  thi 
the  third   pari  «.i 
reen  ^-.i 

is  burnt 

'Pfumftet — A     great     mount  m 

horning  with  flre  «  u  i  tat 
nto  tin  ieai  and  the  third 

lurl  of   the     biu     liauun 

•  I I 


Trumps! — A     great    Star 
1 1  Mm  if  i\  an  upon  tl 


t.ii 


i> ni  of  them  poisonous.} 

bittO     -.-.--■ 


TYim/aH    Thi  third  part  of  the 
mih,    moon   and  stars   was 

imitten,  and  the  third  pan 

■,.l  nii'lii    .1  tik.nt  ,1 

An   angel  Jtuintr    throne;! 
the  midst  ofhi 


!t   mterral  of 


,i  denote.,  fane,  ldg„  pv.ee  and  scarcity  of  grain,  ]  et  not  so  remarkable  for*,  degree,  as  duration  .  »»«" 
Philos.  to  the  first  years  clie  reignof  Severus,  and  altematelj  during  this  period,  aa  TcrtnlL  and  Dion  testily,  there  wer 
foraging  and  desolating  aaes,  ^e.  csr. 


npire  from  the  bat  years  of  rVntoraul 
uiundati  ins,  earthquakes,  droughts 


lu,..   ,  ..,,.„.,  four  sore  judgments  of  God.  E»ekiel  xiv.  21.  The  plague  raged .fifteen  yean  throughout  ereryprownee  of  the  Roman  en 

(PomA.D  leverbefore.    It  was  proceeded  by  a  general  famine  in  theyear  2*8. 

,■  the  military  raised  seditions,  and  insurrl  ctiuns,  and  murdered  thi  enipe 


During  this  period,  tl:  i 


empire  fell  into  disorder.     The  Barbarians  broke  in  on  tlie/c 


church  the  tenth  persecution,  and  at  tin 


I  lei  i-  the  Lord  ducowi 
tate  in  thi  othi  r  world. 

They  K  ere  to  rent  a  cjronos,  until  their  other  brethren  should  be  finished  as  the)  W 
sa)    \    I 

Commencement  of  the  peviod  ofpevsccution  against  Uie  Bohemian-Moravian  churrh,  and  many 

1414  


Seringa  in  that  way.      lit  raised  tin 


the  end  of  tin 

This  cry  began  during  the  tenth  persecution  : 


n, and  gave 


Thist.umi.ci  denotes  that  tremendous  scene  of  desolation  md  Horror,  during  mc  u»»..»»  ...  ....    -  ■ ..,-  -  ~,  ~™  -.. ....   

.  '  ,:  ■  ,    ,.,.  .„■!,  F«nreaented  bva  hailstorm,  as  thev  consisted  ut  many  tubes  and  armies,  all  ot  Ihem  hevce,  warlike,  | 

encampment  oftfieChurch  of Christ.     I  hey  are,  ..>  apll   ■   ,  >resente  aoya  ,  ,  .  1(, 

Clu'istians  siirlcrcd  inuiuin  rabh  ■calamities— nay,  they  were  the  principal  sunerei ».      *.«»j     b      .'  l  l  •  -s  '      < 


.....   i  .,    .         uuh.m«Mi«nf  \  *Wra  and  the  maritime  coasts  of  the  Mediterranean  sea,  by  the  Vandals  and  Alans  under  their  kingGenssrich.      I 

beg K^tThtia&  m  twelve  y^sUiey  subdued  aU  Africa;  carried^amostbloodyp, 

Ution  against  the  Catholics  I    Waged  a  war  nf  fifty  year,  against  1  lie  Unmans,  which  cost  live  null 


Pagai 


•i-i  •   ■   .i    •    i         .iiii    ... .  c  iip..ii.,..,;«n.  in  iheHnmm  e.nnire      The  conversion  of  Centlan/me  the  great,  to  the  Christian  religion,  wss  no  doul 

l',!:i::::i::^r^  %  Z  t&£tZ&%fi%  SSetss  ?Z  3* ;  z  z*  ** ,.. , .....  >  *££»  gradd^  u, ,«» u  .*,,„,„„, 


rarda  actttally  rent  the  western  part  of  ii  t«>  piec 
eculiar  portion 
ilwthis  rfumber  designated  to  be  the  true  Qiurch'of  Christ,  vfcidh  reaches  the  gatt  ^«'i  Ne 


As  yet, 


....        <■  ii  ,        i     i  ■:  ,      ...iw, ...  n.K  li.-i-w.il  becun  to  invjaie  ilu  Itonmn  empire,  and  aft 

If-aubsist.  n. . ,  and  ['.■.   c  intincible  under  the  trialsto  come. 


age  and  cruel.       The 


.  ii:  and  desulateil  all  countries  around  them  with  lire  and  sword. 


This  Slarull  notes  the  Bishop  Of  Home,  who  now  laid  the  first  foundation  to  that  enormous  power,  wealth  and  splendour,  of  wh'fch  his  successors   afterwards  obtained  full  posscs- 
Retigion  and  wotthip  t  ns       with  superstition,  idolatry  and  human  invention,  and  ceremonies  greatly  multiplied;  and  one  third  of  the  waters  of  lifcwcpc  made  poisonou 

md  destructive  of  spiritual  life. 


The  >iiii  denotes  the  religion  of  Christ ;  die  mvm  the  Christian  worslup  ;  the  slurs  the  Bishops  and  principal  te 
or  of  learning  and  philosophy. 

The)   were  eclipse  I  one  thivd,  by  the  invasion  of   the  barbarians,  the  corruptions  of  religion,  the  contentions  of  the  bishops  for  honou 
of  the  clergy  and  1  .avics,  and  the  burningof  many  libraries  by  the  barbarians  


.;,...■,  the  state  of  vital  Christianit)  i  night,  the  state  of  the 
lth  and  power,  the  ignorance  and 


Trump.      I.OCtliU     from     tl 

bottomless  pit,  to 

those    ni.  ii,  who   have  Qpl 

the  seal  of  God,nve  month 


""..:-' 


"/>•' 

All     aug.  I 

^JOVOC    OUK  irttl  <TI, 

that  it  will  mit  be  a  ehm. 

BOI  more     fiMin    77- 
A         Chron.  U  1100 

\ST2 
Commenccmcilt  of  many  ImgJ 

111     Interval  of 

Trumpet— The  most  important 
and  comprising  of  all 


11    Interval    

B.     »oe     -     • 

6  Trump  .hi  urrtiif  of  horse 
men.  Four  angels  w  er. 
loosed  upon  die  river  Eu 
phrates,  who  had  been  pre 
parcel  in  an  hour, 
month,  a  year     -     -     - 


Signs  of  tliis  flying  angel  may  be  found  in  the  writers  of  this  period  ;  some  of  which  wrote  on  the  Revelation  mid  the  signs  of  tin 


This  woe  begai 
adjacent  provinces. 
flS  ;  and  mam  Othl 


With  111.  n 
His  follow. 

■  countries— 


of  Slahuiucd,  his  religion  and  wars.    He  made  himself  master  of  all  Arabia  in  nine  v 
i  conquered  Syria  and  Palestine  till  635 1  Persia,S37i  Africa,  647;  Cyprus,  648;  Cilu 


m,  and  subdua 

land  I.yeia,  6! 


They  were  humbled  by  the  victories  of  Leonliu 
by  that  memorable  victory  of  Charles  Martell's  734, 
limits  of  the  Church  ;  to  which  this  number  refers. 


.  A.  D.  695,    but  their  rapid  progress  was  checked,  and  their  power  broken  in  Chriati  mloin 
in  which  370,0(XI  remained  on  the  held  of  battle.     By  the  time  751,  this  woe  ceased  Within  I  lie 


that  remarkable  event  upon  the  waters  of  tlie  river  Euphrates,  where  during  thin  period  four  great  nations,  the  .hit- 
n  ,  and  the  Tartars  incorporated  themselves  into  one  rcligous  community  ;  divided  the  Saracen  esnpfrs  into  many 
kingdoms  and  principalities,  In  immense  armies,  blood  and  slaughter;  desolated  and  destroyed  each  other;  and  almost  crushed  the  Church  of 
Cliriat  in  Asia,  by  tucis-  sanguinary  persecution  against  the  Christians,  and  fanauc  fury  in  propagating  Mal.omcdciri 


83il7  Trumpet 


LINE  OF  KINGS. 


TilE  WOMAN. 


n  chapter  x    11    only  tuose 

kingdoms  are  under- 

ishavebeen 


In    chapter  si.   1,  2.  follov 
,i     achievements  ol 
,    peoples,  nations 
mil    tongues,  in    which   their 
inited  efforts  had  been  exerted, 
i  :  uid    verses 

surely  signify  and  foretell  tho: 

markablc    Crusades  into   tl 

Holj  Land  Palestine;   with  that 

id  laudable  design 

a  Christiai 

I  the  religion  of  Je 


But  Bt.  Jot 

!,,■  templi .  thi  altar  and  thi 

for  them  ;  sigmfy- 

.   thai  they  should 

i      !        nrcess,    and 

only  retain  and  hold  the  right  of 

,,  ii  thi  t  time. 


,  *  i  mqui  red  the  count! 
s  ii  1099 i  i  igned  there 
ghty-fivc  years,  and  lost  all 
igain  1184  j— and  from  this 
i  Lord  has  detei  mill  1. 
I-  m  ah  ill  hi  trodden  mi 

lot  \ei  forty  !>■ lonths 

li  . 

1184 


I'his    .soman  is  a  symbol  of 

;  Chinch  of  Christ   at  thai 
ic. 

The  .Sun,  is  the  newly  est:  - 
blished  empire  oft1: 

Thc.liWi,  the  Mahomedan 

power  and  religion. 

!  an,  liie  twelve   apOl 
ttieir  doctrine  and  audit 

i'he  methodical  time  of 
the  seventh  trumpet  comprise- 
that  period,  during 

\ed  he.- appal  el  ;  the  time 
of  her  pregnancy  and  parturi' 
— tJie  appearance  of  thi 
dragon  within  the  pales  of  the 
'"  -ch,  and  his  attempt  on  the 
woman. 

ii     in-    -  ttraordinary  <>"" 
c  imprises  her 

A.  Escape — to  a  place  pre 
pared  of  God.  Qivyu,  de 
oles  a  quick  motion  on  tin 
avth.     The  Church  from  that 

tided  her  banner 
II  Europe,  under  the  prolcc- 
tion  of  the  imperial  power.  This 
hangc  of  state  of  the  woman 
denotes: 

1.  Separation  from  the  abo- 
minations and  corruptions 
of  the  rulingchurchpow 

2.  Enlargement  and  augm 
tation  on  land. 

3.  Transporting  tiie  heart  ol" 
the    church    to 
place. 

From  832 
1260  days  677 


1  '  .o 
oir  whole  di  lign  « 
compli  ihed. 

The   !.:■'/    wit i 


•titer 


not 


to  hi 


i  leved 


sense  of  the  word,  as  a  succes 

don   of    witnesses  ; — thoy   an 

physical  pet-sons,  natural  men 

n  ho  rise  up   in  the  power  of 

God  at  the  conclusion  ol'  th 

period,    like    the    Reformers 

Luther,   Zwingle   ami    Calv 

.    1!    i  a.  :  at  the  head  of 

,.,  ,  hurchi      i'i  il.ably  in 

BStine,  when  the  last  tuul  du 

inofthekingdon 

fGodislaid 


End  of  tin  line  of  kings. 


Jerusalem  and  all  Palestine 

.\  ill    fall    to    the   share  of  the 
Christians,  it  the  destruction  of 

tin-  Ik-msi  of  the  bottomless  pit 
Is  king — The   king- 

dotns  of  this  world  arc  become 
tms  of  the  Lorel  tend 

Rev.xi.  15. 


1509 
In  the  intermediate  timc.wa 

al  heaven  h.  e.  within  the  Limit 

irch,bet\veenMichae 

in, I  die  Dragon. 

ii.  The  Dragon,  bj  the  Pa 
gans  their  rulers  and  priests. 

/;.  Michael  by  theChristia 
princes,  I  eachers  and  religion. 

Toe  Dragon  w  ,s  cast  out  ol 
hi,   limits  ofthe  Church  by  tie 
ersi  in  ofthe  Pagans;  froii 
>pe  into  V  1 1 

file  Hight — into  her  plan 
7rsT«'of*«i,  to  move  wit 
tlx  help  of  air. 
During  the  Reformation,  the 
hurch  revived  and  acquired 
L-w  vigour,  for  the  purposes  ol 
er  establishment  on  earth, 
'his  flignt  imports 

1.  A  peremptory  separation 
from  Papal  hierarchy. 

2.  A  flying  propagation  of 
the  Evangelic  doctrine. 

3.  Emigrations  into  foreign 
countries,  by  the  help  of 
navig  Ltion. 

4.  Extensive  missionary  esla 
blishments,  by  the  help  of 
ships  and  air. 

5.  Uible  societies,  for  spread- 
ing tho  Word  of  God. 

The  Hood  ofthe  Serpent  de- 
,i  ,1,  .  th      lurks  and  their  inva 

siniis    of  Christendom,    wine! 
last  ■  I  io  theyear  1683. 

I'he  remnant  of  her  seed,  art 
the  Christians  in  Pagan  and  Ma 
a,  I  mi  i  Hiutries. 
In  this  place  the  test  says 
^4)£T«i,  semii  passive  v. 
•dio  alitur,  she  has  nourish 
ent,  h.  e.  she  is  nourished  ant 
II 
\  time     100  years 


67V 
1509 


lii 


v. 


SKIN,  ANGELS,  VIALS,  H  ARVEST,  &c. 


I.  The  Lamb  with  his  company  on  Mount  Zion  Duria 
11  the  corruption  of  the  church  power  in  doctrine  and  wot 
hip,  there  had  yet  been  many  in  every  country,  who  will 
drew,     lived  separate,    and  bore  witness.      They    wer 

branded  with  many  names  in  France,   Italy,  Bohemia  and 

nanv,  and   often  persecuted.      About  the  year  1176, 
considerable  number  flew  from  France  to  Bohemia,  unite 
ith  the  brethren  there,  and  established  a  church  on  apo; 
tolk  principles  of  doctrine,  worship  and  discipline  ;  a  Chris- 
tian church  indeed. 

The  numher  144,000  designates  them,  as  a  truly  Chris 
an  church,  which  by  its  succession  shall  reach  the  gate 
'  New  Jerusalem.     They  are 

1.  not  defiled  with  women,  h.  e.  Idolatrous  churche: 

sects,  orders, 
2  follow  the  Lamb  in  doctrine  and  practice, 
3.  in  their  mouth  there  is  no  guile,  false  doctrine. 

A.  D.  1627,  during  that  inhuman  persecution,  this  church 
i  Bohemia  was  ruined  to  the  foundation,  and  its  member 
el  into  Germany  j  a  body  of  whom  have  since  been  col- 
lected into  the  Moravian  society,  and  the  greater  part  united 
with  the  Protestant  churches. 

The  three  angels  fit  ing  in  the  midst  of  heaven,  are  thre< 
Patriarchs  of  the  Church,  eachofwhom  has  a  peculiar  fun 
ddmentat  principle  of  doctrine,  by  which  he  stands  distin 
guished,  and  may  be  known  from  the  rest  of  his  brethren 
and  those  belonging  to  his  voice. 


Angel — preaches  an  eternal  Gospel — constraining 
fear  of  God,  as  Creator,  to  give  him  glory. 
midst  of  heaven  is  no  doubt  Germany  here,  and  John 
Arndt  and  his  colleagues  in  that  great  revival  of 
practical  and  experimental  religion,  in  his  lime,  til' 
angel,  lie  has  been  more  or  less  the  means  of  all 
revivals  of  religion  in  Europe  since,  by  Speller 
Frankius,  Tersteegeu,  Zhuendorf,  and  Wesley  &c 
His  writings  have  been  immensely  blessed  and  trans 
lated  into  seven  languages. 

Angel.     His  main  point   of  doctrine  is  :   Babylon   i 
fallen'  He  Mill  hear, 

1.  a  strong  testimony  against  Popery,  andhcrror 
ruptions ; 

2.  but  particularly  point  out  her  downfall,  as  t 
time,  manner  and  instruments,  with  great  fore 
and  penetration — 

is  angel  is  the  pious  Bcngeliiis  and  all  those  great  merl 
in  England,  France  and  Germany,  who  have  made 
the  Revelation  their  particular  study,  and  followed 
his  steps.     It  was  little  understood  before  his  time. 


BEAST  KKO  vl  TllK  SE  V. 


This  year  Pope  Gregory  VII.  front  the  house  of  Hild 
brand  mounted  the  Papal  chair.  He  laid  a  new  foundation 
fornggraneUzing'the  power  and  dignity  of  the  RomanSee 
with  the  greatest  consequences  both  in  church  and  state 
mown  ny,  as  established,  enlarged  and  propa- 
gated by  him  and  his  successors,  is  this  Beast.  During 
the  time  of  the  seventh  Tmmpet,  it  was  engendered,  an 

grew  10  per''      '        i 

I.  IT  Jir.n.l.Vto  way  the  sceptre  legally,  A.D.112.,,  by  tl 
unlimited  subjection  of  all  ecclesiastical  persons  and  the 
possessions!  and  by  assuming  sovereign  prerogatives  evi 

er  all  temporal   princes.     This  was   sealed  by    the  fust 
western  general  council,  held  during  this  year  in  tl  e   to 

i,  of  near  a  thousand  prelates  ;  in  which  also  the  celibac) 
of  pri<  Sts  nas  established. 

These  pretended  successors  of  St.  Peter  soon  rose  to  the 
cry  zenith  of  authority,  and  claimed  till  power  in  In 
and  earth — ami  the  world  bowed,  and  belif  I    d. 


lis  beast  has  seven  heads,  upon  t 
succession  of  Popes,  and  a  mountain  on 
to  be  couiiteilaliead      The)  reignedon 

1.  Mount  Co-dius  from  1123. 

2.  Mount  Avcntinus  from  1216. 
:1  Mount  Vaticanus  from  1294. 
4.  Mount  Quirinalis  from  1464. 

5.  Mount  F.xquilintis  from  1605. 


his  power  it  was  to  hold,  and  c 
forty-two  months,  h.  c,  "666     -  - 


•  during  a  period  of 


time  of  fifty  years.     They  all 
crush  the  'beast.     They  are 


HI.  The  Ci'a&  compris 
ontatn  the  wrath  of  God 
poured  out  on  the 

1.  Earth,  governments,  civil  authorities. 

2.  Sea,  bulk  of  the  people. 

3     Rivers,  fountain.',  institutions  of  instruction,  pulpit 
,  S-C.    &c. 


Sun,  theGermrtncmpire. 
Throne  ofthe  Least— Authority. 
Kiver  Euphrates  —  the  nations  tin 
of  fifteen  years. 


for  the  spa 


above    1509 

18S9 

The  marriage  oftlie   Lamb 
come.  Rev.  \i\   7. 
The   Millennium   Rev.  - 
1    Resurrection      of    t 

\>  i ', 

2.  Judgment  in  theeourt 

in  their  case  ; 

a.  to  live  a  thousa 
years — 

b.  to  reigll  with  Chi 

as  priest  — 

3.  Christ's  reign — 

1  out  of  his  i 

'i .  ,    deceive  the 

tin ii- — 
2.   Gathers  them     to   bat- 
tle around  the  camp  am 
city  of  the  Saints — 
3    The  Devil  cast  into  th 
lake- 
Ill.  Day  of  Judgment. 
IV   New  heaven  and  new  cart) 


The  three  unclean  spirits. 
C.  Angel,  warning  by  the  most  menacing  denunciatioi 
in  Holy  Scriptures. 

IV.  The  harvest  ofthe  earth— Rev,  xiv.  14— 16. 

7.  Vial,  into  the  air,  a  mighty  revolution  over  all  Eu 
rope,  especially  in  the  Catholic  states — to  maki 


V.  The  line  press  of  God's  wrath— Re 


All  nations  shall  come  and  worship  before  the 
for  thy  judgments  arc  made  manifest.  Rev.  xv.  - 


Rev.  xiil.  9 — 10.  Judgment  of  retaliation,  and  distrihu 
ve  justice  on  those  nations  under  the  dominionof  the  beast 
s  instruments  of  persecution,  and  for  blood  guiltiness. 


II    .VO.V  ESSE  nf  the  Beast,  Rev.  17—  8 
The  great  -.chore  mounts  the  beast. 

6.  Mount  Capitoliiuts  from  1798.  On  tl 

ed  the  seven  senators,  appointed  b)  tin  I  lit) 
Home  and  the  governor  of  Bonaparte,  to  1814 
and  now  the  present  [lop 

Rev.  xvii.  10.      Oi 
Thi  Beast  from  the  earth,  probably  the  order  of  the  Jesuit 
hould  they  obtain  the  inquisition — It  will 
ii.  obtain  and  exercise  great  power. 
Ii.  cause  to  worship  the  first  beast, 
<-.  do  great  wonders,  and  deceive, 
,1   say  to  make  an  image  to  the  first,  to  w 


i-iivcd,  and  the persecutioi 


life. 

e.  cause  a  mark  to  be 
Itev.  xiv.  12,  13. 

7.  Mount  Vis 


III.  J1SCEJVSI0J\'  from  the  bottomless  pit,  at  first 
Antipope. 
1    The  ten  kings.  Rev.  xvii.  12. 
'   has  the  false  prophet  to  his  assistance 

makes  the  whore  desolate,  utter  destruction  of  Bah) 


Ion 


.  with  the  I^imb—  battle  in  Hermageddon, 
east  alive,  with  the  fals  e  prophet,  into  the  lake  of  fir 


Satan  boiuid  a  thousand  ) 


Tree  and  righteous  are  his  judgments  on  the  great  whore, 
the  beast  andfalsc  prophet.     Rev.xis  % 


First  lindihiciit.. 
of  the  Beast 
from  the 
tomless  pit 
ami  ofhiaJSm- 

pire.        Which 

from  this  tic  e 
still        JTOTM, 

likcth.rbea»i 
from  the  sea 
from  the  time 
of  Gregory,50 


Lebrated  a  s, 
lemn  festiv- 
al Home,  d 
Aug.  1H1-; 
and  are  situ 
re-eslablishi 
in  Spain,  with 
the      inqtusi- 


1 


EXPOSITION 


OF  THE 


REVELATION 


OF 


JESUS  CHRIST. 


CHAPTER  I. 

1.  The  Revelation  of  Jesus  Christ,  which  God  gave  unto  him,  to  shew 

unto  liis  servants  things  which  must  shortly  come  to  pass,  and  he 
sent  and  signified  it  by  his  angel  unto  his  servant  John. 

2.  Who  bare  record  of  the  Word  of  God,  and  of  the  testimony  of  Jesus 

Christ,  and  of  all  things  that  he  saw. 

3.  Blessed  is  he  that  readeth,  and  they  that  hear  the  words  of  this  pro- 

phecy, and  keep  those  things  which  are  written  therein,  for  the 
time  is  at  hand. 

THIS  book  is  called  the  Revelation  of  St.  John,  the 
Divine.  It  entitles  itself  the  Apocalypsis  of  Jesus  Christ, 
which  name  it  ought  to  have  retained.  Upon  a  general 
view  of  its  contents,  it  is  a  proclamation  of  the  Son  of  God — ■ 
the  heir  of  all  things  and  head  of  the  human  family;  the 
King  of  kings,  and  Lord  of  lords;  that  all  power  in 
heaven  and  earth  is  given  unto  him,  to  establish  his  king- 
dom ;  and  to  reign  in  defiance  of  all  the  powers  of  dark- 
ness, till  he  has  put  down  all  rule,  and  all  authority,  and 
laid  all  his  enemies  under  his  feet. 

Of  all  the  oracles  of  God,  this  volume  is  the  most  re- 
markable, and  of  all  scripture  prophecies,  certainly  the 


42  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

most  important  to  the  church  ;  not  only  on  account  of  its 
sublimity  of  style,  and  vast  import  of  expression ;  but  more 
particularly,  because  it  is  in  a  peculiar  sense  of  the 
world,  a  written  document  of  Jesus  Christ.  In  his  other 
writings,  the  apostle  being  moved  by  the  Holy  Ghost,  has 
written  from  the  treasure  of  divine  knowledge  and  wis- 
dom, which  he  possessed ;  but  here,  except  a  few  remarks 
of  the  inspired  penman,  he  has  only  written  what  the  Lord 
himself  dictated  to  him,  and  what  he  saw  and  heard;  where- 
fore the  whole  work  is  of  the  Lord's  own  management,  and 
in  fact  his  Revelation.  For  after  the  addresses  to  the 
seven  churches,  which  the  apostle  has  written  down  from 
the  lips  of  the  Lord,  and  a  description  of  the  exalted  thea- 
tre of  vision,  in  the  first  five  chapters  of  this  book,  the 
apostle  from  chapter  vi.  to  chapter  viii.  only  gives  us  a 
copy  of  that  volume  in  heaven,  which  the  Lion  of  Judea 
opened.  And  all  what  we  read  from  chapter  viii.  to  chap, 
ix.  21.  is  not  a  transcript  from  that  book  with  seven  seals, 
but  an  emblematical  representation  of  a  series  of  facts, 
which  have  since  occurred,  and  are  recorded  on  the  page 
of  history. 

Verse  1.  Which  God  gave  unto  him.  Our  blessed  Lord 
in  his  mediatorial  character,  became  acquainted  with  many 
things  after  his  exaltation  to  the  right  hand  of  the  Father, 
which  he  did  not  know  during  his  pilgrimage  on  earth. 
Matthew  xxiv.  36.  Mark  xiii.  32.  Acts  i.  7.  He  for- 
merly ascribed  all  to  his  Father.  John  xii.  49.  The  doc- 
trines which  he  taught,  the  miracles'  which  he  performed, 
were  the  command  or  gift  of  his  Father ;  John  v.  36.  chap. 
x.  25 — -whatever  he  possessed,  he  enjoyed  in  union  with  him, 
John  xvi.  1 5— and  here  he  makes  the  same  confession  still, 
even  after  his  ascension.  Surprising  humility  !  Preciou* 
truth!  Of  which  God  is  the  fountain,  Christ  the  teacher,  An- 
gels the  servants,  Apostles  the  witnesses,  and  the  Children 
of  God  the  scholars.  Since  God  has  given  this  Revelation 
to  Jesus  Christ,  there  must  be  many  things  in  it,  unknown 


CHAPTER  I.  1— S.  43 

to  the  holy  prophets,  and  not  found  in  their  writings. 
Every  truth  ought  to  be  dear  to  us,  whether  revealed  by 
degrees,  or  all  at  once  in  meredian  splendour;  to  more  of 
the  inspired  writers,  or  only  to  one. 

The  Revelation  rests  on  the  authority  of  the  Son  of  God ; 
no  testimony  can  be  stronger.  If  we  even  had  not  a  suf- 
ficiency of  historical  evidence,  in  favour  of  its  divine  ori- 
gin ;  yet  the  children  of  God  would  know  this  book  by 
its  language.  No  ancient  or  modern  poet  ever  possessed 
such  a  power  of  invention.  In  reading  this  volume,  every 
single  and  discerning  eye  must  see,  and  every  open  and 
willing  heart  feel,  the  presence  of  a  Divine  power  pervading 
the  whole.  He  sent  it  by  his  angel  to  his  servant  John, 
who  makes  himself  known  to  be  no  other  than  the  apostle. 
Chapter  i.  1,  2,  4,  9.  chap.  xx.  8. 

Things  wfdeh  must  shorthj  come  to  pass.  The  original 
\v  ttk'xjii  ought  to  be  rendered  here,  in  quick  succession^ 
as  the  post  positive  ol  in  the  plural,  refers  to  the  whole  se- 
ries of  prophecies.  They  must  come  to  pass,  in  order  to 
fulfil  many  of  the  prophecies  in  the  Old  Testament,  to 
finish  the  mystery  of  God,  and  to  establish  the  kingdom 
of  Jesus  Christ  on  earth.  They  must  come  in  quick  suc- 
cession— in  a  pressed  series  of  events,  where  the  accom- 
plishment of  one  prophecy  immediately  follows  and  re- 
leaves  the  other,  in  one  connected  chain  to  its  final  comple- 
tion. 

He  has  signified  its  contents.  The  original  ^uoiiMea 
which  is  here  rendered,  signified,  denotes  to  express  by  em- 
blematical  or  figurative  language.  See  John  xii.  33.  Our 
blessed  Lord  therefore  is  also  the  author  of  this  style, 
words  and  manner  of  expression  in  this  book;  which  may, 
account  for  its  difference  from  the  style  of  the  apostle  in 
his  Gospel  and  Epistles.  This  style,  though  dark  and 
mysterious  in  many  instances,  is  yet  sufficiently  intelli- 
gible to  those,  who  are  acquainted  with  the  spirit  of  pro- 


44  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

Unto  his  servants.  Who  are  the  servants  of  Jesus?  The 
Lord  tells  us  himself  chap.  xi.  18.  They  are  the  prophets, 
the  saints,  they  that  fear  his  name  and  praise  him,  small 
and  great.  Chap.  xix.  5.  His  servants  with  respect  to  a 
christian  life,  are  all  true  believers,  who  are  justified  by 
faith,  and  in  a  state  of  sanctifying  grace,  obedient  to  the 
Gospel  of  Christ  by  virtue  of  a  thorough  change  of  heart, 
through  the  efficacy  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  But  with  respect 
to  office,  the  rulers  of  this  world,  and  more  particularly  the 
ministers  of  the  Gospel  are  called  his  servants.  I  take  this 
word  here,  to  denote  all  true  members  of  the  Church  of 
Christ,  and  especially  all  pious  pastors  of  flocks,  who 
preach  the  Word  with  the  good,  and  acceptable,  and  perfect 
will  of  God.  Rom.  xii.  2.  Unto  them  the  Lord  sent  this 
Revelation,  as  a  memorial  of  his  love,  and  an  instrument 
of  instruction  and  comfort,  during  the  whole  time  of  its 
accomplishment.  Thus  it  is  made  their  solemn  duty  to  at- 
tend to  this  word  of  prophecy ;  and  the  third  verse  informs 
them,  that  their  spiritual  happiness  is  connected  with  their 
compliance. 
Verse  3.  Blessed  is  he  that  readeth  and  they  that  hear* 
Oh !  That  guilty  backwardness  of  many  in  our  days,  to 
read  and  study  this  invaluable  treasure  of  the  christian, 
for1  fear  of  incurring  the  ridicule  of  infidels,  or  the  piteous 
smile  of*  the  wise  men  of  this  world.  Some  in  our  days 
neglect  this  kind  of  study/even  from  hypocricy.  They 
assume  a  superior  air  of  sanctity,  as  if  their  minds  were 
employed  in  matters  of  far  greater  moment  than  this,  and 
therefore  pray  "to  be  excused.  Should  a  mortal  presume 
to  know  better  what  he  ought  to  read,  than  God  ?  However 
the  study  of  the  prophecies  should  not  be  our  first  care ; 
for  what  will  all  this  knowledge  avail,  if  we  die  in  our  sins 
at  last.  Our  first  duty  is,  to  seek  the  kingdom  of  God, 
and  his  righteousness,  peace  and  joy  in  the  Holy  Ghost. 
We  must  be  experimentally  acquainted  with  the  ways  of 
God  in  Christ  Jesus,  to  derive  real  benefit  from  know- 


CHAPTER  I.  1—3.  45 

ledge  of  this  kind.  He,  whose  eternal  interest  is  truly  set- 
tled, will  study  the  prophecies  to  the  advantage  of  his 
soul's  concerns,  where  the  unconverted  speculator  only 
satisfies  vain  curiosity.  A  child  of  God  is,  as  it  were,  at 
home  in  the  heavenly  economy  of  his  father's  house,  has 
a  right  to  employ  himself  on  these  subjects,  and  knows, 
how  to  do  it  in  a  manner  becoming  his  kingdom. 

4.  John  to  the  seven  churches  which  are  in  Asia :  Grace 
be  unto  you,  and  peace,  from  him  which  is,  which 
was,  and  which  is  to  come ;  and  from  the  seven  spirits 
which  are  before  his  throne  ; 

5.  And  from  Jesus  Christ,  who  is  the  faithful  wit- 
ness, and  the  first  begotten  of  the  dead,  and  the 
Prince  of  the  kings  of  the  earth.  Unto  him  that 
loved  us,  and  washed  us  from  our  sins  in  his  own 
blood, 

6.  And  hath  made  us  kings  and  priests  unto  God  and 
his  Father ;  to  him  be  glory  and  dominion  for  ever 
and  ever — Amen. 

Thus  runs  the  saluting  benediction  of  this  book,  which 
according  to  the  oriental  manner  of  writing,  always  made 
the  beginning  of  an  address  or  letter,  to  a  child,  friend  or 
superior.  It  was  customary  with  the  apostles,  to  salute 
the  churches  with  grace  and  peace  ;  these  gifts  being  the 
principal  of  all  spiritual  possessions.  To  enjoy  the  grace 
of  God,  and  that  peace  which  passeth  all  understanding,  is 
already  true  happiness  in  this  world — and  the  earnest  to 
our  inheritance  of  the  purchased  possession  in  glory. 
Ephes.  i.  14.  But  this  salutation  here  surpasses  all  the 
former  apostolic  benedictions.  They  salute  from  God  the 
Father,  and  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  but  here :  Grace  and 
peace  from  Him,  which  is — was — and  is  to  come — from  Him, 
who  only  hath  absolute  immortality,  and  is  the  sole  cause 
of  all  existence  in  heaven  and  earth ;  who  was  the  Judge  of 
the  Antideluvian  world,  of  Sodom,  the  Egyptians,  and  all 
the  enemies  of  Israel  during  all  former  ages ;  and  the  pre- 


46  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

server  of  Noah,  Lot,  Abraham,  and  all  his  people 
nude1  the  old  covenant;  and  who  is  to  come  now,  to  sub- 
due all  his  enemies,  and  finish  the  mystery  of  God  on 
earth. 

Jlndfrom  the  seven  spirits  which  are  before  his  throne.  It 
is  the  Lord  Jesus  that  has  the  seven  spirits  of  God,  chap, 
iii.  1 .  By  which  we  are  to  understand  the  Holy  Ghost  in 
his  sevenfold  influence  and  attraction  on  the  Church  of 
Christ.  They  are  not  instruments  of  spectators  here ; 
they  give  grace  and  peace,  and  the  expression,  spirits  of 
God,  denotes  their  excellency.  Zech.  iii.  1.  iv.  10.  Isaiah 
xi.  The  number  seven  is  the  number  of  perfection  in  the 
kingdom  of  God.  Rev.  v.  6.  and  the  summit  of  misery  in 
the  regions  of  darkness.     Lukeviii.  2.  xi.  26.  Prov.  ix.  1. 

Verse  5.  Jlndfrom  Jesus  Christ  the  faithful  witness.  The 
heavenly  Hero  of  the  new  covenant  is  here  described,  as 
to  the  excellency  and  loveliness  of  his  character.  He  is  the 
faithful  witness,  for  he  attested  the  truth,  which  he  was 
sent  from  heaven  to  promulgate  to  an  erring  and  ungrate- 
ful world,  and  sealed  his  doctrine  with  his  death.  He  is 
the  first  begotten  of  the  dead,  because  he  became  the  first 
fruits  of  them  that  slept,  and  rose  previously  to  them  all 
from  the  grave  to  a  glorified  state,  and  to  eternal  life ;  that 
in  all  things  he  might  have  the  pre-eminence  to  his  spiritual 
body,  the  church.  Coloss.  i.  18.  He  is  the  Prince  of  the 
kings  of  the  earth.  The  word  ci$xm  here  should  not  be 
translated  Prince,  but  Supreme  Potentate — for  wherever  it 
occurs,  it  always  implies  the  highest  authority,  power,  or 
excellence  in  that  connexion ;  and  with  the  orientals  it  de- 
notes the  first  fountain,  author  and  origin  of  life,  light, 
power,  &c.  The  meaning  is,  that  he  is  a  superior  per- 
sonage, possessed  of  absolute  rights,  supreme  power  and 
authority  over  all  the  generations  of  men.  Ps.  xxxxix.  27. 
He  loved  us,  for  the  Word  was  made  flesh,  and  laid 
down  his  life  a  ransome  for  all.  By  his  atonement  to  the 
Father,  we  are  washed  in  his  blood ;  and  all  those,  who 


CHAPTER  I.  4—6.  47 

thus  receive  him  by  faith,  possess  a  pre-eminence  in  com- 
parison to  the  children  of  this  world,  like  kings,  compared 
to  their  subjects,  and  priests  according  to  the  Mosaic  in- 
stitution, with  unconsecrated  men.  Yea,  they  not  only  en- 
joy such  prerogatives  in  the  Church  of  Christ  now,  but 
also  have  reason  to  expect  an  inheritance  in  his  kingdom 
about  to  be  'established  on  earth,  Matt.  v.  5.  xix.  29. 
Mark  x.  29.  in  which  they  shall  be  a  holy  priesthood  after 
the  order  of  Melchisedeck. 

7.  Behold,  he  cometh  with  clouds,  and  every  eye 
shall  see  him,  and  they  also  which  pierced  him ;  and 
all  kindreds  of  the  earth  shall  wail  because  of  him. 
Even  so,  Amen. 

8.  I  am  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  beginning  and  the  end, 
saith  the  Lord,  which  is,  and  which  was,  and  which 
is  to  come,  the  Almighty. 

Thus  ends  the  introduction,  and  the  body  of  the  Revela- 
tion com  nances  with  the  following  portion.  In  these  two 
verses  the  Lord  expresses  the  principal  object  of  the  whole 
prophecy;  which  is  to  prove  :  that  He  is,  was,  and  cometh 
as  the  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  true  and  eternal  Word  of 
God,  in  whom  are  hid  all  the  treasures  of  wisdom  and 
knowledge,  Coloss.  ii.  3.  The  phrase  to  Akxito  £l  is 
a  Hebrewism,  for  %  and  y>.  The  Hebrew  alphabet 
has  only  twenty -two  letters,  according  to  which  the  ancient 
Jewish  doctors  divided  their  Scriptures  into  twenty-two 
books,  and  expressed  the  whole  canon,  by  mentioning  the 
first  and  last  letter  of  theV>  alphabet,  which  are  above  in 
Hebrew  and  Greek.  When  therefore  the  Lord  here  saith, 
I  am  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  sense  is,  that  He  is  the  Iieart 
of  the  Old  Testament,  and  the  chief  object  of  its  promul- 
gation. The  word  Almighty  in  the  original  is  iravTox,(>oiT6og 
which  signifies,  the  source  and  fountain  head  of  all  power 
and  authority. 

Jill  shall  see  and  bewail  him!  All  the  posterity  of  Abra- 
ham, and  of  th.ose  which  pierced  and  crucified  him,  Zech. 


48  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

xii.  10;  all  the  tribes  of  nations  covering  the  face  of  the 
earth.  Behold !  he  cometh,  not  as  formerly  in  a  state  of 
humiliation,  but  now  becoming  the  captain  of  our  salva- 
tion— -he  cometh  in  glorious  majesty,  as  a  reward  for  the 
travail  of  his  soul. 

9.  I  John,  who  also  am  your  brother,  and  companion 
in  tribulation,  and  in  the  kingdom  and  patience  of  Je- 
sus Christ,  was  in  the  isle  that  is  called  Patmps,  for 
the  Word  of  God,  and  for  the  testimony  of  Christ. 

10.  I  was  in  the  Spirit  on  the  Lord's  day,  and  heard 
behind  me  a  great  voice,  as  of  a  trumpet, 

11.  Saying,  I  am  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  first  and  the 
last:  and,  what  thou  seest,  write  in  a  book  and  send 
it  unto  the  seven  Churches  which  are  in  Asia ;  unto 
Ephesus,  and  unto  Smyrna,  and  unto  Pergamos,  and 
unto  Thyatira,  and  unto  Sardis,  and  unto  Philadel- 
phia, and  unto  Laodicea. 

Here  the  seer  of  heavenly  visions,  the  tender,  lovely 
apostle  John,  describes  his  own  person  to  all  the  churches, 
that  it  was  he,  whom  they  well  knew  as  their  brother  in 
Christ,  their  associate  in  this  persecution,  a  joint  heir  m 
the  kingdom  of  God,  and  who  had  persevered  with  Christ 
in  all  his  trials.  His  object  in  making  himself  known  is, 
to  procure  the  necessary  authority  for  this  prophecy,  and 
settle  its  canonical  dignity  in  the  churches  for  ever. 

In  the  year  '95,  the  Roman  emperor  Domitian,  com- 
menced a  violent  persecution  against  the  Christians,  dur- 
ing which  St.  John  was  carrio.1.  from  Ephesus  to  Rome, 
where  he  was  thrown  into  a  chaldron  of  boiling  oil,  and 
afterwards  banished  to  the  isle  of  Patmos.  Here  he  re- 
mained until  the  year  '97,  when  the  Roman  senate,  after 
the  death  of  the  emperor,  annulled  all  his  decrees,  he  also 
returned  to  Ephesus  in  the  90th  year  of  his  .age,  and  yet 
lived  seven  years  in  peace,  to  A.  D.  104. 

The  isle  of  Patmos  is  one  of  the  Sporades  in  the  Archi- 
pelago, about  thirty  miles  in  compass,  very  barren,  full  of 


CHAPTER  I.  7— 11.  49 

rocky  mountains,  without  wood,  and  at  present  in  the 
hands  of  the  Turks.  On  this  island  the  holy  apostle  re- 
ceived the  Revelation,  during  his  banishment.  If  he 
stood  on  one  of  those  high  and  solitary  mountains,  from 
which  there  is  an  unbounded  prospect,  full  of  isles,  ocean, 
and  land,  his  mind  must  have  been  naturally  disposed  to 
deep  and  sublime  contemplation.  For  hereto  the  East,  he 
had  Asia  minor,  and  the  seven  churches ;  between  East  and 
South,  the  Holy  Land,  though  out  of  sight ;  towards  south, 
Egypt;  towards  West,  the  ocean,  Greece  and  Italy;  be- 
tween west  and  north,  Macedon,  Greece  or  European  Tur- 
ky,  and  further  off  Hungary  and  Germany.  In .  almost 
all  these  countries  there  now  were  Christian  churches 
planted,  and  thousands  of  fellow  sufferers  for  the  cause  of 
Christ.  They  were  precious  jewels  in  his  sight.  He 
loved  them  as  his  own  soul — his  heart  bled  for  them  in  this 
calamity — he  often  poured  out  his  soul  before  the  throne  of 
grace,  for  their  preservation  and  prosperity — he  had  so 
long  laboured  for  their  instruction  and  comfort,  and  now 
was  separated  from  them  all,  solitary,  and  without  any 
human  assistance  in  his  old  age. 

Here,  on  the  Lords  day,  he  received  the  Revela- 
tion ;  which  was  either  a  Sabbath,  or  more  probably 
the  day  of  our  blessed  Saviour's  resurrection.  The  apos- 
tle knew  that  on  this  day  all  Christians  were  engaged  in 
divine  worship,  and  no  doubt  was  himself  wholly  absorbed 
in  prayer  and  heavenly  meditation.  The  circumstances 
of  that  time  tended  much,  to  augment  the  zeal  and  fervour 
of  his  devotion.  Paganism  swayed  the  sceptre — the  Chris- 
tians were  cruelly  persecuted,  and  all  prospects  for  the  fu- 
ture prosperity  of  the  Church  seemed  enveloped  in  thick 
darkness.  The  ways  of  the  Lord  had  become  inscrutable 
and  mysterious  to  the  most  sagacious  foresight  of  mortals, 
and  his  whole  soul  thirsted  for  knowledge.  Thus  was  his 
mind  exalted  to  a  state  of  heavenly  visions,  and  prepare^ 
to  hold  converse  with  angels  in  light. 

G 


50  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

Verse  10.  J  was  in  the  spirit  'tywouqv  'tv  mtvuxri* 
may  also  be  rendered  J  was  set,  placed,  or  put  into  the  spi- 
rit. The  apostle  felt  the  impulse  of  the  Holy  spirit  of 
God  on  him,  withdrawing  his  mind  from  all  sensible  objects, 
and  placing  his  soul  in  a  state  of  ecstacy  and  vision. 
Acts  x.  10,  11.  Mark  xii.  36.  Hence  it  follows,  that  the 
images  which  he  describes,  did  not  actually  exist,  and  ap- 
pear to  his  external  senses,  but  that  the  whole  vision 
passed  by  ideas  through  his  mind,  from  a  divine  impulse, 
of  which  the  angel  mentioned  in  the  first  verse,  seems  t<* 
have  been  the  means. 

Ji  great  voice  as  of  a  trumpet.     The  ancients  had  only 
two  wind  instruments  of  this  sort,  the  ram's  horn,  and 
the  silver  trumpet;  probably  the  first  is  here  meant,  as  its 
sound  was  more  solemn  and  majestic.     Exod.  xix.  16 
Numbers  x.  2. 

Verse  11.  Send  it  unto  the  seven  Churches.  The  num- 
ber seven  in  this  book,  is  the  number  of  perfection,  and  here 
indicative  of  the  whole  Church,  of  Christ  ,•  of  which  these 
select  bodies  of  Christians  in  Asia,  are  only  the  represen- 
tatives. There  were  larger  and  more  considerable  con- 
gregations at  that  time,  even  in  Asia ;  and  it  is  remarka- 
ble that  these  epistles  are  not  addressed  to  them.  How  the 
holy  father  at  Rome  would  rejoice,  if  they  had  been  ad- 
dressed to  one  of  his  predecessors  also  ?  No  doubt,  lie 
would  have  discovered  a  variation  in  the  text  somewhere, 
and  established  a  conjecture,  so  as  to  favour  his  pretended 
superiority  in  the  church  ?  But  alas,  Rome  is  not  mentioned 
at  all. 

12.  And  I   turned  to  see  the  voice   that   spake  with 
me,     And  being  turned,  I  saw  seven  golden  candle- 
sticks. 

13.  And  in  the  midst  of  the  seven  candlesticks,  one  like 
unto  the  Son  of  man,  clothed  with  a  garment  down 
to  the  foot,  and  girt  about  the  paps  with  a  golden 
girdle. 


CHAPTER  I.  7— 11.  51 

14.  His  head  and  his  hairs  were  white  like  wool, 
as  white  as  snow:  and  his  eyes  as  a  flame  of 
fire; 

15.  And  his  feet  like  unto  fine  brass,  as  if  they  burned 
in  a  furnace ;  and  his  voice  as  the  sound  of  many 
waters. 

16.  And  he  had  in  his  right  hand  seven  stars,  and  out 
of  his  mouth  went  a  sharp  two-edged  sword ;  and 
his  countenance  was  as  the  sun  shineth  in  his 
strength. 

Great  God,  what  terrible  majesty!  "Who  can  form  to 
himself  a  lively  conception  of  this  appearance  without 
being  penetrated  with  a  holy  reverence  and  awe,  ready  to 
fall  down  and  worship  at  his  feet.  Who  does  here  not  re- 
collect the  Lion  of  Judah  ?  When  he  roareth,  who  would 
not  tremble — when  the  Son  of  God  commands,  who  would 
not  submit  ?  Blessed  are  they  that  read  and  hear— blessed 
those,  who  keep  the  words  of  this  prophecy,  for  the 
time  is  at  hand.     All  the  tribes  of  the  earth  shall  wail ! 

There  never  was  such  grandeur  and  dignity  in  any 
angelic  apparition,  as  in  this  appearance  of  the  Son  of 
God ;  and  yet,  this  is  not  his  divine  majesty,  as  seen  by 
the  hosts  of  heaven  in  glory; — It  is  only  an  emblematical 
representation  of  him,  as  the  head  of  his  Church — the 
King  of  kings,  and  Lord  of  lords  in  his  heavenly  armour 
and  judgments. 

Verse  12.  Seven  Golden  Candlesticks.  They  stood  in  a 
half  circle  around  his  person,  and  represent  the  whole 
Church  of  Christ  on  earth,  from  the  commencement  of 
this  prophecy  to  the  beginning  of  the  Millennium  ;  when 
the  Lord  will  establish  a  new  economy  and  government 
in  his  Church — a  royal  priesthood  after  the  order  of  Mel- 
chisedeck. 

Verse  13.  One  like  unto  the  Son  of  Man.  This  expres- 
sion  is  taken  from  Daniel    vii.    "  BAR  ENASCH," 


52  .  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

by  which  the  Jews  always  understood  the  Messiah. 
Christ  often  called  himself  the  Son  of  Man,  to  procure 
reception  for  himself  and  his  doctrine  among  his  peo- 
ple. He  walks  in  the  midst  of  the  Churches,  every  where 
present  to  afford  his  aid;  inspect,  superintend  and  govern 
all.     One  is  as  near  to  him,  as  the  other. 

Clothed  with  a  garment  down  to  the  foot.  A  long  white 
gown,  or  robe  of  state,  which  was  the  customary  dress  of 
dignity  with  the  ancients,  and  worn  by  priests,  kings,  and 
the  Jewish  nobility. 

Girt  with  a  golden  girdle.  It  was  a  favourite  figure  in 
the  East,  to  represent  the  armour  of  spiritual  warfare,  by 
the  emblem  of  holy  garments  ;  in  which  the  girdle  denotes 
the  pledge  of  religion,  in  common  combatants,  and  with  the 
Captain  of  our  salvation  here,  of  his  Messiah-ship.  It  also 
expresses  in  scripture,  righteousness  in  judgment,  and 
faithfulness  in  his  promises.  Isaiah  xi.  5.  To  be  girt 
about  the  loins,  indicates  activity  in  business — -immediately 
about  the  paps,  solemn  and  dignified  repose.  2  Sam.  xx.  8. 
Daniel  x.  5. 

Verse  14.  His  head  and  hairs  white.  Tradition  says, 
Christ  had  fair  hair,  but  here  it  was  so  extremely  white, 
that  the  apostle  makes  two  comparisons,  to  show,  that 
he  wanted  a  word  to  express  it  sufficiently.  The  white 
colour  here  denotes  holiness  of  heart,  thought  and  disposi- 
tion. 

His  eyes  as  aflame  of  fire.  This  is  an  emblem  of  his 
omniscience,  infinite  discernment  and  wisdom,  in  designing 
and  executing  his  eternal  councils  on  earth.  With  such 
eyes  he  may  well  observe  the  movements  of  his  enemies, 
and  the  faithfulness  of  his  friends.  Reader,  imagine  you 
could  see  him  with  these  eyes  surveying  the  surface  of  all 
the  earth,  and  penetrating  into  the  inmost  recesses  of  thine 
heart,  what  would  he  behold  ? 


CHAPTER  I.  12—16.  53 

Verse  15.  His  feet  like  unto  fine  brass.  The  original 
word  is  ;&#AjmA*@<*vov,  which  does  not  signify  brass,  but  a 
metal  to  us  entirely  unknown,  though  considered  among 
the  ancients  more  precious,  than  even  gold.  We  would 
be  nearer  the  true  sense,  by  translating  it;  the  most  re- 
fined metal,  as  Bengelius  has  given  it.  Perhaps  this  chal- 
kolibanon  in  that  burning  state  was  partly  transparent, 
and  of  different  colours  ?  This  part  of  the  description  is 
indicative  both  of  the  glorified  state  of  his  body,  and  the 
firmness  and  vigour  of  his  administration. 

His  voice  as  the  sound  of  many  waters.  This  is  the  voice 
of  a  Hero  indeed,  capable  to  marshal  an  army  of  millions, 
and  to  strike  terror  and  dismay  by  his  word  of  command 
into  the  ranks  of  his  enemies.  Probably  this  is  an  allusion 
to  the  effectual  progress  of  the  Gospel,  as  received  by  many 
nations  on  earth.  It  has  turned  many  a  wilderness  of 
Paganism  into  a  garden  of  the  Lord,  watered  the  parched 
ground,  and  satisfied  many  a  thirsty  soul. 

Verse  16.  In  his  right  hand  seven  stars.  This  emblem  de- 
notes the  sovereign  power  and  authority,  which  the  Lord 
exercises  over  his  gospel  ministry,  as  to  their  appointment, 
succession,  and  usefulness  in  his  Church.  They  are 
under  his  more  immediate  inspection,  comfort,  and  go- 
vernment, for  they  are  in  his  hand,  but  the  churches  are 
only  in  his  presence. 

A  two-edged  sword,  gopQala  ifcopog  6%iT<&  is  a  very 
strong  exp  ression,  and  signifies  a  broad  sword  with  two 
edges,  a  glave,  as  used  in  slaughter  houses.  It  denotes  his 
fiery  indignation  against  his  enemies,  and  his  power  and 
readiness  to  defend  his  Church. 

His  countenance  as  the  sun  in  his  strength.  It  was  of  such 
brilliancy  and  brightness,  as  the  sun  during  an  unclouded 
and  hot  summer's  day.  These  words  express  the  ex- 
cellency and  inherent  qualities  of  his  glorified  body,  and 
his  glory  as  Redeemer  of  the  world,  after  his  ascension. 
Join)  xvii.  24. 


54  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

17.  And  when  I  saw  him,  I  fell  at  his  feet  as  dead.  And 
he  laid  his  right  hand  upon  me,  saying  unto  me, 
fear  not ;  I  am  the  first  and  the  last : 

18.  I  am  he  that  liveth,  and  was  dead;  and,  behold,  I 
am  alive  for  evermore,  Amen;  and  have  the  keys 
of  hell  and  of  death. 

19.  Write  the  things  which  thou  hast  seen,  and  the 
things  which  are,  and  the  things  which  shall  be 
hereafter  ; 

20.  The  mystery  of  the  seven  stars,  which  thou  sawest 
in  my  right  hand,  and  the  seven  golden  candlesticks. 
The  seven  stars  are  the  angels  of  the  seven  churches ; 
and  the  seven  candlesticks,  which  thou  sawest  are 

!  the  seven  churches. 

Verse  17.  I  fell  at  his  feet  as  dead*  The  apostle  turned 
to  know,  from  whence  this  formidable  and  tremendous 
voice  proceeded;  and  gazing  with  fixed  attention,  was 
struck  with  amazement  and  awful  apprehensions,  more 
than  he  was  able  to  support,  and  fell  at  his  feet  as  dead. 
Thus  it  also  happened  to  Daniel  and  Isaiah.  It  ap- 
pears to  be  a  maxim  in  the  kingdom  of  God,  that  before  a 
great  measure  of  heavenly  grace  can  be  communicated,  a 
deep  debasement  of  human  nature  will  always  precede 
it.  John  was  so  particular  an  intimate  of  Christ,  during 
his  pilgrimage  on  earth 5  and  yet,  so  great  was  his  glory 
now,  that  the  first  sight  of  his  Lord  was  more,  than  he 
could  bear.  O  infidel  and  sinner,  how  will  you  stand  be- 
fore Him ! 

He  laid  his  right  hand  upon  me.  The  hand  of  his  holi- 
ness terrifies;  the  hand  of  his  power  crushes  the  unbe- 
liever, and  saves  the  penitent ;  but  the  hand  of  his  loving 
kindness  revives  body  and  soul.  He  said,  fear  not,  my 
beloved  John,  this  my  terrible  armour  is  not  intended  for 
your  destruction.  You  know  me  well,  lam  the  first  source 
of  life,  happiness  and  knowledge,  and  the  last,  for  whom, 
and  to  whom  are  all  things.     Rom.  xi.  36. 


CHAPTER  I.  17—20.  55 

Verse  18.  lam  he  that  liveth.  In  the  foregoing  verses 
the  Lord  spoke  more  immediately  of  his  divine  nature : 
I  am — the  first  and  the  last — which  is — was — is  to  come ; 
he  now  speaks  of  his  human  nature,  which  alone  could 
die.  I  am  Jesus  Christ,  the  mediator  between  God  and 
man,  who  suffered  death  on  the  cross  in  your  presence, 
for  the  sins  of  the  world,  and  who  now  liveth  to  all  eter- 
nity. 

For  evermore.  €/?  t5V  almas  rtov  xi&vwv,  This  expression 
evidently  indicates  an  infinite  duration,  but  yet  an  infinite 
duration  of  distinguished  times.  All  finite  beings  live  in  a  suc- 
cession of  time,  which  they  measure  either  by  external  ob- 
jects, or  by  the  series  of  thought  and  reflection  within  their 
own  mind.  Only  God  inhabits  eternity,  and  lives  exalted 
above  these  limits  of  creation,  which  can  never  become  the 
perfection  of  a  creature;  because  they  have  began  to  exist, 
from  which  point  their  time  can  always  be  computed. 
This  must,  I  presume,  also  be  the  case  with  the  human  na- 
ture of  our  blessed  Lord  ?  That  it  is,  as  to  his  mediatorial 
office,  and  future  reign,  the  apostle  expressly  affirms. 
1  Cor.  xv.  28.*  The  ancient  Asiatics,  according  to  Herder, 
who  were  acquainted  with  the  Chaldean  wisdom,  and  the 
religious  tenets  of  Zoroaster,  considered  the  whole  dura- 
tion of  the  world  as  subdivided  by  many  general  revolu- 
tions or  catastrophes  like  the  flood,  predetermined  in  the 
councils  of  heaven.  Between  these  revolutions,  the  Su- 
preme Deity,  in  their  opinion,  changed  his  ministers  and 
fovernors  of  this  inferior  world,  so  that  no  one  of  the 
eavenly  powers  had  more  than  one  time  of  reign  on 
earth.  The  time  of  such  a  reign,  from  one  revolution 
to    the    other,   the    Chaldeans    called    OLAM,    Daniel 

*  When  the  Son  shall  have  arrived  at  the  summit  of  his  Mediatorial 
glory,  having  gradually  sub] ected  all  contrary  power,  and  death  itself  to 
his  jurisdiction  ;  then  a  new  economy  will  be  established,  and  a  new  ex- 
alted relation  between  Christ  and  his  Father,  in  regard  to  urs  manhood, 
which  shall  continue  through  anew  succession  of  ages, 


56  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

ii.  4.  chap.  iv.  3.  chap.  vii.  18.  Ezr.  iv.  15.  which  word 
often  occurs  in  Daniel,  and  never  signifies  an  absolute 
eternity,  but  only  an  unknown  time,  or  a  time  having 
a  beginning,  but  an  unknown  duration.  For  an  abso- 
lute eternity,  the  Hebrew  term  is  GNAD.  Isaiah  ivii. 
15.  This  Olam,  they  expressed  in  the  Greek  language  by 
the  term  <*/wv,  and  made  this  word  the  vehicle,  of  this 
vast  and  important  Asiatic  idea.  Hence  all  the  doctrine, 
and  heresies  about  these  Aionas  during  the  first  centuries 
of  the  christian  sera.  This  division  of  the  duration  of  the 
world  into  so  many  Aionas,  is  a  fundamental  idea  in  the 
Zend-Avesta,  the  holy  scriptures  of  the  Persians,  attri- 
buted to  Zoroaster,  the  great  reformer  of  Sabiism ;  whose 
religious  opinions  obtained  unlimited  sway  over  all  Asia, 
since  the  time  of  Cyrus,  and  were  prevalent  yet  among 
Jews  and  Gentiles,  even  in  the  time  of  St.  John.  From 
these  considerations,  I  presume  to  say,  the  above  original 
ought  to  be  rendered,  "  through  all  ages  of  the  world;" 
In  accordance  with  this  idea,  the  apostle  Paul  terms  Satan, 
2  Cor.  iv.  4.  O  ©go?  ra  aiwos  txt«,  the  God,  or  governor  of 
this  age,  n.  a.  in  which  the  kingdom  of  God  is  oppressed 
by  temptation,  and  intellectual  darkness,  of  which  Satan  is 
the  chief  and  first  cause. 

Ketjs  of  death  and  hell.  By  the  word  hell  we  understand 
the  place  of  eternal  torment,  which  is  not  at  all  the  true 
meaning  of  the  original  word  Hades.  It  is  the  Scheol  of  the 
Hebrews,  the  place  of  shades,  of  dawning  light,  of  longing 
and  silent  solitude,  the  place  of  the  general  cong-regation 
of  the  dead,  the  court-yard  of  eternal  justice;  where  Christ 
appeared  in  the  assembly  of  departed  spirits.  1.  Pet.  iii. 

17 iv.  6.  Hebrews  xi.  39,  40.     Death,  in  our  common 

acceptation  of  the  word  signifies  the  extinction  of  animal 
life  in  our  bodies,  or  the  separation  of  body  and  soul.  But 
this  cannot  be  the  meaning  here.  After  a  mature  consi- 
deration of  all  the  parallel  places,  where  these  words  oc- 
cur, it  appears,  that  after  our  dissolution.  Hades  is  the 


CHAPTER  I.  17— 20    .  57 

place  and  state  ofall  separate  spirits,  and  Thanatos  the 
place  and  state  of  the  body ;  where  it  is  dissolved  into  its 
first  elements,  in  order  that  the  immortal  bud  or  germ  of 
the  future  body  may  be  set  at  liberty,  to  bring  forth  its  glo- 
rious fruit.  In  this  Hades  is  Tartarus  to  the  wicked,  and 
Elysium  to  the  good.  Thanatos  and  Hades  are  often  men- 
tioned together  in  scripture.  Ps.  vi.  5.  Isaiah  xxviii.  18. 
Xxxviii.  18.  and  both  described  as  strong  and  powerful. 
1  Cor.  xv.  55.  Song  of  Sol.  viii.  6.  To  each  of  these 
states  and  places  the  Orientals  assigned  a  superintending 
angel,  who  governed  by  severe  laws,  and  defended  his 
own  with  authority  against  the  encroachments  of  others. 

Keys  are  emblems  of  power  and  dignity ;  they  indicate 
in  this  place,  that  our  blessed  Saviour  has  sovereign  power 
over  both,  Rom.  xiv.  9.<.which  he  has  proved  even  in  the 
moment  of  his  death.  The  graves  were  opened;  and  many 
bodies  of  the  saints  which  slept  arose,  and  came  out  of  the 
graves  after  his  resurrection,  and  went  into  the  holy  city, 
and  appeared  wnto  many.  Math,  xxvii.  52,  53.  Where 
have  these  saints  been  during  all  this  time,  since  their 
death  ?  And  what  was  their  employment  ?  They  have 
surely  not  been  idle  :  for  in  the  kingdom  of  God  all  is  in- 
dustry to  useful  purposes ;  and  yet,  they  were  only  new 
partakers  of  his  resurrection.  Christ  should  be  the  first- 
born of  the  dead,  and  thereby  demonstrate,  that  he  has  des- 
poiled death  and  hades  of  their  power,  and  brought  life 
and  immortality  to  light.  The  most  noble  saints  of  the 
Old  Testament,  became  the  first  glorious  garland  of  his 
resurrection.  When  Paul  endeavours  to  describe  the  pleni- 
tude of  his  power,  his  words  encompass  the  extremities  of 
the  universe,  when  he  says :  he  passed  into  the  lowermost 
parts  of  the  earth,  and  ascended  up  far  above  all  heavens, 
that  he  might  fill  all  things.  Eph.  iv.  9,  10.  All  knees 
should  bow  before  him  in  heaven,  on  earth,  and  under  the 
earth ;  and  every  tongue  confess  that  Jesus  Christ  is  the 
Lord  of  glory.     Phil.  ii.  10,    11.     Hebrews  i.  3.    The 


58  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

apostle  Peter  extends  the  message  of  his  triumph  even  un- 
to the  spirits  in  prison.  1  Pet.  iii.  17 — to  chap.  iv.  6.  to 
those,  who  had  once  heen  the  first  patterns  of  wickedness 
and  infidelity,  and  on  that  account,  pass  even  in  Heathen 
mithologies  for  a  race  of  demons,  against  whom  as  they 
say,  the  Supreme  God  armed  stars  and  angels,  and 
washed  the  elements  of  their  pollutions  by  the  flood. 

Here  the  second  chapter  ought  to  commence  with  the  19th 
verse  ,•  for  the  Lord  now  begins  to  dictate  the  seven  epis- 
tles to  the  apostle,  whom  he  commands  to  be  his  secretary 
and  amanuensis  by  saying,  write.  This  divine  order  how- 
ever does  not  only  refer  to  these  seven  epistles,  but  also  to 
the  whole  contents  of  the  Apocalypse ;  which  by  his  au- 
thority, is  divided  into  three  parts.     St.  John  was  to  write 

and  has  written : 

I*  The  things  which  he  had  seen,  from  chap. 

i.  11— 18. 
II.  The  things  which  are,  from  chap.  i.  19,  20. 

ii.  1—7. 
III.  The  things  which  shall  be  hereafter,  from 

chap.  ii.  8. 
When  doctors  disagree,  who  shall  decide  the  contro- 
versy ?  And  they  differ  widely  in  this  place.  Some  con- 
tend, that  these  addresses  are  not  prophetic,  and  only  con- 
cern those  seven  individual  churches  in  Asia,  and  their 
bishops  or  pastors.  Others  look  upon  them,  as  wholly  of 
a  prophetic  nature,  and  as  containing  a  description,  of  the 
internal  state  of  vital  religion  and  the  most  interesting 
events  in  the  Church  of  Christ,  during  seven  different  pe- 
riods. Some  make  these  periods  of  equal,  and  others  of 
unequal  lengths ;  some  describe  them  as  arising  in  succes- 
sion, and  others  let  them  run  parallel  to  each  other  for  many 
years.  They  all  hold  these  seven  candlesticks  to  signify 
seven  churches,  and  the  seven  stars  their  pastors ;  but  they 
disagree  in  their  applications  of  these  prophecies,  and  se^ 
lect  very  different  objects,  in  which  they  suppose  them  fuK 


CHAPTER  I.  17—20.  59 

Ailed.  It  is  vary  probable  these  great  men  may  have  erred 
on  both  sides,  and  the  truth  lie  between  them.  Those  who 
contend  for  seven  different  churches  in  succession,  cannot 
draw  the  line  of  distinction  between  them  with  any  degree 
of  exactness ;  and  those  which  only  understand  the 
churches  in  Asia,  are  often  wavering  as  they  proceed  to 
explain,  and  give  us  but  little  saticfaction.  I  look  upon 
this  subject  as  important  and  well  deserving  of  mature 
consideration.  If  in  my  researches  on  this  head  I  have 
been  so  fortunate,  as  to  hit  upon  a  rich  bed  of  precious 
metal,  by  following  a  good  appearance  a  few  feet  deeper ; 
the  credit  is  certainly  due  to  those,  who  first  dug  the 
shaft  into  the  bowels  of  the  earth,  and  prepared  the  way 
for  entrance. 

These  seven  stars  and  seven  candlesticks  are  called  a 
mystery  in  the  £0th  verse,  and  must  therefore  be  of  a 
more  comprehensive  signification,  than  merely  to  denote 
those  churches  in  Asia :  though  they  surely  were  of  first 
import  to  them.  These  epistles,  no  doubt,  most  properly 
belong  to  the  following  prophecy,  and  stand  strictly  con- 
nected with  its  contents.  We  only  wish  to  know  in  what 
point  of  view  their  relation  is  to  be  considered.  I  have  in 
part  ventured  my  opinion  on  this  head,  though  with  all  sin- 
cere respect  due  to  the  talents,  learning,  and  labours  of 
others.  If  it  should  not  appear  convincing  to  all  my 
readers,  probably  some  of  them  have  not  studied  this  sub- 
ject as  it  deserves.  These  churches  are  by  their  number 
seven  [which  is  the  holy  number,  the  number  of  perfection] 
the  representation  of  the  whole  church  of  Christ,  at  seven 
different  periods  of  time ;  and  these  addresses,  are  seven 
pastoral  charges  of  the  great  Shepherd  and  Bishop  of  souls, 
to  Ms  gospel  ministry,  and  where  our  Lord  expressly  desig- 
nates, also  to  all  the  members  of  his  church.  They  arc 
chiefly  addressed  to  the  gospel  ministry  ;  in  direct  terms,- 
at  the  head  of  every  epistle,  and  the  churches  are  not  ex- 
pressly comprehended  in  them,  except  in  the  annexed 


6o  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN4, 

promises.  And  even  there  the  pious  prelate  BengeliuS 
reads  instead  of:  t*  to  itvivpot,  Kiyu  rotig  £utAipf0jr# 
•what  the  Spirit  saith  the  Churches,  with  an  ellipsis  taken 
from  chap.  xxii.  16.  thus  :  what  the  Spirit  saith  in)  reels 
txKhtjcioiK,  in  or  at  the  churches  ;  so  that  the  gospel  minis- 
try in  or  at  those  churches  is  still,  even  in  the  annexed 
promises  the  principal  object  in  view. 

It  is  the  gospel  ministry  then,  which  here  receives 
special  instruction,  concerning  their  official  conduct,  and 
the  most  successful  mode  to  manage  the  affairs  and  go- 
vernment of  the  church,  during  those  times  of  extraordi- 
nary trial  and  temptation,  to  which  these  pastoral  chargeg 
refer.  The  contents  of  these  charges  have  heretofore 
been  explained,  as  only  concerning  the  conduct  and  prac- 
tice of  private  christians  during  perilous  times,  and  their 
state  of  vital  religion ;  but  the  Lord  here  describes  the 
general  character  of  hisministry,  as  it  is  at  each  period, 
with  praise  or  censure  where  due.  This  being  the  nature 
and  design  of  these  epistles,  we  may  expect  to  meet  in 
them  with  many  prophetic  views  of  important  events  to 
the  church ;  which  also  afford  light  to  many  of  the  fol- 
lowing prophecies,  more  particularly,  where  the  pasto- 
ral instructions,  praise  or  censure  given,  are  of  a  spe- 
cial nature,  and  refer  to  particular  times  and  places  in  the 
church. 

Pause  then,  ye  Shepherds  of  souls!  Read  and  study 
these  charges  with  renewed  and  double  attention,  as  ex- 
pressly addressed  to  you ;  to  you  my  reverend  brethren  in 
particular.  Our  candlestick  is  among  these  seven,  and 
we  constitute  one  of  these  angels,  to  which  the  Lord  of  life 
and  death  addresses  himself.  Consider,  how  serious  are 
his  forewarnings — how  loving  Ms  admonitions — how  full 
of  comfort  his  encouragements — how  great  his  promises, 
and  how  faithful  his  advice.  We  are  in  his  hand, 
and  the  Lord  walks  in  our  midst,  observing  our  labours, 
and  inspecting  our  flocks,  with  eyes  $£e  a  flame  of  fire, 


CHAPTiy  I.  17—30.  jgl 

too  penetrating  to  behold.  If  we  enter  the  conflict  under 
his  banner,  and  fight  the  good  fight  of  faith ;  if  we  per- 
form our  duty  well,  as  officers  under  his  command  j  if 
we  overcome  the  enemies  of  our  souls,  and  of  his  church, 
our  happiness  will  be  complete.  But  how  shall  we  es> 
cape,  if  we  neglect  so  gre$t  salvation.    Hebrews  xi.  3. 


CHAPTER  II. 


THESE  angels  of  the  seven  churches  then,  are  not  se- 
lected in  imitation  of  the  Scheliach  Zibbur,  or  ruler  of  the 
Jewish  synagogue.  They  are  not  physical  persons,  or 
bishops  of  churches  in  Asia,  at  that  time  5  but  moral  re- 
presentatives oi  the  whole  body  of  the  gospel  ministry,  at 
seven  different,  periods,  to  which  these  charges  refer. 
Though  ministers  of  the  gospel  are  often  represented  in 
the  emblematical  style  of  scripture  as  stars  and  angels ; 
yet  there  is  a  great  difference,  to  be  termed  a  star  among 
millions  of  other  stars,  and  to  be  one  of  these  seven  in  the 
right  hand  of  the  Lord.  There  is  more  glory,  dignity  and 
excellence  attached  to  these,  than  can  ever  fall  to  the 
share  of  one  servant  of  Christ.  The  angels  at  Smyrna, 
Pergamos,  Thyatira,  Sardis  and  Laodicea  are  also  in  dif- 
ferent places  addressed  in  the  plural  number,  to  assist  us 
in  arriving  at  the  true  sense  af  this  word. 

The  seven  candlesticks,  by  which  the  Church  of  Christ 
is  represented  in  these  pastoral  letters,  were  no  doubt 
lighted,  and  burning  in  very  different  degrees  of  bright- 
ness, though  it  is  not  expressly  mentioned  in  the  text.  The 
first  christian  churches  had  a  great  measure  of  light  and 
grace,  and  bore  a  clear  testimony  concerning  Christ,  to  all 
Heathen  nations.  They  were  candlesticks  burning  with  a 
holy  flame  of  love  and  zeal  for  the  glory  of  Christ  and  the 
conversion  of  souls.  Some  churches  now  scarcely  shine 
6v  burn — some  burn  without  shining,  and  others  shine 


CHAPTER  II.  1— 7.  6b 

without  burning.  Knowledge  and  testimony  avail  not — 
they  are  but  half  the  character  of  a  christian  church  ;  our 
hearts  must  be  filled  with  the  love  of  Jesus,  and  all  our 
conversation  sanctified  and  zealous  for  the  good  of  souls, 
to  meet  the  approbation  of  the  Lord. 

It  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  these  seven  charges  of  the 
great  Bishop  of  souls  to  his  gospel  ministry,  are  all  con- 
ceived and  arranged  after  one  uniform  method  and  dispo- 
sition. A  few  slight  deviations  excepted,  where  the  state 
and  situation  of  the  ministry  is  so  very  different,  and  the 
time  peculiarly  eventful;  the  contents  of  every  charge  are 
adjusted  in  the  following  order  of  the  charge  unto  the 
angel  at  Ephesus. 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  EPHESUS. 

It  contains  from  verse  1  to  7.- 

I.  Ji  command  to  write,  what  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  was 

about  to  dictate. 
II.  A  declaration  of  part  of  his  glorious  title.  These 
things  saith  he,  that  holdeth  the  seven  stars  in  his 
right  hand,  who  walketh  in  the  midst  of  the  seven 
golden  candlesticks.  The  Lord  here  declares  him- 
self the  great  presiding  Shepherd  of  souls,  from 
whom  the  whole  body  of  the  gospel  ministry  derive 
their  office  and  authority  in  the  church.  He  upholds 
them  in  his  hand,  and  protects  them  by  his  power, 
against  all  attempts  of  their  enemies  towards  their 
destruction;  and  employs  the  light  they  emit,  ac- 
cording to  his  own  pleasure.  In  the  midst  of  the 
churches,  he  is  every  where  present,  omniscient  to 
discern  all  their  wants — all  powerful  and  willing  to 
help. 
III.  The  pastoral  charge  itself  to  the  gospel  ministry,  in 
which 

1.  The  Lord  bears  testimony  to  their  official  character. 
a.  /  know  thy  works,  and  thy  labours.  These 
two  words,  works  and  labour,  are  no  tautology; 
they  would  be  as  they  stand,  but  the  first  is  not 
properly  translated,  t$yovy  not  only  signifies 
work,  it  also  denotes  office.    See  1  Tim.  iii.  1. 


CHAPTER  II.  1—7.  6* 

Tim.  iv.  5.  John  xvii.  4.  Acts  xiii.  2.  Et 
apud  Xenoph.  Lib.  ii.  psed.  sov  t^yov,  Hum 
est  officium.  It  should  be  here  rendered :  J 
have  inspected  thy  offices,  in  every  department 
of  the  church,  [as  established  at  the  time,  to 
which  this  charge  refers,]  bishops,  chorepiscopi, 
presbyters,  deacons  and  deaconesses,  in  all  their 
functions ;  and  am  perfectly  sensible  of  the  toil 
and  diligence,  you  severally  undertake  for  the 
good  of  souls  among  Jews  and  Gentiles,  and  for 
the  prosperity  of  my  Chuneh. 

b.  And  thy  patience.  Thy  continuance  in  perform- 
ing thy  duties  against  all  disappointments,  ob- 
stacles and  crosses,  and  in  bearing  thy  enemies 
with  meekness  of  heart.  fci 

e.  Thou  canst  not  bear  them,  which  are  evil.  This 
refers  to  the  strict  church-discipline  of  the 
first  christians,  in  requiring  experimental  reli- 
gion, pure  morals  and  christian  practice  of  all 
their  members,  in  which  they  have  never  after- 
wards been  equalled,  even  to  the  present  day. 

d.  Tried  them  which  say,  they  are  apostles.  About 
that  time  and  after  the  death  of  the  apostle,  the 
church  was  much  infested  by  false  apostles,  and 
teachers  of  heresy.  But  the  ministry  watched 
to  preserve  the  christian  doctrine  pure.  No 
doubt,  they  have  often  been  cried  down  in  con- 
sequence of  their  faithfulness  in  this  respect,  as 
uncharitable  and  severe  by  these  pretenders, 
and  their  deluded  adherents ;  but  they  followed 
the  example  of  their  Saviour,  and  here  obtained 
his  approbation. 

e.  Thou  hast  borner  and  hastlabouredfor  my  name's 
sake.  The  acts  of  the  apostles,  their  epistles  to 
the  churches,  and  the  accounts  of  the  apostolic 
fathers  are  a  comment  on  these  words.     It  is 

i 


66  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

impossible  to  read  them  and  not  to  be  filled 
with  reverence  for  the  ministry  of  those  days. 
Their  labours  for  the  good  of  souls,  their  pa- 
tience, sufferings  and  indefatigable  zeal  for  the* 
cause  of  their  Lord,  will  remain  a  standing  ex- 
ample to  the  end  of  time.  Thou  hast  not 
fainted  says  the  Lord,  till  towards  the  close  of 
this  period, 

2.  When  he  censures  them  thus:  Nevertheless  I  have 
somewhat  against  thee,  because  thou  hast  left  thy 

Jirst  love.  4*ure  love  to  God  and  men  is  the  soul 
of  Christianity,  the  distinguishing  characteristic 
of  all  true  disciples  of  Christ,  the  main  spring  to 
all  good  works,  and  an  indispensable  part  in  the 
character  of  a  useful  evangelic  pastor.  He  yet 
had  love,  but  it  now  began  to  be  mingled  with 
self-love,  and  worldly  interest;  where  at  first 
his  whole  body  and  soul  had  been  a  living  sacri- 
fice to  the  Lord  in  his  vineyard,  because  he  had 
loved  him  first,  and  called  him  to  that  great  and 
distinguished  honour,  of  being  a  servant  in  his 
church. 

3.  Jin  exhortation.  Remember  therefore  from  whence 
thou  art  fallen,  and  repent,  and  do  the  first  works. 
Only  recollect  how  bright  and  brilliant  your  star 
once  shone  in  the  knowledge  of  divine  things ; 
how  your  heart  was  warmed  with  the  love  of 
Jesus  in  the  preaching  of  the  gospel,  and  instruct- 
ing the  penitent  sinner;  how  all  your  actions 
spoke  faith,  zeal  and  charity ;  how  your  labours 
were  blessed  to  the  conversion  of  thousands  ;  and 
compare  it  with  your  present  state  of  mind  and 
usefulness  in  the  church.  Repent,  Oh  let  your 
mind  be  changed  to  what  it  was  at  first,  and  do 
the  first  works ! 


CHAPTER  II.  1—7.  67 

4.  Motives  to  repentance.  Or  else  Twill  come  unto 
thee  quickly,  and  will  remove  thy  candlestick  out  of 
his  place,  except  thou  repent; — But  this  thou  hast, 
that  thou  hatest  the  deeds  of  the  Nicolaitanes,  which 
I  also  hate.  The  Nicolaitanes  were  a  sort  of 
Gnostic  philosophers,  who  according  to  church 
history,  combined  sensual  enjoyments  with  the 
pure  doctrines  of  Christianity.  This  temptation 
seems  to  have  been  most  subtle  and  spacious; 
the  Lord  found  it  necessary  to  signify  hjs  entire 
abhorrence  of  their  deeds.  The  ministry  after 
St.  John's  days,  though  fallen,  were  not  yet  sunk 
so  deep,  as  to  adopt  such  principles ;  and  the 
Lord  told  them  so,  in  order  to  encourage  them  to 
repentance.  Yea,  to  excite  a  prompt  compliance, 
he  threatens  to  remove  their  candlestick  and 
bring  his  people  away  to  another  place ;  which 
also  was  afterwards  done.  For  the  light  of  chris- 
tian knowledge  has  since  been  almost  entirely  ex- 
tinguished in  all  those  places  in  the  East,  where 
the  first  churches  flourished. 

5.  Ji  glorious  promise, 

a.  A  word  to  excite  the  attention  of  all  christians. 
He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear,  what  the  Spirit 
saith  [in]  unto  the  churches.  Whoever  has  a  suf- 
ficient acquaintance  with  the  spirit  of  prophecy, 
and  a  cultivated  mind  to  discern  spiritual  mat» 
ters,  let  him  attend  to  what  is  here  said  by  the 
Lord,  in  the  churches  of  the  ministry  and 
their  spiritual  warfare  and  glorious  reward. 

b.  The  promise.  To  him  that  overcomethwilll  give 
to  eat  of  the  tree  of  life,  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the 
paradise  of  God.  It  is  selfconceit,  when  the  un- 
converted man  imagines  himself  belonging  to 
the  number  of  these  spiritual  combatants,  an(J 
presume  to  comfort  himself  with  these  promises. 


68  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

He  knows  nothing  of  this  warfare,  and  as  yet, 
is  himself  an  enemy  to  God.  Rom.  viii.  7. 
This  great  conflict  must  first  commence  within 
our  own  hearts,  before  we  can  rally  around  the 
banners  of  Christ,  for  the  defence  of  his  church. 
And  that  only  begins,  when  in  the  day  of  God's 
power,  the  sinner's  eyes  are  opened,  and  he 
turned  from  darkness  to  light,  and  from  the 
power  [rfc  k%%ql&s  armour]  of  Satan  unto  God, 
that  he  may  by  spiritual  arms  and  divine  as- 
sistance, combat  his  own  corruptions,  and  fight 
the  good  fight  of  faith  in  the  presence  of  the 
Lord.  Only  those  pastors  then,  truly  and  ex- 
perimentally acquainted  with  Christ,  can  take 
an  effectual  share  in  this  conflict  of  the  church, 
under  her  great  Captain.  And  all  those  who 
do,  and  endure  manfully  to  the  end,  overcoming 
the  enemies  of  Christ  in  their  desperate  at- 
tempts against  his  church  in  their  time,  shall 
eat  of  the  tree  of  life ;  of  which  the  tree  in 
Eden  was  only  the  type,  from  which  Adam  was 
prevented  to  eat  after  the  fall,  by  being  banished 
out  of  paradise.  It  was  customary  with  the 
ancient  Hebrews  and  many  Eastern  nations, 
to  term  every  thing  very  beautiful,  salutary  or 
glorious  a  tree  of  life;  but  here  it  seems  to  con- 
vey the  peculiar  promise  of  immortality,  in  a 
state  of  innocence  and  fruition  of  God,  of  which 
the  happiness  of  our  first  parents  is  only  a  figure. 
According  to  the  Zend  Avesta,  or  scriptures 
of  the  Persians,  the  tree  of  life  grows  in  the 
midst  of  the  fountain  of  immortality,  upon  the 
holy  mount,  right  in  the  centre  of  the  world. 
Here  is  the  mother  of  rivers,  from  whence  this 
heavenly  element  extends  itself,  pregnant  with 
germs  of  life  for  plants,  trees*  animals  and  men. 


CHAPTER  II.  1—7.  69 

over  all  the  nature  of  Ormuzd.    This  king  of 
all  trees,  the  tree  of  life,  is  nourished  by  the 
vital  parts  of  this  fountain,  and  its  sap  endows 
with  immortality,  and  produces  the  resurrection 
of  the   dead.      See   Herders    Erlauterungen. 
II.  P.  p.  102.    This  tree  of  life  is,  no  doubt,  a 
symbol  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  of  the  blessed  effects 
of  his  redemption.     John  vi.  53 — 55.    Who  en- 
dows his  people  with  immortality  and  eternal 
life  in  heaven. 
This  charge  next  to  its  general  use,  seems  particularly 
intended  for  the  first  evangelic  ministry  immediately  in, 
and  after  the  apostolic  age.     That  has  been  the  time,  ac- 
cording to  church  history,  when  their  first  lo>  e  had  much 
abated,  when  the  church  was  infested  by  false  apostles, 
the  Nicolaitanes  and  other  teachers  of  heresy,  of  which 
however  we  now  know  little  more,  than  barely  their  names. 
See  Mosheims  Eccl.  History. 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  SMYRNA. 

8.  And  unto  the  angel  of  the  church  in  Smyrna 
write ;  these  things  saith  the  first  and  the  last, 
which  was  dead,  and  is  alive ; 

9.  I  know  thy  works,  and  tribulation,  and  poverty, 
[but  thou  art  rich]  and  I  know  the  blasphemy  of 
them  which  say  they  are  Jews,  and  are  not,  but 
are  the  synagogue  of  Satan. 

10.  Fear  none  of  these  things  which  thou  shalt  suffer: 
behold,  the  devil  shall  cast  some  of  you  into  pri- 
son, that  ye  may  be  tried :  and  ye  shall  have  tri- 
bulation ten  days :  be  thou  faithful  unto  death, 
and  I  will  give  thee  a  crown  of  life. 

11.  He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear  what  the  spirit 
saith  unto  the  churches ;  he  that  overcometh  shall 
not  be  hurt  of  the  second  death. 

The  exhortation  in  the  former  charge  seems  to  have 
had  its  desired  effect  on  the  gospel  ministry  of  those  days, 
since  this  pastoral  letter  contains  all  praise,  comfort  and 
promise,  without  the  least  censure  or  blame.  They  had 
returned  again  to  their  first  love,  and  were  now  doing 
their  first  works  with  renewed  zeal,  for  the  glory  of  Christ 
and  his  church.  Such  a  revival  was  also  highly  neces- 
sary. The  Lord  wanted  a  host  of  Martyrs,  for  some  di- 
vine purposes  unknown  to  us,  and  therefore  permitted  the 
Roman  emperors  to  turn  their  whole  empire  into  a  fiery 
furnace  of  affliction,  for  all  who  adored  the  name  of  Christ; 
in  which  the  hottest  place  was  always  appointed  for  the 
pastors  of  the  church. 


CHAPTER  II.  8— 11.  71 

Verse  8.  Was  dead  and  is  alive.  He  first  died  for  us. 
and  it  is  therefore  no  more  than  reasonable  and  just,  we 
also  should  die  for  him  and  for  his  cause.  He  is  now  alive, 
by  his  own  power,  and  having  the  keys  of  hell  and  of  death. 
is  able  to  raise  us  to  glory.  He  is  sole  proprietor  of  our 
life  as  our  creator,  preserver,  and  since  he  has  given  him- 
self a  ransome  for  us,  when  we,  by  sin,  had  forfeited  all 
right  and  title  among  the  living ;  and  may  therefore 
demand  it  when,  and  in  what  manner  lie  may  judge  ex- 
pedient. 

Verse  9.  I  know  thy  works.  Inter  u$a,  oqaco,  ftxiiro), 
S-zxopati,  &iu%iu,  hoc  videtur  interresse,  quod  uiu>9  sit 
perspicio.  See  Pasor.  olfa  therefore  maybe  rendered: 
I  have  well  observed,  understood,  [Mark  iv.  12.]  or  minutely 
inspected  all  your  different  offices,  with  what  sort  of  per- 
sons they  are  filled,  and  how  they  are  administered. 

Tribulation,  Here  the  Lord  foretells  those  sanguinary 
and  barbarous  persecutions,  which  the  christians  suffered 
during  the  first  centuries  under  the  Roman  emperors. 
The  followers  of  Christ,  and  more  especially  the  minis- 
ters, suffered  all  kinds  of  punishments  and  tortures,  both 
capital  and  corrective,  to  the  amount  of  some  millions  of 
souls.  It  is  by  no  means  improbable,  that  the  Lord  may 
here  allude  to  ten  such  calamitous  times,  as  the  word 
y[*t(>x}  day,  often  signifies  time,  particularly  in  the  New 
Testament.  Math,  xxiii.  SO.  Luke  iv.  25.  Math.  ii.  1. 
vii.  22.  John  ix.  4.  Rom.  xiii.  12.  But  the  first  two 
under  Nero  and  Domitian  cannot  be  taken  into  this  ac- 
count, as  they  were  already  past. 

Poverty,  hit  thou  art  rich.  The  Pagan  magistracy  at 
that  time  throughout  the  whole  Roman  empire,  rapacious 
and  insatiable,  were  perpetually  gaping  after  the  confisca- 
tion of  property  in  order  to  enrich  themselves.  When 
the  multitude  craved  the  blood  of  the  christians,  they  rea- 
dily consented,  and  transferred  the  greatest  part  of  the 
forfeitures  to  their  own  pockets.    Where  the  father  of  a 


72  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

famijy  suffered  martyrdom,  or  became  a  public  confessor  s 
the  magistracy  stripped  the  whole  family  of  their  estate  5 
and  hence  the  extreme  poverty  and  indigence  of  the  mi- 
nisters. The  Lord  himself  comforts  them  here  in  their 
distresses,  by  reminding  and  assuring  them  a-new,  of 
their  great  reward  on  the  day  of  retribution.  Math, 
xix.  29.     Mark.  x.  29. 

Blasphemy  of  the  Jews.  The  Jews  persecuted  the  chris- 
tians with  great  hatred  and  malignity  from  the  time  of 
Christ's  death  to  their  total  defeat  under  Adrian.  Even 
after  they  had  lost  the  power  to  execute  their  cruel  pur- 
poses themselves,  they  turned  inveterate  and  public  accu- 
sers against  them,  so  long  as  they  could  obtain  a  hearing. 
In  Palestine  and  all  the  Roman  provinces,  they  seized  every 
occasion  to  load  them  with  injuries  and  reproach.  In  order 
to  stir  up  both  the  magistracy  and  people  to  their  destruc- 
tion, they  accused  them  of  being  enemies  to  the  Roman 
emperors,  and  state ;  the  same  as  the  Roman  Catholics 
have  lately  done  in  France  against  the  Protestants.  The 
Church  of  Christ  at  no  time  had  more  perfidious  and  bitter 
enemies,  than  the  Jews,  wherefore  the  Lord  here  calls 
them  a  synagogue  of  Satan ;  which  word  signifies,  an  ac- 
cuser in  judgment.  They  were  false  Jews,  and  instru- 
ments of  Satan.     Rom.  ii.  28. 

Verse  10.  Fear  none  of  those  things.  This  comfort  and 
assurance,  no  doubt,  was  very  necessary.  It  is  likely  that 
many  of  the  ministry  were  much  discouraged  by  the  vio- 
lent opposition  of  the  Jews,  and  the  bloody  persecution  of 
the  Heathens,  and  some  may  have  entertained  serious 
thoughts  of  ceasing  to  preach.  They  were  every  moment  in 
danger  of  their  lives,  since  the  Heathens  and  Jews  sought 
them  in  particular,  and  tried  every  manner  of  torture  to 
induce  them  to  apostatize.  Their  flesh  had  no  rest,  but 
was  troubled  on  every  side ;  without  were  fightings  and 
death,  within  were  fears,  2.  Cor.  vii.  5.  The  Lord 
therefore  answers  beforehand  to  their  awful  state  of  mind: 


CHAPTER  II.  8—11.  rs 

fear  none  of  those  things  which  thou  shalt  suffer,  as  though 
you  might  not  he  ahle  to  endure  these  pains,  and  forced  to 
apostacy,  hurt  my  cause,  and  lose  your  souls  at  last. 
Take  courage,  and  go  on  to  perform  the  duties  of  your 
oflices  in  every  department,  I  will  never  forsake  you.  Be 
christians,  and  bishops  of  souls  in  sincerity ;  all  your  suf- 
ferings will  work  together  for  your  good.  You  will  be 
sifted  like  grain,  and  tried  like  gold  in  a  furnace,  that  you 
may  be  qualified  for  my  purposes. 

Crown  of  life.  The  Revelation  takes  notice  of  two  sorts 
of  crowns,  a  regal  or  imperial  crown,  and  a  crown  of  vic- 
tory ;  this  last  is  to  be  understood  in  this  place.  It  was 
customary  among  the  ancients,  to  crown  a  hero  after  a 
victorious  campaign.  This  crown  was  not  only  a  badge 
of  high  honour,  it  also  conferred  a  dignity  and  certain  pri- 
vileges, which  the  conqueror  enjoyed  in  preference  to  his 
fellow  citizens.  But  these  were  only  perishable  crowns, 
and  earthly  privileges — the  Lord  Jesus  promises  a  crown 
of  life,  with  the  privilege  of  immortality  in  his  everlasting 
kingdom.  And  this  peculiar  felicity  is  here  offered  the 
gospel  ministry,!  as  the  reward  of  being  faithful  unto  death. 
Their  prerogatives  then,  are  not  merely  citizenship  in 
heaven;  but  titles  to  large  possessions,  peculiar  favour 
and  special  employments  in  the  most  important  concerns 
of  Christ's  kingdom. 

-  Verse  ]  1.  Second  death.  The  first  death  is  the  separation 
of  body  and  soul,  whereby  we  are  deprived  of  our  first  life; 
the  second  death  is  the  casting  of  body  and  soul  into  ever- 
lasting perdition,  whereby  we  are  deprived  of  the  second 
and  eternal  life.  This  state  of  eternal  punishment  is 
therefore  called  the  second  death.  See  chapter  xx.  14. 
xxi.  8. 

This  pastoral  charge  is  given  to  the  gospel  ministry 
during  the  time  of  persecution  by  public  authority,  in  which 
Jews  and  Gentiles  were  united,  for  the  total  destruction  of 
the  Church  of  Christ.    They  have  withstood  that  terrible 


74  REVELATION  OF  ST,  JOHN. 

storm,  with  a  few  exceptions,  and  now  enjoy  the  promise 
before  the  throne  of  the  Lamb.  Great  has  been  their  sa- 
crifice, much  greater  is  their  reward  now  in  heaven. 
Consider,  0  ye  pastors  of  Christ's  flock !  that  a  similar 
time  of  such  peril  and  temptation  is  now  again  near  at 
hand,  and  perhaps  nearer  than  we  all  imagine.  How  far 
will  our  constancy  and  faithfulness  go  ?  What  sacrifices 
shall  we  be  prepared  to  make  ?  What  return  shall  the 
Lord  receive  from  us,  for  the  travail  of  his  soul  ?  May  the 
Lord  enable  us  to  light  our  lamps,  and  provide  oil  in  time, 
ere  it  be  too  late  !  For  the  most  violent  and  trying  crisis  of 
that  persecution,  Rev.  xiii.  11 — 18.  xiv.  13,  is  not  past, 
and  the  beast  from  the  abyss  is  yet  to  rise,  whose  element 
is  now  maturing  throughout  the  civilized  world. 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  PERGAMOS. 

12.  And  to  the  angel  of  the  church  in  Pergainos  write ; 
these  things  saith  he  which  hath  the  sharp  sword 
with  two  edges. 

13.  I  know  thy  works,  and  where  thou  dwellest,  even 
where  Satan's  seat  is :  and  thou  holdest  fast  my 
name,  and  hast  not  denied  my  faith,  even  in 
those  days,  wherein  Antipas  was  my  faithful 
martyr,  who  was  slain  among  you,  where  Satan 
dwelleth. 

14.  But  I  have  a  few  things  against  thee,  hecause 
thou  hast  there  them  that  hold  the  doctrine  of 
Balaam,  who  taught  Balak  to  cast  a  stumhling 
Mock  before  the  children  of  Israel,  to  eat  things 
sacrificed  unto  Idols,  and  to  commit  fornication. 

15.  So  hast  thou  also  them  that  hold  the  doctrine  of 
the  Nicolaitanes,  which  thing  I  hate. 

16.  Repent,*  or  else  I  will  come  unto  thee  quickly, 
and  will  fight  against  them  with  the  sword  of  my 
mouth. 

17.  He  that  hath  an  car,  let  him  hear  what  the  Spirit 
saith  unto  [at,  in]  the  churches;  to  him  that 
overcomcth  will  I  give  to  eat  of  the  hidden  manna, 
and  will  give  him  a  white  stone,  and  in  the  stone 
a  new  name  written,  which  no  man  knoweth 
saving  he  that  feceiveth  it. 

Here  is  an  other  proof,  why  these  addresses  should  be 
considered  in  the  light  of  pastoral  charges.    The  Lord 


76  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

appears  at  the  head  of  his  church,  in  his  episcopal  cha- 
racter, and  pronounceth  public  excommunication  against 
the  corrupters  of  his  institution,  in  the  face  of  all.  He 
protests  at  Ephesus,  against  the  false  Apostles ;  at  Smyrna, 
against  the  false  Jews;  and  here  at  Pergamos  against 
those,  who  confused  Christianity  by  blending  it  with 
Paganism;  and  these  together  with  the  Nicolaitancs,  are 
hereby  solemnly  excluded  from  the  sheepfold  of  Christ. 
Against  all  these  heretics  and  their  principles,  the  minis- 
ters of  those  times  seem  to  have  been  too  lenitive  and  sur- 
rendered privileges,  derogatory  to  the  prosperity  and  ma- 
jesty of  the  Church ;  for  which,  the  Lord  here  censures 
them,  and  corrects  their  faults. 

Verse  12.  Ji  sharp  sword  with  two  edges.  See  chap.  i.  16. 

Verse  13.  Thou  dwellest,  where  Satan's  seat  is.  @£oW 
ought  not  to  be  translated  seat,  but  throne.  Seat  is  only  a 
place  of  rest  and  abode;  but  throne  implies  government, 
regal  authority,  the  centre  of  empire  ;  and  this  last  signi- 
fication is  certainly  the  meaning  here.  Such  a  residence 
and  throne  of  Satan  has  been  Paganism,  and  the  city  of 
Rome  in  the  Roman  empire,  in  which  Satan  made  the 
emperors  his  magistracy,  and  the  Pagan  priests  his  legal 
instruments  of  persecution  against  the  religion  of  Christ, 
as  the  9th,  and  10th  verses  clearly  affirm.  For  though  «11 
sanguinary  persecutions  ceased,  after  the  conversion  of 
the  emperor  Constantine  to  Christianity;  yet  Satan's 
kingdom  fell  into  many  paroxysms  of  rage  and  fury  in  the 
provinces,  where  even  after  this  happy  change  the 
Heathens  retained  their  temples  and  religious  rites  for  se- 
veral centuries.  But  also  in  the  very  heart  of  the  empire 
Satan  held  his  throne  for  a  considerable  time,  where  the 
Roman  senate,  and  many  of  the  magistrates,  philoso- 
phers, rhetoricians,  military  leaders,  and  persons  of  emi- 
nence and  distinction,  remained  attached  to  the  service  of 
the  Pagan  deities.  But  the  words  of  the  Lord  convey  an 
other  idea  on  this  subject,  which  it  imported  the  church 


CHAPTER  II.  12— A7.  77 

very  much  to  know.  He  tells  them,  that  Paganism  in  the 
Roman  empire  is  the  throne  and  centrepoint,  the  visible 
residence  of  Satan's  kingdom  in  this  world,  where  his  power 
and  influence  was  of  the  first  importance.  Thus  he  in- 
forms them  of  their  danger  and  peril,  and  what  momentous 
effects  their  constancy  and  faithfulness  would  have,  towards 
the  glory  of  Christ's  Church,  and  the  destruction  of  the 
power  of  Satan  on  earth. 

But  also  Pergamos  was  such  a  little  throne  of  Satan's, 
wholly  given  to  idolatry,  and  full  of  images,  of  Pagan  dei- 
ties, priests,  and  worshippers  in  the  temples  of  iEsculapius 
and  Diana.  In  this  city,  many  Christians  praised  God  by 
martyrdom. 

Thou  holdestfast  my  name,  and  hast  not  denied  my  faith. 
This  praise  of  their  constancy  and  faithfulness  in  such  a 
place,  and  on  the  lips  of  the  Lord,  makes  their  virtue  in 
our  estimation  of  high  worth  and  excellence.  However, 
it  does  not  appear  to  me,  as  if  the  Lord  by  these  words, 
alluded  only  to  the  struggles  of  Paganism  against  Chris- 
tianity ;  his  expressions  indicate  a  time,  in  which  the  pu- 
rity of  the  christian  doctrine  was  in  great  danger  of  be- 
ing perverted,  and  particula?*ly  his  name  and  faith.  His 
name  denotes  the  doctrine  concerning  his  person  and  office, 
as  the  Son  of  God,  and  the  Redeemer  of  the  world.  This 
they  were  very  much  in  danger  to  deny,  during  the  rage  of 
Arianism,  in  which  the  orthodox  Christians  underwent  se- 
vere trials  and  sufferings  on  account  of  their  confession; 
especially  in  Africa,  where  the  name  of  Christ,  as  being 
equal  with  the  Father,  and  considered  the  Redeemer  of 
mankind,  had  many  martyrs.  The  faith  of  Christ  here 
signifies  his  religion,  the  doctrine  generally  which  he 
taught.  To  deny  the  religion  of  Christ,  the  gospel  minis- 
try also  were  in  the  greatest  temptation  during  the  reign 
of  Julian  the  apostate,  who  reduced  the  Church  to  the 
brink  of  destruction  by  art  and  stratagem,  which  he  car- 
ried on  especially  against  the  ministers  with  the  utmost 


78  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN 

bitterness,  and  at  the  same  time,  with  the  most  consummate 
dexterity. 

Verse  14.  But  I  have  a  few  things  against  thee.  You 
suffer  those  without  public  reproof,  which  act  the  part  of 
Balaam  and  Balak  over  again.  He  taught  the  Moabites 
an  artifice,  to  unite  Paganism  with  the  worship  of  the  true 
God,  to  please  Balak  against  his  better  knowledge.  And 
these  endeavour  from  politic  views  to  confound  Heathenr 
ism  with  the  Christian  worship,  in  order  to  make  Chris- 
tianity palatable  to  the  great  ones  of  this  world.  They 
introduce  Pagan  rites  and  ceremonies  under  a  Christian 
explanation,  from  motives  of  self-interest  and  a  desire  of 
power  and  dignity.  The  sons  of  Israel  polluted  themselves 
in  the  sight  of  God,  by  being  caught  in  such  stratagems, 
and  what  else  can  you  expect  now  ?  It  would  however  ap- 
pear from  comparing  this  text  with  the  historical  fact  al- 
luded to,  Numbers  xxxi.  16.  that  this  attempt  had  been  pro- 
jected by  some  few7  lifeless  Christian  doctors,  and  prose- 
cuted by  the  great  ones  among  the  Pagans,  when  the  gos- 
pel ministry,  as  the  proper  guardians  of  the  church,  gave 
way  and  too  much  connived  at  the  corruptions,  till  it  was  too 
late.  But  here  is  something,  wherein  they  are  still  more 
culpable. 

Verse  15.  So  hast  thou  also  in  your  ministerial  body 
them,  that  hold  the  doctrine  of  the  Nicolaitanes.  This 
sect  was  founded  in  the  second  century  by  one  Nicolaus, 
upon  the  principles  of  the  Gnostics.  They  seem  not  to  be 
the  same  with  those  mentioned  in  the  charge  to  the  Angel 
at  Ephesus,  or  they  were  at  least  since  that  time  reformed 
on  a  new  principle.  We  know7  little  of  their  doctrine  or 
practice  now;  but  they  must  have  been  licentious,  since 
our  blessed  Lord  mentions  them  with  abhorrence. 

Verse  16.  Repent.  Change  your  mind,  reform  your  heart 
and  practice,  for  you  have  hitherto  been  guilty  of  two 
great  faults.  You  have  been  indifferent  to  preserve  the 
Christian  doctrine  and  worship  in  its  pristine  purity,  as  it 


CHAPTER  II.  12—17  79 

was  delivered  unto  you  by  your  predecessors,  in  regard  to 
those  who  follow  the  artful  scheme  of  Balaam;  and  you 
have  not  ex-communicated  all  such  from  the  ministry  and 
body  of  the  Church,  who  hold  the  doctrine  of  the  Nicolai- 
tanes.  Rouse  therefore,  amend  your  ways,  and  attend  to 
your  duty  with  more  diligence  and  faithfulness;  or  I  will 
come  quickly  and  purify  you,  by  bringing  judgment  on 
those  who  make  my  religion  an  engine  of  state,  and  cor- 
rupt my  doctrine  for  purposes  of  self-aggrandizement  and 
worldly  interest. 

Verse  17.  To  him  thai  overcometh  will  I  give.  Our 
blessed  Lord  considers  the  gospel  ministry  in  these 
charges  as  a  separate  body,  particularly  consecrated  to 
himself  and  appropriated  to  his  use  and  purposes.  They 
are  therefore  to  be  estimated  in  a  double  point  of  view. 
As  Christians  and  members  of  the  Church  of  Christ, 
they  have  a  common  interest  in  all  the  promises  of  God  to 
his  people ;  and  as  ministers  of  the  gospel,  they  are  to  make 
peculiar  sacrifices,  for  which  they  are  promised  a  special 
reward,  of  which  but  little  had  been  said  in  other  parts  of  the 
New  Testament  as  yet:  the  great  Shepherd  of  souls,  having 
allotted  this  place  in  his  Apocalypse,  more  immediately  to 
treat  of  their  peculiar  duties  at  the  different  periods  of  his 
Church,  as  also  of  the  special  recompence,  which  faithful 
and  valiant  combatants  arc  to  receive  from  his  hands. 
The  enemies  with  whom  they  were  to  enter  the  conflict  at 
this  period,  were  the  followers  of  the  artful  schemes  and 
stratagems  of  Balaam  and  Balak,  and  the  adherents  to 
the  doctrine  and  vain  philosophy  of  the  Nicolaitanes.  This 
temptation  was  a  general  one  to  the  whole  body  of  the  gos- 
pel ministry — they  had  all  to  engage  in  this  conflict.  For 
only  times  of  general  temptation  and  peril,  are  here  taken 
notice  of.  And  now  behold  the  goodness  of  their  great 
Captain,  in  the  promised  reward  to  him  that  overcometh. 
Though  they  fell,  if  they  only  rose  again ;  though  they 
received  many  a  wound,  if  only  they  overcame  at  last — 


SO  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

their  recompense  is  an  invaluable  treasure,  consisting  in 
the  following  particulars. 

Hidden  manna.  This  denotes  spiritual  manna,  not 
such  as  the  children  of  Israel  eat  in  the  wilderness,  which 
they  could  see;  this  is  hid  from  the  sight  of  man,  and  pre- 
served for  particular  persons,  who  deny  all  worldly  pre- 
ferments and  sensual  pleasure,  from  a  pure  love  to  Christ 
and  for  his  sake.  It  is  the  doctrine  and  spirit  of  Christ, 
which  nourishes  the  soul  unto  eternal  life ;  but  this  pro- 
mise here  refers  to  a  more  exalted  state  of  happiness  in  the 
enjoyment  of  Christ,  yet  future  and  hidden  in  the  world 
to  come.     Hebrew  ix.  3.  xiii.  9,  10. 

A  white  stone.  It  was  customary  with  the  ancients  to 
vote  by  white  or  coloured  stones  in  criminal  prosecutions, 
in  the  Olympic  games,  and  in  elections  to  offices  of  high 
honour  and  profit.  The  white  stone  always  expressed  the 
affirmative,  in  favour  of  the  criminal,  the  victor,  or  candi- 
date on  these  occasions.  He  who  gained  the  victory  in 
the  Olympic  games  received  an  inscription  on  his  white 
stone,  by  which  he  was  entitled  to  certain  privileges  of  ho- 
nour, office  or  emolument,  in  preference  to  others  of  his 
fellow  citizens.  The  promise  of  the  Lord  under  this  figure, 
therefore  denotes  a  full  absolution  on  the  day  of  judg- 
ment, and  a  legal  right  to  peculiar  privileges  in  heaven. 
But  this  is  not  all  yet. 

A  new  name.  This  cannot  mean  the  common  title  of 
« 'children  of  God,9''',  which  all  receive  in  the  new  birth,  who 
truly  experience  that  great  change  of  heart  and  mind. 
Neither  does  it  refer  to  any  of  those  privileges,  which  be- 
lievers enjoy  in  this  world  ;  for  the  word  Swgw,  I  will 
give,  in  the  original  is  the  future  tense,  and  the  whole  pro- 
mise refers  to  the  future  world.  "Ovopa,  name,  here  sig- 
nifies office,  station,  and  dignity,  to  which  they  shall  be  en- 
titled in  the  kingdom  of  Christ.  This  sense  of  the  word" 
**ivov*s  is  not  new.  In  the  opinion  of  the  Orientals  every 
spirit,  angel,  soul  or  demon  has  a  name  in  the  invisible 


CHAPTER  II.  12—17.  &* 

world,  expressive  of  his  office  or  employment*  Hence 
they  speak  of  many  names  in  heaven  and  the  inferior  re<= 
gions,  as  so  many  offices  held  by  the  inhabitants  there  $ 
where  all  ♦  ngaged  in  the  same  object,  are  of  the  same 
name.  The  word  *octvQv\  new,  denotes  excellence,  and 
expresses  the  eminence  of  their  station.  &ni\  of  great  dis- 
tinction it  will  be  indeed :  for  the  Lord  even  saith,  that  no 
man  knoweth  that  state  of  glory,  saving  he  that  receivethiti 
The  meaning  of  these  words  may  be,  thattheir  state  of  glory, 
and  office  in  the  future  world  is  inconceivable  now  ;  or  the 
sense  may  be,  that  it  is  of  such  a  nature  and  distinction, 
as  not  to  be  known  to  others  even  in  the  regjons  of  bliss. 
In  this  charge  the  great  Shepherd  and  Bishop  of  souls 
seems  to  have  his  eye  fixed  on  that  change  of  the  Chris- 
tian doctrine  and  mode  of  worship,  brought  about  by  the 
preposterous  endeavours  of  a  lifeless  clergy,  since  the  be« 
ginning  of  the  fourth  century.  It  began  by  pious  frauds) 
under  the  auspicious  protection  of  Constantine,  the  first 
Christian  emperor,  when  numbers  of  impostors  began  to 
practise  the  impositions  of  the  Heathen  priest,  upon  the  ig* 
norant  and  credulous  multitude,  by  spreading  rumours  of 
prodigies,  selling  fictitious  relics,  and  deceiving  the  eyes 
of  the  populace  with  ludicrous  combats  with  evil  spirits  or 
genii,  in  order  to  allure  the  Pagans.  Yea  they  soon  went 
so  far,  as  to  adopt  Pagan  rites  and  ceremonies  into  the 
Christian  worship,  to  facilitate  the  conversion  of  the  Hea- 
then, and  gain  the  esteem  of  the  great,  rich,  and  powerful, 
who  still  held  their  offices,  and  followed  the  worship  of 
Idols,  in  every  part  of  the  empire.  hTis  ostentatious  wor- 
ship laid  the  foundation  to  the  following  reign  of  supersti- 
tion and  spiritual  tyranny  in  Christendom,  which  is  still 
kept  up  and  defended,  both  in  the  Roman  Catholic  and 
Greek  churches  to  this  day.  By  this  deplorable  change, 
the  Christian  religion  was  wounded  in  its  very  essence, 
and  the  worship  of  God  eclipsed  in  all  its  lustre.  All  this, 
those  desirous  of  convincing  themselves  may  easily  see,  by 
comparing  the  present  mode  of  worship  in  those  churches. 


82  REVELATION  OP  ST.  JOHN. 

« 

with  the  one  instituted  in  the  New  Testament.    See  Mo*- 
heim's  Eccl.  Hist.  C.  W.  F.Walch.  Gibbon. 

The  Lord  also  soon  began  to  fight  againstthese  churches, 
by  the  invasions  of  the  German  and  other  nations  into  the 
western-part  of  the  Roman  empire  :  the  Vandals  in  Africa, 
and  the  Mahometan  and  Turkish  wars  against  the  Greek 
and  Latin  churches  for  many  centuries.  And  by  these 
calamities  the  candlestick  of  the  Greek  church,  was  soon 
almost  totally  removed  out  of  its  place;  and  the  final 
doom  of  the  Roman  Jezebel  is  yet  to  come. 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  THYATIRA. 

18.  And  unto  the  angel  of  the  church  in  Thyatira 
write^  these  things  saith  the  Son  of  God,  who 
hath  his  eyes  like  unto  a  flame  of  fire,  and  his  feejfc 
are  like  fine  hrass ; 

19.  I  know  thy  works,  and  charity,  and  service,  and 
faith,  and  thy  patience,  and  thy  works  5  and  the 
last  to  be  more  than  the  first. 

20.  Notwithstanding  I  have  a  few  things  against 
thee,  because  thou  sufferest  that  woman  Jezebel, 
which  calleth  herself  a  prophetess,  to  teach  and 
to  seduce  my  servants  to  commit  fornication,  and 
to  eat  things  sacrificed  unto  Idols. 

21.  And  I  gave  her  space  to  repent  for  her  fornica* 
tion ;  and  she  repented  not. 

92.  Behold  I  will  cast  her  into  a  bed,  and  them  thafr 
commit  adultery  with  her  into  great  tribulation, 
except  they  repent  of  their  deeds. 

23.  And  I  will  kill  her  children  with  death;  and  all 
the  Churches  shall  know  that  I  am  he,  which 
searcheth  the  reins  and  hearts :  and  I  will  give 
unto  every  one  of  you  according  to  your  works. 

24.  But  unto  you  I  say,  and  unto  the  rest  in  Thyatira, 
[as  many  as  have  not  this  doctrine,  and  which 
have  not  known  the  depths  o  Satan,  as  they 
speak,]  I  will  put  upon  you  none  other  burden; 

25.  But  that  which  ye  have  already  hold  fast  till  I 
come. 


84  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

26.  And  he  that  overcometh,  and  keepeth  my  works 
unto  the  end,  to  him  will  I  give  power  over  the 
nations : 

27.  And  he  shall  rule  them  with  a  rod  of  iron,  as  the 
vessels  of  a  potter  shall  they  he  broken  to  shivers j 
even  as  I  received  of  my  father. 

28.  And  I  will  give  him  the  morning  star. 

29.  He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  Mm  hear  what  the  spirit 
saith  unto  the  Churches. 

Verse  1 8.  These  things  saith  the  Son  of  God.  Born  of 
the  father  from  all  eternity ;  and  according  to  his  humaa 
nature,  a  creation  in  the  womb  of  the  virgin,  merely  by 
the  almighty  energy  of  the  Holy  Ghost — whom  you  know 
and  whose  authority  you  acknowledge.  His  eyes  full  of 
wrath,  sparkle  with  a  divine  lustre  like  two  flames  of  fire, 
because  of  the  abominations  which  he  sees  arising  in  his 
Church.  His  feet  like  the  most  pure  and  refined  metal,  as 
burning  in  a  furnace,  will  mark  nations  and  empires  with 
glowing  coals  as  he  passes  forth.     Habak.  iii.  5. 

Verse  19.  /  know  thtj  works.  I  have  inspected  all  your 
different  offices,  the  persons  who  fill  them,  and  their  man- 
ner of  administration,  and  will  now  tell  you  the  sentiments 
of  my  heart.     See  chap.  ii.  9. 

Charity.  The  original  dycLnrviv,  signifies  both  love  and 
charity,  as  the  one  is  the  tree,  and  the  other  the  fruit. 
The  Lord  means  to  say :  I  approve  of  the  love  to  God  and 
men,  which  fills  thy  heart  and  is  the  chief  motive  of  thy 
actions.  Such  a  disposition  will  always  disclose  itself  by 
charitable  actions,  in  which  the  first  Christians  particular- 
ly abounded.  Every  congregation  had  its  deacons,  and 
many  also  their  deaconesses,  whose  offices  were  to  admi- 
nister the  gifts  and  oblations  to  the  poor  and  needy ;  and 
these  appointments  have  been  well  supplied  for  many  cen- 
turies. But  not  only  the  deacons  believed  it  incumbent  on 
themselves  to  search  for  the  poor  and  sick,  that  might  be 
in  wantj  also  the  ministry  considered  it  their  duty,  under 


CHAPTER  11.48— 29.  85 

whose  directions  the  deacons  officiated.    They  here  re- 
ceive the  Lord's  approbation. 

Service.  fiaKovloiv,  office  of  the  gospel  ministry.  Thus 
I  translate  this  word  here,  though  it  may  signify  all  the 
different  offices  in  the  Church.  The  word  charity  seems  to 
comprise  those  servants  of  the  Church,  whose  offices  con- 
sisted in  administering  to  the  bodily  wants  of  the  poor, 
the  sick,  the  orphans,  the  widows,  &c.  and  service,  the  min- 
istry of  the  Word,  whose  business  it  was  variously  to  in- 
struct the  people,  and  supply  the  spiritual  wants  of  their 
souls.  In  this  sense,  even  the  apostles  are  called  dea- 
cons, 2  Cor.  vi.  4.  Eph.  iii.  7.  Coloss.  i.  23 ;  and  their 
office  a  deaconship. 

Thy  faith,  and  thy  patience.  The  word  ifUtis,  faith, 
ought  to  have  been  translated  here,  faithfulness,  integrity, 
in  the  performance  of  the  duties  appertaining  to  the  dif- 
ferent offices ;  and  uVojwof  jj,  patience,  denotes  the  continued 
resolution  to  oppose  the  attacks  of  the  enemies  of  souls, 
and  to  stay  their  progress  even  under  many  sufferings. 

And  thy  works;  and  the  last  to  he  more  than  the  first. 
As  these  words  stand,  the  expression,  '«  and  thy  works, " 
would  be  only  a  needless  repetition  of  the  first  sentence  in 
this  verse.  But  the  whole  translation  is  faulty,  and  the 
semicolon  placed  amiss.  See  the  note  on  the  word  t^yov, 
verse  2.  jmc/  to.  if>yu  $ov,  not}  tu  is%a.rcc  irXuovx  too* 
irgcoTM,  and  your  last  offices,  which  are  more,  than  the  first. 
At  the  time,  to  which  this  charge  alludes,  the  government 
of  the  Church  had  already  undergone  a  great  change, 
since  the  time  of  Christ  and  his  apostles.  Constantine  the 
great,  had  modelled  its  ancient  form  in  many  respects  ac-< 
cording  to  the  constitution  of  thfe  Roman  empire,  which  ne- 
cessarily introduced,  among  the  different  orders  of  the  min- 
istry, many  new  degrees  of  rank  and  eminence.  Some 
also  were  introduced  from  pride,  and  others  from  neces- 
sity, as  the  Church  extended  her  banners,  and  the  congre- 
gations grew  more  numerous  and  opulent.    They  now  had 


$&  REVELATIONS  ST.  JOHN. 

patriarchs,  exarchs,  metropolitans,  archbishops,  bishops, 
&c.  and  the  Church  at  Constantinople  had  no  less  than  one- 
hundred  deacons.  All  this  I  have  observed  says  the  Lord, 
and  inspected  their  administrations  : 

Verse  20.  But  I  have  against  thee,  that  thou  snfferest  that 
woman  Jezebel.  There  certainly  was  no  Jezebel  at  Thy- 
atira,  as  some  ancient  expositors,  supposed  from  this  pas- 
sage. This  is  a  figurative  expression,  by  which  the  Lord  al- 
ludes to  a  woman  of  far  more  importance.  Jezebel  was 
the  wife  of  Ahab,  1  Kings  xvi.  She  established  the  idola- 
trous worship  of  Baal,  in  the  very  heart  of  the  Church  of 
the  Old  Testament,  and  killed  the  prophets  of  Jehovah  in 
such  numbers,  that  Elijah  laments,  he  was  only  remaining. 
Jezebel  assumed  and  exercised  the  highest  civil  and  ecclesi- 
astic authority,  contrary  to  the  custom  and  the  express  laws 
of  the  state,  by  a  criminal  negligence  and  condescension  of 
tier  husband,  the  king.  And  can  the  antitype  and  thing  sig- 
nified be  of  less  importance  than  its  shadow  ?  Let  us  note 
her  actions  and  the  different  traits  of  her  character,  by 
which  she  stands  distinguished,  and  then  see,  who  this 
Jezebel  is. 

1.  Jezebel  was  the  wife  of  Ahab,  a  stranger  at  first,  and 
daughter  to  the  king  at  Sidon.  She  no  doubt  had  once 
forsaken  her  idolatrous  worship,  and  embraced  the  reli- 
gion of  the  people  of  God ;  since  the  laws  of  the  Jewish 
state  did  not  admit,  to  marry  strange  and  idolatrous  wo- 
men. 

2.  She  returned  again  to  her  former  worship  of  Baal, 
and  grasping  the  supreme  power  of  Church  and  state,  in 
a  criminal  manner,  persecuted  the  worshippers  of  Jehovah, 
and  killed  his  prophets.      9 

3.  To  this  the  Lord  adds ;  she  calleth  herself  a  pro- 
phetess and  teaches  doctrines^  by  which  she  seduces  the 
servants  of  Christ — a.  To  commit  fornication — b.  To  eat 
things  sacrificed  unto  Idols. 


CHAPTER  II.  18— €9.  87 

4.  She  committed  fornication  herself,  and  others  adul- 
tery with  her. 

"We  all  know,  that  it  is  customary  in  prophetic  and  figu- 
rative language,  to  represent  a  Church  by  the  emblem  of 
a  woman.  Thus  the  Church  of  God  is  represented  as  a 
chaste  woman,  and  idolatrous  Churches  by  prostitutes,  in 
numerous  places  of  scripture.  Isaiah  xiv.  6.  Jer.  iii.  1. 
Ezekiel  xxiii.2.  xvi.  41.  Hos.  ii.  2.  Rev.  xii.  1.  xix.  7. 
xxi.  9.  xvii.  3,  4.  This  Jezebel  therefore,  must  signify 
a  certain  separate  religious  society  in  Christendom,  where- 
soever it  exists,  which  bears  the  character  above  described, 
not  only  in  farfetched  similarities,  but  in  an  obvious  and 
striking  manner,  and  all  united  in  that  one  body  of  people,. 

According  to  the  series  of  prophetic  views  in  these 
charges,  we  ought  not  look  for  this  Jezebel  before  the 
commencement  of  the  eighth  century.    Because  the  pre- 
ceding charges  take  up  that  time  in  the  following  order : 
I.  The  apostolic  age,  and  falling  from  first  love- 
to  104. 
II.  The  period  of  the  martyrs  and  persecution — 
••to  3£4. 

.  III.  The  period  of  confounding  Paganism  with  Chris- 
tians— to  700. 
IV.  The  period  of  Jezebel's  corruptions. 

This  then  is  the  period  of  time,  in  which  we  must  search 
the  history  of  the  Church  for  this  Jezebel.  And  I  would 
ask  the  accurate  historian,  what  power,  or  religious  society 
in  all  Christendom  could  the  Lord  have  intended  in  this 
place,  which  would  fully  answer  the  above  character,  ex* 
cept  the  see  of  Rome  ? 

I  am  even  sorry  to  find  so  striking  a  resemblance  ber 
tween  this  Jezebel  and  a  reverend  bishop  of  a  Christian 
society,  whom  otherwise  I  would  desire  to  respect.  But 
to  sacrifice  truth  and  duty  to  an  ill  timed  charity,  would 
only  subject  us  to  the  same  censure  with  the  angel  at  Thy- 
attra  $  whose  great  fault  consisted  in  being  too  indifferent 


*8  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHlSf . 

to  defend  the  truth  in  Jesus  against  error,  and  not  bearing 
his  testimony  sufficiently  loud  and  pointed  against  this 
woman,  as  the  duties  of  his  station  required.  He  ought 
to  have  protested  with  a  becoming  zeal  against  every  cor- 
ruption of  the  religion  of  his  Lord,  without  respect  to  per- 
sons, or  to  his  own  fame.  The  ignorant  and  deluded 
would  probably  have  called  him  an  uncharitable,  restless 
and  intolerant  man :  but  what  are  all  the  accusations  of 
an  ungrateful  world  in  matters  of  conscience.  We  have 
reason  to  fear,  that  the  indifference  of  the  present  pro- 
testant  Churches,  concerning  Popery  and  its  corruptions, 
may  afford  them  the  praise  of  the  world,  but  not  of  God. 
Many  seem  even  ignorant  of  the  depths  of  Satan,  on 
which  its  foundation  is  laid.  And  we  have  all  fallen  short 
in  this  respect  of  the  more  glorious  example  of  our  first 
reformers. 

But  before  I  go  a  step  farther,  I  will  make  a  necessary 
distinction,  which  truth  and  charity  require.  By  this  wo- 
man Jezebel  I  do  not  understand  the  Roman  Catholic  com- 
munity— not  the  private  members  of  that  Church,  or  the 
different  congregations  to  which  they  belong,  but  the  Pa- 
pal see  at  Rome :  and  that  only  so  far,  and  since  it  pretends 
to  be  an  infallible  authority,  and  the  supreme  head  of  the 
Church  of  Christ  on  earth,  as  a  right  derived  from  heaven. 
Otherwise  the  Roman  church  is  respectable,  though  cor- 
rupted in  doctrine  and  practice,  far  more  than  any  of  th« 
Protestant  churches;  yet  the  Lord  has  many  of  his  children 
and  faithful  witnesses  in  it,  whom  he  will  call  from  thence 
before  the  destruction  of  Jezebel.     Rev.  xviii.  4. 

During  the  first  century  the  bishop  of  Rome  was  consi- 
dered inferior  in  point  of  eminence  to  the  bishop  at  Jerusa- 
lem, that  being  the  Mother-Church,  and  the  apostolic  pat- 
tern for  imitation.  And  during  the  first  three  centuries 
he  was  no  more  than  another  bishop;  except  an  assumed 
pre-eminence  of  order,  on  account  of  the  respectability  of 
the  Church  at  Rome  among  the  western  churches.  He  was 


CHAPTER  It.  18—29.  8$ 

.exalted  to  the  dignity  of  patriarch,  at  the  same  time,  With 
the  hishops  of  Antioch,  and  of  Alexandria,  by  the  council 
of  Nice,  A.  D.  325,  to  which  number,  the  council  at  Con- 
stantinople, A.  D«  381,  added  also  the  bishop  of  that  city—- 
since  it  had  become  an  established  maxim  in  those  days,, 
to  determine  the  precedence  and  authority  of  bishops  over 
others,  by  the  rank  of  the  cities  where  they  resided.  Thus 
it  remained  to  the  close  of  the  sixth  century,  during  which 
the  name  and  idea  of  universal  bishop  was  held  a  mark  of 
Antichrist.  Nothing  was  known  as  yet,  of  the  bishop  of 
Rome's  superiority  in  point  of  power,  or  of  his  since  pre« 
tended  infallibility ;  all  his  pre-eminence  consisted  in  the 
pomp  and  splendour,  that  surround  the  Roman  see,  in 
which  he  surpassed  all  his  brethren.  He  yet  obtained  his 
office  by  an  election  of  the  common  people* 

But  a  great  change  took  place  during  the  seventh  cen« 
tury.  Early  in  the  commencement  of  it,  these  lordly  pre* 
lates  began  to  arrogate  to  themselves  a  pre-eminence  over 
all  others,  under  the  pretence  of  being  successors  of  St. 
Peter,  and  vicegerents  of  Christ  on  earth;  though  as  yet 
chiefly  in  opposition  to  the  patriarchs  of  Constantinople*. 
The  Papal  supremacy  >  however,  was  first  introduced  by 
Boniface  III,  who  engaged  that  abominable  tyrant,  Pho- 
cas,  to  confer  the  title  of  universal  bishop  upon  the  Roman 
pontiff;  and  this  arrogant  stride  to  title,  all  his  successors 
endeavoured  to  improve  into  actual  power.  These  ambi- 
tious views  of  the  bishop  at  Rome,  were  for  a  long  time 
opposed  by  emperors,  princes,  and  whole  nations,  till  the 
close  of  the  seventh  century.  Since  that  time  he  was  ac- 
knowledged by  most  of  the  Western  churches  as  supreme 
head  of  the  Roman  Catholic  party,  and  pretended  to  be 
exclusively,  bishop  of  the  world*  By  the  famous  donation 
of  Pepin  and  other  kings  of  France,  since  A.  D.  753,  he 
also  became  possessed  of  several  important  territories, 
and  rose  to  the  dignity  of  a  sovereign  among  the  princes 

m 


90  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

of  the  world;  which  largely  supported  the  see,  in  it 
aspiring  views  to  ecclesiastic  supremacy.  This  authority 
they  now  laboured  to  enlarge  and  confirm,  by  encroach- 
ments upon  the  rights  and  jurisdiction  of  inferior  ecclesi- 
astics, so  as  to  make  them  dependent  on  the  Papal  chair, 
and  by  attaching  the  whole  body  of  the  monks  to  their  ser- 
vice. And  iii  order  to  complete  this  vast  scheme  of  esta- 
blishing a  spiritual  monarchy  on  a  lasting  foundation,  the 
bishops  of  Rome,  by  a  criminal  negligence  and  condescen- 
sion of  the  kings  and  princes,  grasped  also  the  right  of  in- 
vestiture j  the  confirmation  of  the  newly  elected  ecclesias- 
tics ;  the  disposal  of  the  most  profitable  benefices  and  pre- 
bendaries. By  this  additional  power,  their  authority  and 
influence  rose  to  an  enormous  pitch.  They  held  the  life- 
strings  of  the  whole  body  of  the  clergy  in  their  hands,  and 
were  perfectly  sovereign.  See  Professor  Walch's  Hist,  of 
the  Popes. 

Thus  this  Roman  Jezebel  rose  into  existence.  And  now 
we  will  compare  her  actions  and  character,  with  the  pro- 
phetic description  before  us.     Popery, 

I.  Is  of  Heathen  extraction,  begotten  of  the  pontifex 
Maximus,  or  supreme  priest  of  Paganism  in  the  Roman 
empire,  of  whose  office  rights  and  privileges,  this  is  an  imi- 
tation. Constantine  the  Great,  had  already  begun  to 
model  the  administration  of  the  Church  after  the  consti- 
tution of  the  Roman  empire,  by  creating  four  patriarchs, 
or  visible  heads  of  the  Church,  in  imitation  of  his  four 
praetorian  prefects.  But  the  Roman  bishop  grasped  the 
power  and  eminence  of  the  supreme  priest,  in  which  he 
was  much  supported  and  assisted  by  the  Pagan  notions, 
rites  and  ceremonies  already  blended  with  Christianity. 
Of  this,  Popery  stands  convicted,  both  by  history  and  the 
New  Testament. 

II.  Where  will  the  accurate  historian  find  another  power 
in  all  Christendom,  beside  this  Papal  hierarchy,  which  ea? 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29  91 

ablished  itself  by  the  guilty  negligence  of  the  rulers  of 
this  world,  and  by  a  criminal  assumption  of  civil  and  ec- 
clesiastic supremacy  in  the  very  heart  of  the  Church  of 
Christ  ?  Like  Jezebel  of  old,  Popery  fell  in  love  with  the 
kings  and  great  ones  of  the  world,  at  a  time,  when  the 
love  of  Christ  had  died  away  in  the  hearts  of  many.  It 
formed  extensive  connexions,  solely  from  a  desire  of  power, 
and  views  of  self-aggrandizement.  They  both  obtained 
it,  and  were  tyrants. 

III.  Where  is  there  such  a  mixed  power  of  civil  and  ec- 
clesiastic authority,  as  the  kings  in  Israel  possessed,  which 
exercised  such  tyranny  against  the  faithful  servants  of  the 
Lord,  in  order  to  establish  a  false  and  idolatrous  worship  ? 
History  is  full  of  the  inhuman  persecutions  which  the  Pa- 
pal hierarchy  carried  on  against  the  very  best  of  Chris- 
tians. Let  it  suffice  to  mention  only  the  Albingenscs, 
Waldenses,  Vallenses  in  France  and  in  Italy,  and  the  Pro- 
testants to  this  day.  Her  cup  is  to  all  appearance  not  yet 
full ;  though  her  end  will  be  Jezebel-like,  of  which  we 
have  already  seen  the  prognostics.  But  we  must  proceed 
to  what  the  Lord  had  said  about  her. 

IV.  This  apocalyptic  Jezebel  is  not  only  a  woman,  (a 
church)  she  pretends  to  be  a  prophetess  also ;  just  as  the. 
Pope  in  his  college  of  cardinals  calls  himself  the  Church, 
exclusively,  even  of  the  Roman  Catholic  community,  and 
sole  tutoress  of  the  world.  A  prophet,  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment sense  of  the  word,  is  a  divinely  authorized  teacher, 
ivho  was  to  discourse  publicly  upon  the  various  points  of 
Christian  doctrine,  and  to  guide  and  direct  the  people  as 
clothed  by  divine  authority.  The  Papal  chair  at  Rome 
arrogantly  professed  every  item  of  this  definition,  since 
the  commencement  of  the  ninth  century,  to  which  no 
other  Church  in  Christendom  has  ever  attempted  to  pre- 
tend. The  wisest  and  most  impartial  Roman  Catholic 
writers  acknowledge,  that  from  the  time  of  Lewis  the 
Meek,  the  ancient  form  of  church  government  was  greatly 


$$  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

changed  in  Europe  by  the  Roman  pontiff,  and  new  laws  suit 
stituted  in  their  place.  Among  these,  the  spiritual  supre- 
macy of  this  arrogant  bishop  was  of  first  importance. 
They  had  long  pretended  to  this  authority,  but  now  they 
began  to  exercise  it  in  full  vigour.  It  was  zealously  urg- 
ed, that  the  Roman  pontiff  was  constituted  and  appointed 
by  Jesus  Christ,  supreme  legislator  and  judge  of  the 
Church  universal,  and  that  this  right  was  conveyed  to  him 
by  St.  Peter,  the  prince  of  the  apostles.  Hence  they  also 
contended  that  the  bishops,  and  the  whole  body  of  the 
clergy  derived  all  their  authority  from  that  chair,  and 
■  neither  synods,  nor  even  general  councils  could  determine 
any  thing  without  its  consent.  He  presumed  to  be  the  sole 
standard  of  explaining  the  Scriptures  by  his  tradition,  and 
decreed  articles  of  faith;  and  decided  all  controversies  in 
matters  of  religion  and  equity. 

And  what  good  has  this  Papal  Jezebel  done  after  all 
these  extraordinary  pretensions  ?  The  Lord  accuses  her  of 
seducing  his  servants  to  commit  fornication,  and  to  eat 
things  sacrificed  to  Idols.  These  words  are  probably  to 
be  taken  in  a  figurative  sense,  to  denote  that  preposterous 
rage  of  the  Roman  pontiffs  for  image-worship  to  which 
they  have  seduced  all  Europe  since  the  commencement  of 
the  seventh  century.  For,  in  prophetic  language,  fornica- 
tion often  denotes  idolatry.  And  to  partake  in  idolatrous 
rites  and  ceremonies,  may  be  signified  by  eating  things  sa- 
crificed to  Idols.  But  these  expressions  need  not  to  be  ta- 
ken in  a  figurative  sense,  they  are  even  accomplished  in 
their  literal  meaning.  Ever  since  the  Papal  chair  has  es- 
tablished the  celibacy  of  priests,  great  numbers  of  that 
body  were  seduced  at  first,  to  live  like  many  of  the  Popes 
themselves,  in  concubinage,  and  afterwards  in  the  most 
Scandalous  debaucheries.  The  doctrine  itself  is  of  Hea- 
then origin,  and  founded  at  first  on  a  superstitious  opinion 
prevalent  in  the  third  century,  that  those  who  led  a  conju- 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29*  93 

gal  life,  were  of  all  others  the  most  subject  to  the  influence 
of  malignant  daemons.  The  Popes,  however,  urged  this 
doctrine  from  motives  of  self-aggrandizement,  as  this  was 
a  most  effectual  measure,  to  subject  the  whole  body  of  ec- 
clesiastics solely  to  the  interest  and  service  of  the  Roman 
see.  They  likewise  lived  and  supported  themselves  by 
the  things  sacrificed  to  images,  and  the  traffic  that  was 
carried  on  in  relics  of  saints,  and  by  superstition.  Thus 
the  servants  of  the  Lord  in  that  Church  were  drawn  aside 
and  corrupted  by  deceptions  doctrine,  as  the  word  to  se- 
duce, signifies. 

Verse  21.  And  I  gave  her  space  to  repent.  Kxt  Himot, 
ctvTyj'  xqovov  I'vx-  [tiT xv QYigvi,  should  be  rendered:  And  I 
have  given  her  a  chronon  of  time,  that  she  might  repent.  I 
take  a  chronos  in  the  Revelation  to  be  a  time  of  1100 
years.  If  this  period  is  to  be  computed,  from  the  time 
when  the  Roman  see  entered  into  close  connexion  with  the 
rulers  of  France,  by  whose  assistance  its  pontiffs  were  af- 
terwards raised  to  sovereign  majesty ;  then  the  final  doom 
and  bed  of  this  Roman  Jezebel  would  be  about  A.  D.  1840. 
For  Gregory  III,  began  this  connexion,  A.  D.  740,  by  a 
splendid  embassy  to  Charles  Martel,  with  an  infamous^ 
promise  to  withdraw  himself  and  the  city  of  Rome  from 
their  allegiance  to  the  Roman  emperor,  in  case  of  his  as- 
sistance ;  whom  he  bitterly  hated,  on  account  of  his  op- 
position to  image  worship.  See  Walch's  Hist,  of  the 
Popes. 

Of  her  fornication.  Tcogviix,  «^f  7rg£<x«,  to  carry  over 
in  order  to  sell,  to  carry  merchandize.  This  word  does 
not  denote  merely  a  single  instance  of  this  enormous  crime, 
but  a  general  manner  of  living,  and  that  of  the  worst 
kind ;  it  signifies  the  trade  of  a  prostitute,  who  receives 
men  for  money ;  and  for  the  sake  of  gain,  entices  and  al- 
lures even  those  in  conjugal  life,  to  commit  adultery.  It 
is  worthy  of  remark  that  she  is  said  to  commit  fomica- 


94  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

Hon — and  those  who  cohabit  with  her,  are  charged  with 
adultery.  The  first  is  the  same  act  of  an  unmarried  per- 
son, the  last  of  one  in  lawful  wedlock.  The  Lord  hereby 
informs  us,  that  he  never  stood  in  any  connexion  with 
Popery,  or  that  he  never  considered  this  Jezebel  his 
spouse ;  but  the  Catholic  community,  in  as  far  as  it  is  not 
Papal,  not  Roman, -is  still  considered  a  Church  of  Christ, 
the  ministers  of  which  break  the  bonds  of  union  between 
them  and  their  heavenly  Lord,  by  entering  so  far  into  the 
spirit  of  Popery,  as  to  promote  its  propagation.  She  is 
here  represented,  Jezebel  like,  as  a  Woman  of  great  art, 
who  seduces  both  by  her  alluring  pleasures,  and  compet- 
ing power.  Her  pleasures  are  all  bottomed  on  self-in- 
terest, being  objects  of  avarice,  of  pride  and  earthly  hap- 
piness,* and  her  threats  misery,  pain  and  death.  By 
these  means  she  seduces  the  servants  of  the  Lord  to  com- 
mit this  crime  with  herself,  by  deifying  her  own  person, 
and  inducing  all  her  connexions  to  pay  her  divine  honours, 
and  also  to  submit  to  all  her  institutions  as  of  divine  au- 
thority. 

Verse  22 — 23.  Here  the  Lord  threatens  to  bring  judg- 
■  ment  on  her,  on  them  that  commit  adultery  with  her,  and  on 
her  children.  Jezebel  of  old,  was  thrown  down  from  her 
window,  where  her  flesh  was  eaten  by  dogs.  2  Kings  ix, 
33 — 37.  This  was  a  signal  judgment  of  God.  Popery 
will  meet  with  one  equally  rigorous.  From  her  downy 
sofa  of  pleasure,  on  which  she  has  captivated  by  her  charms 
and  intrigues,  and  enraptured  her  lovers  for  a  whole  chro- 
nos,  the  Lord  will  cast  her  into  a  sick  bed  of  great  pain 
and  affliction.  Her  paramours,  who  forsook  the  Lord 
and  committed  adultery  with  her,  are  the  college  of  cardi- 
nals, the  higher  clerical  orders  and  prebendaries,  who 
enter  into  the  life  and  spirit  of  the  Roman  see,  and  enjoyed 
her  pleasures  and  benefits;  and  those  rulers  of  the  world, 
who  have  supported  her  in  her  aspiring  views,  and  persecu 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29.  95 

tions  against  the  servants  and  witnesses  of  the  Lord.  They 
shall  also  be  cast  into  the  same  bed  of  tribulation  and  dis- 
tress with  her;  part  of  which  we  have  now  seen  during 
these  sanguinary  revolutions  in  Europe,  but  the  dregs  of 
the  Lord's  cup  are  yet  to  come.     Ps.  lxxv.  8. 

The  Lord  seems  to  have  this  woman  and  her  transac- 
tions during  many  centuries  before  his  eyes ;  for  he  also 
speaks  of  her  children.  These  are  not  the  Christian 
churches  and  congregations  under  the  government  of 
Popery  .Charity  requires  to  make  this  Christian  distinc- 
tion. Her  children  are  the  different  monastic  orders,  form- 
ed for  her  support,  and  after  her  spirit  and  image;  and 
those  missionary  societies  in  protestant  and,  other  Chris- 
tian countries,  who  use  all  their  endeavours  to  extend  the 
banners  and  authority  of  the  Pope,  among  the  true  wor- 
shippers of  Jesus  Christ.  The  Lord  will  kill  them  with 
death,  if  they  do  not  repent.  This  manner  of  expression 
always  denotes  sudden  death,  by  signal  judgments  from 
heaven :  such  as  earthquakes,  epidemic  diseases,  sanguin- 
ary revolutions,  or  the  desolations  of  a  blood-thirsty  ty- 
rant. The  accomplishment  of  this  dire  sentence  will  carry 
such  evident  marks  of  a  divine  and  special  judgment,  that 
all  the  churches  in  the  different  parts  of  Christendom  at 
that  time,  shall  thereby  know  the  hand  of  the  Lord  Jesus. 
It  probably  terminates  in  that  great  harvest,  Rev.  xiv.  15; 
in  which  also  many  children  of  God  are  gathered  into  the 
heavenly  garner,  but  in  a  very  different  manner,  from  the 
children  of  Jezebel. 

Verse  24.  But  unto  you  I  say,  and  unto  the  rest  at  Thy- 
atira.  The  Lord  makes  a  remarkable  distinction  in  the 
body  of  the  ministry  at  Thyatira.  They  are  divided  into 
the  following  three  classes :  1.  The  woman  Jezebel,  and 
her  lovers  and  children..  2.  The  angel.  3.  The  rest  at 
Thvatira. 


96  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

I.  This  woman  and  her  connexions  have  been  sufficiently 
described.  According  to  prophecy  they  will  once  more 
arise  to  a  considerable  power  in  Christendom,  and  for  a 
short  time,  exercise  great  tyranny  and  persecution,  chiefly 
against  the  Protestants,  before  she  receives  her  final  doom 
by  the  hand  of  the  Lord.  Her  course  is  now  nearly  run, 
and  her  last  elevation  at  hand ;  after  which  she  shall  op- 
pose the  Church  of  Christ  no  more. 

II.  The  angel — The  acknowledged  gospel  ministry  of 
Jesus  Christ  in  his  Church  at  the  time,  to  which  this 
charge  refers.  Their  general  character,  the  Lord  has 
given  in  the  19th  verse,  of  which  they  all  partook,  more 
or  less,  in  the  performance  of  their  official  duties.  This 
angel  is  twice  addressed  in  the  plural  number,  verse  23,  and 
24  ;  in  order  to  show,  that  he  is  a  moral  representative  of 
many.  He  is  here  described,  as  being  in  the  presence 
of  this  idolatrous  woman,  who  profited  much  by  his  re- 
missness in  duty,  though  he  himself  remained  faithful  to 
the  Lord. 

III.  The  rest  at  Thyatira.— Are  also  ministers  of  the  true 
and  uncorr upted  gospel  of  Jesus ;  for  they  are  said,  to  have 
not  this  doctrine,  and  did  not  know  the  deep  schemes  of  Sa- 
tan in  the  establishment  of  this  woman,  and  her  train  of 
corruptions,  or  no  doubt,  they  would  have  borne  a  more 
effectual  testimony  against  her.  They  are  here  represented 
as  in  no  connexion  with  the  woman,  and  as  of  a  distinct 
party  from  the  angel  also;  for  honrog  from  ajiVw,  signi- 
fies the  forsaken,  the  missing,  the  removed,  h.  e.  from  the 
ruling  church-power.  The  Lord  mentions  them  with 
such  approbation,  that  we  may  well  feel  interested  to  ask ; 
who  can  they  be  ?  I  cannot  help  seeing  here  that  host  of 
ancient  witnesses,  who  according  to  Mosheim,  have  since 
the  seventh  century,  either  withdrawn  from  the  ruling 
Church  on  account  of  the  vices  of  the  clergy,  the  ambi- 
tious projects  of  the  Roman  pontiffs,  and  the  corruptions 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29.  9r 

of  religion ;  or  were  driven  away  by  persecution  in  al- 
most every  country  of  Christendom,  but  particularly  from 
those,  under  the,  jurisdiction  of  the  aspiring  bishop  at 
Rome.  Though  their  persecutors,  and  afterwards  the  in- 
quisition, charged  them  with  ignorance,  and  blackened 
their  confession  of  faith,  by  accusations  evidently  false; 
yet  even  their  enemies  acknowledged  the  sincerity  of  their 
piety,  wherever  they  were  truly  known.  They  kept  them- 
selves concealed  at  first,  in  order  to  be  screened  from  per- 
secution, but  when  in  succeeding  time  they  collected  into 
settlements  and  formed  congregations,  their  enemies  stig- 
matized them  with  many  names,  viz.  such  as :  Vallenses, 
Albingenses,  Waldenses,  Paterini,  Cathari,  Bulgarians, 
the  Brethren  of  the *  free  Spirit,  Beghards,  &c.  &c.  &c. 
Many  of  these  people  were  indeed  men  of  whom  the  world 
was  not  worthy,  a  holy  seed  of  the  Lord,  wherever  their 
pilgrimage  was  destined ;  for  they  were  rarely  suffered  to 
remain  long  unmolested  in  the  same  place*  though  always 
better  Christians  than  their  persecutors. 

And  here  perhaps  is  a  suitable  place  to  determine 
with  more  precision,  whom  we  are  most  properly  to  un- 
derstand by  the  angel  in  each  of  these  charges,  and  by  the 
Churches  to  which  they  belong.  The  true  answer  to  this 
inquiry  is  of  no  small  importance  in  the  explanation  of 
these  charges,  and  of  great  moment  in  theology  in  our 
days,  where  so  many  sects  and  churches  in  Christendom 
claim  this  prerogative  exclusively  for  themselves,  and  con- 
demn others.  Let  us  for  a  moment  compare  all  these  char- 
ges, and  upon  a  review  of  the  whole,  the  Lord  will  proba- 
bly himself  satisfy  our  withes.  By  comparing  text  with 
text,  we  shall  be  the  less  liable  to  fall  into  error.  It  is 
evident,  that  these  angels  are  not  the  moral  representa- 
tives 

I.  Of  all  the  Christian  ministry  of  every  sect  and  party 
throughout  Christendom.    For  the  Lord  himself  distin- 

jsr 


98  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

guishes  at  Ephesus  between  the  angel  and  the  false  apos.- 
tles ;  at  Smyrna,  between  him  and  the  false  Jews  ;  at  Per- 
gamos,  he  protests  against  the  followers  of  the  doctrine  of 
Balaam  and  the  Nicolaitanes ;  at  Thyatira,  against  the 
whore  Jezebel;  and  whatever  the  Lord  separates,  we 
have  no  right  to  join.  All  these  heretics  and  corrupters 
Of  the  pure  religion  of  Jesus  are  by  these  protestations  ex- 
communicated from  his  Church,  and  absolutely  cut  off  like 
withered  branches,  from  the  body  of  his  people.  When 
the  Lord  pronounces  excommunication,  we  must  not  ex- 
pect to  hear  Papal  curses  and  anathemas,  a  simple  ex- 
pression of  his  divine  displeasure  is  quite  sufficient. 

II.  Not  of  all  the  faithful  servants  of  Christ  in  his  vine- 
yard, because  he  evidently  distinguislies  at  Pergamos,  be- 
tween the  angel  and  Antipas,  [ex  cLvrl  et  nclg3  anti- 
p.ode,  one  directly  opposite  to  us ;]  who  also  appears  to  be 
a  moral  representative  of  the  first  Christian  ascetics  and 
hermits,  of  the  second  and  third  century.  They  followed 
what  they  called  an  extraordinary  rule  of  sanctity,  abstain- 
ed from  wine,  flesh,  matrimony  and  commerce,  and  ap- 
plied themselves  wholly  to  solitude,  contemplation,  and 
devotion,  in  order  to  have  communion  with  God  in  Christ. 
They  aimed  to  live  above  nature  and  the  rule  of  life,  as 
they  said,  given  to  the  vulgar,  and  are  therefore  denomi- 
nated Antipas,  or  Antipodes.  Though  they  followed  an  er- 
roneous opinion  of  those  days,  and  led  severe  and  austere 
lives ;  yet  history  testifies  their  true  piety,  and  readiness 
to  become  confessors  or  martyrs  for  their  Saviour's  cause. 
The  Lord  also  plainly  distinguishes  at  Thyatira,  between 
-the  angel  and  the  rest  /  and  at  Sardis,  the  few  names,  which 
he  had  left  there.  Both  were  collective  bodies  of  faith- 
ful ministers  of  Christ,  who  receive  praise  and  promises, 
without  the  least  censure  or  blame,  and  yet  not  numbered 
with  the  angels  there. 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29.  9.9 

III.  Nor  of  the  faithful  ministry  of  Christ  only — be- 
cause the  angel  at  Sardis  had  the  name  only  of  being  alive, 
and  in  reality  was  dead;  and  he  at  Laodicea  was  luke- 
warm, and  even  worse  than  cold,  and  therefore  the  Lord 
was  ready  to  spue  him  out  of  his  mouth  as  a  nauseating 
morsel. 

IV.  Neither  the  ministry  of  those  churches  only,  which 
are  acknowledged  by  public  authority,  and  sanctioned  by 
civil  law.  Because  this  was  not  the  case  with  the  angel 
at  Ephesus  and  Smyrna,  both  were  persecuted  by  public 
authority  in  Judea  and  throughout  the  whole  Roman  em- 
empire,  to  the  year  A.  D.  324.  The  Church  and  the 
commonwealth  are  polities  specifically  and  essentially  dif- 
ferent. 

There  is  no  doubt  but  these  angels  hold  the  only  true 
succession  of  the  gospel  ministry  of  Christ  on  earth,  and 
the  proper  lineage  of  spiritual  power  and  privilege  to  the 
stewardship  of  the  mysteries  and  manifold  grace  of  God. 
1  Cor.  iv.  1.  It  therefore  highly  concerns  us  to  inquire, 
whom  these  angels  represent,  and  where  we  are  to  meet 
the  true  Church  of  Christ,  and  its  gospel  ministry.  This 
subject  will  according  to  prophecy,  be  one  day  made  a 
matter  of  greater  moment  in  Christendom ;  and  that  in  all 
probability  soon. 

V.  Not  of  the  ruling  church  power,  as  such,  or  the 
higher  ranks  of  ecclesiastics  at  those  different  periods,  in 
any  country.  For  since  the  time  of  Constantino  the  Great, 
those,  whose  duty  it  was  to  shine  like  stars  of  the  first 
magnitude,  have  generally  been  the  very  persons  who  led 
the  van  among  the  t°mporisers  with  the  world,  and  too 
often  themselves  corrupted  the  religion  of  our  blessed 
Lord  and  Master.  How  many  might  we  name  from  his- 
tory, who,  from  views  of  self-aggrandizement  and  secular 
interest,  have  proved  greatly  unfaithful  at  last.  This  is 
evident  from  the  history  of  the  Roman  Jezebel,  which  has 


100  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

had  the  power  for  many  centuries,  and  done  so  much  mis- 
chief to  the  cause  of  Christ.  It  is  equally  true,  more  or 
less  of  every  established  community  in  preference  to  others 
throughout  Christendom. 

VI.  The  great  question  then  at  last  is,  whom  do  these 
angels  more  particularly  represent  ?  And  where  shall  we 
meet  their  Churches  ?  They  certainly  represent  a  suc- 
cessive ministry  of  the  Lord's  own  institution,  regu- 
larly set  apart  in  his  Church,  and  ordained  to  be  dele- 
gates and  ambassadors  by  his  authority  and  in  his  name 
to  the  churches.  They  are  also  represented  in  these  char- 
ges, as  being  vested  with  a  standing  power  of  governing 
the  Church  under  his  inspection,  and  as  servants  of  the 
Lord,  wTho  continue  to  administer  and  preserve  the  means 
of  grace  in  purity  and  without  essential  corruption,  till  he 
cometh  again  in  glory.  Where  can  we  meet  this  succession 
and  that  power  of  church  government,  which  Jesus  Christ 
himself  received  from  the  Father  5  John  xx.  21.  and  vest- 
ed in  his  apostles,  with  authority  to  convey  it  down  by  a 
successive  ministry  to  the  period  of  the  Church  at  Lao- 
dicea?  After  all  the  attention  I  am  able  to  pay  this  subject, 
in  considering  these  charges,  the  following  is  the  result. 

These  angels  are  not  the  moral  representatives  of  the 
ruling  church  power,  as  such,  at  these  seven  different  pe- 
riods of  the  Church  of  Christ, — but  of  that  part  of  the 
Christian  ministry,  who  remain  to  officiate  as  actual  mem- 
bers of  those  ruling  communities,  and  continue  faithful  to  the 
confession  of  the  pure  doctrine  of  the  gospel,  both  as  to  faith 
and  worship,  without  participating  in  any  essential  corrup- 
tions that  may  be  introduced  during  their  time. 

Those  who  withdraw  from  these  communities  of  their 
own  accord,  and,  without  a  special  call  of  Providence,  hide 
themselves  behind  the  scene  of  action,  loose  their  right 
and  place  in  this  ministerial  succession.  To  turn  the  back 
upon  the  enemy  for  fear  of  a  conflict  in  so  good  a  cause  as 
the  religion  of  Christ,  is  a  great  sin  indeed.    Rev.  xxi,  8. 


CHAPTER  II.  18—29.  101 

The  Protestant  reformers  were  none  of  these.  They  nei- 
ther feared  persecution,  sufferings  nor  death;  at  least 
Luther  was  driven  away  hy  Papal  excommunication, 
and  God  accomplished  his  work  through  him,  without  any 
such  important  intentions  on  his  part  at  first.  They  did 
not  leave  the  Church  of  Christ,  for  they  retained  all  the 
doctrine  and  worship  of  the  Saviour's  institution,  and  are 
therefore  acknowledged  his  ministry  under  the  angel  at 
Philadelphia:  they  only  left  a  heretical  church  power, 
which  as  such,  had  lost  the  right  of  ministerial  succession. 
For  he  who  makes  an  unscriptural  doctrine  his  chief  ob- 
ject and  rallying  point  of  union  for  his  sect,  is  a  teacher  of 
heresy  and  no  longer  a  pastor  in  Christ's  Church ;  though 
many  of  his  adherents  for  want  of  knowledge,  may  on 
that  account  be  far  less  culpable  in  the  sight  of  the  Lord, 
than  he  is  himself. 

3.  The  distinguishing  criterion,  by  which  the  Lord  de- 
signates his  visible  Church,  and  by  which  also  we  may 
find  it  amidst  the  cry  of  so  many  parties,  Lo,  here  is 
Christ !  undoubtedly  is,  purity  of  doctrine,  both  as  to 
faith  and  practice,  and  the  administration  of  the  sacra- 
ments, agreeably  to  the  institution  of  the  Lord.  Accord- 
ing to  this  criterion,  which  is  also  sanctioned,  Acts  ii, 
42,  That  community  is  a  Church  of  Christ,  and  part  of  the 
house  of  eternal  wisdom  built  on  seven  pillars  (Prov.  9.) 
which  makes  solemn  and  public  confession  of  the  doctrine  and 
worship  of  Christ,  and  continues  stedfastly  in  the  fellowship 
of  the  apostles  and  their  successors,  and  in  breaking  of  bread, 
and  in  prayers.  Wherever  we  meet  this  mark  of  distinc- 
tion, whether  they  be  single  persons  in  corrupt  communi- 
ties, or  whole  Churches  under  solemn  profession  in  the 
world,  there  is  the  lineage  of  the  wife  of  the  Lamb,  and 
the  true  succession  of  the  gospel  ministry  among  the  clergy 
of  such  a  Church. 

Verse  24.  J  will  put  upon  you  none  other  burden.  The 
angel  and  the  rest  at  Thyatira  had  burden  enough  in  be- 


102  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

ing  surrounded  by  the  woman  Jezebel  and  her  adherents ; 
the  Lord  offers  them  this  comfort,  that  all  further  suffer- 
ings shall  be  dispensed  with  on  that  account. 

Verse  25.  That  which  ye  have,  holdfast.  That  por- 
tion of  my  doctrine  and  worship  among  you,  hold  fast. 
You  will  be  under  continual  temptation  of  loosing  it ; 
therefore  watch  and  pray,  make  use  of  your  spiritual 
weapons  and  powers,  to  preserve  it,  as  a  great  treasure. 
This  is  also  addressed  to  the  rest  at  Thyatira. 

Till  I  come.  This  declaration  of  the  second  advent  of 
Christ  is  here  mentioned  for  the  first  time  in  these  char- 
ges, and  indicates  that  this  branch  of  the  gospel  ministry 
in  the  midst  of  this  corrupted  Church,  shall  continue  till  the 
Lord  comes.  He  tells  the  angel  at  Ephesus,  that  he  would 
Come  to  remove  his  candlestick,  and  to  him  at  Pergamos, 
he  would  come  and  fight  against  the  Balaamites ;  both  these 
declarations  denote  special  judgments ;  but  the  words  here 
evidently  signify  reward,  which  both  the  gospel  ministry 
and  the  rest  at  Thyatira  shall  receive,  when  he  comes. 

Verse  26.  And  he  that  overcometh  and  keepeth  my 
works.  The  Greek  text  is,  as  follows  :  Kot/  o  vuuv,  not) 
cTvjpwvTofr  tpy*  fAw,  which  should  be  translated  thus: 
And  he  that  overcometh,  and  he  that  keepeth  my  offices; 
where  the  word  tjj^jv  signifies  to  keep  by  guard,  pre- 
serve, retain,  and  always  expresses  carefulness  and  cir- 
cumspection. For  my  translation  of  the  word  tgyot, 
vide  chapter  ii,  2.  By  these  words  the  Lord  describes 
two  different  kinds  of  people,  and  their  best  efforts  to- 
wards performing  the  duties  incumbent  on  them ;  who  also 
in  the  following  words  receive  a  twofold  promise,  in  case 
of  a  faithful  performance. 

The  words,  "  he  that  overcometh"  certainly  refer  to  the 
angel  at  Thyatira,  h.  e.  to  that  branch  of  the  gospel  min- 
istry, which  still  continues  in  the  Roman  Catholic  church 
who,  surrounded  by  the  corruptions,  temptations  and  ty- 


CHAPTER  II 18—29.  105 

lianny  of  Jezebel,  are  here  encouraged  in  the  conflict,  to 
remain  true  and  faithful  unto  the  end. 

But  the  words,  "and  he  that  keepeth,  guardeth,  pre- 
serveth  my  offices,"  refer  to  the  rest  at  Thyatira,  h.  e.  the 
Vallenses,  Abigenses,  Waldenses,  and  that  host  of  an- 
cient witnesses  against  Popery  and  the  corruptions  of  the 
Church  in  doctrine  and  worship,  during  the  dark  centu- 
ries.    It  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  these  pious  servants  of 
the  Lord  at  first  principally  withdrew,  or  were  driven 
away  from  the  Roman  church  community,  on  account  of 
the  Papal  innovations  in  church  government ;  partly  by  its 
own  ambitious  endeavours  after  power,  secular  possessions 
and  worldly  grandeur ;  and  partly  by  introducing  a  multi- 
plicity of  new  offices,  in  order  to  multiply  and  enrich  a 
vicious  and  corrupt  clergy.     These  pious  people  them- 
selves, wherever  they  collected  and  formed  congregations 
of  their  own,  always  established  and  preserved  the  apos- 
tolic form  of  church  government,  which  the  Lord  here 
calls  his  offices,  by  way  of  approbation,  and  because  the 
apostles  acted  according  to  the  direction  of  his  spirit.  The 
Lord  animates  them  to  use  all  diligence  and  care,  in  pre- 
serving their  excellent  church  discipline,  and  to  adminis> 
ter  those  offices  well. 

Power  over  the  nations.  The  promise  is  also  two  fold. 
That  branch  of  the  gospel  ministry  of  Christ  in  the  Ra- 
man Catholic  community  which  overcometh,  is  here  pro- 
mised a  great  harvest  among  the  Heathen.  The  original 
word  'z%qvs}<x}  signifies  both  the  privilege  of  doing  a 
thing,  and  the  power  necessary  to  its  performance — it  also 
denotes  royal  distinction  and  dignity.  At  the  commence- 
ment of  the  Millennium,  when  that  Church  is  reformed 
upon  the  principles  of  the  pure  religion  of  Christ,  and 
purged  of  Jezebel  and  all  her  train  of  corruptions,  a  large 
door  will  be  opened  to  her  missionaries  among  the  Heathen 
nations.    She  will  send  forth  noble  ambassadors  of  Jesus, 


104  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

men  endowed  with  power  from  above,  and  qualified  for 
this  work ;  and  the  Pagans  will  receive  them  with  a  rever- 
ence and  distinction,  due  to  the  first  citizen  of  the  empire. 
The  word  Trotualvu,  which  is  here  given  to  rule,  also  sig- 
nifies to  pasture,  to  reign,  to  govern,  and  indicates  civil 
and  spiritual  government ;  for  the  Lord  himself  explains 
it  in  that  way,  by  adding :  <J?  xccyu  uKytyob,  as  also  I 
have  received  of  mij  father.  Ps.  ii.  8.  They  are  not  to  be 
principals  in  this  government  over  the  nations,  they  are 
only  promised  to  be  his  colleagues,  as  members  of  his  spi- 
ritual body,  1  Cor.  vi.  2,  3 ;  and  how  great  is  even  this 
promise !  The  Roman  Catholic  church  is  even  now  fur- 
nished with  more  funds  and  subjects  for  missionary  pur- 
poses, than  all  the  rest  of  Christendom  together;  but  they 
want  purity  of  doctrine  and  worship,  spirit  and  zeal  for  the 
undertaking.  Her  present  missionaries  are  chiefly  em- 
ployed to  extend  the  power  of  the  Pope  and  the  banners  of 
their  own  order.  But  in  those  days  all  impediments  will 
be  removed,  and  they  shall  be  chief  instruments  in  the 
hands  of  the  Lord,  to  bring  in  the  fullness  of  the  Gentiles. 

Verse  27.  With  a  rod  of  iron.  Those  who  willingly 
submit,  will  be  led  in  green  pastures,  and  led  beside  the 
still  waters  of  gospel  grace ;  but  the  stiff-necked  and  re- 
bellious shall  be  broken  as  the  vessels  of  a  potter  to  shi- 
vers. A  sword  is  the  weapon  against  an  enemy,  but  a  rod 
is  the  instrument  to  punish  capital  transgressors  against 
the  laws  of  the  state.  To  rule  with  a  rod  of  iron,  denotes 
a  strong  and  energetic  government.  To  be  employed 
abroad  in  the  king's  service  is  great  honour,  to  be  employ- 
ed in  the  cabinet  denotes  still  more  abilities  and  confidence; 
but  to  be  the  wife  of  the  Lamb  is  happiness  indeed. 

Verse  28.  The  morning  star.  This  is  a  special  pro- 
mise to  the  rest  at  Thyatira.  The  sense  is  :  with  you  the 
day  of  my  kingdom  shall  first  open;  the  harbinger  of  my 
second  advent  will  first  appear  among  you,  and  you  will 
rejoice  in  his  approach. 


CHAPTER  III, 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  SAUDIS. 


Verse  1.  And  unto  the  angel  of  the  Church  in  Sardis  write ;  these  things 
saith  he  that  hath  the  seven  spirits  of  God,  and  the  seven  stars  $ 
Iknow  thy  works,  that  thou  hast  a  name  that  thou  livest,  and 
art  dead. 
2  Be  watchful,  and  strengthen  the  things  which  remain,  that  are 
ready  to  die ;  for  I  have  not  found  thy  works  perfect  before  God. 

3.  Remember  therefore  how  thou  hast  received  and  heard,  and  hold 
fast,  and  repent.  If  therefore  thou  shalt  not  watch,  J  will  come 
on  thee  as  a  thief,  and  thou  shalt  not  know  what  hour  I  will 
come  upon  thee. 

4.  Thou  hast  a  few  names  even  in  Sardis  which  have  not  defiled 
their  garments ;  and  they  shall  walk  with  me  in  white,  for  they 
are  worthy. 

5.  He  that  overcometh,  the  same  shall  be  clothed  in  white  rai- 
ment ;  and  I  will  not  blot  out  his  name  out  of  the  book  of  life, 
but  will  confess  his  name  before  my  father,  and  before  his  an- 
gels. 

6.  He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear  what  the  Spirit  saith  unto  the 
Churches. 

This  charge  is  given  to  the  gospel  ministry  of  the  Greek 
church,  and  comprehends  that  body  of  men  from  the 
time  of  the  great  and  fatal  schism  between  the  Eastern 
and  Western  Churches,  to  the  commencement  of  the  Mil- 
lennium. Those  well  acquainted  with  the  internal  state  of 
the  Eastern  churches  since  that  time,  will  readily  admit, 
that  it  contains  a  faithful  and  applicable  description  of  their 
general  character.,  even  to  the  present  day.    I  presume 

o 


106  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

that  Dr.  Young,  alias  Stilling,  is  under  a  mistake,  when 
he  explains  this  charge  to  the  angel  at  Sardis,  as  also  re- 
ferring to  the  Latin  church ;  since  that  community  beyond 
all  douht,  has  already  heen  the  subject  of  the  former 
charge,  for  the  following  reason.  By  that  call  on  our  par- 
ticular attention,  to  what  the  Spirit  saith  in  the  Churches, 
these  seA'en  charges  are  divided  into  two  parts.  The  three 
first  stand  peculiarly  connected  among  themselves,  by 
bearing  that  remarkable  form  of  expression  in  front  of  the 
promise  annexed  to  each  charge ;  and  concern  the  ministry 
of  the  general  Church  of  Christ,  before  it  was  rent  into 
different  communities.  The  four  last  charges  are  again 
united,  by  having  this  call  to  attention  annexed  after  the 
promise,  and  at  the  end  of  each  pastoral  letter;  because 
they  refer  to  the  gospel  ministry  of  four  distinct  Churches, 
and  each  charge  is  addressed,  to  a  particular  ministerial 
succession  in  one  of  these  communities.  No  impartial  his- 
torian can  doubt,  but  that  the  Western  clergy  made  the 
first  schism  in  the  Church,  by  suffering  that  woman  Jeze- 
bel to  rise  and  establish  herself  among  them,  in  the  power 
of  the  Pope.  For  this  reason  the  first  of  these  four  last 
charges  is,  in  the  order  of  prophecy,  as  well  as  of  things, 
addressed  to  that  ministerial  succession ;  and  the  one  now 
under  consideration  to  the  angel  at  Sardis,  concerns  the 
ministry  of  the  Eastern  church  exclusively,  as  also  its 
contents  will  evince  and  verify. 

Verse  1.  He  that  hath  the  seven  spirits  of  God.  The 
reason,  why  the  Holy  Ghost  is  here  represented  by  these 
seven  spirits,  is  neither  obvious,  nor  probably  within  the 
limits  of  human  research.  By  this  representation  the 
Lord  may  refer  to  his  peculiar  mode  of  existence  in  the 
Godhead,  or  to  his  manner  of  communicating  himself  to 
the  Churches  in  a  sevenfold  influence  on  the  human  soul. 
But  there  is  certainly  a  particular  motive,  why  the  Lord 
declares  to  the  angel  at  Sardis,  and  to  him  especially,  that 


CHAPTER  III.  1—6.  107  j 

He  had  the  seven  spirits  of  God.  It  is  notorious,  that  the 
separation  of  the  Greek  and  Latin  churches  was  indeed 
begun  by  the  aspiring  views  and  haughty  conduct  of  the 
Roman  pontiffs,  towards  the  patriarchs  of  the  Eastern 
churches ;  but  this  was  by  no  means  the  only  cause.  The 
breach  was  still  widened  by  that  famous  and  unhappy  con- 
test about  image-worship,  and  the  procession  of  the  Holy 
Ghost  from  the  Son.  This  the  Eastern  bishops  denied, 
and  charged  the  Latins  with  heresy,  and  with  the  crime  of 
having  corrupted  the  creed  of  Constantinople ;  by  adding 
the  words  Jilio  que,  i.  e.  and  from  the  Son,  without  autho- 
rity. The  Greek  church  has  ever  since  asserted  this  doc- 
trine, that  the  Holy  Ghost,  proceeded  from  the  Father 
only  m,  and  therefore  the  Lord  here  declares  to  his  ministry 
in  that  community,  in  order  to  rectify  their  confession, 
that  He  also  hath  the  seven  spirits  of  God,  as  well  as  the  Fa- 
ther. 

I  know  thy  works,  &c.  &c.  The  last  part  of  this  verse 
should  be  rendered  thus :  I  have  inspected  thy  offices,: 
though  thou  hast  a  form  as  if  thou  livedst,  yet  thou,  art 
dead.  For  this  sense  of  the  word,  ovo^oc,  see  Hypom. 
Ernest,  in  loco,  and  for  my  translation  of  oT<>  Glassius, 
and  Math,  v,  17.  Here  the  Lord  describes  the  character 
of  his  ministry  in  the  Grecian  church — a  lamentable  pic- 
ture indeed,  but  notoriously  true,  even  to  the  present  day. 
For  many  centuries  already,  that  Church  has  been  covered 
according  to  the  best  authorities,  with  a  thick  and  gloomy 
veil  of  ignorance  and  superstition,  and  its  guardians,  or 
priesthood  has  been  equally  destitute  of  knowledge  and 
vital  religion.  Though  there  were  at  all  times  a  few  judi- 
cious and  pious  servants  of  Jesus  among  them,  yet  the  ge- 
nerality placed  the  whole  of  religion  in  a  laborious  round 
of  rites  and  ceremonies,  and  knew  very  little  of  the  life 
and  power  of  godliness  in  the  soul  of  man. 

Thou  hast  a  form,  saith  the  Lord — a  liturgy,  a  Church 
government,  a  round  of  external  services  in  worship,  which 


108  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

makes  a  good  appearance,  and  produces  you  the  name 
among  the  congregations  of  being  my  ministry.  Those 
who  can  see  no  further  than  the  surface,  may  judge,  that 
also  your  souls  were  alive  to  God  and  to  my  cause  in  them ; 
but  my  eye  has  penetrated  this  veil  of  hypocrisy,  and  my 
judgment  diifers  widely  from  that  of  unenlightened  reason. 

Thou  art  dead,  a  lifeless  corpse,  a  body  of  unregene- 
rated  men,  not  quickened  by  the  spirit  of  him  that  raised 
up  Jesus  from  the  dead.  Your  heart  is  unchanged,  your 
reason  not  illuminated  from  above,-  you  only  understand 
the  external  meaning  of  the  Scriptures  by  means  of  human 
learning,  and  not  that  which  is  spiritually  discerned,  and 
gives  life,  energy  and  activity  to  the  soul.  Therefore  you 
want  zeal,  and  all  your  labours  are  void  of  spiritual  suc- 
cess and  blessing  among  the  sons  and  daughters  of  men. 

Verse  2.  Be  watchful.  y[v%  ypyyopuv,  Be  thou  awa- 
kened, from  thy  spiritual  sleep,  and  arise  from  the  dead, 
and  Christ  shall  give  thee  light,  Eph.  v,  14.  By  the  origi- 
nal the  Lord  commands  him  to  awaken  from  his  state  of 
sloth  and  carelessness,  to  a  sense  of  duty ;  but  our  common 
version  refers  more  particularly  to  the  duty  of  remaining 
in  a  state  of  watchfulness,  A  man  must  first  awake  to  a 
sense  of  his  danger,  before  he  is  capable  of  guarding 
against  the  enemy  of  souls. 

And  strengthen  the  things  which  remain,  &c.  K#)  ^yjp^ov 
t»  KoiTtoi  a  piKXu  a,7ro^xviTv.  And  support  the  forsaken, 
which  are  ready  to  die.  See  Pasor's  Lex.  and  Kypke  in 
loco,  Ti»  tonroi>  ts?  Konrxs  (ttcIvtok;)  reliqua,\.e.  reliquos 
omnes.  The  Church  at  Sardis  contains  three  sorts  of  peo- 
ple :  1.  The  angel,  or  properly  acknowledged  gospel  min- 
istry, who  are  the  immediate  subjects  of  this  charge.  2, 
The  rest,  the  forsaken,  the  removed.  3.  The  few  names, 
which  the  angel  at  Sardis  had ;  by  which  we  may  under- 
stand the  ministry  of  separate  parties,  who  yet  remained 
under  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Grecian  church.  By  these 
fcqm&)  the  rest)  the  forsaken  or  removed,  I  understand  such 


CHAPTER  III.  1—6.  109 

as  had  been  excommunicated  by  the  ministry  of  the  Greek 
church,  forsaken  and  persecuted  against  the  will  and  plea- 
sure of  the  Lord ;  among  which  the  falsely  accused  Pauli- 
cians  hold  a  chief  place.  I  know  the  prejudices,  which 
have  been  handed  down  in  church  histories  from  Greek 
authors,  respecting  this  Christian  and  pious  society  of 
men ;  but  I  am  also  convinced  from  reading  Gibbon  on 
the  decline  and  fall  of  the  Roman  empire,  that  these 
Greeks,  their  inveterate  enemies,  are  bad  authorities  in 
this  case.  This  society  was  formed  by  a  certain  Constan- 
tine,  at  Manalis,  beyond  Samosata,  in  the  seventh  century, 
stnd  at  first  consisted  chiefly  of  those  Gnostics  and  Mani 
cheans,  who  during  thefirst  centuries  of  the  Christian  sera, 
had  been  driven  to  the  banks  of  the  river  Euphrates.  Con- 
stantine  preferred  the  writings  of  the  Apostle  Paul,  and 
adopted  them  as  his  particular  rule  of  faith  and  practice ; 
and  hence  their  name  of  Paulicians.  This  society  soon  ex* 
tended  itself  over  all  the  provinces  of  Asia  Minor  to  the  Eu- 
phrates,  and  established  numerous  congregations  through- 
out all  Armenia,  They  were  founded  in  the  true  spirit  of 
Christianity,  and  flourished  as  a  garden  of  the  Lord,  until 
the  Grecian  emperors  Constans,  Justinian  II,  Leo  the 
Isaurian,\  the  empress  Theodora  and  others,  with  a  cor- 
rupt and  restless  priesthood,  began  to  persecute  them  with 
a  degree  of  bitterness  and  barbarity,  horrible  beyond  ex- 
pression. During  the  reign  of  Theodora  only,  more  than 
100,000  suffered  martyrdom,  by  every  kind  of  tortures; 
because  they  would  not  return  to  the  bosom  of  a  corrupted 
Church,  and  submit  to  the  tyranny  of  a  worldly  minded 
priesthood.  In  order  to  get  rid  of  these  sincere  disciples 
of  Jesus,  who  had  become  troublesome  to  a  lifeless  and  in- 
dolent clergy,  large  bodies  of  them  were  transported  from 
Armenia  into  Thrace;  from  whence  they  passed  on  into 
Bulgaria,  Sclavonia,  Italy  and  France,  where  ^hey  united 
with  the  Yallenses,  Albigenses  and  Waldenses,  and  were 
again  cruelly  persecuted  by  the  Roman  pontiffs.    Those 


1 10  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

who  remained  behind  in  Armenia,  and  Syria,  were  often 
driven  to  the  most  desperate  measures,  to  prevent  the  total 
destruction  of  their  families ;  and  their  zealous  and  faith- 
ful teachers,  being  every  where  particularly  sought  after, 
were  ready  to  expire  under  the  severity  of  their  persecutors. 
These  are  the  forsaken — the  removed,  whom  the  Lord  di- 
rects the  angel  at  Sardis  to  support,  to  sustain,  to  prop,  as 
a  tottering  ediiice,  because  they  had  almost  been  brought 
to  the  point  of  entire  extinction. 

I  have  not  found  thy  works  perfect  before  God.  tv^kKyipoh- 
fxivx,  from  7ta^o&>,  signifies  fulfilled,  satisfied,  completed, 
fully  administered,  Col.  iv.  17.  7rA*j£o'«,  omnes  officii 
partes  oheo.  Vide  Pasor.  It  often  refers  to  what  a  per- 
son has  promised  to  perform,  or  what  has  become  his  duty 
to  do  :  Scil.  rov  vouov,  the  law,  or  the  duties  of  an  office. 
These  words  0v  yelp  ivqvikm  gov  rcH  t^yd  ir nr Ky\^u> pivot 
should  therefore  be  rendered  thus  :  I  have  not  found  thy  of- 
fices fully  administered  before  God.  The  Lord  grants  that 
he  has  made  a  good  beginning,  but  not  continued  with  the 
same  zeal  and  faithfulness ;  he  charges  him  with  having 
performed  part  of  his  duty,  but  not  the  whole.  He  proba- 
bly hereby  refers,  both  to  the  whole  of  his  administration, 
as  the  ministry  of  the  Church,  and  to  his  guilty  negligence 
in  failing  to  succour  and  support  the  poor  Paulicians  in 
their  deep  distress.  Thus  he  stood  charged  on  the  book  of 
judgment  before  God,  against  the  great  day  of  final  retri- 
bution. 

Verse  3.  Remejnber  how  thou  hast  received  and  heard. 
Here  the  Lord  seems  to  remind  his  servants  of  their  ordi- 
nation, when  they  were  invested  with  the  standing  power, 
of  being  his  ministry  of  reconciliation  in  his  Church.  Bear 
it  always  in  your  mind,  says  he,  whose  servants  you  are, 
that  the  word  of  reconciliation  is  entrusted  to  you,  the  go- 
vernment of  the  Church  and  body  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  ora* 
cles  of  God,  1  Thess.  iv.  1.  2  Tim.  i.  13.  and  the  sealing 
ordinances  of  the  sacraments.    Remember  jro>$-,  how  you. 


CHAPTER  III.  1—6.  Ill 

and  your  predecessors  received  them  pure,  and  uncorrupt- 
ed,  out  of  the  hands  of  the  apostles,  as  you  have  heard  hy 
the  doctrine  of  others ;  hold  fast,  and  administer  them  af- 
ter their  example,  in  word,  in  conversation*  in  charity,  in 
spirit,  in  faith,  and  purity,  1  Tim.  iv.  12.  Repent,  and 
change  your  mind  where  you  have  deviated  from  the  form 
of  sound  words,  that  you  may  walk  in  order  to  please  God 
in  Christ  Jesus. 

If  thou  shall  not  watch,  I  will  come  on  thee  as  a  thief. 
Watchfulness  consists  in  a  careful  attention  to  whatever 
passes  in  the  world  without,  or  in  our  own  hearts  within 
us,  in  order  to  derive  advantage  from  it.  But  when  the 
Lord  requires  this  duty  of  his  ministry,  it  has  particular 
reference  to  the  enemies  and  obstacles  of  their  labours,  and 
the  prosperity  of  Zion.  This  is  the  case  here ;  and  the 
Lord  threatens  on  non-observance  of  this  duty,  that  he 
will  come  on  him  as  a  thief.  This  has  been  a  usual  expres 
sion  among  the  Eastern  nations  to  denote  an  unexpected 
calamity  or  judgment.  The  object  of  a  thief  is  not  strictly 
to  murder,  but  to  rob  us  of  our  property,  when  we  sleep  in 
security.  This  judgment  the  Lord  has  executed  on  the 
Eastern  churches,  by  the  amazing  victories  of  Genghiz- 
kan,  Tamerlane,  and  the  Turks.  The  last  of  these  en- 
tirely annihilated  the  Grecian  empire,  robbed  the  Chris- 
tians of  their  wealth,  treated  them  like  slaves,  loaded  them 
with  insupportable  taxes,  and  obliged  them  to  submit  to- 
many  vexatious  and  oppressive  laws  :  while  those  furious 
adventurers  almost  extinguished  the  religion  of  Jesus  in 
the  East.  This  dire  judgment  happened  between  the 
twelfth  and  fifteenth  centuries,  and  the  power  of  the  Turks 
has  continued  to  the  present  day. 

Verse  4.  Thou  hast  a  few  names  even  in  Sardis.  Ry 
ohtyoi  ovopottoty  a  few  names  or  persons,  we  may  un- 
derstand, single  ministers  of  the  gospel  among  the  many 
different  sects  in  the  Greek  Church,  who  remained  in 
union  with  that  ministerial  succession ;  and  a#so  those  an- 


112  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

cient  witnesses  of  the  truth,  whom  the  Greeks  called  Mas* 
mlians,  i.  e.  persons  that  pray.  Many  of  these  were  per-* 
Sons  of  eminent  piety,  and  zeal  for  genuine  Christianity, 
and  neither  enthusiasts  nor  heretics.  They  bore  a  loud 
testimony  against  the  vices  of  the  priesthood,  and  were 
therefore  treated  by  them,  either  with  derision  or  scorn., 
We  are  not  sufficiently  acquainted  with  the  history  of  the 
Eastern  church,  to  enter  into  many  particulars  on  this 
subject ;  but  even  their  enemies  at  times  acknowledged  the 
sincerity  of  their  piety  and  eminent  virtue.  The  Lord  ex- 
presses the  worth  of  their  heart  by  saying :  They  have  not 
defiled  the  garments  of  nheir  souls,  by  self-righteous- 
ness, or  the  pollutions  of  the  world ;  they  shall  walk  with 
me  in  white,  for  they  are  worthy.  This  is  a  special  pro- 
mise, made  to  them  only.     They  shall  walk  with  him. 

Verse  5.  He  that  overcometh  shall  be  clothed  in  white 
raiment.  The  promise  is  always  general,  and  refers  to  the 
whole  Church  and  its  faithful  members,  as  well  as  to  the 
ministry ;  on  condition  that  they  overcome  and  persevere 
in  the  great  conflict  unto  death.  The  white  colour  denotes 
holiness  and  victory,  and  a  white  vestment,  great  distinc- 
tion, and  privileges  in  the  world  to  come. 

I  will  not  blot  out  his  name  out  of  the  book  of  life.  It  was 
customary  with  the  monarchs  of  the  East,  to  have  the 
names  and  deeds  of  such  persons  recorded  in  a  book,  who 
had  done  great  and  eminent  service  to  their  persons,  or 
empire.  Est.  vi.  1.  To  such  a  record  in  heaven,  the 
Lord  seems  to  allude  in  this  place.  Persons  of  such  dis- 
tinguished services  were  entitled  to  particular  reward  or 
privileges,  such  as  office,  titles  and  dignity;  or  perhaps  the 
Lord  may  here  refer  to  the  registers  of  genealogy,  that 
were  kept  among  the  people  of  God  in  the  land  of  promise, 
by  which  on  their  return  from  Babylon,  they  proved  their 
titles  to  theij;  patrimony,  and  the  priests  to  the  priesthood. 
Ezra  ii.  62.  Those  whose  names  were  not  found  in  these 
registers,  had  forfeited  their  inheritance.    Under  this  las£ 


CHAPTER  III.  1— 6*  113 

allusion,  the  import  of  these  words  would  he,  that  the  Lord 
should  then  consider  and  reward  them  as  his  elect. 

The  Lord  will  confess  their  names  before  his  Father  and 
before  his  angels.  Heavenly  honour !  immense  reward ! 
When  they  were  yet  in  this  pilgrimage,  the  world  separat- 
ed and  reproached  them,  and  cast  out  their  names  as  evil ; 
but  then  the  Lord  will  mention  them  to  his  Father,  as  his, 
and  as  worthy  of  preferment  and  dignity.  Those  around 
them  on  earth,  often  insulted  and  mortified  them  while 
here — but  then,  the  angels  will  honour  and  exalt  them 
through  all  eternity* 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 

TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  PHILADELPHIA 

Verse  7.  And  to  the  angel  of  the  Church  in  Philadelphia 
write ;  these  things  saith  He  that  is  Holy,  He 
that  is  true,  He  that  hath  the  key  of  David,  He 
that  openeth,  and  no  man  shutteth ;  and  shut- 
teth>  and  no  man  openeth  ; 

8.  I  know  thy  works :  heliold,  I  have  set  before 

thee  an  open  door,  and  no  man  can  shut  it ;  for 
thou  hast  a  little  strength,  and  has  kept  my 
word,  and  hast  not  denied  my  name. 

9.  Behold,  I  will  make  them  of  the  synagogue  of 

Satan,  which  say  they  are  Jews,  and  are  not, 
but  do  lie ;"  behold,  I  will  make  them  to  come  , 
and  worship  before  thy  feet,  and  to  know  that  I 
have  loved  thee. 

10.  Because  thou  hast  kept  the  word  of  my  patience/ 
I  also  will  keep  thee  from  the  hour  of  tempta- 
tion, which  shall  come  upon  all  the  world,  to  try 
them  that  dwell  upon  the  earth. 

11.  Behold,  I  come  quickly:  hold  that  fast  which 

thou  hast,  that  no  man  take  thy  crown. 

12.  Him  that  overcometb  will  I  make  a  pillar  in  the 
temple  of  my  God,  and  he  shall  go  no  more  out; 
and  I  will  write  upon  him  the  name  of  my  God, 
and  the  name  of  the  city  of  my  God,  which  is 
New  Jerusalem,  which  cometh  down  out  of  hea- 
ven from  my  God  ;  and  I  will  write  upon  him 
my  new  name. 

1 3.  He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear  what  the  Spirit 

saith  unto  the  Churches. 


CHAPTER  III.  1—6.  115 

This  charge  is  given  to  the  new  succession  of  the  gos- 
pel ministry  in  the  Protestant  Church ;  which  is  called 
Philadelphia,  because  of  the  brotherly  love  that  subsists 
between  the  different  communities  belonging  thereto,  and 
their  unanimous  testimony  against  Popery  and  its  corrup- 
tions, both  in  doctrine  and  worship.  It  is  worthy  of  re- 
mark, that  the  different  names  of  these  seven  Churches, 
when  considered  according  to  the  meaning  of  the  primi- 
tive words,  of  which  they  are  composed,  are  all  expressive 
of  the  internal  state  of  these  Churches  at  their  distinct 
periods  of  time. 

1.  Ephesus,  signifies  ardent  desire  or  desirable,  and  ex- 
presses that  ardent  wish  and  zeal  of  the  Church  dur- 
ing the  apostolic  period,  to  extend  and  propagate  the 
Christian  religion,  and  her  amiable  and  lovely  char- 
acter in  the  sight  of  heaven. 

2.  Smyrna,  denotes  myrrh  or  bitterness,  and  in  pro- 
phetic language  is  an  emblem  of  persecution  and  suf- 
ferings, to  which  period  it  also  refers. 

,3.  Pergamos,  an  exalted  tower,  or  steeple.  This  was  the 
name  of  that  well  fortified  castle  at  Troja,  from 
whence  this  signification  originated ;  which  here  in- 
dicates that  firm  and  invincible  stand,  which  the 
Church  had  taken  from  the  time  of  Constantine  the 
Great. 

4.  Thyatira,  from -B-vu,  I  sacrifice,  and  tsi'^w,  I  cor- 
rupt, a  corrupted  sacrifice,  and  expresses  that  corrupt 
worship  of  God  introduced  by  Jezebel,  which  was 
not  a  sweet  savour,  but  the  offensive  smell  of  a  mor- 
tified offering  before  the  Lord. 

5,  Sardis,  from  the  Hebrew  word  Sarad,  to  remain, 
signifies  the  remainder,  the  residue.  After  the 
schism,  the  Greeks  were  under  the  proud  impression 
of  being  the  only  Church  of  Christ  left,  after  the 
great  conflict  with  Paganism  and  the  establishment 
of  Popery  among  the  Latins;  but  after  the  Mahome- 


m  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

dan  inundation  on  the  Eastern  part  of  the  Roman 
empire,  their  Church  became  a  remnant  indeed. 

6.  Philadelphia,  signifies  brotherly  love, 

7,  Laodicea,  signifies  judicature  of  the  people,  or  the 
rights  of  the  people;  because  in  that  Church  the  high- 
est authority  is  lodged  in  its  members,  who  rule  the 
Church  as  a  political  polity,  according  to  reason  and 
conveniency  of  circumstances.  Here  all  Ecclesias- 
tical discipline  and  Church  censure  is  lost. 

Verse  7.  He  that  is  hohj — is  true.  The  holy  one  of  Is- 
rael, Jer.  xlv.  11 ;  the  true  antitype  of  the  Jewish  high 
priest,  who  was  considered  the  most  holy  person  in  Israel, 
Exod.  xxviii.  36.  Among  all  the  sons  of  men  he  is  holy 
without  sin,  and  perfect  in  his  own  person.  He  is  the  real 
antitype,  in  whom  all  types  and  figures  of  the  old  covenant 
were  actually  fulfilled;  true  in  all  his  promises  to  his 
Churches— in  all  his  threatenings  to  his  enemies — The 
only  infallible  guide  through  the  dark  valley  of  this  world. 

He  that  hath  the  key  of  David.  By  this  expression  the 
Lord  refers  us  to  that  memorable  prophecy,  Jer.  xxii.  in 
which  the  prophet  foretells  the  final  doom  of  the  kingdom 
of  Israel  by  the  Assyrians.  Acc6rding  to  the  use  the  Lord 
makes  of  that  prediction  in  this  place,  Jerusalem  and  the 
land  of  Juda  denote  the  Christian  countries  in  Europe, 
and  Sebna,  the  proud  and  haughty  treasurer  over  the  kings 
house,  signifies  the  Pope  at  this  present  time;  who  abuses 
the  keys  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven  in  the  vilest  manner,  as 
Sebna  did  his  authority  in  Juda;  He  shall  be  violently 
turned  and  tossed  like  a  ball,  driven  from  his  station,  verse 
18,  19  ;  and  the  Lord  himself*  will  be  the  true  Eliakim, 
who  will  make  a  better  use  of  these  keys  to  the  castle  and 
royal  treasury  of  David,  than  he  has  done—And  what  he 
does  will  be  final. 

Every  year  on  a  certain  day,  the  Pope  assumes  the  pre- 
tended authority  of  his  chair,  and  pronounces  a  host  of 
reost  horrible  curses  and  anathemas  against  the  Protest 


CHAPTER  III.  7— 13.  W 

tants,  giving  them  over  to  the  devil  for  eternal  damnation, 
because  they  will  not  acknowledge  the  pretensions  of  his 
holiness.  The  poor  man  seems  to  be  ignorant,  that  the 
Lord  has  seven  Churches  in  one ;  though  no  doubt,  there 
are  also  seven  principal  parts  in  his  own  body,  from  which 
he  might  learn  wisdom.  Weak  children  of  God  might  be 
terrified  by  this  unchristian  and  audacious  conduct  of  the 
Roman  bishop;  the  Lord  therefore  comforts  them,  that  he 
has  the  key  to  the  heavenly  treasury,  and  that  the  tyran- 
nical anathemas  of  the  haughty  Popes  are  of  no  effect. 

Verse  8.    I  have  set  before  thee  an  open  door.     J'eJw^ 
£v«7nov,  might  be  rendered,  /  have  established  publicly  be- 
fore you  an  opened  door.     See  Eph.  i.  22.  and  Luke  xii.  9. 
where  $l$ay.i  signifies  to  constitute,  establish,  and  ivwirtov, 
publicly   before  an  assembly,  council,  or  diet.     Here  the 
Lord  refers  to  that  great  work  of  reformation,  which  was- 
begun  in  Germany  by  those  eminent  men  of  God,  Luther, 
Zwingel  and  Calvin,  in  the  year  1517.  Luther  stood  sin- 
gly before  that  grand  assembly  at  Worms,  A.  D.  1521 ; 
and  with  great  resolution  and  presence  of  mind  contended 
for  the  Word  of  God,  as  the  only  rule  of  faith.     At  the  diet 
of  Augsburg,  A.  D.  1530,  those  ministers  and  churches, 
which  had  embraced  the  evangelic  doctrine  of  Luther,  made 
that  famous  confession  of  faith,  by  which  the  Lutheran 
community  stands  distinguished  from  other  Protestant  so- 
cieties of  later  date.    A.  D.  1548,  the  Interim  was  agreed 
to,    and    1555,   on  the   25th  of  September,   the  Protes- 
tants obtained  legal  authority  for  the  free  exercise  of  their 
religion  in  Germany,  which  they  have  enjoyed  to  the  pre- 
sent day.     Thus  the  Lord  has  publicly  established  an  open 
door,  for  the  progress  of  the  Evangelic  doctrine,  and  fojp  an 
extensive  propagation  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus  among  many 
nations.     And  the  Protestants  did  not  want  for  zeal,  to 
enter  this  open  door.     The  light  of  the  reformation  soon 
spread  all  over  Germany,  Switzerland,  Sweden,  Denmark, 
Britain,  and  into  some  parts  of  France,  Bohemia,  Poland, 


1 1 8  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

and  the  Netherlands;  where  thousands  of  congregations 
have  since  been  established  in  unison  with  the  different 
Protestant  societies,  which  form  the  Church  of  Philadel- 
phia. 

Thou  hast  a  little  strength.  The  Protestants  are  but  a 
small  number,  in  comparison  with  the  many  Roman  Ca- 
tholic countries  and  kingdoms ;  but  yet  they  have  a  power 
and  they  will  retain  it  till  the  Lord  comes. 

Thou  hast  kept  my  word.  This  was  the  great  theme  of 
the  Protestant  Reformers  against  Popery  and  its  corrup- 
tions. No  traditions,  no  pretended  infallibility  of  the 
Pope,  or  the  fathers ;  the  word  of  Jesus  was  their  only  au- 
thority and  rule  of  faith,  of  worship  and  practice.  The 
Reformation  of  the  Church  rests  on  this  foundation,  this 
is  her  distinguisl i  mg  ch  aracter  from  Popery.  The  original 
is  not  KgciTiiv,  to  keep,  to  hold,  but  -rtjvsiv,  to  guard,  to  pre- 
serve, and  refers  to  the  Protestant  endeavours  to  defend 
the  authority  and  dignity  of  the  Word  of  God,  against  tra- 
ditions and  the  inventions  of  men. 

Hast  not  denied  my  name.  The  name  of  Christ  signifies 
in  this  place,  his  person  and  religion.  Never,  before  these 
last  fifty  years,  was  the  Protestant  Church  in  danger  of 
denying  the  Lord  Jesus,  or  his  religion.  The  Romish 
Church,.,  although  corrupted,  is  still  a  Christian  Church, 
in  which  souls  may  be  trained  up  to  eternal  felicity.  The 
Protestants  had  nothing  to  fear  from  Popery  in  that  res- 
pect. But  since  Voltaire,  Rosseau,  and  with  them  a  host 
of  French  infidels  began  to  write  against  religion — since 
the  Kantian  philosophy  has  become  the  fashion  of  to 
day — since  even  eminent  divines  have  begun  to  trace  out 
a  i%w  system  of  what  they  call  the  higher  exegesis,  for 
the  explanation  of  the  Scriptures ;  since  then  a  flood  of  in- 
fidelity has  overflown  all  Europe.  Even  Germany,  which 
by  the  blessed  reformation  had  become  the  fountain  of 
light  and  truth  to  other  countries,  and  was  since  that  time 
so  eminently  adorned  with  great  and  good  men  for  near 


CHAPTER  III.  7— 13.  112 

three  centuries,  has  lost  much  of  her  glory  hy  those  nume- 
rous Illuminati    and  other  infidel    societies   established 
among  all  ranks  of  her  inhabitants.   These  vain  pretenders, 
to  philosophy  have  not  yet  discovered  their  delusion — 
many  of  her  respectable  divines  have  still  neither  taste  nor 
relish  for  divine  truths — and  the  higher  ranks  consider  it 
a  condescension  to  read  any  thing  serious;  unless  it  comes- 
recommended  by  all  the  charms  of  wit   and  elegance. 
However,  there  still  are  many  thousand  respectable  and 
faithful  divines  in  the   Protestant   Church,   and  in    all 
her  distinct  fraternities,  of  which  she  consists ;  and  among 
the  middle  classes  of  society,  this  temptation  to  infidelity 
will  never  produce  any  great  effect.     Whatever  our  anti- 
cipation may  be  from  present  appearances  of  apostacy  in 
Europe  or  America^  the  Lord  may  thoroughly  purge  his 
floor ;  but  the  Protestant  Church  will  remain  firm  and 
faithful  in  the  confession  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  his  doctrines, 
till  he  comes. 

Verse  9.  i"  will  make  them  of  the  synagogue  of  Satan, ' 
come  and  worship  hefore  thy  feet.  These  words  are  not 
yet  fulfilled.  If  they  are  to  be  understood  in  their  natural 
meaning*  as  in  the  charge  to  the  angel  at  Smyrna,  pro- 
perly of  Jews;  then  the  Protestant  Church  during  the  fu* 
ture  persecution  by  the  adherents  of  Popery,  will  have  to 
expect  a  renewed  scene  of  Jewish  animosities,  as  of  old ; 
and  at  last  a  harvest  with  some  of  them.  This  sense  is  very 
probable.  But  if  we  are  to  take  these  words  as  being  of 
figurative  import,  they  may  imply  that  seme  of  the  great 
champions  of  infidelity  will  lay  down  their  weapons  of  un* 
righteousness  against  the  Church,  and  make  public  con- 
fession of  their  falsi  accusations  and  guilt.  It  has  often 
been  the  case  during  the  first  century  after  the  Reformation, 
that  those  who  falsely  called  themselves  members  of  the 
Church  of  Christ,  and  were  only  the  sycophants  of  the  Ro- 
mish Jezebel,  after  many  fallacious  and  perfidious  accusa- 
tions, made  public  acknowledgment  of  their  guilty  con- 


i20  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

duct  towards  the  Protestants,  and  became  converts  to  their 
faith.  And  we  may  now  expect  the  same  thing  of  the 
champions  of  modern  philosophy.  Truth  may  he  sup- 
pressed for  a  time,  but  her  own  internal  lustre  will  always 
again  discover  her  genuine  beauty ;  and  her  enemies  must 
at  last  feel  the  necessity  of  her  company,  and  own  her  ex- 
cellence. 

Verse  10.  Because  thou  hast  kept  the  word  of  my  pa- 
tience, I  also  will  keep  thee  from  the  hmr  of  temptation, 
vxopovy  ought  to  be  rendered,  expectancy,  or  patient 
expectation,  in  a  passive  sense  here,  [See  2  Thess.  iii.  5. 
1  Thess.  i.  3.]  so  as  to  refer  to  the  advent  of  Christ,  of 
which  the  Lord  also  speaks  in  the  following  verse.  The 
meaning  is :  Because  thou  hast  constantly  professed  the 
doctrine  [rovAoyov  J  concerning  my  coming  again  among 
you,  to  unite  all  my  Churches,  and  to  establish  my  king- 
dom of  everlasting  dominion,  in  which  all  powers  on  earth 
shall  serve  and  obey  me,  Dan.  vii.  Some  expositors 
however  have  taken  the  original  as  rendered  by  our  com- 
mon version,  and  understood  the  doctrine  of  his  sufferings 
for  the  sins  of  the  world,  in  which  he  has  taught  us,  how 
to  exercise  patience  in  taking  up  our  cross  to  follow  him, 
Math.  xvi.  24.  To  both  these  points  of  doctrine  the  Pro- 
testant Church  has  borne  a  constant  testimony,  though 
more  explicitly  and  unanimously  to  the  last — and  we  here 
see,  her  conduct  in  that  respect  meets  the  entire  approba- 
tion of  the  Lord ;  for  both  these  doctrines  greatly  tend  to 
the  glory  of  Christ,  and  the  prosperity  of  his  kingdom. 
Patience  and  constancy  until  the  mystery  of  God  be  fin- 
ished, is  now  more  necessary  to  the  followers  of  Christ, 
than  ever. 

In  consideration  of  this  proof  of  faithfulness,  the  Lord 
promises  them  a  great  reward.  I  will  also  keep  thee  from 
the  hour  of  temptation,  which  shall  come  upon  all  the 
world.  When  are  we  to  expect  this  great  temptation,  and 
in  what  will  it  consist  ?  In  my  opinion  this  momentous  trial 


CHAPTER  I1L  7— 13*.  ml 

has  already  commenced,  and  will  consist  in  the  following 
particulars. 

I.  That  general  propensity  and  natural  aptness  in  the 
present  disposition  of  the  Christian  world  towards  infide- 
lity vand  the  illustration  of  natural  truths,  without  all  refer- 
ence to  God  or  his  word.  This  indeed  is  the  spirit  of  our 
times,  in  which  unbelief  in  Christ  has  increased  to  an 
alarming  degree,  and  like  the  dragon  in  the  Revelation, 
has  drawn  the  third  part  of  the  stars  of  heaven,  and  cast 
them  to  the  earth.  The  effects  already  produced  are  por- 
tentous. The  public  apostacy  of  a  great  and  polished  na- 
tion, glorying  in  the  abominations  of  her  own  hands ;  the 
public  avowal  of  Deism  and  even  Atheism*  by  many  in 
every  Christian  country,  who  dare  to  treat  Christianity  as  a 
mere  kind  of  fanaticism  in  open  conversation,without  ablush 
or  check  of  conscience ;  the  multiplicity  of  books,  writ- 
ten in  open  or  concealed  defiance  of  the  religion  of  Christ, 
and  in  language  and  style,  adapted  to  all  classes  and  ranks 
of  society ;  these  are  the  dire  effects  of  the  above  mention- 
ed propensity,  and  the  sad  prognostics  of  an  hour  of  temp," 
tation,  never  yet  experienced  by  the  Church  o£  Christ. 

II.  The  present  torrent  of  revolutionary  politics,  per- 
vading all  ranks  of  civil  society,  has  greatly  deranged  the 
affairs  of  the  political  world;  as  infidelity,  its  fountain 
head,  is  certainly  the  first  cause  of  all  moral  degeneracy 
and  confusion.  It  has  brought  about  a  general  neglect  of 
family  worship,  and  of  vital  religion,  by  which  a  due  sense 
of  our  obligations  towards  God  and  the  civil  authority,  is 
chiefly  nourished ;  and  introduced  such  an  indifference  to 
all  religion,  as  even  to  sap  the  foundation  of  civil  society, 
and  make  man  attempt  his  rights  and  liberties  in  a  state 
of  nature.  This  is  the  true  fountain  of  that  greedy  and. 
insatiable  desire  after  liberty  and  the  rights  of  man, 
which  even  now  divides  America,  scourges  Europe,  and  is 
about  to  produce  a  fermentation  in  Asia  and  Africa,  as  far 
as  civilization  extends.    This  is  the  true  spirit  of  temwtar 


122  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

item  to  civil  discontent,  luxury,  pride,  envy  and  avarice — 
it  is  Satan  transformed  into  an  angel  of  light. 

III.  A  new  revival  of  Popery  by  the  power  of  tlie  se- 
cond beast  from  the  earth,  Rev.  xiii.  11 — 17.  which  will 
instigate  a  most  sanguinary  persecution  against  the  Pro- 
testants, and  against  all  those  who  refuse  to  worship  t!e 
first  beast,  or  his  image.  The  chief  points  of  this  pro- 
phecy are  not  yet  fulfilled,  but  their  accomplishment  is  near 
at  hand.  Our  eyes  may  behold  those  abominations,  and 
our  hearts  will  bleed  for  our  brethren  in  Europe.  Many 
will  fall  a  sacrifice  to  Papal  vengeance ;  and  more  will 
prove  unfaithful  to  their  Lord,  and  worship  the  beast. 

IV.  This  hour  of  temptation  will  be  completed  by  the 
ascension  of  the  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit,  and  that 
train  of  unparalleled  calamities  and  tyranny,  which  then 
ensues.  Though  the  element  already  exists,  in  which  this 
beast  shall  live,  move,  and  have  its  being ;  the  beast  itself 
has  not  yet  assumed  the  reins  of  government,  and  probably 
will  not  come  into  full  view  yet  for  a  time. 

Upon  all  the  world.     \%)  tJjV  ofoovpivvg   sometimes  sig 
nifies  only  the  Roman  empire.  See  Luke  ii.  1.  Acts  xi.  28. 
But  it  appears  to  me,  this  temptation  will  be  of  far  greater 
extent,  because  its  circumference  is  immediately  after  re- 
peated by  the  expression,  "  upon  the  earth." 

To  try  tJiem  that  dwell  upon  the  earth.  This  manner  of 
expression  generally  denotes  worldly  minded  and  carnal 
men,  who  live  as  if  tiiis  world  was  their  only  home.  This 
temptation  therefore  will  not  only  concern  the  children  of 
God,  it  will  befall  the  children  of  tlie  world  also,  whether 
they  be  Jews,  Turks,  Pagans  or  Christians. 

also  will  keep  thee.  During  this  intense  and  general 
trial  of  the  civilized  world,  the  Lord  promises  to  preserve 
his  gospel  ministry  in  the  Protestant  Church.  He  as  the 
true  Eliakim,  hath  taken  tlie  key  to  the  strong  hold  of 
David  (2  Sam.  v.  7.)  on  Mount  Zion,  from  tlie  Roman 
Sebna,  Jer.  xxii.  19— -22.  where  he  will  afford  them  pro- 


CHAPTER  III.  f— 13  123 

"tec lion  against  the  Assyrians,  when  that  scene  of  misery 
and  danger  commences.-  Wherever  this  strong  hold  may 
be,  in  the  Kast  or  West,  the  whole  figure  indicates  a  flight 
to  a  place  of  safety  and  union,  not  so  \cry  distant,  and 
within  the  limits  of  the  former  encampment  of  the  Church. 

Verse  11.  Behold  J  come  quickly.  This  then  is  the  last 
conflict  which  we  shall  have  to  sustain.  Its  length  is  call- 
ed an  hour,  i.  e.  a  determinate  space  of  time  in  the  coun- 
cils of  heaven.  It  may  he  short  in  comparison  with  the 
times  of  the  three  woes  in  the  Itevclation  \  but  it  will  appear 
very  long  to  all  the  children  of  God.  During  this  dark 
hour,  we  shall  often  walk  sad  and  troubled,  like  his  disci- 
ples to  Emmaus,  and  ask  one  another :  will  our  long  ex- 
pected king  not  soon  make  his  appearance  again  among 
his  oppressed  and  persecuted  followers  ?  It  is  impossible 
that  he  should  leave  or  forsake  us,  and  yet  he  has  now 
been  silent  for  eighteen  centuries — and  that  is  long.  Might 
he  not  give  us  at  least  one  visible  token,  to  comfort  our 
hearts  and  cheer  our  souls  in  this  burning  desert  ?  Our  ea- 
ger eyes  have  often  looked  for  the  appearance  of  the  morn- 
ing star,  and  the  prognostics  of  the  great  day  of  his 
Church;  but  we  have  hitherto  discovered  little  of  his  ap- 
proach. To  this  lamentation  the  Lord  here  answers  :  be 
comforted  my  children,  the  honr  is  now  arrived,  behold,  I 
come  quickly  for  your  complete  and  glorious  deliverance. 
Hold  that  fast  which  thou  hast,  in  these  times  of  apostacy 
and  political  confusion.  I  cannot  expect  you  to  make  great 
progress  in  your  journey  among  rocks  and  cliffs,  in  this 
dark  and  dreary  night,*  only  take  heed  that  you  may  not 
forfeit  your  crown  of  victory,  which  I  have  already  allot- 
ted as  your  reward. 

Verse  12.  Him  that  overcomdh  will  I  make  a  pillar  in 
the  temple  of  my  God.  Great  is  the  promised  reward — but 
the  conflict  has  been  tremendous  too,  which  the  faithful 
combatant  had  to  sustain,  and  for  which  it  is  offered.  The 
ronnuerors  in  Philadelphia  shall  be  a  pillar  in  the  temple 


124  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

of  God.     This  temple  is  not  in  New  Jerusalem,  but  previ- 
ous to  it ;  for  the  name  of  the  city  of  God  shall  be  written 
upon  this  pillar,  as  a  token  of  their  citizenship  there,  when 
it  shall  come  down  from  heaven.    This  temple  denotes  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  during  the  Millennium,  in  which 
the  faithful  Protestant  ministry  shall  be  one  of  the  pillars, 
to  support  the  inside  work  of  the  House  of  God,  i.  e.  they 
shall  superintend  the  priesthood  and  the  whole  govern- 
ment of  the  Church  during  that  glorious  period.     In  what 
#11  this  noble  administration  will  then  consist,  time  will 
exhibit.     The  Lord  mentions  a  second,  and  remarkable 
use  of  this  pillar :  he  will  write  upon  it  three  different 
names,  the  name  of  God,  the  name  of  New  Jerusalem,  and 
the  name  of  Christ.    It  was  an  ancient  custom  to  decorate 
the  pillars  of  temples  and  Churches  with  coats  of  arms, 
and  trophies  of  signal  victories ;  or  even  to  inscribe  the 
names  and  celebrated  deeds  of  great  and  good  men  on  their 
most  conspicuous  parts,  for  the  information  of  attending 
spectators.     In  allusion  to  this  custom,  the  Lord  promises 
the  faithful  Phil*lelphians,  that  he  will  make  them  a  stand- 
ing ministry  in  his  future  Church,  to  declare  the  great 
deeds  and  ways  of  God  with  the  nations  on  earth ;  the  con- 
flicts and  triumphs  of  Christ  in  his  Church ;  the  civil  and 
ecclesiastic  constitutions  of  New  Jerusalem;  in  order  to 
acquaint  them  with  their  duties  in  that  Theocracy,  or 
royal  priesthood,  which  will  be  established  on  earth  dur- 
ing the  tylillennium.    He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear. 


A  PASTORAL  CHARGE 
TO  THE  ANGEL  AT  LAODICEA. 


Verse  14.  And  unto  the  angel  of  the  Church  of  the  Lao- 
diceans  write ;  these  things  saith  the  Amen, 
the  faithful  and  true  Witness,  the  beginning  of 
the  creation  of  God. 

15.  I  know  thy  works,  that  thou  art  neither  cold 
nor  hot :  I  would  thou  wert  cold  or  hot. 

16.  So  then  because  thou  art  lukewarm,  and  neither 
cold  nor  hot,  I  will  spue  thee  out  of  my  mouth. 

17.  Because  thou  sayest,  I  am  rich,  and  increased 
with  goods,  and  have  need  of  nothing;  and 
knowest  not  that  thou  art  wretched,  and  miser- 
able, and  poor,  and  blind  and  naked. 

18.  I  counsel  thee  to  buy  of  me  gold  tried  in  the 
fire,  that  thou  mayest  be  rich,  and  white  rai- 
ment, that  thou  mayest  be  clothed,  and  that  the 
shame  of  thy  nakedness  do  not  appear ;  and 
anoint  thine  eyes  with  eye-salve,  that  thou 
mayest  see. 

19.  As  many  as  I  love,  I  rebuke  and  chasten ;  be 
zealous,  therefore,  and  repent. 

20.  Behold,  I  stand  at  the  door  and  knock :  If  any 
man  hear  my  voice,  and  open  the  door,  I  will 
come  into  him,  and  will  sup  with  him,  and  he 
with  me. 

21.  To  him  that  overcometh  will  I  grant  to  sit  with 
me  in  my  throne,  even  as  I  also  overcame,  and 
am  set  down  with  my  father  in  his  throne. 

22.  He  that  hath  an  ear,  let  him  hear  what  the  Spi- 
rit saith  unto  the  Churches. 


126  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

There  is  a  remarkable  difference  in  the  title  of  this  an- 
gel, by  which  he  is  in  a  singular  manner  distinguished 
from  those  in  the  foregoing  charges.  They  are  all  address- 
ed thus  :  The  angel  at  Ephcsus,  Smyrna,  Pcrgamos,  &c. 
but  here:  The  angel  of  the  Church  of  ike  Laodzccans ;  by 
which  the  Lord  seems  to  indicate,  that  this  succession  of 
the  gospel  ministry  are  less  his  servants,  than  in  any  of 
the  former  Churches,  and  more  immediate] y  the  dependent 
servants  of  the  people — which  perhaps  is  a  chief  cause  of 
their  deplorable  spiritual  condition.  The  different  man- 
ner of  expression,  however,  refers  more  immediately  to 
the  Church,  over  which  this  angel  presides.  She  is  called 
the  Church  of  the  Laodiseans,  where  in  the  former  charges 
only  the  places  are  mentioned,  in  which  those  Churches 
are,  and  Jesus  Christ,  as  the  owner  of  them,  understood  ; 
as  if  the  Lord  attributed  her  existence  as  a  separate 
Church,  more  to  the  hands  of  men,  than  to  his  own  wise 
and  all  disposing  Providence — for  which  reason  he  could 
not  fully  own  her  as  his  Church.  This  idea  also  receives 
considerable  support  from  the  signification  of  her  name, 
Laodicea,  which  word  being  composed  of  AjtoVaud  <Mc»j, 
signifies  the  right,  jurisdiction  and  judgment  of  the  people, 
and  thus  expresses  the  internal  state  of  this  Church,  in 
which  the  Church  government  is  lodged  in  the  hands  of  the 
members,  who  judge  and  are  judged. 

It  no  less  imports  us  to  ask,  why  only  the  members  of 
this  Church  are  not  mentioned  in  one  body,  as  those  In  the 
other  charges.  All  the  former  are  entitled :  the  Church 
at  Ephesus,  Smyrna,  &c.  he.  but  this  in  the  plural  number 
thus:  the  Church  of  the  Laodiceans.  I  have  seen  Gries- 
back's  variation  here:  \v  XaoSiwu  ix-KA^la?,  but  it  ap- 
pears to  me  not  sufficiently  supported ;  neither  does  it  so 
well  accord  with  the  spirit  and  internal  state  of  this 
Church,  as  the  reading  in  the  common  Greek  text.  We 
dare  not  suspect  a  play  of  words,  or  an  inadvertent  lapse 
of  the  pen,  when  the  Lord  speaks — there  certainly  is  a  rea- 


CHAPTER  III.  14—22.  127 

son  for  this  change.  In  my  opinion  this  maimer  of  expres- 
sion indicates,  that  this  Church  consists  of  many  small  ho- 
dies  of  Christians,  which  have  separated  from  the  other 
Churches,  where  each  body  .governs  itself  independently 
of  the  rest,  though  according  to  the  same  mind  and  princi- 
ples, by  which  alone  they  stand  united.  However,  the 
Lord  still  regards  her  teachers  as  his  ministry,  and  the 
united  number  of  their  societies  or  congregations,  as  his 
Church.  Their  creed,  therefore,  must  yet  be  orthodox, 
at  least  as  to  essential  points  of  doctrine  :  for  by  Atheism, 
or  Deism  in  their  confession,  they  would  totally  forfeit  the 
name  of  being  a  Church  of  Christ.  Though  there  appears 
to  be  but  a  slight  connexion  at  first  between  the  different 
bodies,  of  which  this  Church  consists,  when  the  whole  of 
what  has  been  said,  is  taken  into  consideration  ;  yet  time 
and  circumstances  will  induce  at  least  the  ministry,  to 
draw  the  cords  of  union  more  to  a  point. 

Terse  14.  The  Amen.  This  is  a  Hebrew  word,  and 
Eftoheei  Amen,  signifies  the  God  of  truth.  Jer.  Ixv.  16.  It 
also  has  the  sanction  of  an  oath,  Deut.  xxvii.  and  then  its 
imp  rt  is,  that  all  the  words  to  which  it  refers,  shall  most 
assuredly  be  fulfilled.  In  this  last  signification,  our  blessed 
Lord  often  uses  it  in  the  Evangelists,  where  we  read  in 
English :  "  Verily,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,"  as  a  solemn 
oatli  of  assurance,  annexed  to  those  truths,  which  solely 
rest  on  his  authority.  By  declaring  himself  the  Amen 
then,  we  arc  solemnly  assured,  that  he  himself  will  fulfil 
all  the  promises  of  God  to  man. 

The  fiithful  and  true  vvit:;,ess.  He  is  called  the  faithful 
witness,  because  he  has  testified  the  whole  truth  of  God  to 
man  ;  and  true,  because  he  declared  nothing  but  the  truth 
in  the  name  of  his  Father  on  earth*  and  sealed  it  with  his 
blood.  Jer.  Iv.  4.  He  was  a  witness  indeed,  who  brought 
the  truth  with  him  from  heaven,  the  Logos  of  God,  none 
knew  it  as  well  as  he,  for  he  is  the  truth  himself  to  all  eter- 
nity. Reader  attend  to  his  testimony,  it  is  worthy  of  all 
regard. 


12S  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

The  beginning  of  the  creation  of  God.    Not  principium 
passivum,  as  if  He  himself  was  the  first  of  all  created  be- 
ings, but  principium  activum,  from  whom  all  created  be- 
ings received  existence.     Col.  i.  16.     Psalms  cii.  26.  27. 
Heb.  ii.  2.     A^^,  the  beginning,  signifies  the  first  foun- 
tain, author  or  origin,  and  is  a  word  of  great  import  among 
the  ancient  Orientals.     The  beginning  of  creation  denotes 
the  first  opening  and  entrance  of  the  ground-plot  to  all  ex- 
istence; and  in  progressive  life,  to  higher  degrees.     Jill 
things  were  made  by  Him;  and  without  Sim  was  not  any 
thing  made  that  was  made.    John  i.  3.     The  Zend  Avesta 
of  Zoroaster,  according  to  Mr.  Jlnquetil  du  Perron's trans- 
lation, T.  iii.  p.  800.  670.  697.  conceives  the  most  inward 
principle  of  all  creation  to  be  life,  and  cosmogony,  a  refining 
or  clarifying  of  light  into  life.     The  life  of  the  earth,  sun> 
trees,  animals  and  men,  are  only  so  many  different  de- 
grees of  clarified  light  into  life,  which  in  its  highest  degree 
of  refinement  is  the  image  of  God  in  the  souls  of  holy,  chari- 
table and  good  men.     God  dwelled  from  eternity  in  his 
fullness  of  uncreated  light,  and  revealed  himself  by  the 
Logos  in  the  creation  of  the  Universe,  who  there  was  the 
fountain-head  of  the  life  and  light  of  angels  and  men.. 
These  are  the  noble  ideas  of  the  ancient  Persians,  whom 
we  call  Heathens.     What  a  difference  between  their  exalt- 
ed conceptions  of  the  Logos  of  God,  and  those  low  and  de- 
grading assertions  of  self-idolizing  infidels  in  our  days? 
They  shall  rise  in  judgment,  and  condemn  them  with  all 
their  deluded  followers. 

Verse  15.  I  know  thy  works.  I  have  inspected  thy 
offices,  and  the  nature  and  spirit  of  their  administration* 
My  judgment  differs  widely  from  your  boasting  congratu- 
lations, by  which  you  console  yourselves  to  your  own  des- 
truction. You  are  utterly  mistaken  in  the  general  characr 
ter  of  your  administration. 

Thou  art  not  cold.  Thou  art  not  entirely  ignorant  of  the 
tilings  of  the  spirit  of  God,  not  totally  a  stranger  to  mat- 
ters of  a  divine  nature :  not  a  Jew,  Heathen  or  Infidel, 


CHAPTER  IIL  14—22.  120 

JVbr  hot  As  boiling  water  is  penetrated  by  the  parti- 
cles of  heat,  thus  should  our  souls  be  occupied  by  the  power 
of  Godliness  in  faith,  love  and  charity,  through  the  opera 
tions  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 

/  would  thou  wert  cold  or  hot.  Thou  couldst  sooner  be 
recovered,  and  my  sentence  on  thee  would  be  less  terrible* 
Luke  xii.  47.     2  Pet.  ii.  21. 

Verse  16.  Thou  art  lukewarm.  Not  an  Infidel,  an  An- 
tichrist, nor  a  Christian.  By  this  expression  the  Lord 
refers  to  the  whole  administration  of  all  his  offices.  Luke- 
warmness  in  the  ministry  of  a  Church  may  be  compre- 
hended under  the  three  following  heads  : 

I.  When  they  fall  into  such  gross  errors  and  miscon*- 
ceptions,  as  to  neglect  preaching  the  peculiar  doctrines  of 
the  Christian  religion.  These  essential  points  are  the  doc- 
trine of  the  Holy  Trinity  of  persons  in  the  undivided  God- 
head ;  the  incarnation  of  the  Son  of  God  ,•  the  expiation  of 
the  sin  of  the  world  by  the  Redeemer's  sufferings  and 
death ;  the  efficacy  of  his  intercession ;  the  necessary  co- 
operation of  the  Holy  Ghost,  in  order  to  become  expert 
mentally  acquainted  with  the  Spirit  and  vital  influence  of 
religion,  spreading  itself  over  all  the  powers  of  men's  souls, 
and  quickening  them  into  a  divine  life ;  together  with  the 
intimate  union,  between  God  and  the  believer's  soul* 
When  the  ministry  of  a  Christian  society  ceases  to  be  evan- 
gelical— when  their  sermons  are  thus  divested  of  the  genu- 
ine spirit  and  savour  of  Christianity,  which  alone  produces 
vital  heat,  nourishes  the  soul,  and  quickens  the  spirit ;  then 
such  a  ministry  is  lukewarm — it  is  like  a  dying  man,  in 
whom  the  incapacitated  principle  of  life  has  given  way,  to 
the  cold  hand  of  chilling  death. 

II.  When  their  sermons  are  reduced  to  mere  moral 
essays  without  scriptural  motives,  or  instruction  from 
whence  the  hearer  is  to  obtain  the  power,  and  necessary 
disposition  of  heart,  to  perform  those  duties  and  virtuous 
actions,  which  are  impressed  on  his  conscience.    Our  pro* 


130  REVELATION  OP  ST.  JOHN, 

per  office  is  to  preach  the  word  of  reconciliation  to  a  world 
of  offending  and  ungrateful  sinners ;  to  propound  the  terms 
of  peace  and  pardon  to  the  penitent;  to  open  the  fountain 
of  light  and  life  on  their  souls ;  administer  medicine  to  the 
sick :  and  wholesome  refreshment  for  the  thirsty  and  pant- 
ing soul.  When  therefore  a  ministry  make  the  'practice  of 
religion  their  sole  subject  of  public  discourse,  and  even 
turn  apes  of  Epictetus,  or  the  Stoics,  under  a  Christian  garb, 
as  if  the  illiterate,  or  common  people  wanted  capacity  to 
comprehend  the  great  mystery  of  Godliness ;  sueh  abody  of 
nominal  divines  is  lukewarm,  and  might  with  the  same  jus- 
tice bear  any  other  name,  as  well  as  that  of  a  Christian 
ministry. 

III.  When  their  manner  of  life  and  conversation  is  void 
of  that  sweet,  mild,  humble  and  loving  spirit  of  Jesus, 
which  like  the  morning  sun,  spreads  a  heavenly  lustre 
upon  all  the  actions  of  good  men,  and  animates  them  at  all 
times  to  cultivate  those  two  grand  principles  of  Christiani- 
ty— piety  to  God,  and  charity  to  man.  A  ministry  of 
Jesus,  without  vital  and  experimental  religion,  is  a  curse 
to  the  land.  Zech.  xi.  1 6.  He  that  is  not  with  me  is 
against  me,  and  cannot  gather,  but  scatters  and  destroys. 
Luke  xi.  23.  They  follow  their  office  as  a  profession,  come 
abroad  one  day  in  seven,  dressed  in  solemn  looks ;  and  all 
the  rest  of  the  week  their  social  intercourse  and  personal 
conduct  is  in  open  contradiction  to  the  spirit  of  the  gospel. 
They  are  of  the  world,  and  court  favour  with  the  world, 
that  they  may  enjoy  her  pleasures;  they  confide  in  human 
learning  and  knowledge,  more  than  in  the  illumination 
from  above. 

I  xvill  spue  thee  out.  As  a  nauseating  morsel,  which  ex- 
cites disgust  and  vomition.  Wo  to  that  soul  against  which 
the  Lord  has  such  a  great  aversion  !  its  final  doom  must  be 
dreadful !  This  expression  denotes,  that  the  Lord  will  dis- 
own this  succession  of  Ins  ministry  when  he  comes,  and 


CHAPTER  III.  14—23.  133 

reject  them  with  contempt  and  indignation.  This  is  the 
signification  of — iy,\$<u — in  the  original. 

Verse  17.  Because  thou  say  est,  I  am  rich,  and  increased 
with  goods,  and  hare  need  of  nothing,  hkyta  here  should  be 
rendered  to  teach,  to  preach,  Math,  xxiii.  9.  to  declare  pub- 
licly, 2  Cor.  ix.  3.  Heb.  ix.  11.  Math.  iv.  14.  R,ev.  iii.  9. 
Math.  xiii.  14.  These  three  sentences  contain  those  pe- 
culiar points  of  doctrine,  which  the  ministry  of  the  Laodi- 
ceans  inculcate,  and  by  which  they  stand  distinguished 
from  the  Philadelphians,  as  a  separate  Church.  I  am  rich: 
Man  is  not  in  a  depraved  and  fallen  condition  by  nature — 
there  is  no  such  a  thing  as  original  sin.  The  image  of 
God  has  never  been  defaced  in  the  human  soul — he  is 
suited  to  his  state  and  place,  as  perfect  as  he  ought  to  be  in 
the  gradation  of  the  whole  chain  of  rational  beings.  All 
the  vices  and  corruptions  in  the  world  derive  their  origin 
from  education  and  the  necessary  circumstances  of  our  ex- 
istence here.  Our  modern  metaphysicians  have  now  ex- 
pldred  the  ocean  of  the  human  soul,  and  probed  all  its  fa- 
culties, to  the  bottom.  Reason  is  a  pure  and  unsullied 
light ;  the  will  of  man  is  not  alienated  from  the  life  of 
God;  our  affections  are  not  estranged  by  nature;  and 
conscience  is  the  mere  child  of  education.  This  is  the 
comment  on  the  above  sentence :  /  am  rich  ;  which  seems 
to  refer  solely  to  their  general  course  or  drift  of  doctrine 
concerning  the  natural  capacities  and  dignity  of  man. 

/  am  increased  with  goods.  Man  is  fully  sufficient  to 
make  himself  virtuous — it  only  requires  a  firm  and  steady 
resolution  of  being  so  ',  and  of  this  resolution  he  himself 
is  master,  at  his  own  pleasure.  As  all  our  disorders  are 
not  the  effects  of  sin,  but  consequences  of  our  limited  na- 
ture ;  all  evil  inclinations  may  be  overcome  by  reason, 
without  the  grace  and  assistance  of  God.  Our  happiness  is 
in  our  own  power,  and  we  may  change  our  habits  and  dis- 
position, by  a  mere  philosophic  use  of  the  natural  and 
Christian  means  in  hand.    What  great  progress  have  we 


132  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

not  made  in  arts  and  sciences,  in  civilization  and  polite- 
ness !  To  what  a  great  degree  of  illumination  has  the  hu- 
man mind  arrived  since  the  days  of  the  Reformation  !  Su- 
perstition is  turned  out  of  doors— -the  wings  of  fanaticism 
and  enthusiasm  will  now  soon  be  sufficiently  clipped.  We 
soon  will  have  a  rational  body  of  exegetic  rules,  for  a  more 
reasonable  explanation  of  the  Bible,  and  are  already  fur- 
nished with  means  sufficient  to  determine  the  flowers  of 
Hebrew  poetry,  and  the  bold  flights  and  fire  of  oriental 
genius.  Blessed  be  God !  we  now  say  little  more  of 
Creeds,  or  Confessions  of  Faith ;  our  province  is  the  prac- 
tice and  moral  part  of  religion.  Whether  the  people  be- 
lieve one  God  or  twenty  Gods,  that  will  neither  pick  my 
pocket,  nor  break  my  leg.  These  are  just  inferences  and 
a  true  explanation  of  the  words :  I  am  increased  with 
^oods,  and  have  need  of  nothing;  by  which  the  Lord  re- 
fers to  their  boasting  of  acquired  abilities  in  science,  reli- 
gion and  virtue. 

And  know  est  not  that  thou  art  wretched,  and  miserable, 
&nd  poor,  and  blind,  and  naked.  You  are  most  egregiously 
deceived— full  of  self-conceit  and  vain  presumption,  says 
the  Lord ;  your  real  condition  is  quite  the  reverse,  of  what 
you  conceive  yourself  to  be,  or  to  possess.  Your  boasted 
metaphysics,  and  essays  on  human  understanding  are  like 
a  transmigrating  soul  among  the  ancients,  which  in  every 
generation  assumed  a  new  body,  and  in  essence  always  re- 
mained the  same.  Your  endeavours  to  model  the  princi- 
ples of  exegetical  theology  after  this  meteor  of  so  transit- 
ory a  nature,  can  only  serve  to  confuse  and  perplex  divini- 
ty, in  order  that  others  may  again  disentangle  and  sim- 
plify it  from  your  heterogeneous  wisdom,  which  is  fool- 
ishness before  God.  You  boast  of  superior  illumination 
in  Divine  things  by  the  help  of  reason  and  philosophy,  like 
a  blind  man  of  sight.  The  empire  of  reason  can  never  be 
extended  beyond  the  limits  of  the  material  world ;  and 
that  inward  illumination  from  above,  by  which  alone  spirit- 


C3APTERIII.  14—22.  133 

ual  things  can  be  discerned,  is  not  your  present  portion. 
1  Cor.  ii.  14. 

All  your  fine  moral  discourses  upon  virtues  and  vices, 
without  scripture  motives,  and  the  whole  system  of  re- 
demption, will  never  win  one  soul  to  Christ  and  his  hea- 
venly kingdom.  You  act  the  part  of  a  foolish  physician  at 
the  side  of  a  sickbed,  who  would,  without  administering 
wholesome  and  effective  medicines,  prescribe  exercise  to  a 
dying  man,  professional  employment  to  the  sick,  and  diet 
where  all  appetite  is  lost.  Would  not  an  intelligent  patient 
in  that  case  answer :  Doctor,  this  is  reversing  your  pro- 
per order  of  proceeding;  first  cure  my  disease,  and  your 
prescriptions  shall  be  implicitly  obeyed.  Such  a  preacher 
of  mere  morals,  separates  what  God  has  united,  and  com- 
plies only  with  half  his  commission  to  the  world — he  builds 
the  fabric  of  a  mill,  but  neglects  to  bring  the  water  to  run 
upon  the  wheel,  which  is  to  put  the  whole  machine  in  mo- 
tion. Practical  holiness  is  the  great  end  of  religion,  and 
faith  is  the  means — it  would  be  folly  to  expect  this  end, 
without  the  use  of  means  in  a  proper  manner.  Not  mere 
morality,  but  vital  religion  is  the  chief  good  of  man,  and. 
this  also  is  the  principal  aim  of  an  Evangelical  preacher  in 
all  his  sermons.  These  only  are  the  sermons,  which  the 
Lord  has  ever  blessed  to  rescue  immortal  souls  from  perdi- 
tion into  the  arms  of  Jesus,  and  to  nourish  them  unto  eter- 
nal life.  For  man  is  radically  corrupted,  and  his  restora- 
tion must  begin  from  the  heart.  A  minister,  therefore, 
without  vital,  personal  religion — sermons,  thus  void  of  the 
genuine  spirit  and  savour  of  Christianity — the  private  and 
public  conversation  of  such  a  moralist,  in  the  garb  of  a 
pastor  of  Christ's  flock,  without  the  unction  from  above, 
are  indeed  wretched,  and  miserable,  and  poor,  and  blind, 
and  naked. 

Verse  18.  /  counsel  thee  to  buy  of  me  gold  tried  in  the 
fire.  Here  the  Great  Counsellor  from  heaven  advises  the 
manner,  how  this  angel  may  recover  himself  from  his  der 


134  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

plorable  condition.  He  was  defective  in  three  material 
points,  being  poor.,  blind  and  naked;  and  in  this  wretched 
and  miserable  state,  cold,  insensible,  and  full  of  self-con- 
ceit, as  if  he  wanted  nothing.  In  order  to  his  recovery 
from  these  three  distempers,  the  Lord  recommends  the  fol- 
lowing means:  1.  Pure  and  most  refined  carat  gold, 
against  his  poverty — 2.  White  raiment,  against  his  spirit- 
ual nakedness — 3.  Eyesalve,  to  cure  the  philosophical  cat- 
aract of  his  eyes.  As  his  poverty  consisted  in  a  total  defi- 
ciency of  divine  knowledge,  and  his  imaginary  riches,  in  a 
presumption  that  he  knew  all  things  that  pertain  to  his  sta- 
tion in  the  Church ;  this  pure  and  most  rejined  gold  must  de- 
note the  illumination  and  unction  from  above,  by  which  the 
Holy  Spirit  of  God  teaches  his  friends  knowledge  and  wis- 
dom unto  salvation.  Without  this  illumination  we  rely  en- 
tirely on  our  own*  reason,  and  often  explain  away  the  doc- 
trine of  grace — we  only  understand  the  Word  of  God  by 
nature,  and  not  by  grace;  by  human  learning,  but  not  by 
the  secret  inspirations  of  the  Holy  Ghost ;  by  reason,  but 
not  by  love  ;  the  outward  letter,  but  not  the  secret  of  the 
Spirit,  or  that  which  is  spiritually  discerned,  and  which 
alone  nourishes  the  vital  principle  of  eternal  life  in  the  soul 
of  man. 

White  raiment,  is  the  righteousness  of  saints,  Rev.  xix. 
8 ;  even  the  imputed  righteousness  of  Jesus  Christ,  Jer.  xi. 
10.  which  we  obtain  by  faith.  For  the  Laodicean  morality 
is  self-righteousness,  and  the  filthy  rags  of  a  beggar ;  in 
which  we  shall -for  ever  be  indigent,  ashamed,  and  in  ever- 
lasting contempt  before  the  citizens  of  the  kingdom  of  God. 
These  we  are  to  buy,  i.  e.  to  receive,  Jer.  lv.  1.  for  where- 
with will  a  poor  man  buy  gold,  and  costly  raiment  to  cover 
his  nakedness  ?  But  it  will  cost  all  our  imaginary  riches. 

And  eyesalve.  This  denotes  a  true  and  impartial  self- 
examination,  by  which  we  look  inwardly,  and  take  an  in- 
teresting view  of  the  present  state  of  our  heart,  respecting 
God  and  our  fellow  creatures.    Of  this  eyesalve  the  min- 


CHAPTER  III.  14—22.  13J 

istryofthe  Laodiceans  stand  very  much  in  need.  They 
are  totally  ignorant  of  the  real  state  of  their  mind  and 
heart,  and  what  is  still  worse,  full  of  self-flattery  and  de- 
ceit. Unconvinced  of  their  ignorance  in  the  things  of  the 
Spirit,  of  the  weakness  and  iln worthiness  of  their  corrupted 
heart,  they  never  seriously  inquired  into  the  health  of  their 
soul,  with  any  solicitude  for  grace  and  illumination  from 
above,  in  order  to  restore  them  to  Divine  life,  and  to  reli- 
gious sensibility.  Thus  they  administer  the  holy  offices  as 
a  profession,  without  devotion  and  zeal  for  the  temple  of 
Jesus — without  solicitude  for  the  salvation  of  souls — with- 
out a  good  and  Christian  example  in  their  conversation 
and  behaviour — and  without  prayer.  Gracious  Lord ! 
Can  thy  servants  so  far  forget  themselves,  as  to  devote 
their  ministry  to  the  service  of  the  enemy  of  mankind,  and. 
lead  those  very  souls  to  perdition,  whom  they  are  appoint- 
ed to  save,  and  whom  thou  hast  redeemed  by  thy  precious 
blood! 

Verse  19.  Jls  many  as  Hove,  I  rebuke  and  chasten.  By 
this  expression  the  Lord  mitigates  the  severity  of  the 
above  censure,  and  enlivens  their  hope  of  recovery.  You 
are  not  all  sunk  to  the  very  brink  of  destruction;  there  are 
yet  many  among  you,  whom  I  love  with  tender  compas- 
sion, and  therefore  take  them  into  my  school  for  a  better 
education,  (Ihiyx60  %0^:  nouJtvai)  that  they  may  learn  to 
know  sin  and  God.  This  discipline  consists  in  the  vital 
operations  of  his  Spirit  on  our  hearts  in  affliction.  A  se- 
vere illness,  a  great  loss,  a  disappointment,  the  death  of  a 
beloved  patent,  consort,  child,  or  friend,  have  often  re- 
claimed a  prodigal  son  to  submit  to  the  vital  influence  of 
Divine  grace,  in  order  to  his  restoration.  Into  this  school 
of  discipline  I  will  take  you,  saith  the  Lord — therefore  be- 
ware of 'grieving  or  quenching  my  Spirit;  but  be  zealous, 
and  repent,  before  it  be  too  late. 

Verse  20.  Behold,  I  stand  at  the  door  and  knock.  Here 
the  Lord  seems  to  speak  of  revivals  of  religion,  and  spe- 


136  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

cial  seasons  of  grace  in  the  Church  of  the  Laodiceans, 
which  however  are  not  Drought  about  by  the  instrumen- 
tality of  her  ministry,  but  by  different  servants  of  Jesus 
Christ,  with  whom  he  is  particularly  present,  and  blesses 
their  labours.  By  the  zealous  labours  of  these  select  ser- 
vants, the  Lord  himself  stands  at  the  door  of  the  Laodicean 
Church;  and  to  the  outward  tender  of  grace  in  the  gospel, 
annexes  an  inward  offer  of  his  Divine  influence  on  the  mind 
and  heart  of  the  hearers,  sufficient  for  their  conversion,  if 
not  resisted.  Whosoever  these  special  servants  of  the 
Lord  may  be,  they  seem  to  have  a  particular  aim  at  the 
Laodicean  ministry  in  all  their  labours,  in  order  to  rouse 
them  from  their  state  of  lukewarmness  and  spiritual  insen~ 
sibility;  by  which  no  doubt,  they  will  bring  many  reflec- 
tions and  perhaps  persecution  on  themselves.  However, 
they  are  the  arm  of  the  Lord,  and  the  Gospel  of  Christ  is 
the  hammer,  by  which  these  harbingers  of  good  tidings 
knock  against  the  door  of  the  Laodicean  temple,  so  as  to 
shake  and  resound  through  the  whole  edifice,  in  order  to 
communicate  the  blessing  entrusted  to  them.  For  the 
Laodiceans  have  drunk  deeply  of  the  narcotic  potion,  and 
are  not  easy  to  rouse  from  their  lethargy,  except  by  effec- 
tive means.  They  may  stigmatize  these  instruments  as 
intruders,  and  disturbers  of  their  peace  ;  but  if  they  open 
the  door,  and  give  ear  to  their  message,  the  servants  of 
the  Lord  may  expect  a  cordial  welcome. 

Iwill  come  in  to  Mm,  and  will  swp  with  himf  and  he  with  me. 
Those  who  try  to  improve  this  season  of  grace,  (for  it  ap- 
pears to  be  the  last  one,  immediately  before  the  great  con- 
flict of  the  Church,  and  the  second  advent  of  Christ,)  are 
here  promised  a  blessing  of  immense  value,  even  to  sup 
with  the  Lord.  These  words  do  not  properly  refer  to  the 
sacrament  of  the  Lord's  supper,  but  to  that  intimate  union 
and  familiarity,  which  believers  enjoy  with  Christ  in  those 
halcyon  times,  and  seasons  of  grace,  when  the  Holy  Ghost 
shall  prepare  the  lamp  of  their  souls  for  a  day  of  solemn 


CHAPTER  II.  14— 22.  13? 

rejoicing  in  the  arms  of  Jesus.  The  blessed  prognostics  of 
such  a  season,  are,  as  in  single  persons,  so  in  a  congrega- 
tion, town,  city  or  country,  a  remarkable  attention  to  the 
preaching  of  the  word,  and  to  all  the  means  of  grace ;  a 
peculiar  serenity  in  the  minds  of  the  people,  to  discern  spi- 
ritual things ;  a  notable  fervency  and  punctuality  in  the 
performance  of  all  religious  duties ;  glowing  sentiments  of 
Christian  piety  and  general  benevolence,  in  which  the  mind 
endeavours  to  soar  high  above  nature,  to  the  gate  of  eter- 
nal felicity,  which  the  lukewarm  would  call  enthusiasm,, 
and  bless  themselves  for  their  moderation.  Whosoever 
shall  see  these  signs  of  the  Son  of  Man,  let  him  under- 
stand. 

It  was  an  ancient  custom  among  the  Orientals,  to  make 
friendly  suppers,  in  order  to  enjoy  and  exhilarate  each 
other,  and  as  a  token  of  particular  regard  to  their  friends. 
The  Eastern  sages  would  meet  on  such  occasions  from  far 
and  near,  in  order  to  communicate  to  each  other  their 
knowledge  and  discoveries  in  the  physical  and  moral 
world,  and  in  regard  to  religion.  These  were  hours  of  ex- 
alted pleasure  and  enjoyment — favours  of  a  superior  kind^ 
and  by  this  emblem  the  Lord  here  represents  his  seasons 
of  special  grace  and  spiritual  union  with  his  Church,  and 
the  divine  visitations  to  his  pastors,  in  which  he  discovers 
himself  in  all  the  loveliness  of  his  character,  and  illumin- 
ates the  path  of  their  ministry,  when  they  begin  to  travel 
in  weariness  through  the  valley  of  this  world. 

i"  will  sup  with  Mm,  and  he  with  me.  The  accomplish- 
ment of  the  20th  verse  comprises  a  considerable  time  in 
the  Church,  and  these  words  appear  to  have  an  immediate 
reference  to  that  great  and  glorious  marriage-supper  of 
the  Lamb,  recorded  in  chapt.  xix.  9.  by  which  the  Lord  is 
about  to  gladden  and  overjoy  his  faithful  followers  at  his- 
second  advent.  We  are  now  transported  with  joy  un- 
speakable, and  full  of  glory,  when  the  Lord  discovers  him- 
self to  our  souls,  in  ajl  his  loving  kindness—we  feel  his 

s 


138  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

presence,  the  vital  influence  of  his  spirit,  and  rejoice  ii! 
his  praise  and  the  salvation  of  the  world,  to  the  full  satis- 
faction of  our  heart.  But  at  that  glorious  feast  of  the 
Lamb,  our  souls  will  be  all  pure,  all  love,  all  peace,  all 
joy,  and  reach  the  source  of  all  excellence,  which  no  lan- 
guage can  describe.  New  fountains  of  knowledge,  of  spi- 
ritual pleasure  and  happiness  will  be  opened  unto  us — a 
never  yet  experienced  intimacy  with  Christ  and  his 
Church,  which  will  render  us  as  blessed  as  it  is  possible  to 
become  in  this  world.  But  these  words  indicate  a  double 
feast :  The  Lord  sups  with  his  friends,  and  enjoys  their 
faith,  love  and  vital  hope  ;  and  the  believers  enjoy  him,  as 
their  wisdom,  righteousness,  sanctification  and  redemp- 
tion. 1  Cor.  i.  30.  Rom.  xiv.  17.  Blessed  are  they 
which  are  called  to  this  feast  of  the  Lamb. 

Verse  21.  To  him  that  overcometh  will  t  grant,  to  sit 
with  me  in  my  throne.  It  is  remarkable  that  the  Laodi- 
cean conquerors  are  here  promised  a  more  glorious  re- 
ward, than  any  of  the  faithful  combatants  in  the  former 
charges.  Those  at  Thyatira  are  to  have  power  over  the 
nations,  and  will  be  employed  abroad  in  the  king's  ser- 
vice ;  the  Philadelphians  are  to  superintend  the  priesthood 
and  the  government  of  the  Church :  those  at  Sardis  are  to 
be  employed  at  court,  the  temple,  and  in  new  offices  to  be 
established  in  church  and  state ;  but  the  Laodiceans  are 
to  be  ministers  of  the  interior  affairs  of  state,  which  still 
denotes  a  higher  honour,  more  abilities  and  confidence, 
than  any  of  the  former  promises.  But  they  are  also  de*. 
serving  of  a  superior  reward,  for  their  conflict  was  greater 
and  more  severe. 

A  throne  denotes  royal  authority  and  government.  This 
emblem  refers  to  a  custom  of  the  ancients,  who  made  their 
thrones  wide  atid  spacious,  so  that  more  than  one  person 
could  sit  on  them.  They  shall  sit  with  the  King  of  kings, 
and  Lord  of  lords,  on  one  and  the  same  throne,  and  parti- 
cipate in  his  government,  as  hjs  ministers  of  interior  afr 


CHAPTER  III.  14—22.  139 

fairs  in  that  kingdom,  which  he  is  ahout  to  establish  on 
earth  during  the  Millennium.  Dan.  vii.  This  is  the  high- 
est honour,,  and  next  to  being  the  bride  of  the  Lamb. 

The  Laodicean  conquerors  have  stood  the  day  which 
tried  men's  souls.  They  entered  the  field  of  battle,  where 
all  the  powers  of  darkness,  which  had  fought  by  separate 
detachments  in  former  centuries,  pitched  their  general 
camp  and  place  of  rendezvous — -where  the  remnants  of 
Paganism  in  church  and  state,  superstition,  infidelity,  the 
revolutionary  spirit  of  anarchy,  liberty  and  egotism,  made 
a  united  and  last  attack  on  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ, 
which  is  to  decide  her  fate  on  earth  forever.  We  may  an- 
ticipate important  effects  from  the  most  vigorous  efforts  of 
the  enemy  of  mankind,  in  the  execution  of  a  plan,  which 
has  cost  him  centuries  of  consideration  and  artifice,  and 
whereof  the  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit,  the  true  Anti- 
christ, is  both  the  first  result,  and  chief  instrument. 

Even  as  I  also  overcame,  and  am  set  down  with  my  Fa- 
ther in  his  throne.  Here  the  Lord  evidently  distinguishes 
between  his  throne  and  the  throne  of  his  Father,  as  two 
distinct  and  separate  governments.  He  was  exalted  to 
the  throne  of  his  Father,  in  his  human  nature,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  conquest  he  made  by  his  victorious  suf- 
ferings for  the  redemption  of  the  world.  The  throne  of 
his  Father  denotes  the  government  of  the  Universe, 
and  his  throne  the  government  of  Jesus  Christ  in  this 
sublunary  world — the  theatre  of  his  redeemed  family, 
which  the  Father  has  given  him  as  his  own  inheritance. 
As  the  Father  has  exalted  the  Redeemer  of  the  world  in 
his  manhood  to  his  throne,  in  order  to  accomplish  the  di- 
vine purposes  of  His  eternal  councils;  so  the  Lord  Jesus 
promises  to  exalt  the  faithful,  victorious  combatants  in 
Laodicea,  to  the  administration  of  his  government  in  this 
lower  world.     Blessed  communion  !  unspeakable  honour  ! 

He  that  hath  an  ear  among  the  Laodiceans,  let  him  hear 
what  the  Spirit  of  Jesus  Christ  saitfi  in  the  Churches. 


140  REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

It  will  now  be  an  easy  matter,  by  the  help  of  such  strong 
features  and  distinguishing  characteristics,  which  the 
Lord  has  placed  before  us,  to  decide  that  grand  question, 
who  these  Laodiceans  are.  Let  us  take  a  retrospective 
view  of  this  Church  and  place  all  the  principal  features, 
which  the  Lord  has  described  as  distinguishing  character- 
istics, at  once  before  our  eyes.     They  are  represented, 

I.  By  their  very  name  as  a  people  which  hold  the  su- 
preme power  of  their  rights,  jurisdiction,  and  judg- 
ment, in  their  own  hands ;  which  may  refer  both  to 
their  mode  of  civil  and  church  government. 

II.  By  being  called  the  Church  of  the  Laodiceans  in  the 
plural  number,  as  consisting  of  many  distinct  parties 
who  yet  have  a  common  tie  by  which  they  stand 
united  as  a  Church. 

III.  As  a  Church  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  one  of  the  seven 
candlesticks,  by  which  her  orthodoxy,  at  least  as  to 
essentials  is  acknowledged,  though  she  has  added 
many  things  of  her  own,  for  which  reason  she  is  also 
denominated  the  Church  of  the  Laodiceans. 

IV.  The  gospel  ministry  of  this  Church  is  lukewarm  i\\ 
all  its  administration.  They  neglect  the  peculiar 
doctrines  of  the  gospel,  which  are  the  life,  Jire  and 
savour  of  Christianity,  and  preach  ingenious,  flowery 
discourses  on  morality,  supported  by  philosophical 
arguments  and  motives,  which  only  appear  to  advan- 
tage m  such  writings  as  those  of  Seneca,  Cicero, 
or  the  Stoics. 

V.  This  ministry  is  unsound  in  certain  points  of  doc- 
trine concerning  the  depraved  and  fallen  condition 
of  man,  and  the  absolute  necessity  of  God's  grace  in 
his  restoration  and  recovery  unto  divine  favour  and 
gospel  obedience. 

VI.  There  are  revivals  of  religion  among  them,  of  a 
new  and  distinguished  kind,  by  which  the  Lord  in  a 
special  and  powerful  manner  knocks  at  the  door  of 


CHAPTER  III.  14—22.  141 

•     their  temple.     Many  are  roused  to  a  sense  of  their 
danger,  and  turn  victorious  combatants  in  the  great 
conflict,  then  pending  between  the  Lord  Jesus  and 
the  powers  of  darkness,  concerning  the  very  exis- 
tence and  duration  of  the  Church  of  Christ. 
VII.  Since  the  whole  series  of  these  seven   Churches 
arises  in  succession,  the  following  from  the  preced- 
ing one  immediately  before  it,  we  shall  therefore 
have  to  look  for  these  Laodiceans  amongthe  Protes- 
tant communities,  who  are  the  precedent  Church  of 
Philadelphia.    It  cannot  be  the  Romish  church,  for 
that  is  a  hierarchy ;  it  cannot  be  the  Greek  church, 
because  Philadelphia  did  not  proceed  from  her ;  it 
j    cannot  be  the  whole  Protestant  church,    for  that 
exists  prior  to  it,  and  is  promised  to  remain  till  the 
Lord  comes.     Neither  does  it  denote  those  infidel 
societies  in  Europe,  who  during  this  time  of  falling 
away,  have  made  public  confession  of  Deism  and 
infidelity ;  for  they  are  far  beneath  the  character  of 
a  Church  of  Christ  at  all,  and  have  forfeited  their 
eternal  inheritance.     My  tremulous  mind  feels  itself 
unequal  to  the  decision.     The  Protestant  communi- 
ties in  England  and  America  will  determine  the1 
question,  who  these  Laodiceans  are — and  who  are 
their  ministry ;  whether  they  refer  to  the  Russian 
church,  or  to  themselves. 
These  seven  charges  constitute  the  first  part  of  the  Re- 
velation of  Jesus  Christ  to  his  servants,  in  which  they  re- 
ceive instruction,  censure,  and  comfortable  promises,  con 
cerning  those   times  and  circumstances  in  which  these 
churches  exist,  and  how  they  should  conduct  the  adminis- 
tration of  their  offices,  as  becoming  a  Christian  ministry. 
I  cannot  close  these  charges  of  Jesus  Christ.the  great  Shep- 
herd and  Bishop  of  souls,  to  his  gospel  ministry,  by  any 
thing  more  suitable  and  impressive,  than  the  following 
words  from  MassiHon's  charges  to  his  clergy :  «  But  th£ 


UZ     -"    REVELATION  OF  ST.  JOHN. 

Church  is  not,- God  be  praised !  disgraced  by  many  of  so 
profligate  a  character :  jet  it  cannot  be  dissembled  that 
there  are  some,  who,  by  their  lukewarmness  in  religion, 
or  their  attachment  to  the  world,  weaken  the  efficacy  of 
their  ministry.  For  not  keeping  alive  in  their  breasts  the 
spirit  and  the  grace  of  their  calling,  by  prayer,  by  medita- 
tion, by  a  life  of  sanctity  and  holiness,  they  have  neither 
power  nor  inclination  to  speak  of  the  things  of  God.  They 
perform  the  duties  of  their  sacred  function  without  zeal, 
and  without  interest,  and  by  consequence,  without  a  bles- 
sing :  they  pronounce  the  most  awful  and  affecting  truths 
with  an  indifference  and  insensibility  which  deprive  them 
of  all  their  force;  the  coldness  of  their  heart  freezes  the 
words  on  their  tongue ;  and  it  is  not  possible  that  they  can 
inspire  their  hearers  with  the  ardor  of  religion,  the  divine 
fire  of  the  love  of  God,  when  they  do  not  feel  a  single  spark 
of  it  in  their  own  breasts.  For  we  must  apply  our  leisure 
to  meditation,  and  engage  our  heart  in  piety,  if  we  would 
expatiate  on  the  holiness  of  the  gospel,  with  glory  to  God, 
and  edification  to  our  hearers ;  if  we  would  inspire  those 
who  violate  its  precepts  with  a  dread  of  God's  displeasure, 
if  we  would  persuade  them  to  avert  his  wrath,  and  secure 
his  favour.  Hence  it  is,  that  where  "  holiness  to  the  Lord9* 
is  not  eminently  conspicuous  in  the  life  and  conversation 
of  the  ministers  of  the  gospel,  many  people  depart  from  the 
service  of  the  Church,  unconcerned  for  their  sins,  and  in- 
different about  their  salvation  :  hence  the  preaching  of  the 
gospel  without  success,  the  prayers  of  the  Church  without 
avail,  all  the  ordinances  of  religion,  and  all  the  means  of 
salvation  imedify.ing  and  unserviceable  to  Christians," 


THE 


SECOND  SERIES 


OF 


PROPHECIES. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


The  Apocalypse  may  be  divided  into  two  parts,  each  of 
Which  contains  a  Series  of  Prophecies  comprising  many 
centuries.  The  first  part  commences  with  a  general  pre- 
face to  this  Book,  and  a  special  Introduction  to  that  glori- 
ous appearance  of  Jesus  Christ  contained  in  the  first  chap- 
ter. After  which  the  Lord  reveals  the  lineage  of  his 
Church  on  earth,  and  the  succession  of  his  gospel  ministry, 
down  to  his  second  Advent  at  the  beginning  of  the  Millen- 
nium. This  and  the  following  chapter,  contain  a  more  im- 
mediate Introduction  to  a  new  order  of  Prophecies,  upon  a 
more  general  scale,  which  in  part,  runs  on  parallel  to  the 
former  series,  and  constitutes  the  main  body  of  the  Reve- 
lation. 

With  the  explanation  of  this  chapter,  expositors  begin 
their  digression  from  each  other,  according  to  their  dif- 
ferent favourite  systems.  Some  treat  this  vision  theosophic- 
ally,  and  view  these  images  as  objects  of  the  invisible 
world.  Others  remain  in  the  field  of  history,  and  explain 
it  symbolically,  as  concerning  the  Christian  dispensation. 
The  pious  prelate  Bengelius  and  professor  Yung,  con- 
sider it  as  the  theatre,  from  whence  the  invisible  powers  in- 
terfere in  the  scenes  on  earth,  and  direct  the  great  and 
eventful  occurrences  in  church  and  state.  It  no  doubt 
deserves  the  attentive  inquiry  of  the  scholar,  and  the  most 
acute  investigation  of  able  divines,  since  it  is  a  synopsis  of 
so  many  partial  discoveries,  made  to  the  prophets  and  men 

T 


146  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

of  God  in  former  ages,  and  contains  an  aggregate  of  ob= 
jects,  to  which  we  meet  with  such  numerous  allusions  both 
in  the  Old  and  New  Testaments.  Before  I  enter  on  the 
explanation  of  this  chapter,  I  presume  it  necessary,  to 
make  a  few  general  remarks  for  the  benefit  of  common 
readers,  to  which  I  shall  often  refer  in  the  body  of  this 
treatise,  and  which  will  at  once  decide  my  lot,  as  to  the 
tenor  of  this  exposition. 

I.  This  vision  is  an  emblematical  representation,  and 
not  a  direct  and  immediate  view  of  heavenly  objects,  as 
they  appear  in  the  celestial  regions.  We  all  know, 
that  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  on  earth  is  not  a  natural 
woman,  adorned  with  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars — that  the 
old  Roman  empire  was  not  a  dragon — that  Popery  is  not 
a  beast  with  seven  heads,  and  ten  horns.  These  are  all 
symbols  of  a  large  and  comprehensive  import,  customary 
in  prophetic  language.  But  there  certainly  is  something 
in  the  accomplishment  of  these  predictions,  which  really 
resembles,  aud  truly  corresponds  with  those  images,  by 
which  they  are  identified.  Thus  in  the  vision  before  us, 
there  surely  is  no  book  of  paper  or  parchment  in  heaven- 
no  material  throne ;  Christ  does  not  appear  there  in  the 
form  of  a  Lamb,  as  slain — nor  the  Holy  Ghost  in  the  shape 
of  seven  lamps  of  fire.  But  there  is  undoubtedly  some- 
where a  true  resemblance  and  correspondent  reality  of 
these  lofty  figures  in  the  accomplishment  of  this  vision,  by 
which  they  are  fully  authorized,  and  properly  realized  t© 
the  conviction  of  the  human  mind. 

II.  It  is  not  the  object  of  this  vision  to  represent  celes- 
tial beings  in  their  spiritual  nature.  The  sole  purport  of 
these  sublime  symbols  is,  to  paint  characters,  offices,  ac- 
tions, judgments  and  blessings,  as  they  exist,  or  were  to 
be  brought  about  by  Providence.  The  reason  for  this  pro- 
position is  self-evident.  Because  such  are  the  limits  and 
extent  of  human  understanding  in  our  present  state  of  ex- 
istence, that  we  are  utterly  incapable  of  acquiring  any 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  14' 

knowledge  of  the  spiritual  nature  of  immaterial  beings,  as 
they  essentially  are.  Hi  things  supernatural  and  divine, 
our  knowledge  must  at  all  times  remain  very  imperfect 
and  limited.  For  even  all  matter  of  revelation  from  God 
to  man,  can  only  be  made  to  us,  in  form  of  human  ideas, 
and  according  to  our  manner  and  capacities  of  forming 
conceptions ;  (fro  nostro  concipiendi  modo,J  otherwise  no 
human  mind  would  be  able  to  receive,  or  understand  it. 
God  alone  inhabits  eternity,  and  possesses  an  infinite 
knowledge  of  all  things  at  once ;  but  we  live  in  time,  and 
think  by  detached  ideas,  and  in  succession  of  thought.  It 
would  even  be  absurd  to  suppose,  that  a  being  consisting 
of  body  and  spirit,  so  closely  united,  should  be  susceptible 
of  purely  sensitive,  or  purely  spiritual  ideas ;  when  it  is 
evident  that  the  faculties  and  operations  of  a  pure  spirit 
must  be  very  different,  from  those  of  a  spirit  so  essentially 
united  with  a  body.  Moreover,  all  our  materials  of  thought 
are  derived  either  from  sensation  or  reflection;  but  things 
immaterial  and  supernatural  are  generically — toto  genere — 
different — « Siv  kq-n  rav  qvtuv — from  what  we  are  able  to 
form  conceptions  of  in  our  present  state.  Our  real  know- 
ledge of  these  things  depends  altogether  on  figurative  ex- 
pressions, taken  from  sensible  objects  in  nature,  and  their 
resemblance  to  things  in  the  intellectual  world ;  and  on 
analogy  between  the  faculties,  operations,  and  perfections 
of  the  human  mind,  which  was  formed  after  the  image  of 
God,  and  their  correspondent  reality  and  true  resemblance 
to  the  nature  of  things  in  heaven.  Hence  all  our  know- 
ledge of  God  and  the  nature  of  a  future  world,  is  only  re- 
lative and  analogous ;  and  we  have  no  perceptions  of  the 
things  of  God,  as  they  are  in  themselves.  1  Cor.  ii.  IS. 
We  only  know  in  part,  and  prophecy  in  part.  1»  C  n\  xiii. 
9  ;  we  walk  by  faith,  and  not  by  sight.  2  Cor.  v.  7,  We 
only  see  through  a  glass  into  an  enigmatical  word,  which 
expresses  spiritual  things  by  terms  of  sensible  objects,  and 
not  face  to  face,     1  Cor.  xiii,  12.    And  when  Paul  was 


148  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

caught  up  to  a  view  of  heaven  and  paradise,  the  words 
which  he  heard  were  unspeakable  in  human  language,  and 
unlawful  for  man  to  utter.  £  Cor.  xii.  4. 

III.  Yet  all  our  knowledge  of  God  and  a  future  world, 
which  we  have  acquired  in  this  way,  from  the  works  of  na- 
ture, of  Providence,  and  from  Revelation,  is  no  less  true 
and  real,  though  it  is  relative  and  analogical.  1.  Because 
man  was  created  in  the  image  of  God,  and  hence  we  are1 
certain,  that  there  is  a  real  resemblance  and  a  true  corres- 
pondency between  the  faculties,  perfections  and  operations 
of  the  human  soul,  and  the  infinite  perfections  of  the  divine 
nature  of  God.  Though  his  attributes  are  incomparably 
greater,  than  all  similar  faculties  in  man;  yet  they  must 
be  of  the  same  nature.  For  otherwise,  how  could  we  be 
exhorted  to  imitate  them  ?  or  how  could  our  conceptions  of 
them  be  true  ?  2.  Because  we  are  formed  to  the  absolute 
necessity  of  this  kind  of  knowledge  concerning  God  and 
the  invisible  world ;  and  we  are  certainly  made,  to  know 
and  serve  our  Maker.  3.  Because  God  has  revealed  him- 
self in  this  way  to  man  in  his  word,  in  which  he  expresses 
his  infinite  attributes,  his  nature,  and  actions,  by  terms 
indicative  of  the  actions  and  faculties  of  the  human  soul; 
and  the  immaterial  objects  of  the  intellectual  world,  by  the 
names  of  things  in  this  world — and  He  certainly  cannot 
deceive  us.  For  this  purpose  he  exalted  the  minds  of  his 
servants  to  those  uncommonly  majestic,  and  sublime  hiero- 
glyphics, formed  of  such  refined  and  precious  substances, 
which  of  all  others  in  nature,  bear  the  nearest  resemblance 
and  relation  to  things  divine  and  supernatural.  And  these 
lofty  images  also  indicate  the  nearest  approach  of  the  hu- 
man mind  to  objects  of  the  invisible  world,  and  the  utter- 
most extent  of  reason,  in  that  kind  of  knowledge.  Though 
the  faculties  of  our  souls  are  capable  of  great  cultivation 
and  improvement,  and  even  possessed  in  very  different  de- 
grees by  many  persons ;  yet  they  are  every  where  bounded 
by  the  same  limits,  as  to  objects  of  an  immaterial  and  di^ 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  149 

vine  nature.  The  doctrine  of  a  central  faculty,  or  of  a  se- 
cret principle  of  truth,  hy  which  our  views  could  be  ex- 
tended beyond  the  rational  powers  of  our  minds,  into  a  di- 
rect and  immediate  prospect  of  the  immaterial  world,  is 
certainly  the  production  of  a  disturbed  brain.  It  would 
even  be  absurd  to  contend,  that  the  minds  of  prophets  had 
been  exalted  by  the  Almighty,  so  as  to  be  capable  of  a  di- 
rect and  immediate  view  of  God,  or  an  adequate  knowledge 
of  the  spiritual  world ;  for  that  would  have  made  them 
equal  to  infinite  perception.  After  these  remarks  I  will 
now  attempt  to  explain  this  vision. 

In  my  opinion,  this  and  the  following  chapter  should  be 
considered  after  the  manner  of  the  mystical  allegory,  or 
double  prophecy  of  the  .Old  Testament :  1 .  As  an  emblema- 
tical representation  of  the  Church  of  God  in  all  ages,  and 
of  the  gradually  increasing  alliance,  and  relation  between 
Him  and  his  people,  especially  under  the  Christian  dis- 
pensation.    2.  As  a  prophetic  delineation  of  the  form  of 
Christ's  kingdom  during  the  Millennium.     In  common 
prophecy  the  primitive  meaning  of  the  words  is  dropped, 
and  the  figurative  only  is  retained  :  but  in  this,  the  figura- 
tive sense  requires  an  increasing  completion,  until  all  the 
features  of  the  whole  image  are  identified,  and  placed  be- 
fore the  eyes  of  the  Church  at  one  entire  view. 
Verse  1.    After  this  I  looked,  and,  behold  !    a  door  was 
opened  in  heaven  :  and  the  first  voice  which  I 
heard  was  as  it  were  of  a  trumpet  talking  with 
me;   which  said,  Come  up  hither,   and  I  will 
thee  tilings  which  must  be  hereafter. 

2.  And  immediately  I  was  in  the  Spirit :  and  be- 
hold J  a  throne  was  set  in  heaven,  and  one  sat 
on  the  throne. 

3.  And  he  that  sat  was  to  look  upon  like  a  jasper 
and  a  sardine  stone :  and  there  was  a  rainbow 
round  about  the  throne,  in  sight  like  unto  an 
emerald. 


150  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

Thus  opens  the  great  theatre  of  heavenly  visions,  to 
which  the  holy  seer  St.  John  was  raised  hy  a  second  ec- 
stacy.  The  Lord  Jesus  raised  the  curtains,  and  the 
Churches  beheld  the  most  exalted  and  interesting  scenes — - 
the  tabernacle  of  God  with  men.  How  marvellous  is  his 
loving  kindness,  in  discovering  such  divine  things  to  mor- 
tal man  !  Let  earth  and  heaven  raise  one  chorus,  to  mag- 
nify his  name. 

Verse  2.  I  was  in  the  spirit.  St.  John  had  returned 
from  his  first  vision,  where  he  beheld  Christ  in  the  midst 
of  the  golden  candlesticks,  with  seven  stars  in  his  right 
hand,  in  order  to  write  the  seven  charges.  His  mind  was 
now  again  withdrawn  from  all  visible  objects,  and  fixed 
by  the  command  of  a  clear,  loud,  and  sonorous  voice,  as  of 
a  trumpet ;  so  that  it  appeared  to  him,  as  if  his  soul  was 
transported  into  heaven,  where  he  beheld  the  profound 
mysteries  of  eternity. 

A  throne  was  set  in  heaven.  There  certainly  is  no  throne 
in  heaven,  upon  which  God  should  sit.  A  throne  is  an  em- 
blem of  power,  authority  and  government.  This  throne 
denotes  the  supreme  dominion,  which  God  exercises  over 
the  world  in  his  Church.  It  is  not  the  eternal  throne  of 
his  Godhead,  from  which  he  gives  laws  to  the  Universe  ; 
but  that,  which  was  set  at  the  creation,  in  establishing 
his  Church  on  this  earth.  This  is  the  archetype  to  the 
throne  of  God  in  the  temple  at  Jerusalem,  Isa.  vi.  1.  Jer. 
xvii.  12.  and  in  the  tabernacle,  where  he  dwelled  between 
the  cherubims,  Ps.  xcix.  1.  1  Sam.  iv.  4.  Job  i.  6.  1  Kings 
xxii.  19.  revealed  himself  to  Moses,  and  in  succeeding 
times,  answered  the  questions  of  the  high  priest  concern- 
ing church  and  state.  Exod.  xxv.  17.  The  original 
word  £jc€jto,  from  wpxi,  signifies  to  lay  down,  to  place 
along,  by  which  the  size  of  this  throne  is  intimated,  as  be- 
ing very  large  and  broad ;  and  accordingly  he  who  sat  on 
it,  though  in  human  form,  far  exceeded  the  size  of  a  man. 
The  Lord  is  in  his  holy  temple  in  Zion;  let  all  the  earth 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  151 

keep  silence  before  Him,  Habak.  ii.  20.  He  dwelleth 
under  the  praises  of  Israel:  declare  among  the  people  his 
doings.     Ps,  xxii.  3.  ix.  11. 

Verse  3.  And  he  that  sat  was  like  a  jasper  and  a  sardine 
stone.  He  that  sat  on  this  throne  is  God  the  Father,  the 
Ancient  of  days,  in  distinction  from  tlie  Lamb,  which  was 
in  the  midst  of  the  throne,  and  from  the  Holy  Ghost,  who 
is  represented  by  seven  lamps  of  fire.  The  apostle  de- 
scribes his  external  appearance  and  colour,  as  like  unto  the 
precious  stones  Jasper  and  Sardius,  which  no  doubt,  are 
here  intended  to  express  the  various  perfections  of  his  di- 
vine nature,  as  perspicuous  in  his  government,  particularly 
during  the  first  ages  of  the  xvorld.  The  Sardine  is  redj 
and  at  least  half  transparent,  the  Jasper  is  white,  cerulean, 
and  has  small  red  veins  ;  both  would  make  up  the  appear- 
ance of  a  Being,  of  nearly  flesh-colour,  but  of  a  more  re- 
fined substance,  partly  bright,  clarified,  and  exceedingly 
glorious.  White,  denotes  purity,  holiness  and  justice ;  red, 
signifies  judgment,  and  fiery  indignation  against  the  wick- 
ed; and  the  durability  of  these  gems,  that  He  is  eternal, 
immutable  in  his  nature,  and  all  his  promises  and  threat- 
enings  most  sure.  Thus  far  the  God  of  nature  was  known 
from  his  works  and  by  tradition,  to  the  antedeluvian  "world, 
as  represented  by  these  emblems. 

A  rainbow  round  about  the  throne,  like  unto  an  emerald. 
The  throne  of  the  supreme  Governor  of  the  world,  was 
with  respect  to  its  height,  or  more  properly  its  breadth, 
encompassed  by  a  rainbow,  in  order  to  keep  those  about 
the  throne  at  a  propel?  distance.  This  bow  is  the  arche- 
type of  that  in  the  clouds,  which  the  Lord  promised  Noah, 
as  an  eternal  memorial  of  his  covenant  with  him  and  his 
posterity,  that  he  would  no  more  destroy  the  world  by  a 
flood.  Gen.  ix.  12 — 16  ;  and  that  seed  time  and  harvest, 
and  cold  and  heat,  and  summer  and  winter,  and  day  and 
night,  shall  not  cease  while  the  earth  remaineth.  Gen» 
viii.  22.    Th»  apostle  compares  the  colour  of  this  bow  t© 


152  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

an  emerald,  which  is  an  exceedingly  fine  green,  and  the 
stone  itself  very  bright  and  transparent.  This  may  denote, 
that  the  grace  of  God  under  this  covenant  towards  the 
world  shall  always  be  in  an  improving  state,  arid  of  ever- 
lasting duration. 

Terse  4.  And  round  about  the  throne  were  four  and 
twenty  seats :  and  upon  the  seats  I  saw  four 
and  twenty  elders  sitting,  clothed  in  white  rai- 
ment ,•  and  they  had  on  their  heads  crowns  of 
gold. 

5.  And  out  of  the  throne  proceeded  lightnings, 
and  thunderings,  and  voices  :  and  there  were 
seven  lamps  of  fire  burning  before  the  throne, 
which  are  the  seven  Spirits  of  God. 

6.  And  before  the  throne  there  was  a  sea  of  glass 
like  unto  a  crystal :  and  in  the  midst  of  the 
throne,  and  round  about  the  throne,  were  four 
beasts  full  of  eyes  before  and  behind. 

Verse  4.  Upon  the  seats  four  and  twenty  elders  sitting, 
clothed  in  -white  raiment.  What  are  these  elders  ?  And 
whence  came  they  ?  This  they  tell  us  themselves,  chapter 
v.  9.  10.  "  Thou  hast  redeemed  us  to  God  by  thy  blood, 
out  of  every  kindred,  and  tongue,  and  people,  and  nation  ; 
and  hast  made  us  unto  our  God,  kings  and  priests :  and  we 
shall  reign  on  the  earth."  Though  these  elders  are  from 
every  tongue  and  nation  on  earth,  yet  when  their  whole 
character  is  considered,  as  described,  they  are  not  the  re- 
presentatives of  all  mankind,  nor  of  the  visible  Church  of 
Christ  on  earth,  nor  of  the  general  number  of  the  elect.  If 
we  compare  their  own  confession  with  Rev.  xx.  4.  they  re- 
present those  chosen  spirits,  and  witnesses  of  Jesus  through- 
out the  world,  who,  as  an  equivalent  for  having  lost  their 
lives  for  Christ's  sake,  shall  rise  in  the  first  resurrection, 
and  reign  with  Christ  during  the  Millennium.  And  with 
regard  to  this  their  future  appointment,  and  proper  theatre 
of  action,  they  arc  spoken  of  twice  in  the  future  tense : 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  153 

Verse  9.  koc)  oroiv  Jusovgi.  And  when  they  shall  give  glory, 
in  connexion  with  the  elders;  and  chap.  v.  10.  /3<xs-<Agu- 
soy,t.v3  we  shall  reign  on  earth.  In  reference  to  these 
elders,  the  Jewish  church  had  established  twenty-four 
courses  of  priests,  1  Chi  on.  xxiv.  1.  4*  18*  Luke  i.  5. 
who  served  by  turns  in  the  temple  at  Jerusalem — and 
twenty-four  Levites,  as  deputies  of  the  twelve  tribes,  who 
attended  the  service  of  the  temple  as  their  representatives, 
and  transacted  the  business  of  their  tribes  at  court,  in  the 
Sanhedrim,  and  with  the  priests.  They  are  clothed  in 
white  raiment,  from  the  custom  of  clothing  those,  who 
were  admitted  on  account  of  their  genealogies  and  perfec- 
tion of  body,  to  the  court  of  the  priests.  In  the  original, 
their  seats  are  also  called  thrones,  and  these,  as  well  as 
their  crowns  of  gold,  and  the  circumstance  of  their  sitting 
on  these  thrones,  indicate  their  present  appointment,  and 
future  royal  priesthood  in  the  kingdom  of  Christ  on  earth/. 
They  are  particular  saints,  who  have  proved  themselves 
worthy  of  this  station,  Isa.  xxiv.  23.  Hebrews  xi.  2.  at  the 
head  of  their  brethren.  0  ye  combatants  under  the  ban- 
ners of  Jesus !  behold  the  glorious  reward  of  faithfulness 
in  trying  seasons,  and  rise  to  follow  their  footsteps ;  the 
recompense  is  infinitely  superior  to  the  toil  of  the  under- 
taking. 

Verse  5.  Lightnings,  thunderings  and  voices*  Light- 
nings refer  to  the  sight,  thunderings  to  sensibility,  and 
voices  to  the  sense  of  hearing.  The  allusion  is  evidently 
to  the  Old  Testament  dispensation,  and  the  manner  in  which 
God  revealed  himself  in  giving  the  law  on  Mount  Sinai. 
Lightning  may  allude  to  the  discovery,  which  the  Lord 
made  to  the  Israelites  of  his  own  nature  and  character,  in 
promulgating  the  moral  law  as  the  fundamental  principle 
of  his  moral  government  over  the  world.  Thunderings  may 
refer  to  his  promises  and  threaten] ngs,  blessings  and  curses* 
by  which  he  excited  the  sensibility  to  the  performance  of 
his  will.    And  the  prophecies  of  the  prophets  are  often 

v 


154  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

called  the  voices  of  the  prophets,  Acts  xiii.  27.  Johii  the 
Baptist  calls  himself  the  voice  of  one  in  the  wilderness 
John  i.  23.     Ps.  ciii.  20.  xxix.  3.  4.  5.  6.  7    8.  9. 

Seven  lamps  of  burning  jive.  The  Holy  Ghost,  in  allu- 
sion to  the  seven  lamps  in  the  tabernacle  and  temple.  Se- 
ven is  the  number  of  fullness  and  perfection,  in  whic^i  he  is 
always  present  in  the  Church,  and  communicates  his  illu- 
minating, quickening  and  refreshing  influence  through 
his  word  and  ordinances  in  all  ages.  This  sevenfold  com- 
munication is  specified,  Isaiah  xi.  2.     See  chap.  i.  4.  iii<  1. 

Verse  6.  Before  the  throne  was  a  sea  of  glass,  like  unto 
crystal.  We  are  apt  to  conceive  the  theatre  of  this  vision 
on  too  contracted  a  scale,  which  upon  mature  consideration 
of  all  the  different -objects,  must  have  been  very  wide  and 
extensive.  St.  John  beheld  a  spacious  throne  with  a  very 
broad  pedestal,  on  which  the  four  living  beings  formed  a 
full  circle  with  the  throne,  and  before  it  an  extensive  pave- 
ment, broad  and  deep  like  a  sea  of  crystal,  above  which 
stood  the  seven  flames  of  fire.  Around  this  sea  of  glass, 
the  twenty-four  elders  formed  a  second  circle  with  the 
throne  of  God,  and  at  a  proper  distance  behind  the  elders, 
millions  of  angels  surrounded  the  whole.     Chap.  v.  11. 

In  order  to  understand  the  spiritual  meaning  of  this  sea, 
it  is  necessary  to  attend  to  the  following  remarks  on  the 
original.  The  learned  Doctor  S.  R.  Doederline  says  :  It 
is  customary  with  the  Hebrews,  to  call  a  large  plain  a  sea. 
And  the  original  v«X«vof,  from  vxXos,  not  only  signifies 
glass,  but  the  ancients  also  very  frequently  translate  it 
electrum;  which  according  to  Theophrastus,  is  a  collective 
mass  of  all  the  different  precious  metals,  in  a  most  refined 
and  purified  state.  Chap.  xxi.  18,  it  is  said,  that  the 
city  of  New  Jerusalem  was  built  of  pure  gold,  like  purified 
electrum;  and  verse  21.  that  not  the  street,  as  we  read  in 
our  common  version,  but  x,x)  J  KhanTa  the  market-place 
and  centre  of  the  city  of  God,  immediately  before  the  throne 
of  God  and  the  Lamb,  was  of  pure  gold,  like  transparent  eke- 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  155 

trum.  This  translation  is  also  evidently  correct  from  both 
passages."  For  why  are  the  words  clear  and  transparent 
added,  if  glass  is  to  be  understood,  which  is  clear  and 
transparent  of  itself?  Why  should  its  clearness  be  describ- 
ed in  the  text  before  us  by  crystal,  when  glass  itself  is  a 
clear  body  ?  See  Exod.  xxiv.  10.  There  is,  however,  a 
difference  between  this  sea,  and  the  matter  of  which  New 
Jerusalem  is  built ;  for  here  the  sea  itself  is  electrum,  but 
in  New  Jerusalem,  the  gold  is  only  compared  to  it.  In  al- 
lusion to  this  sea,  of  which  Moses  must  have  had  a  sight 
in  the  Mount,  Exod.  xxv.  40.  Heb.  viii.  5.  Solomon  overlaid 
the  floor  of  the  temple  with  gold.  1  Kings  vi.  30.  This  ex- 
tensive plain  or  pavement,  wide  and  deep,  before  the  throne, 
denotes  the  aggregate  of  all  revelation  from  God  to  men  in 
all  ages  ;  which  is  compared  to  the  sea,  because  of  the  deep 
things  of  God,  and  the  profound  mysteries,  and  fulness  of 
grace  and  mercy ;  clear,  like  crystal,  because  of  the  pu- 
rity, perspicuity  and  evidence  of  the  heavenly  truths  con- 
tained in  it ;  a  solid  mass  of  precious  metals,  to  denote  the 
different  value  of  these  truths,  and  the  firmness,  durability, 
union  and  connexion  of  the  whole.  This  transparent 
massy  plain  formed  a  circuit  before  the  throne,  so  that  the 
throne  partly  rested  on  this  stable  foundation,  the  rainbow 
reflected  his  seven  colours  in  it,  and  the  seven  lamps  their 
flames  of  fire — the  Lamb  stood  on  it,  right  in  the  midst 
between  the  elders  and  the  living  creatures — the  Mediator 
between  God  and  man,  whose  image  the  Church  had  long 
beheld  in  this  revelation,  as  in  a  mirror.  This  is  the  mir- 
ror of  eternity,  in  which  we  may  behold  God  and  our  ever- 
lasting home.  What  a  folly  in  Deists,  to  attempt  remov- 
ing such  a  mass,  of  which  they  neither  know  the  depth,  the 
value,  nor  consequence  ! — to  attempt  to  disfigure  the  work- 
manship of  Him,  from  whose  throne  proceed  lightnings  and 
thunder ! 

Four  beasts  full  of  eyes  before  and  behind.    This  is  a  bad 
translation,  which  by  no  means  conveys  the  proper  sense 


156  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

of  the  original.  The  Greek  word  is  not  9-j^/ov,  beast-,  but 
^wov,  from  £»&>,  (from  which  word  the  Grecians  call  God 
ffie)  and  should  be  rendered  a  living  Being,  or  a  Being 
full  of  lives.  Upon  the  subject  of  these  Beings  of  life,  ex- 
positors have  collected  a  variety  of  opinions,  which  it  would 
be  useless  to  repeat.  I  will  therefore  place  the  mind  of  my 
reader  at  once  into  that  circuit  of  ideas,  in  which  he  may 
view  this  elucidation  to  advantage. 

The  Revelation  treats  every  subject  of  its  contents  on  a 
general  scale,  and  each  particular  part  in  a  continued  rela- 
tion to  the  whole  design,  and  final  aim  of  heaven.  This 
therefore,  is  in  a  peculiar  sense  the  Book,  in  which  we 
may  expect  to  meet  with  grand  and  comprehensive 
thoughts.  The  Church  of  God  on  earth  is  here  represent- 
ed as  a  divine  institution  and  system  of  education,  in  which 
chosen  nations  are  gradually  instructed,  and  trained  up, 
to  be  a  ferment  in  the  whole  mass  of  mankind  foi  eternal 
purposes.  This  extensive  institution  has  different  depart- 
ments, in  which  those  qualified,  have  been  advanced  from 
one  course  of  heavenly  lessons  of  knowledge  and  discipline 
to  another.  In  each  of  these  departments  the  Lord  has 
gradually  discovered  himself/  and  the  sublime  objects  of 
the  intellectual  world,  according  to  the  sense  the  chosen 
people  of  God  felt  of  their  own  wants;  by  which  they  were 
also  fitted  for  the  reception  of  such  discoveries,  and  induc- 
ed to  ask,  and  search  for  such  knowledge,  as  necessary  to 
their  happiness.  There  are  four  such  Church-states,  or 
departments  in  the  general  Church  of  God  on  earth,  of 
which  these  Beings  of  lives,  in  the  text  before  us,  are  the 
emblematical  representatives.     These  are  the  following : 

I.  The  Patriarchal  Church  economy,  during  the  time  of 
'promise,  before  Moses,  which  is  here  represented  by  that 
Being  of  life  like  a  lio)u  This  figure  expresses  the  distin- 
guishing characteristics  of  the  whole  body  of  the  Church 
during  that  time ;  which  are  boldness  of  faith  in  the  pro- 
mise* of  God;  courage  in  the  service  of  the  Lord,  strength 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  157 

against  the  enemy,  natural  liberty,  not  yet  incumbered  by  a 
load  of  precepts  for  Church  discipline.  The  lessons  which 
they  were  taught,  participated  of  the  same  characteristics. 
They  learned  to  know  God  from  his  works — his  natural 
and  moral  government  over  the  world,  from  the  ways  of 
Providence — hopes  of  the  recovery  of  mankind  from  moral 
ruin,  by  the  promised  Seed  of  the  Woman. 

II.  The  Mosaic  economy,  which  is  here  represented  by 
that  Being  of  life  like  a  calf  or  ox.  This  figure  has  been 
a  hieroglyphic  of  great  import,  from  ancient  times. 
The  Egyptians  made  their  God  Apis  after  it,  to  whom  they 
paid  divine  honours  in  a  living  ox;  and  the  Hindoos  still 
worship  these  beasts  as  divinities.  The  distinguishing 
characteristic  of  this  figure  is  indefatigable  laboriousness, 
under  the  yoke,  for  the  general  good  of  man.  This  charac- 
ter is  very  applicable  to  the  Old  Testament  institution. 
We  all  know  the  round  of  ceremonies  under  the  law,  that 
heavy  load  of  precepts  and  discipline,  in  the  Jewish  church, 
and  the  general  laborio-isness  of  this  people  in  bearing  so 
heavy  a  yoke  to  this  day.  But  as  the  ox  also  served  for  a 
sacrifice,  so  this  institution  was  acceptable  to  the  Lord, 
and  induced  many,  to  devote  themselves  entirely  to  God 
and  his  service  during  many  centuries.  The  principal  les- 
sons taught  in  this  department  were  an  enlarged  and  au- 
thoritative republication  of  natural  religion  as  known  be- 
fore, with  a  more  immediately  introductory  dispensation 
of  Providence,  carried  on  by  the  Messiah  for  the  recovery 
and  salvation  of  the  human  family,  by  rendering  satisfac- 
tion to  the  righteous  Governor  of  the  world. 

III.  The  Christian  economy,  which  is  represented  by 
that  Being  of  life  with  the  face  of  a  man.  This  figure  in- 
dicates, that  every  part  of  this  dispensation  requires,  and 
bespeaks  the  use  of  reason  and  experience;  that  its  religion 
are  lessons  of  real  knowledge,  and  the  worship  rational; 
that  the  arrangement  of  the  whole  economy  bespeaks  hu- 
manity and  mercy,  and  the  administration  of  it  wisdom  and 


158  THE  GREAT  THEATRE 

prudence,  according  to  the  final  aim  of  heaven,  for  which 
it  has  been  established.  The  heavenly  lessons  taught  in 
this  department  are,  an  enlarged  republication  of  natural 
religion  in  its  genuine  simplicity,  by  which  we  are  instruct- 
ed, that  this  world  is  the  work,  and  under  the  natural  and 
moral  government  of  an  all  perfect,  wise,  benevolent  and 
Omnipotent  Being,  whose  law  is  virtue,  and  whose  judg- 
ments are  righteous,  in  this  world  and  in  the  world  to 
come. — An  elucidation  of  all  the  essential  points  in  the  in- 
troductory dispensation  of  the  Messiah,  since  the  creation. 
And  a  full  discovery  of  that  marvellous  plan  for  the  re- 
demption of  the  world,  by  Jesus  Christ  (who  now  assumed 
the  form  of  a  man,)  and  the  Holy  Ghost. 

IV.  From  this  institution,  the  Revelation  informs  us, 
we  are  to  be  advanced  into  that  economy,  which  will  be 
established  during  the  Millennium,  properly  called  the  per- 
sonal kingdom  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  of  the  people  of  God  on 
earth.  This  dispensation  is  represented  here  by  that  liv- 
ing Being  like  a  flying  eagle,  which  figure  may  denote,  as 
general  characteristics  of  this  economy,  a  ready  swiftness 
in  obeying  the  divine  commands ;  great  penetration  and 
sagacity  to  discover  errors,  enemies  and  danger ;  a  parti- 
cular capability  to  soar  on  high  into  the  divine  councils,  and 
mysteries  of  God ;  a  steady  look  by  the  eye  of  faith  into 
the  eternal  sun  of  righteousness,  the  fountain  of  primeval 
light  in  the  world  of  spirits ;  and  an  incessant  endeavour 
to  soar  aloft  towards  it,  as  the  final  destination  of  man, 
and  the  centre  point  of  all  spiritual  activity,  without  ever 
being  able  to  approach  it  in  all  eternity.  This  economy 
will  again  be  as  much  elevated  above  the  present,  as  the 
Christian  is  above  the  Mosaic,  by  an  enlarged  re-publica- 
tion of  all  the  truths  of  former  dispensations,  and  many 
new  discoveries  of  God  to  man.  Those  qualified  for  this 
department,  will  be  saints  indeed. 

Verse  7.     And  the  first  beast  was  like  a  lion,  and  the  se- 
cond beast  like  a  calf,  and  the  third  beast  had  a 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  159 

face  as  a  man,  and  the  fourth  beast  was  like  a 
flying  eagle. 
8.    And  the  four  beasts  had  each  of  them  six  wings 
about  him;  and  they  were  full  of  eyes  within : 
And  they  rest  not  day  and  night,  saying,  holy, 
holy,  holy,  Lord  God  Almighty,  which  was, 
and  is,  and  is  to  come. 
Full  of  eyes  before,  and  behind,  and  within.     These  four 
Beings  are  very  properly  called  £&)#,  and  represented  as 
large  conservatories  of  many  lives;  for  by  them  the  Lord 
both  preserves,  nourishes  and  propagates  the  spiritual  life 
in  his  people  on  earth.     They  are  said,  to  be  all  alike  full 
of  eyes,  by  which,  I  apprehend,  we  are  to  understand  the 
ministers  of  the  word  of  God,  and  his  special  servants,  the 
seers,  the  prophets,  the  apostles  and  reformers,  by  which, 
as  principal  teachers  in  these  divine  institutions  of  educa- 
tion and  discipline,  these  economies  have  been  managed 
and  conducted.    The  eyes  before,  directed  towards  the 
throne,  in  order  to  watch  the  commands  of  Almighty  God, 
may  denote  the  prophets,  and  extraordinary  servants  un- 
der the  immediate  inspiration  of  the  Lord.     The  eyes  be- 
hind, directed  towards  the  sea  of  elecirum,  denote  the  ordi- 
nary ministers,  who  have  need  to  look  into  the  Scriptures 
of  truth,  to  search  their  sense,  and  pry  into  their  spiritual 
meaning ;  to  overlook  the  flock,  committed  to  their  charge ; 
to  espy  enemies  and  danger,  and  give  the  necessary  notice 
of  them,  from  the  appearing  signs  of  the  times,  according 
to  prophecies  and  the  sure  word  of  God.     The  eyes  within, 
may  represent  all  the  children  of  God  in  these  economies, 
as  endowed  with  spiritual  light  and  knowledge  by  divine 
illumination  ;  or  the  body  of  these  beings  of  life  may  de- 
note the  people  of  God  under  these  dispensations,  and  the 
eyes  within,  those  ministers  particularly  instrumental  in 
promoting  the  internal  prosperity  of  Zion,  and  the  life  of 
God  in  the  souls  of  men. 


160  THE  GREAT  THEATRE, 

Verse  8.  The  four  beasts  had  each  of  them  six  wings. 
The  living  creatures  in  Ezekiel  i.  6.  hail  four  wings,  and 
the  scraphims,  Isa.  vi.  %  had  six  also  ;  which  more  imme- 
diately belong  to  the  whole  body  of  these  beings  of  life,  and 
no.  doubt,  express  certain  virtues,  common  to  all  the  chil- 
dren of  God,  in  all  ages.  The  prophet  Isaiah  informs  us 
©f  their  use.  With  two  they  covered  their  faces  through 
reverence,  from  the  beams  of  venerated  glory,  too  bright 
for  seraphims  themselves  to  behold.  With  two  they  cover- 
ed their  feet,  by  which  is  indicated  a  deep  sense  of  their 
sinfulness,  weakness  and  imperfection  in  all,  and  even  their 
best  works,  as  the  foundation  of  that  cardinal  virtue 
humility.  And  with  the  other  two  they  fly,  signifying 
their  readiness  to  fulfil  the  command  of  the  Lord  to  the 
best  of  their  power. 

They  rest  not  day  and  night,  saying,  holy,  holy,  holy. 
O  blessed  restlessness !  There  is  no  night  in  heaven,  only 
here  on  earth,  where  these  Beings  of  life  exist.  They  are 
wholly  devoted  to  the  service  of  God,  in  which  they  live, 
and  move,  and  possess  spiritual  life.  Their  whole  exis- 
tence is  penetrated  by  a  deep  sense  of  the  holiness  of  this 
Triune  God,  Father,  Son,  and  Spirit ;  by  which  they  are 
animated  and  directed  to  an  incessant  and  perpetual  wor- 
ship, either  more  or  less,  in  every  hour  by  day  or  night, 
throughout  the  whole  economy.  This  word  »yiQs3  holy, 
and  in  Isaiah  kadosch,  signifies  a  thing  separated  from  all 
things  common,  and  solely  devoted  to  sanctified  purposes  j 
but  when  used  of  God,  it  denotes  his  infinite  perfection  and 
Supreme  excellence  in  every  power  and  virtue  constituting 
his  Deity,  which  finite  beings  may  endeavour  to  imitate, 
but  never  fully  attain.  This  supreme  excellency  of  God  in 
all  his  moral  attributes  they  praise  continually,  to  shew 
the  beauty  which  they  behold  in  it,  and  their  earnest  en- 
deavour after  holiness  in  person,  doctrine,  life,  and  con- 
versation. They  also  praise  him  as  the  Lord  of  his 
Church,  a«  God,  the  only  object  of  worship — as  the  Al- 


OF  HEAVENLY  VISIONS.  161 

mighty,    navronedTctiPi   the  supreme   rider  of  the  Uni- 
verse— which  was,  is,  and  is  to  come. 
Verse  9.  And  v.  hen  those  beasts  give  glory,  and  honour, 

and  thanks,  to  him  that  sat  on  the  throne,  who 

liveth  for  ever  and  ever, 

10.  The  four  and  twenty  elders  fall  down  before 
him  that  sat  on  the  throne,  and  worship  him 
that  liveth  for  ever  and  ever,  and  cast  their 
crowns  before  the  throne,  saying, 

11.  Tliou  art  worthy,  0  Lord,  to  receive  glory,  and 

honour,  and  power ;  for  thou  hast  created  all 

things,  and  for  thy  pleasure  they  are  and  were 

created. 

Here  the  tense  changes,  and  runs  on  in  the 
future. 
Verse  "9.  Jwfov?i,  and  when  they  shall  or  will  give 
glory.  Verse  10.  7tscovvto4/,  when  they  will  fall  down. 
0<*AoO?<,  they  shall  cast  down  their  crowns.  By 
this  change  of  tenses  we  are  referred  to  a  future  period, 
when  the  sublime  machinery  of  this  chapter  will  meet  its 
full  completion,  in  the  personal  kingdom  of  Christ  on 
earth  during  the  Millennium.  This  kingdom  will  fill  the 
whole  ^arth,  and  will  be  divided  into  four  different  econo* 
mies,  in  which  the  four  and  twenty  elders,  and  with  them 
the  holy  Martyrs  will  rule  with  Christ,  as  kings  and 
priests  on  earth  a  thousand  years,  as  an  equivalent  for  the 
sacrifice  they  made  for  Christ's  sake.  When  these  four1 
Beings  of  life  encompass  the  four  parts  of  the  world,  and 
fall  down  in  unanimous  worship ;  the  elders  will  likewise 
cast  down  all  their  power  and  authority  at  the  feet  of 
the  Lamb,  and  govern  the  human  family  in  perfect  com- 
pliance with  his  will  and  pleasure.  Then  will  the  Lord 
receive  glory  for  his  sufferings,  honour  for  his  humiliation, 
and  the  thanks  of  a  formerly  ungrateful  world. — He,  for 
whose  pleasure  the  world  has  been  created,  Rom.  xi.  36. 


163  THE  GREAT  THEATRE,  &c. 

these  economies  established,  and  mankind  trained  to  con- 
fess freely,  and  from  deep  conviction,  that  he  is  worthy  of 
this  doxology. 

My  exposition  of  this  chapter  has  been  rather  full,  be- 
cause it  has  been  new  on  many  points ;  the  following  shall 
be  more  brief. 


CHAPTER  V. 


A  serene  and  solemn  contemplation  of  this  theatre  of 
heavenly  visions,  ought  to  convince  every  reflecting  mind 
of  its  Divine  origin.     The  spiritual  sensibility  excited  by 
this  view,  far  surpasses  all,  which  the  most  pompous 
scenery  of  Greek  or  Roman  poets  could  ever  produce.  Be- 
hold the  appearance  of  God  in  powerful  majesty,  seated 
on  his  throne  of  government,  in  the  midst  of  refulgent 
flashes  of  lightnings,  thunderings,  and  voices :  attended 
by  the  four  Living  Beings  as  ministers  of  state,  under  the 
symbols  of  royal  boldness,  indefatigable  activity,  prudence, 
and  heavenly-mindediiess,  and  furnished  with  wings,  and 
thousands  of  eyes,  to  observe  and  execute  the  Divine  man- 
dates : — Their  attitude ;  standing  before  the  throne,  pene- 
trated with  reverence : — the  sea  of  electrum,  forming  a  spa- 
cious circuit  before  Jehovah,  in  which  the  seven  flames  of 
fire,  waving  immediately  over  its  surface,  reflect  their  glo- 
rious light,  and  every  other  object  in  heaven,  as  in  a  mir- 
ror : — around  this  sea  twenty-four  thrones,  on  which  sit 
his  royal  subjects,  perfected  saints :— i-and  the  whole  sur- 
rounded by  many  millions  of  angels — all  these  engaged 
in  rapturous  songs  of  praise— in  acclamations  of  holy, 
holy,  holy !  what  a  glorious  scene!  what  terrible  majesty ! 
Although  this  vision  is  an  emblematical  representation 
of  the  Church  of  God  on  earth ;  yet,  I  have  no  hesitation 
to  say,  that  these  sublime  symbols  may  also  represent  real 
objects  in  the  intellectual  world.  For  after  God  has  accom- 


164  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES 

plished  all  his  divine  purposes  on  earth,  this  world  will 
be  a  perfect  resemblance  of  heaven.  But  what  convinces 
my  mind  most,  is  a  comparison  of  this  vision  with  that  re- 
corded in  Ezekiel,  chapt  i.  and  x  :  with  that  of  Isaiah  vi ; 
and  with  that  which  Moses  beheld  on  the  Mount,  Exod. 
xxv.  40.  Hebrews  viii.  5 ;  according  to  which  he  con- 
structed the  tabernacle,  and  all  the  holy  instruments  and 
vessels  appertaining  to  its  service,  which  St.  Paul  informs 
us,  were  only  the  shadow  and  example  of  heavenly  things. 
This  St.  Paul  could  say,  from  having  been  an  eye-witness, 
after  he  was  caught  up  to  a  view  of  heaven  and  paradise, 
where  also  he  saw  these  archetypes  of  all  the  machinery  in 
the  Old  Testament  dispensation,  though  perhaps  only  in  a 
partial  view.  Bat  a  more  minute  elucidation  of  these  ob- 
jects in  that  respect,  would,  I  presume,  be  visionary,  and 
of  little  benefit  to  many  readers. 

This  chapter  now,  commences  the  Revelation  of  the  mys- 
tery of  God  to  his  Church.  These  great  personages  rise, 
one  after  the  other  to  the  theatre  of  action,  till  at  certain 
interesting  nodes,  all  the  powers  of  heaven  and  hell  are 
engaged  in  the  prosecution  of  their  different  views.  But 
the  Lamb  of  God,  which  here  receives  his  commission  in 
a  book  from  the  throne,  exercises  his  authority  in  many 
direful  conflicts  against  the  powers  of  darkness,  and  ap- 
pears at  last  as  supreme  Ruler  of  the  world,  adorned  with 
many  crowns,  as  conqueror  of  all  his  enemies. 
Verse  1.  And  I  saw  in  the  right  hand  of  him  that  sat  on 
the  throne,  a  book  written  within  and  on  the 
backside,  sealed  with  seven  seals. 

2.  And  I  saw  a  strong  angel  proclaiming  with  a 
loud  voice,  who  is  worthy  to  open  the  book,  and 
to  loose  the  seals  thereof? 

3.  And  no  man  in  heaven,  nor  in  earth,  neither 
under  the  earth,  was  able  to  open  the  book,  nei- 
ther to  look  thereon. 


THE  GOVERNMENT.  165 

Me  that  sat  on  the  throne  is  here  represented,  as  admin- 
istering the  government  of  the  world  and  the  Church 
to  that  period  of  time.  Until  then  He  held  the  book  in  his 
hand — then  Jehovah  gav«  the  Revelation  to  Jesus  Christ, 
chap.  i.  1 ;  hut  before  that  time  its  contents  were  not 
known  to  the  angels  in  heaven,  neither  to  the  Son,  but  to 
the  Father  only.  Mark  xiii.  32.  His  right  hand  denotes 
his  all-governing  power. 

A  book  written  within  and  on  tJie  backside.  This  book 
is  a  symbol  of  the  Divine  plan  of  administration,  formed 
by  eternal  wisdom  concerning  the  government  of  the  world 
and  the  Church,  until  then  hidden  in  the  treasures  of  the 
Almighty.  Deut.  xxxit.  34.  It  appeared  to  the  apostle  a 
long  roll  of  Egyptian  paper,  or  parchment,  rolled  up  in 
form  of  a  cylinder,  to  shew  that  it  contains  a  large  account 
of  a  long  train  of  events  to  be  accomplished.  Whatever 
concerned  the  Church,  and  its  members  is  the  several  ages 
of  time,  was  written  within  this  roll ;  and  that  which  con- 
cerned the  world  and  the  Roman  empire,  was  contained 
on  fae  outside.  For  it  regards  both  the  Christian  Church 
and  the  world. 

Sealed  with  seven  seals.  To  show,  that  to  open  this 
book,  it  required  a  person  having  the  command  of  seven 
different  powers,  in  reference  to  the  Lamb  with  seven 
horns  and  seven  eyes ;  or  as  seven  is  the  number  of  full- 
ness and  perfection,  that  it  required  one,  possessed  of  all 
power  in  heaven  and  earth.  The  word  sealed,  here  sig- 
nifies that  this  book  of  God's  decrees,  as  the  rule  and  mea- 
sure of  his  government,  was  yet  unknown  and  unaccom- 
plished. 

Verse  2.  Ji  strong  angel  proclaiming,  who  is  worthy  to 
open  ?  If  the  human  mind  could  extend  its  faculties,  (if 
I  may  be  allowed  the  expression,)  to  the  confines  of  the 
material  and  immaterial  world,  where  the  uttermost  ends 
of  human  thoughts  are  directed  by  invisible  powers,  and 
all  creation  by  the  Divine  influence  of  God — what  a  scone 


166  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES 

of  relations  and  activity  would  we  behold  between  nature 
and  its  God,  man  and  his  Creator,  the  Church  militant, 
and  the  Church  triumphant,  and  her  supreme  head.  To 
this  sphere  the  apostie  was  exalted,  and  his  mind  beheld 
the  first  avenues,  through  which  this  train  of  human  af- 
fairs on  earth  is  influenced  and  directed  by  heaven.  Here 
a  heavenly  herald,  a  strong  angel  sounds  his  voice  through 
the  three  regions  of  creation,  heaven,  earth,  and  Hades, 
making  proclamation:  If  amj person  had  knowledge,  dig- 
nity, and  power  sufficient  to  open  the  book,  and  to  loose  the 
seals  thereof,  that  he  was  desired  to  come,  and  to  do  it !  His- 
tory has  recorded  the  echo  of  his  voice  on  earth,  at  the  close 
of  the  first  century.  The  Christians  expected  the  second 
advent  of  the  Lord,  and  the  accomplishment  of  the  mystery 
of  God  concerning  the  Church ;  and  now  they  were  cruelly 
persecuted  by  Jews  and  Gentiles,  and  all  began  to  be  se- 
riously alarmed  about  her  future  prosperity  and  continu- 
ance. All  future  prospects  seemed  involved  in  profound 
darkness.  Even  St.  J  ohn  appears  to  have  suffered  by  these 
heart-rending  thoughts,  on  the  isle  of  Patmos.  Tl^s  a 
unanimous  and  ardent  desire  arose  in  the  Christian  Church 
for  more  light  and  knowledge  under  this  mysterious  dis- 
pensation— or  in  the  words  before  us,  for  opening  the  seals 
of  the  book  of  prophecy.  Also  both  Jews  and  Heathens 
were  alarmed  at  the  progress  of  Christianity,  and  asked 
their  oracles  for  information.  The  holy  martyrs  went 
with  this  prayer  in  their  hearts,  into  the  world  of  spirits; 
and  the  consummated  saints  in  heaven  asked  with  this  an- 
gel, and  wishfully  waited  for  the  answer.  Of  this  general 
inquiry  and  desire,  this  angel  seems  to  have  been  the 
cause  and  director.  What  a  mighty  angel  he  must  be ! 
Perhaps  "Gabriel,  whose  very  name  signifies,  the  strong 
and  mighty  one  of  God? 

To  open  the  book  and  to  loose  the  seals  thereof.  The  mean- 
ing here  is  not  merely  to  loose  the  seals,  and  to  open  the 
book,  in  order  that  it  might  be  read.    This  would  have 


THE  GOVERNMENT.  167 

been  no  great  difficulty  with  such  a  roll,  as  John  had  seen. 
No,  the  import  of  this  proclamation  is  also  emblematical, 
and  in  figurative  words.  The  sense  is  :  1.  TV  ho  possesses 
ability  and  knowledge  sufficient  to  understand  the  whole 
plan  of  administering  the  goverment  of  the  world  and  of 
the  Church,  as  contained  in  this  book  of  God's  decrees,  in 
order  to  explain  it  to  others,  as  it  is  done  in  the  following 
chapters  of  the  Revelation.  2.  Who  possesses  dignity 
and  power  to  administer  this  government,  and  to  execute 
all  these  Divine  decrees  according  to  this  plan  of  mea- 
sures, so  as  to  fulfil  and  accomplish  all  the  prophecies 
and  purposes  of  heaven.  This  was  the  arduous  undertak- 
ing for  the  performance  of  which  all  creation  confessed 
their  inability.  None  were  able  ! 
Verse  4.    And  I  wept  much,  because  no  man  was  found 

worthy  to  open  and  to  read  the  book,  neither  to 

look  thereon. 

5.  Arid  one  of  the  elders  saith  unto  me,  weep  not : 
behold,  the  lion  of  the  tribe  of  Judah,  the  root 
of  David,  hath  prevailed  to  open  the  book,  and 
to  loose  the  seven  seals  thereof. 

6.  And  I  beheld,  and,  lo,  in  the  midst  of  the  throne 
and  of  the  four  beasts,  and  in  the  midst  of  the 
elders,  stood  a  Lamb  as  it  had  been  slain,  hav- 
ing seven  horns  and  seven  eyes,  which  are  the 
seven  spirits  of  God,  sent  forth  into  all  the 
earth. 

7.  And  he  came  and  took  the  book  out  of  the  right 
hand  of  him  that  sat  upon  the  throne. 

Verse  4.  /  wept  much.  So  loud  did  the  echo  of  the 
angel's  voice  resound  in  his  soul — so  much  was  he  op- 
pressed by  the  spirit  of  that  time,  and  the  sanguinary  per- 
secution under  the  emperor  Domitian — so  ardent  was  his 
desire  for  a  discovery  of  the  future  prospects  of  the 
Church,  that  he  wept;  because  he  believed  this  book  con- 
tained a  revelation  of  her  future  destinies,  and  no  man 


168  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES 

was  found  qualified,  to  explain,  or  undertake  its  accom- 
plishment. He  even  wept  much.  The  opening  of  this 
book  has  cost  tears,  hut  its  accomplishment  will  occasion 
many  more. 

Verse  5.  One  of  the  elders  saith,  weep  not,  &c.  &c.  It 
is  true,  the  most  mighty  and  powerful  angels  in  heaven 
are  unequal  to  this  task,  though  they  have  performed  ac- 
tions of  great  renown — wonders  of  eternity  !  Yet  Jesus 
Christ,  the  Lion  of  Judah,  Gen.  xlix.  9.  the  root  of  David, 
on  whom  the  seven  fold  Spirit  of  Jehovah  rests,  Isa.  xi.  1. 
2.  has  accomplished  such  an  arduous  .nterprise  in  the  re- 
demption of  the  world ;  by  which  he  p  oved  himself  quali- 
fied, worthy,  and  willing,  also  to  execute  this  mighty 
scheme  of  administration,  without  which  the  momentous 
designs  and  purposes  of  heaven  in  the  death  of  Jesus,  could 
not  be  fully  attained.  Therefore,  dear  John,  weep  not. 
This  satisfied  the  holy  seer,  and  n--  w  he  looked  about  for 
this  great  and  able  personage,  whom  his  eager  eye  had  not 
yet  espyed,  because  of  his  diminutive  appearance  among 
so  many  glorious  objects. 

Verse  6.  In  the  midst  stood  a  Lamb,  as  it  had  been 
slain,  &c.  &c.  dgvlov,  even  signifies  a  young  tender  lamb. 
He  is  thus  represented,  because  his  pilgrimage  on  earth 
was  very  limited  in  comparison  with  that  of  the  ancient 
patriarchs,  whose  protracted  existence  embraced  even  ma- 
ny centuries ;  but  also  on  account  of  a  striking  resem- 
blance between  the  innocent  qualities  of  a  lamb,  and  the 
perfections  of  his  humanity,  which  he  manifested  in  his 
mediatorial  office.  Our  Saviour's  exaltation  began  with 
his  resurrection.  Since  that  time  great  things  have  passed, 
concerning  Him  in  the  invisible  world,  Heb.  ii.  8.  9.  In 
his  ascension,  angels,  authorities,  and  powers  were  made 
hie  subjects,  1  Pet.  iii.  22.  Ten  days  after,  he  sent  the 
promise  of  the  Father,  the  Holy  Ghost.  And  here  he  re- 
ceives his  commission  in  a  book  from  the  throne,  and  com- 
mences the  government  of  the  world.    He  stood  in  the 


THE  GOVERNMENT.  i& 

midst  of  the  throne  oi  the  eternal  Father,  who  probably  sat 
on  one  side — in  tlnftiidst  of  the  four  Beings  of  life,  or  in 
the  heart  of  his  Church — in  the  midst  of  the  twenty-four 
-elders,  the  representatives  of  all  his  holy  martyrs  and  wit- 
nesses in  the  world  of  Spirits.  This  illustrates  his  excel- 
lence, dignity,  and  ability.  Jls  it  had  been  slain.  He  yet 
had  the  marks  of  his  sufferings  and  death  upon  him — the 
print  of  the  nails  and  spear  in  his  hands,  feet  and  side, 
fresh  as  lately  slain.  0  how  can  he  forget  his  people !  How- 
can  the  eternal  Father  behold  his  Son  and  deny  his  mercy 
to  the  world !  Why  should  we  not  have  perfect  confidence 
in  him  ? 

Having  seven  horns  and  seven  eyes.     Horns   denote 
power,  great  ability,  and  in  the  prophetic  writings,  kings 
$nd  kingdoms.   Dan.  viii.  20.  21.  and  vii.  24.     Christ  is 
called  the  horn  of  David,  and  the  horn  of  salvation,  Ps. 
cxxxii.  17.   Luke  i.   89.     Eyes  denote   wisdom,   know- 
ledge,   sagacity,  foresight    and  providence.     These    eyes, 
more  particularly  denote  the  seven  Spirits  of  God,  which 
Christ  received  without  measure.    Thus  he  is  here  repre- 
sented, as  every  way  qualified  to  open  this  book  of  God's 
decrees,  and  to  administer  the  government  of  the  world  and 
the  Church,  by  a  perfect  completion  of  the  whole  plan  of 
infinite  wisdom,  concerning  the  restoration  of  the  human 
family  to  favour,  and  glory.     He  took  tjie  book,  and  thus 
assumed  the  authority  and  government  with  perfect  assur- 
ance, and  the  complaisance  of  the  eternal  Father. 
Verse  8.     And  when  he  had  taken  the  book,  the  four^ 
beasts  and  four  and  twenty  elders  fell  down  be- 
fore the  Lamb,  having  every  one  of  them  harps, 
and  golden  vials  full  of  odours,  which  are  the 
prayers  of  saints. 
9.     And  they  sung  a  new  song,  saying,  Thou  art 
worthy  to  take  the  book,  and  to  open  the  seals 
thereof:  for  thou  wast  slain,  and  hast  redeemed 


170  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES 

us  to  God  by  thy  blood,  oirt  of  every  kindred, 
and  tongue,  and  people,  aiS  nation. 
10.    And  hast  made  us  unto  our  God,  kings  and 
priests,  and  we  shall  reign  on  the  earth. 
Verse  8.     The  four  beasts  and  the  twenty-four  elders  fell 
down  before  the  Lamb.     Here  the  doctrine"  of  Christ's  di- 
vinity is  fully  established.     All  his  economies,  churches, 
saintsj  faithful  ministers,  martyrs,  and  witnesses  pay  him 
divine  honours  as  God,  and  the  Mediator  between  God  and 
man,  by  way  of  religious  worship;  and  all  this  in  the  pre- 
sence of  the  eternal  Father,  and  in  the  face  of  heaven.     O 
what  stupidity,  and  wickedness,  to  deny  the  Lord  that 
bought  us  !    2  Pet.  ii.  1.     To  blaspheme  him  on  earth, 
whom  all  heaven  adores,  is  Satan-like. 

The  ancient  harp,  was  an  instrument  of  music  with  ten 
strings,  which  was  not  sounded  by  the  hand,  but  by  a  cer- 
tain tool,  at  divine  service,  2  Sam.  vi.  5.  Ps.  xxxiii.  2.  and 
on  particular  occasions  of  great  joy. 

Golden  vials  full  of  odours,  which  are  the  prayers,  &c. 
In  allusion  to  these  vials,  they  had  golden  censers  in  the 
temple  at  Jerusalem,  in  which  incense,  or  odours,  were 
daily  burned,  and  the  sweet  smell  ascended  to  heaven. 
These  odours  are  not  symbols  of  the  prayers  themselves, 
but  of  their  being  acceptable,  regarded,  and  remembered  be- 
fore God.  Neither  do  the  elders  here  act  the  part  of  me- 
diators for  the  praying  saints ;  but  that  of  divine  messen- 
gers, who  like  the  angel  that  was  sent  to  Cornelius,  Acts 
X.  inform  the  saints  on  earth,  by  spiritual  signs  and  to- 
kens, that  their  prayers  are  come  up  for  a  memorial  before 
God,  and  will  be  answered  in  due  season.  Heb.  i.  14. 
Whenever  they  make  such  a  communication  to  the  saints, 
then  the  smoke  of  the  sweet  odours  ascendeth  up  before 
.God  out  of  their  hands,  and  the  saints  feel  the  heavenly 
tune  of  their  hearts  touching  every  fibre  of  sensibility. 
Tor  the  scene  of  this  vision  is  not  actually  in  heaven,  but 
in  the  Chureh  on  earth ;  and  it  is  here,  where  the  elders 
kindle  the  fire  of  these  odours  in  the  hearts  of  saints.    Ac- 


THE  GOVERNMENT.  \7\ 

cording  to  this  idea  of  the  subject,  the  holy  Martyrs  con- 
stitute a  separate  spiritual  priesthood,  arranged  into 
twenty-four  courses,  the  heads  of  which  are  these  elders, 
to  whom  are  assigned  this  employment  at  present,  among 
the  saints  on  earth.  O  Christian !  remember  when  you 
pray,  that  some  one  of  these  holy  martyrs  is  kneeling  by 
your  side,  to  worship  the  same  Lord  and  Saviour  with  you, 
and  to  signify  to  you,  that  your  prayer  is  acceptable.  Re- 
member, you  are  praying  in  the  congregation  of  angels. 
The  whole  import  of  this  figure  then  is,  that  this  royal 
priesthood  on  this  occasion  offered  themselves,  their  com- 
missions and  offices,  as  a  living  sacrifice,  and  confessed  al- 
legiance to  Jesus,  the  Lamb  of  God,  upon  his  entering  on 
the  administration  of  his  government. 

Verse  9.  Jlnd  they  sung  a  new  song.  The  original 
word  'si&tj,  song,  signifies  a  piece  of  poetry,  a  hymn  put  in 
metre,  so  that  it  can  be  sung  like  the  Psalms  of  David,  or 
other  hymns  of  praise  and  worship.  See  Enh.  v.  19.  Col. 
iii.  16.  in  the  original.  This  here  is  entitled  a  new  S07igy 
because  it  was  just  then  made  on  a  new  occasion,  when 
the  Saviour  undertook  the  government  of  the  world  and  the 
Church ;  and  because  its  contents  were  a  new  discovery, 
which  the  elders  had  only  then  made  concerning  their  future 
appointment  on  earth.  Of  this  song  the  prophet  Isaiah 
has  spoken,  xlii.  10.  and  throughout  the  whole  of  that 
chapter.  The  subject  of  this  heavenly  ode  is  expressed  in 
the  following  words  :  Thou  art  worthy.  This  is  a  deli- 
berate and  public  confession  of  their  own  conviction,  con- 
cerning the  knowledge,  ability,  dignity,  and  power  of  the 
Lamb,  to  explain  and  execute  the  divine  scheme  of  go- 
vernment as  contained  in  this  book ;  and  a  free  acknow- 
ledgement of  their  allegiance  to  him.  For  this  proceeding 
they  give  the  annexed  reason  :  for  thou  wast  slain,  and  hast 
redeemed  us  to  God  by  thy  blood.  There  was  a  time,  when 
angels  desired  to  look  into  the  marvellous  plan  of  redemp- 
tion, l  Pet.  i.  12 ;  but  since  the  ascension  of  Jesus  Christ, 


1/3  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES 

that  great  and  mysterious  scheme  of  salvation  has  Keen 
fully  exhibited,  and  excites  the  admiration  and  delight  of 
heaven.  The  four  Beings  of  life,  and  the  elders  knew  of 
no  one  worthy  and  capable,  of  all  the  mighty  and  excellent 
in  heaven,  who  had  ever  performed  an  enterprize  that 
could  inspire  such  confidence,  except  the  Lamh  in  the  re- 
demption of  mankind.  The  Lamb  who  undertook  and 
executed  that  scheme,  He  is  worthy  of  the  throne.  His 
blood  and  sufferings  are  the  price  of  our  redemption — a 
great  price  indeed ! 

Out  of  every  kindred,  and  tongue,  and  people,  and  nation. 
Here  both  those  Beings  of  lives,  and  the  elders  tell  us  who, 
and  from  whence  they  are.  They  are  redeemed  by  the 
blood  of  the  Lamb — They  are  of  all  nations  on  the  earth. 
This  passage  does  not  prove,  that  only  the  elect  were  re- 
deemed, it  only  evinces,  that  these  enjoyed  the  fruits  of 
the  redemption  of  Christ.  Dan.  iii.  4.  Col.  i.  £3.  These 
four  words  may  refer  to  the  four  parts  of  the  world. 

Verse  10.     And  hast  made  y,s  unto  our  God  kings  and 
priests.      The  learned  and  pious  Bengelius  reads  here 
(ZxgiXuxv,  a  kingdom,  pro  $&<; iKiig >  kings.    The  Church 
of  Christ  is  now  a  spiritual  kingdom,  John  xviii.  36 ;  but 
in  the  Millennium,   during  the  thousand  years  reign  of 
Christ  on  earth,  it  will  be  a  kingdom  in  every  sense  of  the 
word :  and  then  the  four  Beings  of  life  will  be  his  king- 
dom, for  the  elders  say,  fiotgihivgo/Mv>  %ve  tvil  Ireign  as 
kings  on  the  earth.    At  present  they  are  only  priests,  but 
then  they  shall  be  as  kings  and  priests  on  earth,  Rev.  xx. 
4.  5.  6.  as  a  compensation  for  the  sacrifice  they  made  of 
their  lives,  for  the  sake  of  Christ  and  his  doctrine. 
Verse  11.  And  I  beheld,  and  I  heard  the  voice  of  many  an- 
gels round  about  the  throne,  and  the  beasts,  and 
the  elders  :  and  the  number  of  them  was  ten 
thousand  times  ten  thousand,  and  thousands  of 
thousands  ,• 


THE  GOVERNMENT.  173 

12.  Saying  with  a  loud  voice,  worthy  is  the  Lamb 
that  was  slain  to  receive  power,  and  riches,  and 
wisdom,  and  strength,  and  honour,  and  glory, 
and  blessing. 

The  voice  of  many  angels.  An  innumerable  company. 
Daniel  saw  such  a  number,  chap.  vii.  10.  Ps.  lxviii.  17. 
They  were  angels 'and  not  separate  spirits  of  men,  for  they 
do  not  say,  that  the  Lamb  redeemed  them.  Those  which 
the  Lamb  has  redeemed,  the  four  Beings  of  life,  and  the 
elders,  were  nearer  to  the  throne  than  they,  because  the 
saints  are  the  heirs  of  salvation,  and  the  Church  is  the 
bride  of  the  Lamb.  This  innumerable  company  of  an- 
gels is  said  to  have  encompassed  the  whole  scene ;  because 
they  are  servants  of  God,  and  ministering  Spirits  to  the 
Churches,  and  guardians  to  believers,  whom  they  protect 
from  enemies  and  dangers,  and  perform  many  thousand 
good  offices.  Heb.  i.  14.  Rev.  i.  1.  Acts  xxvii.  24.  Acts 
xvi.  9.  10.  2  Kings  vi.  16.  17. 

Verse  12.  Worthy  is  the  Lamb.  Thus  all  the  heavens 
testify  of  his  qualification  and  worthiness  of  the  throne, 
and  freely  acknowledge  their  allegiance,  in  order  to  serve 
under  his  command.  These  seven  words  of  praise  may 
allude  to  the  seven  horns  and  eyes  of  the  Lamb,  and  to  the 
divine  purposes,  which  he  is  to  accomplish  by  them.  Thus 
one  division  after  the  other  declares  the  worthiness  of  the 
Lamb,  and  acknowledges  allegiance:  first  the  visible 
Church  and  people  of  God  in  these  four  economies,  and  all 
his  holy  martyrs ;  secondly,  all  the  hosts  of  heaven  ;  and 
thirdly,  in  the  next  verses,  the  whole  human  race  on  earth, 
and  in  Hades  under  the  earth — God  and  the  whole  Uni- 
verse, Deists  deviate  from  them  all,  and  are  the  enemies 
of  all.  Luke  xix.  14.  But  his  citizens  hated  him,  and 
sent  a  message  ojrlgu  *Jt»  Agyovrg?,  behind  his  back, 
(through  the  country)  saying  we  will  not  have  Him  to 
reign  over  us. 


174  THE  LAMB  ASSUMES,  &c. 

Verse  13,  And  every  creature  which  is  in  heaven,  and  on 
the  earth,  and  under  the  earth,  and  such  as  are 
in  the  sea,  and  all  that  are  in  them,  heard  I  say- 
ing,  Blessing,    and   honour,    and  glory,   and 
power,  be  unto  him  that  sitteth  upon  the  throne, 
and  unto  the  Lamb  for  ever  and  ever. 
14.  And  the  four  beasts  said,  Amen.   And  the  four 
and  twenty  elders   fell  down   and  worshipped 
him  that  liveth  for  ever  and  ever. 
It  would  appear  from  this  chapter,    that  the  eternal 
Father  revealeth  his  Son  in  a  gradual  manner  both  in  hea- 
ven and  earth,  and  that  Jesus  Christ  manifests  himself 
only  by  his  works,  and  the  performance  of  marvellous  en- 
terprises; until  at  last  the  whole  Universe  is  brought, 
freely  to  confess  his  superiority  in  every  point  of  view, 
even  in  his  manhood,  and  to  acknowledge  allegiance  from 
a  full  knowledge  and  conviction  of  his  worthiness,  by  his 
admirable  deeds.     The  universal  homage  of  all  creation, 
animate  and  inanimate,  as  recorded  in  these  verses,  did 
not  actually  take  place  at  the  time  when  John  beheld  this 
vision.     Neither  did  the  Lamb  really  then  only  open  th<i 
book,  and  undertake  the  government,  which  certainly  must 
have  happened  before  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  since 
that  judgment  is  ascribed  to  him.     All  this  is  a  prophetic 
vision,  of  the  gradual  extension  of  the  Saviour's  kingdom, 
and  acknowledged  authority  to  the  end  of  time.    John  v. 
23.    Phil.  ii.  9.  10. 11. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


I.  SEAL,  ACCOMPLISHED  PEOM  A.  D.  72 to  122. 

Verse  1.  And  I  s;aw  when  the  Lamb  opened  one  of  the 
seals,  and  I  heard,  as  it  were  the  noise  of  thun- 
der, one  of  the  four  beasts  saying,  Come  and 
see. 
2.  And  I  saw,  and  behold  a  white  horse;  and  he 
that  sat  on  him  had  a  bow ;  and  a  crown  was 
given  unto  him :  and  he  went  forth  conquering 
and  to  conquer.  \ 

When  the  Lord  made  this  Revelation  to  St.  John,  the 
situation  of  the  Church  of  Christ  was  peculiarly  Critical. 
Jerusalem  and  her  temple,  the  former  people  and  Church 
of  God  lay  in  total  ruin  ,•  which  in  its  holy  records  had 
many  glorious  promises  not  yet  fulfilled.  The  banners  of 
the  Church  had  been  planted  in  Biany  countries,  and  her 
ministers  every  where  met  with  great  success,  in  enlisting 
many  valiant  soldiers  for  the  service  of  the  Lord.  Jews 
and  Gentiles  were  alarmed,  at  this  rapid  propagation  of 
the  Gospel ;  and  the  Christians  were  in  full  expectation  of 
the  approach  of  the  personal  kingdom  of  Christ  on  earth, 
which  should  encompass  the  whole  world.  In  the  midst 
of  this  full  tide  of  prosperity,  the  Church  of  Christ  was  ar- 
rested by  the  cruel  persecutions  of  the  Roman  emperors, 
Nero  and  Domitian,  revived  Paganism  in  all  its  abomina- 
tions, and  threatened  Christianity  with  utter  destruction. 
Idolatry  was  every  where  again  vigorously  supported  by 


176         I.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  72— TO  122. 

the  powers  of  this  world,  the  self-interested  views  of  a  host 
of  priests,  and  the  corrupt  passions  of  man  :  but  the  reli- 
gion of  Jesus  was  accounted  foolishness,  an  enemy  to  the 
state  and  to  mankind,  and  only  maintained  herself  by  the 
truth  of  her  doctrine,  and  the  holy  lives  of  her  disciples. 
When  the  Christians  saw  all  their  hopes  thus  crossed,  and. 
all  their  wishes  frustrated,  many  thousands  fell  into  doubts, 
perplexing  temptations  and  fears,  concerning  the  truth  and 
divine  origin  of  the  Christian  religion,  and  her  final  suc- 
cess on  earth.  Short-sighted  reason  argued  thus :  If  Je- 
hovah be  the  author  of  Christianity,  and  Jesus  Christ  the 
Son  of  God,  then  our  religion  must  finally  prevail,  and  all 
the  promises  concerning  the  welfare  of  Zion,  will  surely 
be  accomplished ;  but  the  natural  probability  from  the  vio- 
lent opposition  of  the  world,  is  against  us,  and  Paganism 
is  victorious  from  the  throne  to  the  cottage.  It  is  not  im- 
possible that  we  may  be  deceived.  Man  perhaps  is  doom- 
ed to  wander  in  darkness,  doubt  and  perplexity,  through 
the  valley  of  this  world,  forlorn,  and  ignorant  of  a  life  to 
come,  without  a  true  knowledge  of  his  Maker  and  his  God. 
All  those  miracles  which  we  have  seen,  and  which  are 
preached  unto  us,  may  be  the  effects  of  superior  beings, 
unknown  to  us,  or  from  latent  causes  in  nature,  and  we 
destined,  to  be  the  sport  of  an  inferior  Demiurgus,  or  a  de- 
ceitful Governor  of  this  world.  If  in  this  life  only  we 
have  hope  in  Christ,  we  are  of  all  men  most  miserable, 
1  Cor.  xv.  19.  O  that  God  in  whom  we  trust,  would  take 
pity  on  us,  and  pour  light  and  comfort  into  our  despond- 
ing hearts !  If  this  book  had  not  opened  the  future  pros- 
pects of  the  Chmrch  of  Christ,  these  and  similar  doubts  and 
perplexities  would  have  arisen  in  the  hearts  of  millions  in 
every  age,  and  the  Church  would  this  day  as  much  as  ever, 
aeed  such  a  mighty  support. 

The  principal  wish  and  desire  of  the  Church  in  those 
days  of  affliction  was,  to  know  the  future  prospects  of 
Christianity  in  the  Roman  empire,  and  the  final  doom  of 
Paganism.    Both  these  important  points  were  revealed. 


I.  SEAL  FROM  A.  n.  72— TO  122.  177 

by  opening  the  first  six  seals  of  the  heavenly  roll ;  and 
thus  all  Christians  received  instruction  and  comfort.  Each 
seal  enclosed  only  those  events,  which  should  he  brought 
about  by  Providence,  during  a  determined  space  of  fifty 
years ;  and  not  all  the  events  which  happened  during  that 
space  of  time,  nor  even  all  those  which  the  historian  would 
treat  with  principal  concern.  Here  prophecy  differs 
widely  from  profane  history ;  it  only  takes  notice  of  those 
dispensations,  which  were  intended  to  effect  the  downfall 
of  Paganism,  and  the  success  and  prosperity  of  the  Church, 
and  disciples  of  Jesus.  All  the  glorious  achievements  of 
emperors  and  armies,  which  have  no  tendency  to  further 
the  designs  of  heaven,  are  not  considered  as  worthy  of  re- 
membrance. They  are  mere  actions  of  men,  in  which  the 
Church  of  God  is  not  immediately  concerned,  and  are 
therefore  undeserving  of  a  place  in  the  journal  of  Provi- 
dence. 

The  whole  Revelation  then,  contains  a  prophetic  history 
of  the  Christian  religion,  of  Christ  and  his  Church.  And 
this  chapter  begins  the  evolution  of  a  series  of  Divine  mea- 
sures, by  which  the  mystery  of  God  was  to  be  accomplish- 
ed at  different  periods  in  the  Roman  empire,  in  order  to 
procure  a  secure  dwelling-place  for  the  Church. 

Verse  1.  Come  and  see.  The  opening  of  these  seats 
seems  to  have  been  attended  with  circumstances,  peculiarly 
majestic.  When  the  Lamb  opened  a  seal,  he  also  exr 
hibited  its  centents  by  a  hieroglyphic  representation 
in  the  surrounding  clouds.  Here  a  rider  on  horseback 
passed  in  full  view  of  the  throne,  and  all  its  attendants, 
through  this  heavenly  theatre  of  visions  $  and  the  first 
Being  of  life  like  a  lion,  with  a  tremendous  voice,  as  the 
noise  of  thunder,  called  the  holy  seer  to  give  particular  at- 
tention, that  nothing  might  escape  his  observation,  which 
could  benefit,  instruct,  or  comfort  his  brethren. 

Verse  2.  Jl  white  horse ;  and  he  that  sat  on  him  had  a 
fyow.    Expositors  have  differed  widely  in  their  explana* 


178  I.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  72— TO  122. 

tions  of  this  seal.  Bengelius  has  here  seen  the  victories 
of  the  Romans  under  the  emperor  Trajan,  and  Dr.  Yung 
the  rapid  propagation  of  the  gospel  during  the  first  cen- 
turies. Thus,  truth  sometimes  lies  before  our  feet  un- 
observed, and  we  search  for  it  with  great  labour  at  a 
distance.  Horses  are  instruments  of  war,  and  a  white 
horse  is  an  emblem  of  victory,  conquest,  and  succeeding 
prosperity.  This  hieroglyphic  represents  the  Lord  Jesus 
Christ  in  a  double  point  of  view,  to  the  unspeakable  com- 
fort of  his  afflicted  Church.  First,  as  conqueror  of  Juda- 
ism, and  the  Jewish  nation,  for  having  rejected  him  as 
their  Messiah  and  King.  When  the  Persian  kings  after 
a  signal  victory,  offered  sacrifices  to  the  sun,  they  rode  on 
white  horses.  On  account  of  this  victory  it  is  said  in  the 
text,  i^o'S-jj,  a  crown  has,  or  had  been  given  him,  as  ji  thing 
which  had  Ireen  done  sometime  before  this  vision^of  St. 
John.  Secondly,  as  directing  all  the  conquests  of  the  Ro- 
mans, from  this  time  to  the  accomplishment  of  his  hea- 
venly designs  concerning  his  Church.  The  Roman  gene- 
rals used  to  ride  white  horses  at  the  head  of  their  armies, 
and  their  triumphal  chariots  were  drawn  by  white  horses. 
It  is  worthy  of  particular  remark,  that  Daniel's  prophecy 
concerning  the  limits  of  the  Roman  empire,  Dan.  vii.  7. 
23.  was  not  fully  accomplished,  till  in  the  days  of  Trajan. 
He  conquered  from  Anno.  108,  in  a  few  years,  Armenia, 
Assyria,  Mesopotamia,  and  even  the  countries  beyond  the 
Tigris;  and  extended  the  Roman  dominion  far  beyond 
what  Pompey  had  done  towards  the  East,  and  to  the  full 
extent  of  the  Macedonian  empire.  The  Christians  were 
alarmed  by  the  immense  power  of  the  Romans,  as  they  were 
always  ready  to  supportidolatry  with  all  its  abominatioj.s ; 
but  the  Lord  here  informs  his  people,  that  he  superintends 
the  power  of  these  conquerors  of  the  world,  and  directs  all 
their  victories  to  the  benefit  of  his.  Church.  And  accord- 
ingly, Gibbon  asserts  that  by  this  overgrown  power,  the 
Romans  weakened  the  centre  of  their  empire,  and  thus  ac- 


II.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  122— TO  172.         if& 

celerated  its  dissolution.  The  Lord  directed  the  Roman 
victories  and  conquests  to  the  promotion  of  his  Church 
and  drove  his  arrows  into  the  hearts  of  his  enemies.  Pa. 
xlv.  All  victories  from  henceforth,  had  a  ruinous  effect  on 
the  empire,  and  the  Roman  power  began  to  sink  from  that 
time.  Paganism  lost  its  mighty  hold,  and  fell  into  disre- 
pute, until  the  whole  empire  became  a  province  of  the  Lord 
Jesus. 

Those  expositors,  who  explain  this  seal  only  of  the  Lords 
spiritual  conquests  through  his  Church  and  religion,  have, 
I  presume,  not  sufficiently  considered  this  subject.  They 
represent  this  rider,  as  having  a  wholly  separate  and  dis- 
tinct object  and  employment,  from  the  following  riders: 
whereas  the  horse  and  rider  under  the  first  seal,  must 
surely  be  explained  in  connexion  with  those  under  the  se- 
cond, third,  and  fourth  seals,  as  having  the  execution  of 
only  a  part  of  an  enterprize,  of  the  same  nature  with  the 
rest.  This  explanation  also  perfectly  accords  with  chap. 
xix.  11.  Where  this  same  rider  again  returns,  after  having 
gained  many  crowns,  i.  e.  kingdoms  and  empires  j  for  he 
went  forth  conquering  and  to  conquer. 


II.  SEAL  ACCOMPLISHED  PROM  A.  D.  122 — TO  172. 

Verse  3.     And  when  he  had  opened  the  second  seal,  I 
heard  the  second  beast  say,  Come  and  see. 
4.     And  there  went  out  another  horse  that  was  red ; 
and  power  was  given  to  him  that  sat  thereon  to 
take  peace  from  the. earth,  and  that  they  should 
kill  one  another :  and  there  was  given  unto  him 
a  great  sword. 
By  the  first  seal  the  Christians  were  comforted  con- 
cerning the  extension  of  the  Roman  power  in  the  East,  es- 


180        II.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  122— TO  172. 

pecially  those,  who  inhabited  the  conquered  countries  along 
the  Euphrates  and  Tigris,  not  to  imagine  that  Providence 
was  smiling  on  a  government,  by  which  they  were  cruelly 
persecuted,  and  his  Church  disregarded.  By  the  open- 
ing of  this  second  seal  the  Lord  discovered  another  cause, 
which  would  effect  the  downfall  of  this  colossean  power, 
the  foreknowledge  of  which  might  prove  to  them  of  great 
benefit  during  its  accomplishment,  to  strengthen  their  faith 
and  to  make  them  more  cautious  in  times  of  danger.  At 
the  opening  of  the  first  seal,  St.  John  was  called  on  by  the 
Lion,  the  image  of  heroic  faith  and  actions,  as  expressive 
of  the  general  character  of  the  Church  in  those  days  j  but 
now  by  the  second,  the  image  of  industry  and  sufferings 
for  the  common  good  of  man. 

This  horse  denotes  war,  and  his  red  colour  blood  and 
slaughter,  which  was  to  take  place  on  earth,  h.  e.  particu- 
larly on  the  continent  of  the  Roman  empire.  By  the  open- 
ing of  this  seal  therefore,  the  Christians  received  solemn 
warning  in  those  countries,  where  God  in  righteous  judg- 
ment had  withdrawn  the  spirit  of  peace  and  reconciliation, 
and  given  men  over  to  insurrection,  sedition  and  rebellion? 
until  at  last  the  great  sword  severed  all. 

All  this  has  actually  taken  place  in  the  Roman  empire 
during  this  period.  Immediately  on  the  death  of  Trajan, 
the  provinces  Armenia,  Assyria,  and  Mesopotamia,  re- 
volted from  the  Romans ;  and  the  ensuing  fermentations, 
Wars  and  calamities,  made  those  countries  a  very  insecure 
place  of  residence  for  the  Church.  But  this  prophecy 
seems  to  refer  more  particularly  to  the  intestine  wars 
under  Adrian  against  the  Jews,  and  to  their  bloody  insur- 
rections, which  began  A.  D.  133. 

Since  the  destruction  of-  Jerusalem  the  Jews  had  lost 
their  own  government,  their  laws  of  worship,  and  even  their 
country,  where  they  were  forced  to  abandon  the  sepulchres 
of  their  fathers,  and  all  those  monuments  of  Divine  love 
and  favour,  to  the  insolence  of  Pagans,    As  their  return 


II.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  122—. TO  172.        181 

was  not  prohibited  by  law,  they  soon  collected  again  in 
their  beloved  country  in  great  numbers,  and  raised  their 
tents  even  among  the  ruins  of  Jerusalem.  But  their  love 
of  liberty,  and  burning  revenge  against  the  Romans,  made 
them  every  where  restless  citizens.  They  often  raised 
iasurrections  against  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  and  com- 
mitted most  horrible  cruelties.  In  the  neighbourhood  of 
Cyrene  they  destroyed  no  less  than  220,000  men;  in 
Egypt  and  Cyprus  240,000 ;  so  that  Adrian  sent  new  co- 
lonies in  order  to  re-populate  the  desolate  places.  But 
when  Adrian  began  to  rebuild  Jerusalem,  he  filled  it  with 
Heathens,  and  even  erected  a  Pagan  temple  for  idolatrous 
worship  within  her  walls,  in  consequence  of  which  the 
Jews  suddenly  rose  in  rebellion  throughout  the  whole  Ro- 
man empire.  An  infamous  impostor  by  the  name  of  Baro- 
chebas  inflamed  their  passions  to  the  highest  pitch  of  enthu- 
siasm, by  calling  himself  the  Star  of  Jacob,  under  which 
title  the  Messiah  had  been  promised,  as  the  deliverer  of 
Israel,  Num.  xxiv.  17.  Akibas,  the  most  famous  among 
the  Jewish  doctors,  and  the  principal  families  of  that  di- 
luded  people,  received  him  as  their  Messiah  without  any 
further  proof,  than  believing  that  to  be  the  time  of  his  ap- 
pearance. They  chose  him  their  leader,  took  many  for- 
tresses, and  spread  desolation,  blood  and  slaughter,  where- 
ever  they  went,  especially  among  the  Christians  in  Judea, 
whom  they  persecuted  with  unaccountable  fury.  Rufus, 
the  governor,  could  not  stop  their  progress,  though  the  em- 
peror had  sent  him  large  supplies  of  troops ;  he  therefore 
sent  Julius  Severus,  the  greatest  general  of  his  time,  who 
subdued  them  with  such  immense  blood  and  slaughter,  as 
to  deter  them  for  ever  from  rising  again.  He  destroyed 
fifty  of  their  cities,  and  nine  hundred  eighty-live  towns, 
and  made  Palestine  almost  a  desert  and  solitary  wilder- 
ness. The  Jews  lost  more  than  600,000  of  their  nation. 
So  great  was  the  slaughter,  especially  in  Bither,  of  men, 
women,  and  children*  that  the  Jews  say  their  blood  ran 


182       III.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  172— TO  222. 

down  into  the  main  sea>  that  a  horse  might  wade  up  to  his 
nose  in  blood.  From  this  time,  their  yoke  became  heavier 
than  ever  under  the  Roman  empire,  they  were  banished 
Judea,  and  forbidden  ever  to  approach  the  holy  city. 

This  overthrow  of  the  Jewish  nation  was  total,  like  that 
of  their  city  and  temple,  and  left  them  no  hopes  of  reco- 
very. They  have  drawn  this  judgment  upon  themselves, 
by  their  malignant  opposition  to  the  Church  of  Christ. 
They  not  only  rejected,  and  put  to  death  their  Messiah, 
but  also  persecuted  his  disciples  and  followers  with  unac- 
countable malice,  and  destroyed  their  peace  and  happiness 
in  every  country,  by  presenting  false  accusations  against 
them  before  the  Roman  tribunals.  Thus  they  have  added 
the  blood  of  many  thousand  Christians  to  that  of  their  pro- 
phets, and  hastened  their  total  ruin.  And  this  is  the  effect 
of  the  great  sword,  given  to  the  rider  under  this  seal. 

During  this  period  also  the  third  and  fourth  persecution 
raged  in  Asia  with  double  fury,  in  which  Polycarp  and 
Justin  honoured  God  by  their  deaths  as  martyrs.  But 
this  prophecy  does  not  seem  to  refer  to  that  legislative 
madness,  which  is  all  reserved  for  the  fifth  seal.  These 
words  only  refer  to  those,  who  are  capable  of  killing  one 
another,  which  is  not  the  disposition  of  Christians,  and 
much  less  of  the  Christians  of  those  days. 


III.  SEAL  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  172 — TO  222. 

Verse  5.  And  when  he  had  opened  the  third  seal,  I  heard 
the  third  beast  say,  come  and  see.  And  I  be- 
held, and  lo,  a  black  horse ;  and  he  that  sat  on 
him  had  a  pair  of  balances  in  his  hand. 
6.  And  I  heard  a  voice  in  the  midst  of  the  four 
beasts  say,  a  measure  of  wheat  for  a  penny,  and 


in.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  172— TO  222.      183 

three  measures  of  barley  for  a  penny  5  and  see 
thou  hurt  not  the  oil  and  the  wine. 

This  hieroglyphic  denotes  a  famine,  which  was  to 
happen  during  this  period  in  the  Roman  empire,  more  re- 
markable for  its  universality  and  duration,  than  on  ac- 
count of  the  high  degree  of  scarcity  of  the  necessaries  of 
life.  See  Sam.  iv.  7.  8.  and  chap.  v.  10.  Bread — grain 
is.  truly  scarce,  when  it  is  no  longer  measured  by  measure, 
but  weighed  out  by  balances.  %orvi|,  Cluxmx  is  a  measure 
of  about  two  pounds,  the  usual  allowance  in  Xerxes's 
army,  and  among  the  Romans  of  a  man  per  day;  and 
ivivoLfitov,  a  penny,  was  the  usual  hire  of  a  labourer  for  a 
day.  A  man's  daily  wages  then,  would  only  buy  himself 
bread,  without  any  thing  to  eat  with  it,  or  any  surplus  for 
his  family,  or  even  for  his  own  clothing.  This  scarcity 
would  have  fallen  on  the  superfluities  also,  such  as  oil  and 
wine,  but  the  voice  of  Christ  from  the  midst  of  the  four  Be- 
ings of  life,  limited  it  to  the  most  necessary  articles  of  sub- 
sistence. 

Those  historians,  who  have  given  us  the  lives  of  the  em- 
perors, and  the  particulars  of  their  reign  in  detail,  during 
this  period,  bear  witness  to  such  a  famine  in  the  Roman 
empire.     It  began  during  the  last  years  of  the  reign  of 
Antonine  the  philosopher,  and  lasted  to  the  first  years  of 
the  emperor  Severus.    There  were  alternately  throughout 
the  whole  Roman  empire  sterility  of  crops,  inundations, 
great  droughts,  barrenness  of  soil,  immense  exportation^ 
of  grain,  foraging  during  the  many  intestine  wars,  earth- 
quakes, burning  of  towns,  unnatural  meteors  and  eclipses. 
Tertullian  says,  that  during  the  reign  of  Antonine,  each 
town  and  city  in  the  empire  had  suffered  a  famine,  and 
that  the  heavy  rains,  which  had  been  the  cause  of  it,  were 
so  numerous,  as  to  threaten  the  world  with  a  second  de- 
luge.    The  emperor,  who  had  sold  his  precious  furniture 
to  prosecute  the  war,  made  the  people  great  donations,  out 
of  his  own  private  purse.    During  the  reign  of  the  empe- 
ror Commodus,  says  Echart  in  his  Roman  History,  the 


184      III.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  172— TO  222: 

Tiber  inundated  a  great  part  of  the  city  of  Rome,  upon 
which  followed  a  great  famine,  earthquakes,  and  infection 
of  the  air,  by  bloodless  animalcules  and  insects.  The 
scarcity  ran  so  high,  that  the  people  in  a  violent  commo- 
tion killed  Oleander,  the  emperor's  favourite.  Severus  at 
last  made  it  a  principal  object,  to  supply  their  wants  by 
importations  from  other  countries.  There  neither  was  be- 
fore nor  after  this  period,  a  famine  so  general  and  of  such: 
long  duration,  as  this  had  been. 

And  here  I  would  answer  an  objection,  which  perhaps 
some  of  my  readers  are  ready  to  make.     They  wish  to 
read  of  more  all-important  events,  as  the  completion  of 
these  seals,  than  what  are  here  actually  treated  of.     To 
this  I  answer:  1.  When  the  Lord  judges  it  necessary  to 
comfort  and  strengthen  his  Church  in  any  certain  period 
by  prophecy,  he  can  only  make  choice  of  such  events  as 
according  to  his  Divine  prescience  of  things,  actually  take 
place  during  that  time.     The  events  themselves  are  not 
the  principal  objects  to  the  Church,  however  great  op 
small  their  influence  on  her  prosperity  may  be;  but  the 
accomplishment  of  a  divine  prediction  in  those  occurrences. 
This  is  what  constitutes  them  prophecies — memorials  and 
pledges  of  the  Lord  to  his  people.     2.  These  events  are 
sufficiently  important  to  the  Church.    The  Christians  were 
citizens  of  the  Roman  empire,  and  their  lives  and  sublu- 
nary happiness  were  largely  involved  in  its  fate.  By  these 
prophecies  they  were  infonred  of  the  extent  of  these  ca- 
lamities, which  might  diminish  unnecessary  fear,  excite 
them  either  to  fly  from  danger,  where  it  was  proper,  or 
prepare  to  meet  it  in  a  becoming  manner.  S.  The  Church 
of  Christ  in  those  days  was  as  yet  a  young  and  tender  in- 
fant, which,  especially  during  the  time  of  the  bloody  per- 
secutions by  the  Romans,  required  perpetual  aid  and  re- 
freshment.    The  Lord,  therefore,  in  each  period  gave  her 
pledges  of  his  favour  and  assistance,  that  she  might  con- 
tinue faithful,  and  rise  superior  to  the  power  of  her  ene- 
mies. 


IV.  SExiL  FROM  A.  D.  222  TO  272.         185 

IV.  SEAI  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  222 TO  272. 

Verse  7.    And  when  he  had  opened  the  fourth  seal,  I 
heard  the  voice  of  the  fourth  beast  say,  come 
and  see. 
8.     And  I  looked,  and  behold  a  pale  horse;  and 
his  name  that  sat  on  him  was  death,  and  hell 
followed  with  him  :  and  power  was  given  unto 
them  over  the  fourth  part  of  the  earth,  to  kill 
with  sword,  and  with  hunger,  and  with  death, 
and  with  the  beasts  of  the  earth. 
The  name  of  this  rider  fully  corresponds  with  the  colour 
of  his  horse.    According  to  the  same  rule  we  may  admit, 
that  the  rider  on  the  white  horse  was  victory;  the  rider 
on  the  red  horse  war;  the  rider  on  the  black  horse  famine; 
and  because  all  the  judgments  of  God  under  the  foregoing 
seals  still  continued,  and  here  received  new  strength,  this 
rider  is  emphatically  called  death.    The  holy  seer  beheld 
his  frightful  appearance,  as  he  passed  the  theatre  of  visions 
before  the  throne  of  God.     The  colour  of  his  horse  was 
%Afc>£o?,  Pa^e»  a  mixture  of  green  and  yellow,  like  faded, 
putrescent  grass.     <*JV  as  we^  as  scheol,  hell,  signifies ^a 
spacious  open  gulf,  or  large  cave  under  the  earth.     The 
ancients,  who  had  more  intercourse  with  the  world  of  spi- 
rits than  we,  believed  Hades  to  be  a  great  solitary  desert, 
into  which  all  separate  spirits  are  collected,  before  the  de- 
termination of  their  final  destiny.  Isa.  xiv.  1  Sam.  xxviii. 
Death  here  denotes  sudden  death,  as  by  pestilence,  putrid 
fevers  and  other  epidemics. 

The  sword,  hunger,  death  and  beasts  are  the  four  sore 
judgments  of  God,  by  which  he  punishes  the  opposition  of 
diabolical  nations.  Ezek.  xiv.  21.  Lev.  xxvi.  16.  Jer. 
xxiv.  10.  Ezek.  vi.  12.  They  all  raged  dreadfully  durr 
ing  this  period  in  the  Roman  empire.  (>o[A,<$a,icc  not  only 
signifies  sword,  but  a  broad  swordf  a  glave,  as  used  in 

a  a 


m       IV.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  222—TO  272. 

slaughter-houses,  and  indicates  a  most  wanton  and  pro- 
fuse shedding  of  human  blood. 

The  Roman  empire  had  suffered  greatly  by  the  repeated 
shocks  of  judgments  under  the  former  seals,  but  those  in- 
flicted under  this  seal,  brought  it  almost  to  the  brink  of 
ruin.  The  whole  empire  was  thrown  into  dreadful  confu- 
sion by  the  mismanagement  of  many  weak  and  incompetent 
emperors,  and  the  imprudence  of  governors  in  the  provin- 
ces. The  soldiery  lost  all  discipline  and  spirit  of  subordi- 
nation— They  murdered  good  emperors  and  publicly  sold 
the  empire  to  the  highest  bidder,  as  one  would  expose  a 
commodity  for  money.  Hence,  without  divination  we  may 
judge  of  their  government,  and  the  sufferings  of  the  peo- 
ple. The  emperor  Maximinus  killed  more  than  4,000 
men,  without  any  charge  or  judicial  process  against  them. 
Gcdlienus,  that  cruel  tyrant,  depopulated  many  cities  and 
towns  by  his  barbarities,  and  daily  exterminated  three  or 
four  thousand  of  his  soldiers,  because  he  had  discovered 
their  intentions  of  creating  a  new  emperor.  During  his 
reign  thirty  tyrants  arose,  who  divided  the  empire  between 
them,  and  whose  extirpation  caused  streams  of  blood.  In 
less  than  fifty  years,  more  than  twenty  emperors  died  vio- 
lent deaths,  and  the  Roman  empire  was  almost  destroyed. 
Probus  killed  in  different  battles  400,000  Germans,  be- 
sides what  he  lost  himself;  Decius  30,000  Goths;  Clau- 
dius destroyed  in  different  engagements  300,000  of  the 
same  people ;  and  that  cruel  wretch,  Maximinus,  deso- 
lated Germany,  with  fire  and  sword  to  the  distance  of  four 
hundred  miles. 

The  Roman  empire  was  most  grievously  afflicted  by  fa- 
mine, A.  D.  248,  which  was  followed  A.  D.  250,  by  a  pes- 
tilence of  cruel  and  general  rage.  It  began  in  Ethiopia, 
pervaded  the  East  and  every  part  of  the  Roman  empire, 
and  lasted  fifteen  years.  There  were  times,  when  5,000 
died  in  one  day  within  the  city  of  Rome,  and  its  course 
was  no  less  fatal  throughout  the  whole  empire,  in  propor- 


V.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  272— TO  322.        187 

fion  to  their  number  of  population.   Perhaps  there  never 
was  its  equal  in  extent  and  duration. 

This  period  is  also  marked,  by  five  general  persecutions 
of  the  Christians,  in  which  many  thousands  perished  by 
being  thrown  before  wild  beasts,  and  by  the  savage  cruel- 
ties of  the  Roman  emperors,  governors  and  magistrates. 
These  judgments  swept  away  according  to  this  prophecy, 
the  fourth  part  of  the  earth :  that  is,  the  fourth  part  of  the 
citizens  of  the  Roman  empire,  during  this  period,  did  not 
die  natural  deaths — which  is  by  no  means  improbable. 
These  judgments  befel  the  Church  as  well  as  the  state, 
and  fully  express  the  import  of  the  images  under  this  seal. 

.  m 


V.  SEAL  ACCOMPLISHED  PROM  A.  D.  272 — TO  522. 

Verse  9.  And  when  he  had  opened  the  fifth  seal,  I  saw 
under  the  altar  the  souls  of  them  that  were  slain 
for  the  word  of  God,  and  for  the  testimony 
which  they  held : 

10.  And  they  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  How 
long,  0  Lord,  holy  and  true,  dost  thou  not  judge 
and  avenge  our  blood  on  them  that  dwell  on  the 
earth  ? 

11.  And  white  robes  were  given  unto  every  one  of 
them;  and  it  was  said  unto  them,  that  they 
should  rest  yet  for  a  little  season,  until  their  fel- 
low servants  also,  and  their  brethren,  that 
should  be  killed  as  they  were,  should  be  ful- 
filled. 

The  four  first  seals  stand  peculiarly  connected  among 
themselves  by  the  internal  order  of  this  book  of  prophecy. 
At  the  opening  of  each  of  them,  the  hieroglyphic  represen- 
tation of  their  contents  is  introduced  by  one  of  those  four 


186        V.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  272— TO  322. 

Beings  of  life  around  the  throne  of  God ;  because  they 
refer  to  events,  which  were  to  happen  solely  on  earth,  and 
within  the  limits  of  the  Church,  and  to  the  extent  of  the 
sound  of  the  gospel  trumpet.  The  following  seals  are 
again  connected,  and  comprise  events  in  both  the  visible 
and  invisible  world,  which  therefore  exceed  the  voice  of 
these  living  creatures. 

By  the  opening  of  this  seal,  the  Lord  informed  his 
Church  on  three  very  material  points,  necessary  for  her  to 
know,  as  she  was  now  to  pass  the  fiery  ordeal,  to  prove 
her  fidelity  for  exer. 

I.  /  saw  under  the  altar  the  sods  of  them  that  were  slain. 
Thus  the  Lord  ^scloses  the  tenth  and  last  general  perse- 
cution, under  the  Roman  emperor  JDioclesian,  which  began 
A.  D.  303,  and  was  carried  on  under  four  successive  edicts 
from  the  throne,  by  all  sorts  of  torments  and  unspeakable 
cruelties,  for  ten  years.  The  number  of  martyrs  during 
this  persecution  was  immense,  among  which  were  many 
characters  distinguished  for  piety  and  learning.  They  are 
accounted  no  less  than  144,000  persons.  So  great  was  the 
diligence  and  zeal  of  the  Roman  magistrates  and  the  mul- 
titude, against  the  Christians,  that  their  raving  exertions 
were  like  to  prove  fatal  to  the  Christian  cause.  At  first 
they  only  pulled  down  the  Christian  churches,  burned 
their  books  and  writings,  and  deprived  them  of  all  civil 
rights  and  privileges ;  but  at  last  their  cruel  minds  im- 
pelled them  to  such  brutal  and  shameful  torments,  as  even 
decency  forbids  to  describe.  This  being  the  most  severe, 
and  last  of  all  the  persecutions  by  Pagan  Rome,  is  there- 
fore here  particularly  noted,  though  all  former  martyrs 
are  also  comprehended  under  this  seal. 

II.  I  saw  under  the  altar  the  souls.  Here  the  Lord  ele- 
vates the  veil,  and  the  Church  beholds  a  glorious  scene  in 
the  invisible  world — the  state  of  immortality,  in  which 
bouIs  exist  after  their  separation  from  the  body,  and  the 
virtue  and  excellence  of  martyrdom.    It  was  a  generally 


V.  SEAL  FROM  J^B.  272— TO  322.         189 

received  opinion  among  the  ancient  fathers,  that  the  souls 
of  believers,  after  death,  were  clothed  in  ethereal  bodies,  in 
which  they  acted,  and  might  even  appear  upon  earth 
among  the  living,  like  the  angels  and  the  Son  of  God  in 
ancient  time,  until  the  day  of  resurrection.  Gen.  xviii. 
19.  This  opinion  seems  to  be  confirmed  by  this  passage. 
St.  John  beheld  them  in  human  form,  heard  their  exclama- 
tion, and  saw  them  dressing  in  white  robes.  They  there- 
fore were  not  in  a  state  of  insensibility  or  sleep,  but  had 
full  recollection  of  past  events,  consciousness  of  their  pre- 
sent state,  and  from  the  many  martyrs,  which  during  that 
persecution  daily  increased  their  number,  a  perfect  know- 
ledge of  what  was  transacting  in  the  world.  This  inform- 
ation induced  them  at  that  time,  to  cry  with  a  loud  voice, 
i.  e.  with  great  ardour  and  fervency. 

The  holy  seer  beheld  them  under  the  altar  of  burnt- 
offering,  by  which  they  are  represented  to  the  comfort  of 
their  brethren  on  earth,  as  holy  and  acceptable  sacrifices 
to  the  Lord,  and  in  a  place  of  protection  and  perfect  safety. 
They  knew,  that  they  had  been  slain  for  the  word  of  God, 
and  for  the  [^x^rxj^av,  doctrine,  religion  of  Jescs,  chap. 
xx.  4.]  testimony  which  they  had,  and  did  not  doubt  but 
God  would  judge  and  avenge  their  blood  and  sufferings  -, 
but  they  were  very  desirous  to  know,  how  long  it  would  yet 
be  until  the  day  of  retribution.  This  desire  was  not  a  sin- 
ful or  malicious  affection,  for  the  Greek  word  IjcJhcmv, 
signifies,  to  assist  an* innocent  sufferer,  by  civil  pro- 
cess, and  to  adjudge  the  guilty.  They  therefore  only 
petition  for  the  exercise  of  his  right  of  defence,  and  retri- 
bution in  their  behalf;  or  in  other  words,  they  wished  to 
know,  when  the  enemies  of  the  Church  should  be  over- 
come, and  the  personal  kingdom  of  Christ  established  on 
earth.  White  robes  were  given  unto  everrj  one  of  them. 
This  was  a  token  of  peculiar  favour  and  promotion,  as  in 
the  East,  priests  were  invested  by  white  robes  with  the 
holy  office.    They  were  henceforth  employed  as  minister- 


190        V.  SEAL  FROM  *.  D.  272— TO  322. 

ing  spirits,  for  them  who  shall  be  heirs  of  salvation.    He- 
brews i.  14. 

III.  They  should  rest  yet  for  a  little  season.  The  holy 
martyrs,  who  had  been  collected  under  the  altar  during 
the  first  nine  general  persecutions,  expected  (perhaps 
from  some  sign  given  in  the  world  of  spirits,)  the  judg- 
ments of  God  on  Paganism,  and  the  near  approach  of  the 
kingdom  of  Christ.  When  therefore  their  number  was  so 
greatly  enlarged,  (luring  the  tenth  persecution,  they  ex- 
pressed their  disappointment  by  a  loud  and  pressing  peti- 
tion, for  more  light  concerning  the  time  of  the  suffering 
state  of  the  Church.  In  this  they  were  fully  gratified ; 
but  St.  John  was  induced  to  express  this  period  of  time  in 
an  obscure  manner  by  the  word  chronos,  which  signifies  a 
space  of  time  not  determined  by  numbers,  but  by  events. 
As  for  instance,  the  time  of  a  dynasty  of  a  reigning  family 
in  a  kingdom,  or  the  duration  of  a  republic,  or  of  a  war, 
was  by  the  Grecians  called  a  chronos.  Hence  it  follows, 
that  ail  determinations  concerning  the  length  of  a  chronos, 
are  only  supposition,  which  nevertheless  may  rise  to  a 
great  degree  of  probability.  I  have  determined  the  chro- 
nos to  be  1100  years.  For  Bengelius  and  others  reject 
the  word  junc^ov,  little,  in  this  place,  which  is  received  in 
our  common  version ;  but  if  it  even  remains,  it  would  not 
embarrass  my  system.  For  ^ovog  y.w.%os  is  an  expres- 
sion less  indeterminable  than  even  chronos,  and  may  de- 
note any  time  between  900  and  10G0  years,  though  it  can- 
not signify  more,  or  less,  without  interfering  with  other 
numbers.  The  Revelation  speaks  of  four  bloody  persecu- 
tions against  the  saints,  three  of  which  already  stand  re- 
corded on  the  page  of  history.  That  of  Pagan  Rome 
during  the  first  centuries — that  by  Papal  Rome  against 
the  Waldenses  and  MMgenses  A.  D.  1208  and  1209 — ■ 
that  against  the  Hussites  in  Bohemia,  and  the  Protestants 
in  Europe — and  that  by  the  beast  out  of  the  earth,  and  by 
he  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit ;  which  last  is  not  here 


V.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  272— TO  S22.       191 

considered,  as  it  occurs  during  the  time  of  the  last  judg- 
ments. If  now  we  retain  the  reading:  a  little  chronos: 
that  is,  less  than  a  chronos,  we  have  906  years  from  the 
commencement  of  the  tenth  persecution  A.  D.  303,  when 
those  souls  began  their  exclamation  under  the  altar,  to  the 
time  of  the  Papal  crusades  against  the  Waldenses  A.  D. 
1209.  But  if  we  adopt  the  reading  u  a  chronos,"  and  cal- 
culate from  the  end  of  the  first  persecution,  314,  we  have 
the  commencement  of  the  third  A.  D.  1414,  when  those 
eminent  men  of  God,  John  Huss,  and  Jerome  of  Prague, 
were  burnt  alive  by  the  council  of  Constance,  and  all  their 
followers  persecuted  with  savage  barbarity,  by  the  emperor 
Sigismund  and  the  Papal  clergy,  for  many  years.  The 
text  even  seems  to  favour  the  opinion  of  an  allusion  to  two 
periods  of  persecution,  and  denominates  the  martyrs  of 
the  first  Waldenses  and  Albigenses,  "fellow  servants"  of 
the  ancient  martyrs,  and  those  of  the  second  period,  since 
the  time  of  John  Huss,  only  "  brethren"  Now  the  time  of 
the  first  persecution  from  A.  D.  64 — to  the  year  314,  is 
250  years.  If  we  add  these  to  1414,  we  have  1664,  pre- 
cisely the  time  when  the  persecutions  against  the  Protes- 
tants ceased,  and  the  Evangelic  doctrine  was  again  legally 
established  in  Germany. 

This  seal  does  not  discover  any  direct  judgment  on  the 
Roman  empire ;  but  history  informs  us,  what  a  great  effect 
the  blood  and  sufferings  of  the  martyrs  had  on  the  Pagan 
spectators,  and  on  Paganism,  in  facilitating  their  conver- 
sion. Yet  the  united  voice  of  all  the  martyrs  requiring 
vengeance,  may  well  be  considered  as  a  powerful  cause  of 
the  downfall,  and  utter  ruin  of  Heathenism  in  the  Roman 
dominions. 


192       VI.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  322— TO  372 

VI.  SEAL  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  322 TO  372. 

Verse  12.  And  I  beheld  when  he  had  opened  the  sixth 
seal,  and,  lo,  there  was  a  great  earthquake ;  and 
the  sun  became  black  as  sackcloth  of  hair,  and 
the  moon  became  as  blood  : 

13.  And  the  stars  of  heaven  fell  unto  the  earth,  even 
as  a  fig-tree  casteth  her  untimely  figs,  when  she 
is  shaken  of  a  mighty  wind  : 

14.  And  the  heaven  departed  as  a  scroll  when  it  is 
rolled  together ;  and  every  mountain  and  island 
were  moved  out  of  their  places : 

1 5.  And  the  kings  of  the  earth,  and  the  great  men, 
and  the  rich  men,  and  the  chief  captains,  and 
the  mighty  men,  and  every  bond-man,  and  every 
free  man,  hid  themselves  in  the  dens,  and  in  the 
rocks  of  the  mountains ; 

*  16.  And  said  to  the  mountains  and  rocks,  fall  on  us, 
and  hide  us  from  the  face  of  him  that  sitteth  on 
the  throne,  and  from  the  wrath  of  the  Lamb  : 
17.  For  the  great  day  of  his  wrath -is  come;  and 
who  shall  be  able  to  stand  ? 
It  is  customary  in  prophetic  writings,  to  announce  the 
final  doom  of  nations,  of  governments,  and  of  religious 
communities  by  images  and  expressions,  which  in  their  li- 
teral sense  can  only  take  place  on  the  last  day  of  judgment, 
and  at  the  destruction  of  the  world.     See  Isa.  xiii.  9.  10. 
13.  17.  19.  and  xxxiv.  4.  5.  Hagg.  ii.  21.  &2.  Joel  ii.  10. 
Ezek.  xxxii.  7.  8.  Math.  xxiv.  7.  29.  Luke  xxi.  25.  26. 
Heb.  xii.  26.  27.     The  reason  is,  because  these  nations, 
governments  and  communities,  are  then  precisely  found  in 
that  state  of  corruption,  into  which  the  whole  world  will 
be  sunk  at  the  last  day  of  final  retribution.     The  eternal 
mind  is  then  thus  disposed  towards  their  existence,  as  He 
will  be  on  the  last  day,  in  regard  to  the  continuance  of 


VI.  SEAL  FEOM  A.  D.  322— TO  372.       193 

maiikind  on  this  earth.  When  such  a  catastrophe  takes 
place,  the  day  of  grace  seems  to  be  over  for  foolish  virgins, 
and  the  door  of  heaven  shut  against  the  wicked.  Rev. 
xxii.  11. 

By  this  terribly  majestic  description,  the  Lord  informs 
his  Church  of  the  total  overthrow  of  Paganism  in  the  Ro- 
man empire,  both  as  to  its  religion  and  civil  power;  whicb 
was  begun  during  the  period  of  this  seal,  by  the  conver- 
sion of  the  Roman  emperor  Constantine  the  Great,  and  its 
final  doom  perfectly  fixed  in  the  year  372. 

This  earthquake  signifies  a  great  civil  commotion  in  the 
Roman  empire ;  hear  en,  Paganism ;  the  sun,  the  Heathen- 
ish doctrine  of  religion ;  the  moon,  their  worship  and  idol- 
atry ;  the  stars,  their  priests ;  the  earth,  their  civil  polity ; 
mountains  and  islands,  the  larger  and  inferior  divisions  of 
the  empire;  dens  and  rocks,  those  places,  into  which  the 
gospel  of  Christ  had  not  yet  penetrated,  and  which  served 
as  places  of  refuge,  concealment,  and  protection. 

The  sun  and  fountain-head  of  all  their  religious  light 
and  knowledge  became  black,  which  is  a  sign  of  mourning, 
perplexity,  and  consternation.  Joel  ii.  10.  It  darkened 
at  the  dawn  of  gospel  day,  and  lost  all  power  further  to  il- 
luminate, even  in  the  eyes  of  reason.  Their  idolatrous 
worship  appeared  an  unreasonable  fraud  and  deception, 
and  the  Heathens  changed  their  assemblies,  and  festival 
days,  into  councils  of  blood  and  revenge  against  the  Chris- 
tians. Their  priests,  magicians,  and  vestals,  lost  all  their 
honour,  excellence,  and  support,  and  sunk  down  to  the 
common  multitude.  Chr.  i  20,  Dan.  viii.  10.  Paganism, 
which  had  been  the  universal  religion  of  the  empire,  like 
the  expanse  or  firmament,  departed  as  a  scroll  when  it  is 
rolled  together.  For  Constantine  proiabited  its  worship, 
and  turned  the  Heathen  temples  into  Christian  churches. 
The  mountains  and  islands  were  moved  ;  for  the  different 
emperors  carried  on  great  wars  against  ore  another,  and 
made  new  divisions  in  the  empire  between  themselves,  and 


194        VI.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  322— TO  372. 

in  the  provinces.  All  the  supporters  of  Paganism,  from 
the  throne  to  the  cottage,  withdrew  after  that  total  over- 
throw of  Licinius  by  Constantine,  in  which  the  first  is  said 
to  have  lost  100,000  men;  and  the  idolaters  began  to 
dread  the  wrath  of  the  worshippers  of  the  Lamb,  whom 
they  had  persecuted  so  cruelly.  They  were  dismissed 
from  the  offices  of  the  state,  and  in  the  Roman  armies. 
iMax'entm®  fled  from  Constantine,  end  perished  in  the  ri 
ver  Tiber ;  Diode  sian  poisoned  himself;  Licinius  was  put 
to  death,  after  having  lurked  about  in  fields  and  villages, 
under  a  sense  of  the  wrath  of  the  Lamb  in  his  conscience, 
which  was  the  case  with  many  thousands  in  those  days. 
The  conversion  of  Constantine  the  Great,  was  undoubt- 
edly the  most  fatal  blow  Paganism  ever  received,  and  the 
emperor  Theodosius  nearly  affected  its  total  abolition. 
From  this  period  it  gradually  declined,  and  the  Church  of 
Christ  rose,  arrayed  in  heavenly  splendour. 

Historians  testify,  that  on  the  day  of  the  great  victory 
of  Constantine  over  Litinius,  the  sun  was  eclipsed,  and 
the  stars  shone  for  four  hours,  and  the  moon  appeared  like 
blood.  Thus  the  Lord  intimated  this  great  change  on 
earth  by  signs  in  the  firmament,  in  order  to  excite  the  at- 
tention of  men  to  his  marvellous  deeds. 

It  has  been  often  remarked  by  able  divines,  who  were 
critically  acquainted  with  the  Roman  history  during  the 
period  now  under  consideration,  that  the  defeat  and  ruin 
of  Paganism  was  neither  so  rapid,  nor  so  generally  mark- 
ed with  such  poignant  and  alarming  sensations  in  the 
minds  and  conduct  of  the  Heathens,  as  the  strong  and 
glaring  images  under  this  seal  would  lead  us  to  suppose. 
In  answer  to  this  objection  it  has  been  observed,  that  these 
are  figurative  terms,  customary  in  prophetic  writings, 
which  must  not  be  taken  in  a  literal  sense,  nor  extended 
beyond  the  limits  of  what  they  usually  signify  in  other 
parts  of  the  Scriptures.  But  this  solution  is  not  fully  satis- 
factory in  this  place.    Vt  hen  I  consider  this  seal  in  all  its 


VI.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  322— TO  372.       195 

bearings  to  the  whole  prophecy,  it  appears  to  me,  that 
those  eminent  men  have  not  formed  to  themselves  a  com* 
petent  conception  of  the  majesty  and  vast  import  of  this 
book,  which  certainly  comprehends  both  the  visible  and 
invisible  world,  and  many  of  its  prophecies  reach  from 
one  into  the  other,  jtist  as  the  events  are  produced  by  in- 
visible first  causes.  Paganism  in  the  Roman  empire  un- 
der this  catastrophe,  is  an  emblem  of  the  infernal  regions  ; 
and  the  hieroglyphics  under  this  seal,  express  a  final  doom, 
begun  on  earth  in  an  empire,  which  for  many  years  had 
been  the  throne  and  residence  of  Satan,  and  ended  by  such 
an  actual  representation  of  the  last  day  of  judgment  among 
the  damned  in  hell.  The  learned  and  pious  Bengelius  is 
of  this  opinion,  as  also  Dr.  Yung ;  and  the  context  strongly 
requires  such  an  explanation.  For  the  fifth  seal  opens  a 
scene  in  the  invisible  world,  where  we  behold  the  state  of 
the  holy  martyrs;  and  in  the  following  chapter, ,  we  are. 
shown  a  great  multitude  of  saints  and  angels  in  heaven. 
If,  therefore,  the  unhappy  dead  are  not  also  intended  in 
this  place,  they  would  not  be  mentioned  at  all.  And  yet  it 
is  acknowledged,  that  the  seven  seals  comprise  the  whole 
creation.  The  holy  martyrs  were  promoted  to  a  higher 
state  of  felicity,  and  no  doubt,  the  unhappy  dead  have  been 
hereby  placed  into  a  more  painful  looking  for  of  judgment 
and  fiery  indignation,  which  shall  devour  the  adversaries. 
Heb.  x.  %7.  31.  ix.  27.  Math.  viii.  29. 

Thus  the  great  mystery  was  solved,  and  the  Christians 
now  knew,  which  of  the  two  principal  religions  in  the  Ro- 
man empire  would  at  last  prevail.  The  Lion  of  Juda 
had  overcome  Judaism,  and  now  by  a  second  victory  laid 
even  ttye  throne  and  residence  of  Satan  under  his  feet. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


TWO  VISIONS  AS  PREPARATORY  TO  THE  SEVENTH  SEAL.. 

This  chapter  contains  two  visions,  expressive  of  the  se- 
curity of  saints  in  all  ages ;  which  should  hoth  he  consi- 
dered as  preparatory  to  the  opening  of  the  seventh  seal, 
or  to  its  contents  under  the  sound  of  the  seven  trumpets. 
First,  four  angels  make  their  appearance,  as  instruments 
of  God's  wrath  against  the  vices  and  corruptions  in  Chris- 
tendom, which,  since  the  emperor  Constantine  had  given 
the  Church  peace,  tranquility,  riches  and  honour,  soon 
rose  to  such  a  daring  height,  as  to  eclipse  the  spirit  and 
lustre  of  genuine  Christianity.  Against  these  dangerous 
innovations,  and  succeeding  judgments,  the  people  of  God 
were  sealed  to  the  number  of  144,000.  After  which  the 
holy  apostle  had  another  vision  of  a  numberless  multitude 
of  saints,  and  of  an  innumerable  company  of  angels,  wor- 
shipping before  the  throne  of  God  and  the  Lamb,  in  pro- 
found submission  and  reverence. 

Verse  1.  And  after  these  things  I  saw  four  angels  stand- 
ing on  the  four  corners  of  the  earth,  holding  the 
four  winds  of  the  earth,  that  the  wind  should 
not  blow  on  the  earth,  nor  on  the  sea,  nor  on 
any  tree. 
2.  And  I  saw  another  angel  ascending  from  the 
east,  having  the  seal  of  the  living  God  :  and  he 
cried  with  a  loud  voice  to  the  four  angels,  to 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  197 

whom  it  was  given  to  hurt  the  earth  and  the 

sea, 
3.     Saying,  hurt  not  the  earth,  neither  the  sea,  nor 

the  trees,  till  we  have  sealed  the  servants  of  our 

God  in  their  foreheads. 
I  have  remarked  in  my  preliminary  observations,  that 
the  language  of  St.  John  in  this  book  of  prophecy  is  not 
Athenian,  but  in  a  great  measure  only  the  vehicle  of  orien- 
tal ideas.  Here,  perhaps,  is  a  most  suitable  place,  to 
produce  a  strong  proof  in  favour  of  that  assertion. 

So  obvious  is  this  truth  in  the  hieroglyphic  language  of 
Daniel  and  the  Apocalypse,  that  our  would-be  philoso- 
phers, and  modern  infidels  have  united  to  assert,  that  our 
Scripture  doctrine  concerning  angels  was  originally  de- 
rived from  Chaldea.  These  gentlemen  have  often  told 
falsehoods,  sometimes  from  ignorance,  and  more  frequently 
against  their  better  knowledge,  in  order  to  undermine  the 
word  of  life,  in  favour  of  their  own  vicious  desires.  But 
in  this  instance,  the  resemblance  of  Scripture  emblems  to 
the  religious  tenets  of  the  Chaldeans,  has  in  justice  struck 
them  with  conviction,  though  their  conclusion  is  fallacious 
and  only  true  in  part.  It  is  true  that  both  the  Chaldean 
and  Persian  Magi  taught  a  doctrine  concerning  good  and 
bad  angels,  as  a  part  of  their  wisdom,  similar  to  our  Scrip- 
ture doctrine,  even  as  early  as  the  days  of  Daniel,  of 
which  the  numerous  litanies  of  the  Zend  Avesta,  or  Per- 
sian Bible,  contain  ample  testimony.  And  it  is  also  true., 
that  the  inspired  penmen  in  their  style  of  writing,  have 
adopted  those  commonly  received  and  understood  opinions 
in  their  days,  as  emblems,  to  express  the  profound  and 
hidden  mysteries  of  God  to  man.  But  will  it  follow  from 
hence,  that  because  this  doctrine  has  been  believed  among 
the  ancients,  and  corrupted  by  the  Persian  Magi,  that  it  is 
therefore  false,  and  the  philosophic  dreams  of  moderns 
true  ?  The  ancient  reformers  of  philosophy,  religion,  and 
politics,  have  been  men  of  great  minds,  who  have  even 


198  PREPARATORY  VISIONS. 

erred  with  honour;  which  is  hy  no  means  the  case  with 
modern  infidels. 

No  doubt,  our  first  parents  were  acquainted  with  the 
existence  of  angels,  from  whom  they  received  many  useful 
lessons,  and  much  necessary  information  while  yet  in  para- 
dise. And  I  also  know  no  reason,  why  these  heavenly 
messengers  should  not  have  had  as  much  intercourse  with 
the  holy  patriarchs  before  the  flood,  as  we  surely  know, 
they  have  had  with  the  men  of  God  after  the  deluge,  al- 
though it  is  not  expressly  mentioned  in  Scripture.  These 
traditions,,  accompanied  at  times  by  actual  experience,  are 
no  doubt  the  fountain-head  of  all  the  Heathen  mythologies, 
and  demonologies,  in  which  they  now  appear  so  much  dis- 
torted, and  garbed  in  vile  superstition,  and  gross  igno- 
rance. Chaklea  seems  to  have  been  the  mother  of  Sabi- 
ism,  h.  e.  the  worship  of  the  host  of  heaven,  and  the  tu- 
toress of  this  gross  idolatry  among  other  nations.  They 
imagined  the  sun  to  be  the  visible  body  of  the  Deity,  and 
maintained  that  the  moon,  the  planets,  and  the  fixed  stars, 
were  animated  and  governed  by  angels,  or  superior  intelli- 
gences, as  the  body  of  man  by  a  living  soul.  The  Sabian 
Magi  appear  to  have  had  few  conceptions  of  an  intellectual 
world,  beyond  these  heavenly  luminaries,  when  Zoroaster 
arose  in  ZJrmi,  and  reformed  Sabiism  among  the  Modes 
and  Persians,  by  his  religious  philosophy  of  light  and  fire. 
He  taught  them,  that  the  host  of  heaven  were  only  emblems 
of  the  Deity  and  his  angels,  over  which  they  presided  as 
governors,  and  opened  a  view  before  them  into  an  invisible 
world,  where  all  these  intelligent  beings  appeared  in  their 
primeval  excellence  and  glory.  However,  according  to 
his  tenets,  they  also  had  many  employments  on  earth,  where 
they  superintend  the  four  elements,  and  seasons,  empires, 
kingdoms,  nations,  oceans,  rivers,  men,  and  the  affairs  of 
men.  In  the  exercise  of  these  offices  they  were  often  op- 
posed by  the  dews  and  daroudjs,  i.  e.  demons,  who,  accord- 
ing to  his  philosophy,  had  been  the  first  inhabitants  of  this 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  199 

earth,  and  whom  God  conquered  by  the  stars  and  angels 
in  a  general  deluge,  because  they  polluted  the  elements. 
These  evil  spirits  inhabit  darkness,  the  atmosphere,  and 
solitary  places,  from  whence  they  oppose  all  the  benevo- 
lent designs  of  good  angels  towards  men,  whom  they  hate 
and  seek  to  destroy.  Zend  Avesta  T.  iii.  p.  358.  359. 
Also  see  Herder's  Erlauterungen  zum  N.  T. 

Verse  1.  Four  angels,  holding  the  four  winds  of  the 
earth.  These  are  evil  angels,  for  they  hurt  with  injustice, 
as  the  original  uJtxztv,  verse  2.  signifies.  They  are  in- 
struments of  God's  wrath  under  the  four  f»rst  trumpets  hi 
the  next  chapter.  And  as  the  subordinate  agents  under 
the  three  last  trumpets  are  evil  angels,  viz.  the  angel  of 
the  bottomless  pit,  the  four  angels  bound  at  the  great  river 
Euphrates,  and  the  great  red  dragon  himself  at  last,  we 
cannot  but  consider  these  in  the  same  light,  since  they  ex- 
ecute judgments  cf  the  same  nature,  and  to  the  identical 
purposes  with  the  three  last.  I  w  ill  not  undertake  to  de- 
termine, in  how  far  these  angels  should  be  considered  sym- 
bolical, or  to  what  extent  beings  from  the  invisible  world 
may  have  been  employed  in  the  execution  of  the  divine  de- 
crees, to  bring  about  such  extraordinary  phenomena,  as 
those  alluded  to  in  this  place.  There  is  at  least  nothing 
improbable  in  the  opinion,  that  the  Lord  may  actually  per- 
mit evil  spirits  to  engage  in  such  dreadful  enterprises,  so 
far  as  they  may  accord  with  his  wise  and  providential  mea- 
sures of  government,  his  eternal  designs.  These  angels 
seem  to  have  held  this  office  as  an  appointed  employment 
for  many  years.     Jer.  xlix.  36.  37.     Dan.  vii.  2. 

The  earth,  on  the  four  corners  of  which  these  angels 
stood,  here  signifies  the  continent  of  the  Roman  empire; 
and  the  sea,  the  sea  coast  of  the  Mediterranean :  and  the 
trees*  the  princes  and  principal  personages ;  which  will 
more  evidently  appear  by  the  explanation  of  the  trumpets. 
This  empire  is  here  considered  a  plane  square,  in  regard 
to  the  four  points  of  heaven,  east,  west,  north  and  south^ 


$£00  PREPARATORY  VISIONS. 

from  whence  the  four  winds  blow.  Dan.  viii.  8.  xi.  4. 
Math.  xxiv.  31 T  But  these  winds  are  not  denominated 
winds  of  heaven,  they  are  termed  "  winds  of  the  earth;" 
which  denotes  that  these  angels  are  not  divine  messengers* 
and  these  winds,  storms  of  calamities  and  war,  by  which 
the  Roman  empire  should  greatly  suffer,  and  be  utterly 
rent  to  pieces. 

Verse  2.  Another  angel  ascending  from  the  East.  This 
Was  a  holy,  but  created  angel,  as  is  apparent  from  the  lan- 
guage which  he  holds  in  the  third  verse :  "  the  servants  of 
our  God"  by  which  he  acknowledges  himself  a  subject 
and  worshipper  of  the  Lord.  St.  John  beheld  him  ascend- 
ing the  horizon  from  the  East,  from  whence  those  dread- 
ful calamities,  and  consequently  the  sealing  of  the  servants 
of  the  Lord,  were  to  commence.  He  cried  with  a  loud 
■voice,  because  the  four  angels  showed  signs  of  eagerness, 
to  accomplish  their  bloody  work  without  delay.  This 
shows  the  provident  care  of  the  Lord,  and  even  of  holy 
angels  for  the  Church  of  Christ,  during  the  approaching 
trials  and  dangers.  She  would  not  have  been  able  to  sus- 
tain the  storm  in  her  present  state,  having  lost  much  of 
her  former  spirit  offaith,  love  and  fidelity,  during  her  late 
prosperity;  wherefore  this  mighty  angel  was  sent  to 
strengthen  and  prepare  her  for  this  time  of  great  peril. 
Verse  4.     And  I  heard  the  number  of  them  which  were 

sealed.   And  there  were  sealed  a  hundred  and 

forty  and  four  thousand  of  all  the  tribes  of  the 

children  of  Israel. 
5.  Of  the  tribe  of  Juda  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 

Of  the  tribe  of  Reuben  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. 

Of  the  tribe  of  Gad  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 
6..     Of  the  tribe  of  Aser  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 

Of  the  tribe  of  Napthalim  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand. 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  201 

Of  the  tribe  of  Manasses  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand. 
f .     Of  the  tribe  of  Simeon  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Levi  were  sealed  twelve  thousand1. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Isachar  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. 
8.    Of  the  tribe  of  Zebulon  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand. 
Of  the  the  tribe  of  Joseph  were  sealed  twelve 

thousand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand. 
,  The  sealing  angel  had  the  seal  of  the  living  God,  and  in 
the  execution  of  his  commission  many  assistants,  of  whom 
he  speaks  verse  third,  in  the  plural  number.  Under  what 
symbol  this  seal  appeared  in  the  vision  to  St.  John,  is  not 
mentioned ;  but  it  was  impressed  on  none,  except  the  ser* 
vants  of  God,  on  true  believers  already  advanced  in  holi- 
ness. It  was  said,  that  Frederick  the  Great,  king  of 
Prussia,  bore  the  hieroglyphic  of  a  king  in  his  physiog- 
nomy. And  there  is  no  doubt,  the  tranquil,  serene  and 
heavenly  mind  of  a  sanctified  child  of  God,  will  also  im- 
press itself  on  his  countenance,  by  which  others  are  warn- 
ed :  take  heed,  that  thou  speak  kindly  to  Jacob.  Gen.  xxxi. 
23.  But  the  sealing  in  this  place  is  of  far  greater  impor- 
tance. It  was  an  unction  from  above,  by  which  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Church  of  Christ  received  self-subsistence, 
firmness  invincible  under  the  trials  to  come,  and  an  in- 
visible safeguard  for  bodily  security,  amidst  all  the  ca- 
lamities of  the  empire  under  the  following  trumpets.  As 
anciently  there  was  a  mark  upon  the  houses  of  the  Israel- 
ites, in  consequence  of  which  the  destroying  angel  passed 
by,  Exod.  xii.  7.  13 ;  and  upon  the  foreheads  of  those  that 
sighed  and  cried  in  Jerusalem,  Ezek.  ix.  4;  so  were  these 
servants  of  God,  in  a  particular  maimerrconvinced  of  thei* 

C  c 


202  PREPARATORY  VISIONS* 

state  of  grace  and  adoption,  and  of  their  safety  in  the 
chamber  of  his  protection,  till  the  days  of  indignation 
should  pass  over,  and  the  glorious  Millennium  begin. 
2  Cor.  iii.  3.  2  Tim.  ii.  19. 

Verse  4.  Of  all  the  tribes  of  Israel.  This  cannot  mean 
Israel  after  the  flesh,  but  the  true  Israel  of  God,  the  chil- 
dren of  the  promise,  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ,  where 
all  distinction  of  tribes  has  ceased,  Gal.  iii.  28,  and  every 
believer  is  accounted  an  Israelite.  Rom.  ix.  6.  8.  This 
passage  does  not  treat  of  the  protection  of  the  Jews,  but 
the  preservation  of  the  Church.  She  is  represented  by  the 
twelve  tribes  of  Israel,  in  order  to  show  that  she  has  been 
accepted  in  their  place,  and  may  apply  all  the  promises  of 
scripture  to  her  comfort,  as  being  grafted  into  the  first 
stock.     Rom.  xi. 

By  the  number  144,000,  these  servants  of  God  are  re- 
presented as  the  true  Church  of  Christ.     This  is  a  square 
number  consisting  of  twelve,  in  allusion  to  the  members  of 
the  Church  of  the  Old  Testament,  who  were  the  true  and 
genuine  offspring  of  the  twelve  patriarchs  ;  and  to  the 
Church  of  the  New  Testament,  of  the  offspring  of  the 
twelve  apostles.     It  also  is  the  number  of  New  Jerusalem. 
The  Church  of  Christ  is  expressed  by  this  number  here, 
because  at  that  very  time,  all  those  heads  of  families  had 
been  brought  into  her  bosom,  which  constituted  the  genu- 
ine lineage  of  the  old  dispensation,  and  such  of  the  Church 
of  Christ,  as  by  their  posterity  will  reach  the  gates  of  New 
Jerusalem.     This  you  may  call  mercy  unto  thousands  on 
them  that  love  him.     Exod.  xxxiv.  7. 
Verse  9.     After  this  I  beheld,  and  lo,  a  great  multitude, 
which  no  man  could  number,  of  all  nations,  and 
kindreds,  and  people,  and  tongues,  stood  before 
the  throne,  and  before  the  Lamb,  clothed  with 
white  robes,  and  palms  in  their  hands ; 
10.    And  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  salvation 
to  our  God,  which  sitteth  upon  the  throne,  and 
unto  the  Lamb. 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  SOS 

11.  And  all  the  angels  stood  round  about  the  throne, 
and  about  the  elders  and  the  four  beasts,  and 
fell  before  the  throne  on  their  faces,  and  wor- 
shipped God, 

12.  Saying,  Amen  :  Blessing,  and  glory,  and  wis- 
dom, and  thanksgiving,  and  honour,  and  power, 
and  might,  be  unto  our  God  for  ever  and  ever. 
Amen. 

This  vision  is  distinct  from  the  preceding  one,  and  yet 
closely  connected  in  subject,  matter,  and  design.  The  for- 
mer comprehends  the  lineage  of  the  twelve  tribes,  as  incor- 
porated with  the  Church  of  Christ,  and  comforts  the  ser- 
vants of  the  Lamb,  by  a  lively  representation  of  the  provi- 
dent care  of  God  for  the  security  and  enlargement  of  the 
Church  during  the  following  times  of  great  peril,  and  Ro- 
mish apostacy.  Here  St.  John  beheld  an  innumerable  mul- 
titude of  saints  in  heaven,  from  all  nations,  and  kindreds, 
and  people,  and  tongues,  among  which  were  all  the  chil- 
dren of  God  under  the  Old  Testament,  in  order  to  ani- 
mate their  drooping  spirits  under  the  approaching  calami- 
ties of  the  trumpets.  Their  being  clothed  in  white  robes, 
denotes  their  characters  and  employments  at  present,  and 
during  the  Millennium :  as  it  was  usual  for  princes  and 
priests  to  be  arrayed  in  such  garments,  when  in  the  exer- 
cise of  their  offices.  Rev.  i.  6.  v.  10.  They  had  palms  in 
their  hands,  which  were  emblems  of  victory  and  triumph 
among  the  ancients,  as  also  tokens  of  great  joy  at  solemn 
festivals  among  the  Jews.  Lev.  xxiii.  40.  They  had  van- 
quished Satan,  sin  and  death,  and  now  commemorated  the 
wonders  of  his  love  in  the  following  verse,  by  which  they 
had  been  preserved,  and  brought  hither.  In  this  they  were 
joined  and  assisted  by  all  the  angels  in  heaven,  who  had 
been  ministering  spirits  to  them,  while  yet  in  the  wilder- 
ness of  this  world,  and  now  enjoyed  the  unspeakable  plea- 
sure, of  seeing  all  their  labours  crowned  with  immortal 
honour.-  Heb.  i.  14.    Yet  in  humility,  they  ascribe  all  to 


204  PREPARATORY  VISIONS. 

the  Lord,  who  enabled  them  to  accomplish  so  important  a 

work. 

Verse  13.  And  one  of  the  elders  answered,  saying  unto 

me,  what  are  these  which  are  arrayed  in  white 

robes  ?  and  whence  came  they  ? 

14.  And  I  said  unto  him,  Sir,  thou  knowest.  And 
he  said  to  me,  these  are  they,  which  came  out 
of  great  tribulation,  and  have  washed  their 
robes,  and  made  them  white  in  the  blood  of  the 
Lamb. 

15.  Therefore  are  they  before  the  throne  of  God, 
and  serve  him  day  and  night  in  his  temple  :  and 
he  that  sitteth  on  the  throne  shall  dwell  among 
them. 

16.  They  shall  hunger  no  more,  neither  thirst  any 
more ;  neither  shall  the  sun  light  on  them,  nor 
any  heat. 

17.  For  the  Lamb,  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the 
throne,  shall  feed  them,  and  shall  lead  them 
unto  living  fountains  of  waters  :  and  God  shall 
wipe  away  all  tears  from  their  eyes. 

Verse  1 3.  And  one  of  the  elders  answered.  'Kttq^I\ioiaaij 
does  not  only  signify  to  answer,  but  often,  to  begin  a  dis~> 
course,  to  address  a  person,  and  thus  it  ought  to  be  rendered 
here.  The  angel  addressed  St.  John,  in  order  to  give  hi«n 
more  information  concerning  this  multitude  of  saints,  for 
the  comfort  of  the  Church,  and  himself  under  his  present 
sufferings. 

This  innumerable  company  of  saints  before  the  throne 
of  God  and  the  Lamb,  were  not  the  holy  martyrs.  For  all 
the  martyrs  from  the  beginning  of  the  world  to  that  time, 
would  not  amount  to  such  a  great  multitude,  as  St.  John 
here  beheld.  Beside  this,  their  lot  has  been  determined 
under  the  fifth  seal,  as  that  of  the  unhappy  dead  under  the 
sixth ;  so  that  we  cannot  expect  to  meet  with  them  so  soon 
again.    Nevertheless,  the  elder  describes  them  as  hav- 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  £05 

ing  come  out  of  great  tribulation,  by  which  we  may  under- 
stand the  afflictions,  reproaches  and  persecutions  of  the 
saints,  which  they  suffered  as  confessors,  and  faithful  fol- 
lowers of  Christ,  for  his  name's  sake,  and  the  many  trials 
and  temptations  in  working  out  their  own  salvation  with 
fear  and  trembling,  which  the  children  of  God  have  expe- 
rienced in  all  ages.  Their  robes  may  denote  the  whole 
Christian  life  and  conversation,  even  their  most  holy  ac- 
tions ;  which  arc  all  imperfect,  and  not  acceptable  in  them- 
selves before  God ;  wherefore  they  are  said  to  have  wash- 
ed them,  and  made  them  white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. 
These  two  words,  to  wash,  and  to  make  white,  refer  to  two 
distinct  actions.  By  being  washed  in  the  blood  of  Christ 
we  are  cleansed  from  the  filth  of  sin,  which  refers  to  justifi- 
cation ;  and  by  being  whitened  or  bleached,  our  imperfec- 
tions are  done  away,  and  we  are  adorned  by  the  righteous- 
ness of  Jesus  Christ,  which  denotes  sanctification  through* 
his  spirit.  Both  acts  are  here  ascribed  to  the  saints,  be- 
cause of  their  concern,  faith,  and  trust  in  the  use  of  the 
means,  in  order  to  enter  the  kingdom  of  God.  There  is, 
however,  a  considerable  difference  between,  their  robes  and 
those  of  the  elders,  according  to  the  original.  They  only 
had  stolw,  gownSj  but  the  elders  white  raiment,  which  may 
denote  a  higher  degree  both  of  sanctification  and  prefer- 
ment. 

This  innumerable  multitude  then,  is  the  general  assenv 
bly  of  all  the  spirits  of  just  men  made  perfect,  in  all  ages 
of  the  world.  For  it  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  the  words 
in  the  original,  verse  14,  ol  t(>x°V'iV0l>  should  not  be  ren- 
dered, "which  came"  but,  "those  coming,"  so  as  also  to 
comprehend  those  which  follow,  until  the  second  advent  of 
Christ.  After  this  general  description  of  their  character, 
the  elder  proceeds  to  inform  the  apostle  of  their  future  re- 
ward and  employment.  I  say  designedly,  their  future  re- 
ward. For,  that  degree  of  felicity  which  they  now  enjoy- 
ed, St,  John  had  beheld,  and  described  in  the  preceding 


206  PREPARATORY  VISIONS. 

verses;  and  the  attentive  reader  of  the  original  will  ob* 
«erve,  that  in  the  fifteenth  verse,  the  tense  suddenly 
changes,  and  runs  on  in  the  future  to  the  end  of  the  chap- 
ter. The  elder  therefore  informs  St.  John  in  these  last 
verses,  of  a  yet  higher  degree  of  happiness  and  employ- 
ment, to  which  these  saints  would  he  promoted  at  a  more 
distant  period,  namely,  in  the  time  of  the  Millennium,  or 
during  the  personal  kingdom  of  Christ  on  earth.  A  series 
of  important  events  is  carried  on  in  the  church  militant, 
but  a  still  more  momentous  train  above,  in  the  Church  tri- 
umphant ;  of  which  we  here  now  and  then  meet  with  a 
faint  glance  in  this  prophecy. 

It  is  said  of  their  present  state  of  happiness :  They  are 
before  the  throne  of  God,  and  serve  him  day  and  night  in  his 
temple,  in  allusion  to  the  priests  and  Levites,  whose  ser- 
vice in  the  temple  was  constant  and  uninterrupted.  These 
words  denote  their  present  employments,  under  their  great 
high-priest  in  the  Church  of  Christ,  in  which  they  are  en- 
gaged on  earth  among  the  heirs  of  eternal  salvation,  though 
invisible  to  our  view.  Ease  and  rest  is  incompatible  with 
felicity  in  heaven,  where  all  is  life  and  activity  for  the  hap- 
piness of  all,  and  where  the  degrees  of  glory  consist  in 
preferments  to  stations,  in  which  most  good  can  be  done. 

But  now  the  tense  changes,  and  the  elder  describes  their 
future  happiness  in  these  remarkable  words  :  And  He  that 
sitteth  (now)  on  the  throne  shall  (then)  dwell  among  them. 
Here  a  future  promotion  to  a  still  higher  station  of  felicity, 
than  what  they  at  present  enjoy,  is  evident  beyond  con- 
tradiction. It  is  no  less  obvious,  that  this  degree  of  glory 
will  consist  in  a  more  immediate  enjoyment  of  his  beatific 
presence,  and  such  an  intimate  communion  with  him,  as 
they  had  never  before  experienced.  But  its  points  of  dis- 
tinction from  other  states  of  felicity,  must  be  learned  by  a 
more  close  inspection  of  the  words  of  the  text.  X^voa, 
saga,  to  dwell,  to  reside  in  tents,  is  never  used  to  signify 
an  immutable  continuance  of  a  state  of  things.    Its  precise 


PREPARATORY  VISIONS.  207 

meaning  is,  to  sojourn  under  a  risible  cover,  formed  for  the 
purpose  of  dwelling  in  for  a  time  ',  as  the  Israelites  dwelled 
in  tents,  the  soul  of  man  in  a  body,  and  God  in  a  temple, 
2  Cor.  v.  1.  4.  2  Pet.  i.  13,  14.    Acts  vii.  46.  Rev.  xxi.  3* 
Thus  it  is  said,  our  Saviour  tpoj'voKg,  dwelled  in  a  tent 
among  us,  after  the  Word  was  made  flesh.    John  i.  14. 
This  phrase  seems  to  denote  more  than  his  spiritual  pre- 
sence with  his  saints,  and  yet  not  the  same  state  of  happi- 
ness, which  they  now  enjoy.  It  indicates  the  glorious  reign 
of  Christ  with  his  saints  on  earth,  when  their  felicity  will  be 
increased  by  a  personal  intercourse  with  their  mortal 
brethren,   and  Christ  shall  dwell  with  them,  in  a  visible 
pavilion,  as  king  of  all,  and  in   all  his  personal  glory. 
During  this  thousand  year's  reign,  the  Lord  will  complete 
another  marvellous  enterprise  on  earth,  which  even  an- 
gels and  saints  will  desire  to  look  into.  1  Pet.  i.  12.    They 
shall  hunger  no  more,  nor  tldrst  any  more,  for  natural  or 
spiritual  tilings ;  neither  shall  the  sun  of  trial  and  afflic- 
tion light  on  them,  nor  any  heat  of  toil,  or  spiritual  la- 
bour.   Isa.  iv.  5.  6.    Ps.  xci.  1.    cxxi.  6.    Isa.  xlix.  10. 
xxv.  8.    For  the  Lamb  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  throne, 
shall  feed  them  with  the  rich  discoveries  of  himself,  as  sig- 
nified by  a  feast,  by  new  wine  in  his  Father's  kingdom,  by 
eating  and  drinking  at  his  table,  where  they  shall  be 
sweetly  and  fully  satiated  and  refreshed  for  ever.     Saints^ 
and  angels  will  be  living  fountains  of  water  to  each  other, 
and  to  men,  their  brethren.  John  viii.  38.  Thus  the  Lamb, 
their  king  TroipaviT,  shall  rule  them,  (reget  ittos,  as  the 
Vulgate  version  reads)  and  in  the  midst  of  his  ancients 
gloriously  a  thousand  years,  to  wipe  away  all  tears  from 
their  eyes. 

There  is  no  intimation  of  any  separate  time  annexed  to 
these  two  visions,  and  it  would  be  highly  improper,  to  add 
a  time  to  any  prediction  in  this  book  without  being  author- 
ized thereto  by  the  text.  For  the  internal  order  and 
method  of  the  Revelation,  is  a  singular  masterpiece  among 


208  PREPARATORY  VISIONS. 

the  prophecies  of  Scripture,  and  like  a  stately  edifice,  per- 
fectly symmetrical  in  all  its  parts,  where  nothing  is  left  to 
be  added,  by  the  ingenuity  of  man.  The  expositor  who 
follows  this  order,  will  soon  find,  that  the  Lord  thereby  in 
tended  to  assist  him  in  the  discovery  of  truth ;  and  he  who 
neglects  it,  must  inevitably  work  himself  into  a  labyrinth 
of  his  own  inventions.  These  two  visions  may  therefore 
Le  considered  either  as  a  continuation  of  the  sixth  seal,  or, 
as  I  presume,  an  introduction  to  the  seventh;  though  both 
take  up  a  period  of  time,  running  collateral  with  the  main 
column  of  this  admirable  system. 

The  Lamb  has  opened  seven  seals,  and  not  eight,  or 
twelve ;  which  number,  no  doubt,  has  its  secret  and  im- 
portant signification  in  the  counsels  of  heaven.  Here  it  is 
the  key-number,  to  determine  the  periods  of  the  seals,  and 
of  the  trumpets.  They  each  comprise  a  jubilee-year,  or 
seven  'weeks  of  years,  except  where  the  periods  are  extend- 
ed by  annexed  extraordinary  numbers,  as  I  have  shown  in 
the  Introduction.  But  the  seventh  seal  comprises  a  period 
of  seven  jubilee-years,  divided  into  seven  equal  portions  of 
time,  by  the  seven  trumpets.  We  will  now  proceed,  and 
see  how  strongly  this  is  proved,  and  verified  by  history. 
Completion,  no  doubt,  is  a  solution  of  the  problems  of 
these  numbers,  which  must  silence  infidelity,  and  confirm 
for  ever  our  faith  in  the  word  of  God. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


VII.  SEAL,  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  372. 

Verse  1.  And  when  he  had  opened  the  seventh  seal,  there 
was  silence  in  heaven  about  the  space  of  half  an 
hour. 
2.  And  I  saw  the  seven  angels  which  stood  before 
God ;  and  to  them  were  given  seven  trumpets. 
This  chapter  opens  a  new  scene  of  events,  attended  with 
circumstances  peculiarly  majestic,  and  of  portentous  im- 
port. Hitherto,  every  creature  around  the  throne  of  God 
had  been  in  motion,  and  heaven  resounded  the  harmony  of 
the  celestial  choirs,  to  the  praise  of  the  Lamb,  for  the  exe- 
cution of  the  judgments  under  the  former  seals,  by  which 
the  utter  ruin  of  Paganism  had  been  completed  in  the  Ro- 
man empire.  But  now  when  the  Lamb  broke  the  seventh 
seal,  all  heaven  stood  in  profound  silence,  as  if  struck  with 
astonishment  and  awe,  at  the  disclosure  of  a  new  train  of 
momentous  measures  against  the  Church  of  Christ  herself, 
because  of  her  degeneracy  and  corruption  during  her  late 
prosperity.  This  solemn  silence  is  only  mentioned  in  this 
place.  .  Heaven  paused  in  deep  contemplation,  as  feeling 
materially  interested,  and  largely  participating  in  the  fu- 
ture sorrows  of  the  Church.  Ps.  xlvi.  10.  Be  still,  and 
know  that  I  am  God ;  I  will  be  exalted  in  the  earth.  This 
sudden  cessation  has  an  immediate  reference  to  the  seven 
trumpets,  and  indicates  the  important  contents  of  the  se- 
venth seal,  to  which  it  raises  the  anticipation  of  attentive 

od 


210  VII.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  372. 

readers.  It  cannot  refer  merely  to  the  angel  offering  in- 
cense at  the  altar,  while  the  people,  according  to  ancient 
custom,  were  in  silent  prayer  without  5  for  St.  John  al- 
ways, puts  his  (xiTd  rotvroi,  after  these  things,  when  he 
passes  from  one  vision  to  another,  which  he  has  not  done 
in  this  place.  Though  this  appears  to  be  the  most  natural 
meaning  of  this  silence  in  heaven,  it  may  nevertheless  also 
refer  to  the  tranquil  state  of  the  Church  under  the  empe- 
ror Theodosius.  And  in  this  case  heaven  would  denote 
the  Church  of  Christ  on  earth,  and  half  an  Jmur,  simply  an 
indeterminate  space  of  time,  as  in  John  iv.  21.  23. 

Thus  the  seals  comprise  events  in  both  the  visible  and 
invisible  world ;  but  the  trumpets  only  refer  to  the  Latin 
and  Greek  Churches,  in  their  different  states  of  degene- 
racy, and  to  the  kingdoms  of  this  world,  which  are  to 
make  room  for  the  personal  kingdom  of  Christ  which  is  to 
be  established  during  the  Millennium. 

Verse  2.  Jlnd  I  saw  the  seven  angels.  The  ancient  Jews 
believed,  that  there  were  at  all  times  seven  angels  attend- 
ing around  the  throne  of  God,  as  his  prime  ministers,  and 
special  messengers  in  the  government  of  the  world.  Job 
xii.  15.  Zoroaster  in  his  Zend-Avesta  considers  them,  as 
the  chief  of  all  created  beings,  perfect  images  of  God, 
kings  immediately  under  him,  generals  against  the  powers 
of  Jihriman  or  Satan,  and  in  continual  activity  for  the 
good  of  the  whoh  kingdom  of  God.  Their  combatants 
and  associates  are  the  principalities,  the  powers,  and  all 
the  mighty  ones  of  heaven,  with  whom  they  constitute  one 
state,  one  kingdom,  and  one  people  of  the  most  High.* 
This  also  appears  to  have  been  the  doctrine  of  the  latter 
prophets,  of  the  apostles  of  our  Lord,  Eph.  ii.  21.  Col. 
ii.  10.  and  a  fundamental  idea  in  the  whole  xospog  vojjto?, 
or  Alexandrian  philosophy.  The  passage  before  us  affords 
new  evidence  of  the  truth  of  this  doctrine.  And  in  imita- 
tion of  these  angels,  the  Eastern  monarchs  chose  seven 

*  See  Erlaeuterungen  zum N.  T.  IB.  p.  29. 


VII.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  372.  211 

princes,  as  the  principal  personages  of  the  empire,  whose 
employment  was  a  continual  attendance  at  the  throne, 
Esther  i.  14.  As  these  seven  angels  are  to  be  considered 
the  chief  rulers  in  heaven,  their  introduction  in  this  place 
denotes  a  general  interference  of  all  the  celestial  powers, 
in  the  execution  of  the  Divine  decrees  under  the  trumpets* 
How  great  must  be  the  interest  at  stake,  how  mighty  and 
complicated  the  power  and  scheme  of  the  enemy,  when 
such  exertions  are  made  on  the  part  of  Heaven  ! 

To  them  were  given  seven  trumpets.  See  Rev.  i.  10. 
The  most  ancient  use  of  trumpets  in  communities  among 
the  Asiatics,  is  that  of  wandering  nations,  or  migrating 
hordes,  at  shifting  their  habitations  in  search  of  fresh  pas- 
ture ;  on  which  occasions,  the  most  valient  chief  at  the 
head  of  the  whole  train,  blew  a  trumpet  during  the  whole 
march.  This  custom  is  yet  observed  among  the  Kalmucs, 
and  other  Eastern  hordes  to  the  present  day,  when  they 
roam  about  from  place  to  place  with  their  cattle.  But  it 
also  was  of  general  use  as  an  instrument  of  war,  both  to  an 
army  in  march,  and  to  proclaim  battle  and  victory.  The 
Hebrews  used  trumpets  to  proclaim  solemn  festivals.  But 
they  cannot  be  considered  in  this  sense  here,  where  they 
no  doubt,  refer  to  that  memorable  invasion  of  the  Roman 
empire,  by  so  many  German  and  Asiatic  nations,  after  the 
death  of  Theodosius ;  and  to  those  wars,  desolations,  and 
calamities,  which  Heathen  nations,  in  times  after  this  ca- 
tastrophe, have  brought  on  Christian  countries,  and  on  the 
Church.  Jer.  iv.  19.  Hos.  v.  8.  Those  expositors  who 
connect  these  trumpets  with  the  following  angel  at  the 
altar,  in  allusion  to  the  Jewish  priests,  blowing  trumpets 
at  the  offering  of  incense,  have  not  considered,  that  they 
were  only  given  to  the  angels  here,  and  not  blown  on  this 
occasion.  St.  John  makes  a  parenthesis  in  the  text,  when 
he  passes  on  to  the  angel  at  the  altar,  whose  offer  of  in- 
cense he  only  considers  a  collateral  circumstance  to  the 
blowing  of  the  trumpets,  and  not  vice  versa. 


212  VII.  SEAL  FROM  A.  D.  372. 

Verse  3.  And  another  angel  came  and  stood  at  the  altar, 
having  a  golden  censer ;  and  there  was  given 
unto  him  much  incense,  that  he  should  offer  it 
with  the  prayers  of  all  saints  upon  the  golden 
altar  which  was  before  the  throne. 

4.  And  the  smoke  of  the  incense,  which  came  with, 
the  prayers  of  the  saints,  ascended  up  before 
God  out  of  the  angel's  hand. 

5.  And  the  angel  took  the  censer,  and  filled  it  with 
fire  of  the  altar,  and  cast  it  into  the  earth  :  and 
there  were  voices,  and  thunderings,  and  light- 
nings, and  an  earthquake. 

Verse  3.  And  another  angel  came.  The  Revelation 
opens  a  stupendous  view  into  the  world  of  spirits.  Here 
we  see  heaven  and  earth  engaged,  to  accomplish  the  will 
of  the  Almighty  ruler  of  the  Universe.  No  book  of  Scrip- 
ture makes  such  numerous  recitations  of  angels  as  this  ; 
and  the  correct  meaning  of  this  word  is  in  many  passages 
all-important,  and  yet  difficult  to  find.  Dr.  Gill,  for  in- 
stance, has  taken  this  angel  to  be  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
and  others  have  here  understood  the  Holy  Ghost.  They 
fell  into  the  same  mistake  with  John  himself,  Rev.  xix.  10. 
who  began  to  worship  an  angel,  which  had  told  and  shown 
him  such  glorious  things.  But  the  Holy  Ghost  is  never 
catled  an  angel  in  the  Scriptures.  Christ  is  sometimes 
denominated  an  angel  in  the  Qld  Testament,  because  of  his 
then  future  embassy  into  the  world ;  but  never  in  the  New 
Testament,  where  he  sends  his  angel.  Rev.  i.  1.  xxii.  16. 
and  is  himself  the  Lord,  whose  second  Advent  is  prepared 
by  all  these  measures.  The  angel  here  with  the  golden 
censer  is  termed  "  another  angelj'  by  which  words  he  is 
Compared  to  the  former  seven,  as  to  his  person,  and  yet 
distinguished  from  them  as  to  his  office  and  employment. 
This  is  also  proved  by  the  circumstances  of  his  standing 
at  the  altar,  of  the  incense  having  been  given  him,  and 
from  the  whole  aspect  of  his  ministration. 


THE  TRUMPETS.  213 

Much  incense,  that  he  should  offer  it  with  the  prayers  of 
all  saints.  This  is  an  unhappy  translation,  which  very 
much  favours  the  prevalent  opinion  of  former  times,  con- 
cerning the  mediation  of  angels  in  support  of  the  saints. 
iv*  imvi  should  have  heen  translated,  that  he  should 
give,  or  lay  it  to  the  prayers  of  all  saints,  and  not,  that 
he  should  offer  it  with  them ;  for  the  word  offer,  is  not 
found  in  the  original.  The  performance  of  this  angel  here, 
is  an  angelic  function,  and  not  a  priestly  employment ;  but 
rather  the  archetype  of  that  sacred  office,  which  Moses  be- 
held on  the  Mount.  These  prayers  had  been  placed  upon 
the  altar,  before  the  angel  came  to  it,  and  received  the  in- 
cense. He  did  not  lay  the  incense  into  the  censer,  but 
united  it  with  the  prayers  of  the  saints  upon  the  golden 
altar,  where  it  was  kindled  by  the  holy  fire  of  eternal  love, 
as  blazing  forth  in  the  intercession  of  Christ.  Burning 
incense  is  an  emblem,  not  of  the  prayers  themselves,  but  of 
their  being  very  grateful,  and  acceptable  to  God.  Ps* 
cxli.  2. 

The  true  import  of  this  passage  seems  to  be,  that,  some 
time  before  the  blowing  of  the  trumpets,  all  the  saints  on 
earth  lamented  the  degeneracy  and  corruption  of  the 
Church,  and  made  many  efforts  by  prayer  for  her  revival, 
but  for  a  time  without  any  visible  signs  of  success.  Thus 
the  prayers  of  all  saints  were  brought  upon  the  golden 
altar  in  heaven,  which,  at  least  in  this  place,  is  not  locally 
different  from  the  true  Church  of  Christ.  Incense  here 
denotes,  both  those  heavenly  graces  in  praying  saints,  by 
which  alone  their  prayers  are  made  acceptable,  and  of  ef- 
fect before  God,  as  also  that  glorious  consciousness  of 
faith,  in  which  believers  rejoice,  know  and  experience, 
that  their  prayers  are  accepted.  Now,  so  degenerate  was 
the  Church  at  that  time— ^so  much  in  want  of  the  life  and 
spirit  of  true  Christianity,  that,  in  prayers  which  regarded 
the  whole  Church,  even  the  wise  virgins  of  those  days 
slumbered,  and  for  a  time  were  in  want  of  incense,  until 


214  THE  TRUMPETS. 

this  ministering  angel,  who  had  received  those  heavenly 
graces  for  that  purpose,  revived  and  animated  them  anew, 
to  a  more  exalted  state  of  faith  and  love.  Thus  did  the 
smoke  of  the  incense  ascend,  with  the  prayers  of  the  saints, 
out  of  the  angels  hand  up  before  God. 

Verse  5.  Jlnd  the  angel  took  the  censer,  andjilled  it  with 
fire  of  the  altar.  Two  altars  are  mentioned  in  this  vision ; 
the  golden  altar  of  incense,  and  the  altar  of  burnt-offering, 
here  merely  denominated  the  altar.  The  altar  of  incense 
under  the  old  dispensation  was  the  place, '  where  men  en- 
treated God  for  favour  and  acceptance,  Exod.  xxx.  1.  3.  6. 
but  the  altar  of  burnt-offering  was  the  place,  where  God 
required  Divine  justice  to  be  executed,  against  the  trans- 
gression of  his  law.  Exod.  xxvii.  This  was  done  typically 
by  offering  sacrifices  during  the  time  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment, and  in  reality,  by  the  sufferings  and  atonement  of 
Christ  for  the  sins  of  the  world.  From  the  archetype  of 
this  altar  of  burnt-offering,  or  theatre  of  Divine  justice 
against  a  guilty  world,  the  angel  took  fire  in  consequence 
of  the  prayers  of  the  saints,  by  which  are  meant  the  judg- 
ments and  the  wrath  of  God  against  his  enemies,  and  upon 
the  transgressors  of  his  will. 

Cast  it  into  the  earth :  and  there  were  voices,  and  thun- 
derings,  and  lightnings,  and  an  earthquake.  The  earth 
here  denotes  the  Roman  empire,  now  become  Christian, 
and  the  earthly  minded  nations  in  the  neighbouring  coun- 
tries. Thunder,  lightning  and  earthquake  are  commo- 
tions of  nature,  which  according  to  history,  always  pre- 
cede the  sore  judgments  of  God ;  but  here  they  are  figura- 
tive expressions  of  great  import,  by  which  the  prayers  of 
the  saints  were  answered,  and  certain  measures  of  Divine 
justice  signified  to  the  Church.  By  voices,  are  meant 
those  ministers  of  the  Word,  who  rose  up  at  this  time,  in- 
spired with  extraordinary  zeal  and  fervour  to  enlighten  the 
minds,  and  alarm  the  consciences  of  the  people,  by  pro- 
mulgating the  future  terrors,  and  righteous  judgments  of 


THE  TRUMPETS.  815 

the  Lord  upon  the  land.  This  in  many  places  occasioned 
a  revival  of  religion,  as  is  generally  the  case,  when  great 
calamities  are  to  follow.  Thunderings  signify  the  judg- 
ments of  God,  actually  inflicted  by  ways  of  Providence, 
which,  when  seen  or  heard  of,  stun  the  ears,  and  terrify 
the  hearts  of  the  guilty.  Lightnings  are  the  prognostic 
signs  of  these  judgments  at  a  short  distance,  by  means  of 
which  flashes  of  Divine  justice  reach  the  consciences  of 
sinners,  in  order  to  turn  them  to  repentance.  And  earth- 
quakes  have  ever  been  looked  upon,  as  emblems  of  civil 
commotions,  among  the  nations  of  the  world.  This  earth- 
quake in  particular,  denotes  the  commencement  of  those 
remarkable  revolutions,  of  ,which  I  shall  give  an  account 
under  the  next  vers©. 

Verse  6.    And  the  seven  angels,  which  had  the  seven 
trumpets,  prepared  themselves  to  sound. 

In  order  perfectly  to  comprehend  this  new  scene  of 
events,  which  is  indicated  by  the  blowing  of  the  trumpets, 
I  presume  it  necessary,  to  make  a  historical  introduction, 
which  I  have  reserved  for  this  place,  where,  according  to 
this  series  of  prophecy,  the  judgments  of  God  are  in  full 
approach  upon  the  house  of  God,  1  Pet.  iv.  IT.  and  the 
whole  Roman  empire.  To  reason  from  history,  these 
judgments  nearly  all  proceeded,  in  a  great  measure,  from 
the  same  fountain-head — from  the  tremendous  commotion 
which  ensued  in  Asia  and  Europe,  upon  the  commence- 
ment of  that  great  migration  of  Asiatic  and  German  na- 
tions, armies,  hordes  and  tribes  $  who  by  numerous  inva- 
sions shook  the  Roman  empire  to  its  centre,  rent  the  Wes- 
tern part  of  it  to  pieces,  and  divided  it  among  themselves. 

This  remarkable  migration  of  the  barbarians  at  that 
time,  was  an  extraordinary  occurrence,  of  which  the  world 
has  not  beheld  the  equal  to  this  day.  Gibbon,  Mosheim 
and  other  historians,  account  for  this  sudden  tempest  of 
nations,  in  the  following  manner.  A  nation  of  Tartars, 
in  the  north-eastern  parts  of  China,  under  their  victorious 


216  THE  TRUMPETS. 

monarch  Toulcin,  vanquished,  and  expelled  the  nation  of 
the  Huns  from  their  country  to  the  north  of  the  Caspian 
sea.  This  numerous,  and  no  less  warlike  nation,  soon 
withdrew  from  the  presence  of  an  insulting  victor,  and,  in 
search  of  a  new  home,  fell  upon  the  nation  of  the  Mans, 
who  inhabited  the  countries  along  the  river  Tanais,  whom 
they  almost  annihilated.  Now  the  barrier  of  nations  in 
those  parts  was  broken,  and,  like  a  violent  torrent,  they 
overwhelmed  the  Ostrogoths,  and  Visigoths,  one  nation  after 
the  other,  and  pressed  with  incumbent  weight  into  the  fer- 
tile plains  of  the  Vistula ;  whilst  the  vanquished  nations, 
who  retreated  before  them,  must  have  been  forced  on  the 
confines  of  Germany.  The  inhabitants  of  those  regions, 
which  the  ancients  have  assigned  to  the  Suevi,  the  Vandals, 
the  Burgundians,  &c.  &c.  disdaining  to  be  incumbered  by 
these  Sarmatian  fugitives,  abandoned  their  woods  and  mo- 
rasses for  the  more  rich  and  cultivated  provinces  of  the 
Roman  empire.  In  this  they  were  soon  followed  by  other 
nations  from  Asia,  who  overthrew  one  another  with  pre- 
cipitation, like  the  waves  of  a  tempestuous  sea,  to  take 
their  share  in  the  general  spoil.  This  appears  to  be  the 
most  satisfactory  account  of  the  origin  of  that  memorable 
commotion  among  the  nations  of  the  earth,  which  cost  the 
Church  so  many  tears,  and  the  Roman  empire  so  much 
blood  ana*  treasure.  No  doubt,  in  this  tremendous  scene, 
the  earth  has,  in  a  peculiar  sense  of  the  word,  been  a 
theatre  of  the  powers  of  darkness,  who  aimed  at  nothing 
short  of  the  total  annihilation  of  the  Church  of  Christ. 
Bat  when  they  imagined  their  victory  most  complete,  the 
Lord  said  to  this  tempestuous  sea,  hitherto  sh alt  thou  come, 
but  no  further ;  and  here  shall  thy  proud  waves  be  stayed. 
Job  xxxviii.  11. 

Though  the  first  symptoms  of  these  terrible  commotions, 
may  be  dated  from  about  the  year  A.  D.  250  ;  yet  these 
barbarian  nations  for  many  years,  approached  the  Roman 
empire  only  from  a  distance,  with  fear  and  awe.    When 


I.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  372--TO  422,     217 

they  afterwards  drew  nearer,  and  attempted  to  make  in- 
roads into  the  frontier  provinces,  they  were  for  a  long  time 
repulsed  with  great  loss.  However,  these  roaming  hordes 
still  continued  to  take  possession  of  all  the  adjacent  coun- 
tries, and  thus  encompassed  the  empire  on  every  side. 
And  these  are  the  four  winds  of  the  earth,  which  were 
stayed  in  their  progress,  till  the  servants  of  God  had  been 
sealed.  Rev.  vii.  1.2.  3.  History  also  assures  us,  that  the 
Roman  empire  was  not  sensibly  agitated,  or  in  actual  dan- 
ger of  being  rent  to  pieces  by  these  attacks  of  the  barbari- 
ans, till  after  the  year  A.  D.  372,  or  even  after  the  death 
of  the  emperor  Theodosius. 


I.  TRUMPET  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  372 — TO  422, 

Verse  7.     The  first  angel  sounded,  and  there  followed  hail 
and  fire  mingled  with  blood,  and  they  were  cast 
upon  the  earth  :  and  the  third  part  of  trees  was 
burnt  up,  and  all  green  grass  was  burnt  up. 
This  terrible  tempest  denotes  the  irruption  of  the  barba- 
rians into  the  continent  of  the  Roman  empire.     No  figure 
could  have  been  more  suitable  and  striking,  than  this  storm 
of  hail,  fire,  and  blood,  to  represent  the  invasions  of  these 
fierce  and  warlike  multitudes,  consisting  of  many  tribes, 
kindreds,  and  tongues,  who  all  laid  in  their  claim  for  the 
common  plunder.     Isaiah  xxviii.  2.    ch.  xxix.  6.    Exod. 
ix.  23.  Heb.  vi.  8.     This  storm  of  hail  was  mingled  with 
fire  and  blood.     Fire,  denotes  the  incensed,  savage  fierce- 
ness of  their  dispositions  which  characterized  all  their  ac- 
tions in  this  work  of  ruin  and  desolation.     Blood  here  de- 
signs great  slaughter  in  battle.     The  earth  signifies  the 
continent  of  the  Roman  empire,  and  more  especially  the 
western  parts  of  it  as  Germany,  France,  Spain  and  Italy, 
which  have  been  the  particular  theatres  of  these  scenes  of 

lavage  and  horror. 

E  e 


218     I.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  372— TO  422, 

History  testifies  the  completion  of  this  trumpet,  during 
the  period  of  time  from  A.  D.  372 — to  422.  It  commenced 
with  the  improvident  act  of  the  Roman  emperor  Valens^ia 
permitting  the  Goths  to  pass  the  Danube,  and  to  settle 
themselves  in  Dacia,  Mossia,  and  Thrace.  By  this  impoli- 
tic step,  he  admitted  a  powerful  enemy  into  the  bosom  of 
the  empire,  which  endangered  its  security,  and  invited  the 
other  Barbarian  nations.  Soon  after  this,  the  white  Huns 
invaded  Mesopotamia,  and  carried  their  victori  his  arms 
up  to  the  very  wails  of  Edessa,  whilst  the  Europian  Huns 
niade  incursions  into  the  provinces  along  the  Danube.  In 
the  year  378,  the  Goths  in  Thrace  advanced  from  that  pro- 
vince into  Macedon  and  Thessaly,  where  they  committed 
dreadful  ravages.  They  afterwards  blocked  up  the  city  of 
Constantinople,  plundered  the  suburbs,  and  at  last  totally 
defeated  and  killed  the  emperor  himself.  Thus  these  Bar- 
barian hordes  daily  increased  their  ranks  around  the  em- 
pire ;  and  though  the  following  emperors  opposed  them 
with  their  whole  power,  the  Romans  suffered  much.  They 
fought  most  terrible  battles,  and  the  advantages  gained  in 
the  end,  were  rarely  worth  the  blood  of  a  single  soldier. 

This  was  the  state  of  Europe  when  Thcodosius  died, 
and  divided  the  empire  between  his  two  sons,  Arcadius  and 
Honorious ;  who  both  held  the  reins  of  government  with 
unsteady  hands,  and  governed  by  their  ministers,  who 
were  often  unfaithful.  Especially  Honorious,  who  resided 
at  Ravenna,  and  reigned  over  the  Western  provinces,  ap- 
peared to  be  little  better  than  an  idiot.  Theodosius  died 
in  January  A.  D.  395,  and  early  in  the  spring  the  Goths 
were  in  arms.  The  German  auxiliaries  in  the  Roman  ar- 
mies, declared  their  independence,  went  over  to  their 
countrymen,  and  assailed  the  declining  empire  with  great 
success.  The  Westgoths,  issued  forth  out  of  Pannonia,  and 
invaded  Greece  and  Italy.  So  great  was  the  consterna- 
tion, that  the  emperor  took  refuge  in  the  town  of  Ista  in 
Piedmont,  where  he  almost  fell  a  prisoner  into  the  hands  of 


I.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  372— TO  422.    219 

fche  victorious  Marie.  Another  German  king,  Radagais, 
marched  an  immense  army  from  the  northern  extremities 
of  Germany,  almost  to  the  gates  of  Rome.  It  consisted  of 
Vandals,  Sueves,  Burgundians,  Alans  and  other  northern 
tribes,  and  is  computed,  with  the  accession  of  women, 
children  and  slaves,  to  400,000  persons.  Gainas,  another 
Gothic  commander  in  the  Roman  service,  revolted  and 
turned  his  arms  against  the  Eastern  provinces,  and  had 
almost  gained  the  capital  of  Constantinople. 

In  400,  the  victorious  Marie  at  the  head  of  his  warlike 
Goths,  entered  Italy  again,  and  took  the  city  of  Rome  at 
three  different  times ;  which  he  at  last  plundered,  and  re- 
duced many  magnificent  buildings  to  aehes.  His  successor 
Jltaulph,  pillaged  and  ravaged  the  city  and  country  a  se- 
cond time,  and  then  invaded  the  south  of  France;  where 
he  established  a  kingdom,  which  soon  extended  its  limits 
over  all  Spain  and  Portugal.  About  this  time,  also  the 
Franks  passed  the  Rhine,  and  established  A.  D.  420,  a  new 
kingdom  in  Gaul,  under  their  king  Pharamond.  All  these 
invading  armies,  took  possession  of  the  most  fertile,  and 
fairest  of  all  the  European  provinces  j  and  Odoacer,  at  the 
head  of  his  Goths  and  Heruli,  conquered  Augiistukis,  the 
last  Roman  emperor,  and  thus  gave  the  mortal  blow  to  the 
imperial  dignity  in  the  West. 

This  tremendous  tempest  is  said  to  have  burnt  up  the 
third  part  of  trees,  and  all  green  grass  on  the  continent  of 
the  Roman  empire.  Trees  may  denote  the  principal  per- 
sonages, both  civil  and  ecclesiastical  ,•  which  is  a  trope, 
common  with  the  prophets.  Isa.  ii.  13.  Zech.  xi.  1.  2. 
Isaiah  lv.  12.  Grass,  may  signify  the  common  people,  as 
being  a  multitude,  in  a  flourishing  condition,  though  of  no 
power  against  such  an  enemy*  Job  v.  25.  Ps.  lxxii.  16. 
Ps.  ciii.  15.  1  Pet.  i.  24.  Isa,  xl.  6.  7.  There  can  be  no 
doubt  of  the  great  sufferings  of  all  ranks  and  orders  by 
these  calamities,  during  this  period.  The  higher  classes 
lost  their  offices,  all  their  possessions  in  the  world,  and 


m    II.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  422— TO  472. 

one  third  of  them  their  lives.  But  the  common  people  are, 
represented  by  this  prophecy,  as  having  fallen  altogether, 
an  entire  pray  to  the  ravages  of  these  Barbarians,  with  all 
their  estates ;  except  those  who  had  been  sealed,  by  the 
seal  of  the  living  God.     Rev.  vii.  3.  4. 

The  blowing  of  this  trumpet  was  of  import  to  the  Church 
of  Christy  for  we  may  venture  to  assert,  that  the  Chris- 
tians were  the  principal  sufferers  under  these  calamities. 
Though  these  fierce  and  warlike  nations  were  for  the  most 
part  strangers  to  Christianity,  and  only  intent  to  acquire 
wealth  and  dominion,  yet  they  were  often  excited  by  the 
Pagans,  who  still  remained  in  the  empire,  to  treat  the  fol- 
lowers of  Christ  with  inexpressible  cruelty  and  violence. 
However,  their  expectations  were  finally  disappointed. 
The  eternal  sun  of  righteousness  illuminated  the  hearts  of 
these  usurpers;  they  at  last  embraced  Christianity,  and 
resigned  their  sceptres  to  the  Lord,. 


II.  TRUMPET  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  422 TO  472. 

Verse  8.    And  the  second  angel  sounded,  and  as  it  were  a 

great  mountain  burning  with  fire,  was  cast  into 

the  sea;  and  the  third  part  of  the  sea  became 

blood : 

9.     And  the  third  part  of  the  creatures  which  were 

in  the  sea,  and  had  life,  died ;  and  the  third  part 

of  the  ships  were  destroyed. 

This  trumpet  must  be  explained  in  connexion  with  the 

first,  as  being  of  the  same  nature,  and  having  the  Roman 

empire  for  its  object ;  and  yet  as  sufficiently  distinguished, 

in  regard  to  time  and  place.     Hence  it  cannot  refer  to  the 

Macedonian  heresy,  nor  to  the  taking  and  sacking  of 

Home,  by  the  victorious  Marie,  at  the  head  of  his  fierce 


II.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  422— TO  472.     22l 

and  warlike  Goths,  as  Dr.  Gill,  and  other  expositors  have 
explained.  The  sea  here  denotes,  the  countries  on  the  sea 
coast  of  the  Mediterranean ;  and  the  burning  mountain, 
that  terrible  invasion  of  Africa,  by  the  Vandals  and  Alans 
under  their  king  Gtnserick,  who  during  this  period,  deso- 
lated all  those  countries  with  fire  and  sword,  in  a  most 
cruel  and  savage  manner.  This  mountain  was  cast ;  that 
is,  it  came  from  another  region,  and  fell  with  sudden  vio- 
lence on  this  devoted  third  part  of  the  Roman  empire, 
which  had  hitherto  escaped  the  calamities  of  the  first 
trumpet. 

During  the  accomplishment  of  the  prophecy  under  this 
trumpet,  the  Christian  Church  in  Africa  was  almost 
crushed  by  violence,  and  the  cruel  oppression  of  her  ene- 
mies. Gensericky  that  savage  and  inhuman  tyrant,  set 
sail  from  Spain  A.  D.  427,  at  the  head  of  80,000  Vandals, 
and  invaded  Africa  by  the  treachery  of  Bonifacius,  the  Ro- 
man governor,  who  had  been  offended  by  his  Court.  This 
fierce  people  had  no  sooner  arrived,  than  they  carried  on. 
a  most  dreadful  war  of  desolation  and  plunder  against  the 
inhabitants  for  twelve  years,  took  the  province  out  of  the 
hands  of  the  Romans,  and  established  a  kingdom  for  them- 
selves, which  continued  a  whole  century.  Genserick  him- 
self was  a  monster  of  cruelty,  and  his  Vandals  without 
mercy.  They  committed  inexpressible  cruelties,  without 
remorse,  during  a  period  of  fifty  years,  in  which  they 
waged  a  continual  war  of  carnage  and  rapine*  against 
the  Romans  on  the  European  sea  coast,  and  the  islands 
in  the  Mediterranean;  which  is  said,  by  Procopius,  an 
author  of  those  days,  to  have  almost  depopulated  Africa, 
and  to  have  cost  five  millions  of  souls.  Their  known  sa- 
vage cruelty,  and  the  glory  of  a  number  of  victories  which 
they  gained  in  rapid  succession,  almost  disarmed  the 
power  of  the  Romans.  They  conquered  Hippo  A.  D.  437, 
Carthage  A.  D.  439,  and  in  a  few  years  the  islands  of 


/ 


222     II.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  422— TO  472. 

Sicily,  Sardiana,  Corsica,  Eberjus  and  Majorca.  A.  D. 
455,  they  invaded  Italy  with  an  army  of  300,000  men,  and 
far  surpassed  the  West  Goths  in  their  terrible  cruelties. 
They  pillaged  Naples,  Capua,  and  many  other  cities  and 
towns  on  the  continent;  and  their  fleet  ravaged  every 
place  within  its  reach  on  the  sea  coast.  Rome,  which  had 
submitted  to  their  victorious  arms,  lost  all  its  treasures, 
and  not  even  retaining  its  ornaments,  which  other  Barba- 
rians had  as  yet  permitted  it  to  enjoy. 

The  Vandals,  for  the  most  part,  were  Jlrians.  Amidst 
their  constant  wars,  they  also  carried  on  a  bloody  perse- 
cution against  the  Catholics,  who  professed  their  adherence 
to  the  Nicene,  doctrine,  concerning  the  divinity  of  Christ. 
Gcnserick  and  his  son  Hunerick  in  particular,  razed  their 
churches,  exiled  thtir  bishops,  and  tormented  by  the  most 
violent  methods,  such  as  remained  inflexible  against  their 
wicked  importunities.  They  even  exceeded,  if  possible, 
Pagan  Rome,  in  injustice,  and  devising  various  means  of 
torture ;  under  which  many  thousands  were  either  maimed 
in  their  bodies,  or  honoured  the  Lord  by  martyrdom. 

The  whole  nation  is  here  compared  to  a  burning  moun- 
tain, consuming  itself,  and  every  combustible  matter  in 
contact  with  it.  By  this  figure  are  indicated  their  rage, 
fury,  and  savage  cruelties  in  all  their  invasions  of  the  Ro- 
man empire ;  and  the  barbarous  persecutions,  which  they 
carried  on  against  the  Catholics  in  their  own  country. 
The  Christian  Churches  in  Africa,  under  the  government 
of  the  Vandals,  truly  dwelled,  as  it  were  in  contact  with  a 
consuming  fire.  For,  we  are  informed  by  credible  histo- 
rians, that  before  their  invasion  of  that  country,  they 
counted  seven  hundred  bishoprics  in  it,  (i.  e.  congrega- 
tions, according  to  the  meaning  of  this  word  at  that  time,) 
which  these  cruel  tyrants  almost  totally  destroyed.  Just 
as  the  sea  would  be  agitated,  if  a  burning  mountain  was 
thrown  into  its  bosom ;  such  was  the  turbulence  and  con- 
fusion of  the  ocean  of  nations  along  the  Mediterranean, 


III.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  522.     223 

during  the  time  of  their  incursions.  But  as  the  sea  would 
also  soon  extinguish  the  fire  of  such  a  flaming  mountain, 
so  their  fury  and  power  was  only  of  short  duration. 

Thus  history  furnishes  abundance  of  testimony  in  com- 
pletion of  this  prophecy,  for  the  confirmation  of  our  faith. 
Those  minutely  acquainted  with  the  events  during  this 
period,  will  readily  consent,  that  one  third  part  of  the  in- 
habitants of  Africa,  and  on  the  European  sea  coast  of  the 
Mediterranean,  died  violent  deaths  by  these  judgments ; 
and  that  one  third  part  of.  the  ships,  or  towns,  cities, 
islands  and  states  have  been  destroyed  by  these  cruel  in- 
vaders, and  in  consequence  of  their  incursions.  Ezek. 
xxix.  4.  5. 

Some  of  my  readers  perhaps,  would  rather  take  Milla 
to  be  this  burning  mountain,  who  is  termed  the  scourge  of 
God>  and  the  dread  of  the  world.  He  certainly  was  the 
most  terrible  of  all  men,  who  at  the  head  of  his  Huns,  had 
nearly  desolated  the  whole  earth,  and  filled  it  with  blood 
and  slaughter;  wherefore  he  might  properly  have  been 
predicted,  under  the  figure  of  a  burning  mountain.  But 
his  invasion  of  the  Roman  empire,  from  A.  D.  445  to  456, 
though  dreadful  beyond  expression,  does  not  realize  all 
the  features  of  this  prophecy. 


III.  TRUMPET  ACCOMPLISHED  EEOM  A-D.  472 — TO  522. 

Verse  10.  And  the  third  angel  sounded,  and  there  fell  a 
great  star  from  heaven,  burning  as  it  were  a 
lamp,  and  it  fell  upon  the  third  part  of  the  rivers, 
and  upon  the  fountains  of  waters  j 
11.  And  the  name  of  the  star  is  called  wormwood : 
and  the  third  part  of  the  waters  became  worm- 
wood ;  and  many  men  died  of  the  waters,  be- 
cause they  were  made  bitter* 


224    HI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  52a. 

Nature  is  by  far  the  most  pleasing  source  of  images  in 
all  poetry,  and  the  prophets  appear  to  have  taken  a  par- 
ticular delight,  to  express  the  stupendous  mysteries  of  God 
in  her  sublime  language.  The  highest  objects  in  the  na- 
tural world  are  the  sun,  moon,  and  stars;  and  by  these 
they  represent  the  principal  personages  either  in  the  world 
politic,  or  in  the  Church.  Dan.  viii.  10.  Isa.  xiv.  12. 
li.  16.  xlix.  13.  xliv.  23.  Math.  xxiv.  29.  It  would  by 
no  means  accord  with  all  the  features  of  the  prophecy  un- 
der this  trumpet,  to  explain  its  contents  of  the  world  poli- 
tic, and  this  star  of  a  king,  kingdom,  empire,  prince,  or 
ruler  of  the  people.  In  my  opinion,  this  star  must  signify 
an  eminent  doctor,  or  ruler  of  the  Church,  ch.  i.  20.  Ben- 
gelius  has  here  understood  Jlrius  and  his  heresy,  and  Dr. 
Gill  Pelagius  and  the  pernicious  effects  of  his  heretical 
doctrines  concerning  the  original  corruption  of  human  na- 
ture, and  the  necessity  of  Divine  grace.  But  this  trumpet 
is  too  late  for  Arius,  who  lived  in  the  reign  of  Constantine ; 
and  the  doctrines  of  Pelagius  were  suppressed  by  the  elo- 
quent pen  of  Augustine,  and  the  councils  of  the  Gauls, 
Britons,  and  Africans,  before  they  acquired  that  degree  of 
celebrity,  ascribed  to  this  star.  Some  expositors  have  un- 
derstood it  of  Origen;  but  his  reputation  has  only  been 
considerable  among  the  monastic  orders,  and  his  doctrines 
were  attended  with  no  such  pernicious  effects.  Besides, 
this  trumpet  must,  from  its  connexion  with  the  general  ten- 
dency of  all  these  judgments,  refer  to  an  event  of  such  a 
nature,  as  not  only  effects  the  Church,  but  also  the  Roman 
empire :  which  has  only  been  the  case  in  a  small  degree, 
even  with  Arianism. 

This  star  represents  the  bishop  of  Rome,  in  his  aspiring 
efforts  to  pre-eminence  and  spiritual  supremacy  in  the 
Church  of  Christ ;  for  which  the  immediate  foundations 
were  laid,  during  this  period,  according  to  the  concurring 
testimony  of  those  eminent  historians,  Walch  and  Mos- 
keim.    By  this  ambitious  grasp  at  rank  and  ecclesiastical 


III.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  52<8.     £25 

jurisdiction,  the  Roman  pontiff  opened  a  large  fountain  of 
Corruption  among  the  clergv  ;  prepared  the  way  for  the 
consequent  introduction  of  superstition,  and  Popery;  and 
commenced  those  odious  and  hitter  contentions  between 
the  patriarchs,  which  caused  so  many  assassinations  and 
cruel  wars,  and  finally  ended  in  that  fatal  separation  of 
the  Eastern  and  Western  Churches. 

I  do  not  mean  to  assert,  that  the  fall  of  this  great  Roman 
star  during  this  period,  consisted  in  pretensions  to  a  supre- 
macy over  the  powers  of  this  world;  or  that  he  assumed 
as  yet  the  title  of  supreme  lawgiver  and  judge  of  the  whole 
Christian  Church,  which  he  claimed  in  succeeding  times. 
No,  his  fall  consisted  in  publicly  pretending,  and  strenu- 
ously labouring  from  this  time,  to  establish  a  divine  right 
to  pre-eminence  of  rank,  office,  and  power,  as  a  court  of  ap~ 
peals  among  all  his  brethren,  because  he  was  the  successor  of 
St.  Peter,  and  vicegerent  of  Christ  on  earth.  This  ambitious 
scheme  was  engendered  by  the  Roman  pontiff  in  the  com- 
mencement of  this  period,  and  acknowledged  to  that  ex- 
tent in  the  Western  Church  before  its  close,  as  signified 
by  the  prophecy  of  this  trumpet. 

Soon  after  the  persecution  had  ceased,  and  the  Church 
began  to  enjoy  peace  and  prosperity  under  the  auspices  of 
the  Roman  emperors,  a  great  change  took  place  through- 
out all  ranks  of  Christendom,  but  especially  among  the 
higher  orders  of  the  clergy.  Constantine  attached  con- 
siderable revenues  and  privileges  to  all  officers  in  the 
Church;  and  when  in  succeeding  time,  every  congrega- 
tion became  endowed  with  large  funds,  they  were  under 
the  direction  and  management  of  the  bishops.  In  con- 
sequence of  this  state  of  ease  and  happiness,  an  evident 
decline  of  piety  and  holiness  ensued,  and  the  minis- 
ters of  the  gospel  soon  lost  the  former  genuine  lustre  of 
their  office;  while  some  fell  into  views  of  self-interest, 
luxury  or  indolence,  and  others  made  all  efforts  to  create 
new  ranks,  and  titles  of  honour  and  distinction  anion? 

Ff 


226    HI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  522. 

themselves  for  their  own  aggrandizement.  The  bishop  of 
Rome  had,  so  early  as  the  third  century,  obtained  a  dis- 
tinguished seat  in  the  Episcopal  order ;  because  he  was 
bishop  of  that  ancient  metropolis  of  the  empire,  and  sur- 
passed all  his  brethren  in  magnificence,  revenues,  the 
number  of  his  ministers,  and  the  size  of  his  diocess.  We 
even  meet  with  encomiums  upon  that  Church  in  the  second 
century,  indicative  of  peculiar  distinction.  When  there- 
fore, at  this  time,  all  ran  for  the  palm  of  honour,  he  had 
already  gained  a  considerable  start  through  the  prejudices 
of  the  times,  and  now  employed  both  prudence  and  craft 
to  establish  his  pre-eminence,  before  his  competitors 
.should  be  able  to  meet  him  on  equal  ground. 

Hitherto  he  had  only  enjoyed  a  pre-eminence  of  rank, 
(from  respect  for  the  Church  at  Rome,)  not  incom- 
patible with  the  Christian  spirit.  But  during  the 
period  of  this  trumpet,  he  pursued  a  most  unchristian 
train  of  measures,  in  order  to  gain  a  degree  of  dignity, 
power  and  dominion  over  his  brethren,  absolutely  incon- 
sistent with  the  ppirit  of  Christianity,  and  the  final  aim  of 
Heaven  in  the  establishment  of  the  Church  on  earth.  Thug 
fell  a  star  of  the  first  magnitude,  from  the  celestial  sphere 
of  the  general  Church  of  Christ. 

The  causes  by  which  the  bishop  of  Rome  was  induced, 
thus  publicly  to  pretend  a  divine  right,  in  support  of  his 
ambitious  scheme  for  supremacy,  were  the  vigorous  efforts 
of  Acacias?  bishop  at  Constantinople,  towards  acquiring  a 
superiority  of  rank.  This  prelate  had  been  exalted  by  the 
third  canon  of  the  council  held  at  Constantinople,  A.  D. 
381 — and  by  the  twenty  eighth  canon  of  the  council  at 
Chalcedon,  A.  D.  451,  to  an  equal  rank  with  the  patriarchs 
of  Rome,  Antioch,  and  Alexandria,  because  he  was  bishop 
of  the  imperial  city.  This  was  perfectly  consistent  with 
the  fundamental  maxim  of  Church  government  at  that 
time,  when  the  rank  of  bishops  was  determined,  by  the 
rank  of  the  cities  where  they  resided.    But  now,  when 


III.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  522.     227 

Rome  was  on  the  decline,  and  Constantinople  had  risen  to 
the  summit  of  eminence,  by  having  become  the  seat  of  the 
empire  ;  its  bishop  also  rose  a  formidable  rival  and  check 
to  the  growing  authority  of  the  Roman  patriarch.  Sim- 
plicius,  who  at  this  time  filled  the  Roman  chair,  was 
thereby  mortified,  and  stimulated  into  vehement  measures. 
His  successor,  Felix  II.  interfered  in  the  transactions  of 
the  East,  the  same  as  he  had  done,  in  settling  disputes  be- 
tween the  clergy,  and  protecting  the  bishops  against  their 
lawful  patriarchs,  in  order  to  acquire  influence  and  autho- 
rity to  establish  his  own  supremacy,  in  which  he  too  well 
succeeded.  Thus  elated  by  pride  and  zeal,  he  called  a 
c  juncil  at  Rome,  on  purpose  to  excommunicate  Acacius, 
bishop  of  Constantinople,  which  no  one  before  him  had 
ever  ventured  to  attempt.  This  arrogant  and  unwarranta- 
ble step,  occasioned  a  schism  between  the  Eastern  and 
Western  Churches,  which  is  said  to  have  lasted  twenty- 
five  years,  but  in  fact,  was  never  healed  until  their  final 
separation.  Felix  and  his  successors  prosecuted  their  am- 
bitious plan  with  such  vehemence  and  obstinacy,  that  the 
Eastern  bishops  at  last  consented,  and  erased  Acacius's 
name  from  their  sacred  register,  covered  with  eternal  dis- 
grace. Thus  the  Roman  pontiff  gave  a  deadly  wound  to 
the  pre-eminence  of  the  patriarch  of  Constantinople,  and 
under  the  garb  of  zeal  for  the  Church,  tacitly  established 
his  own  supremacy.  Symmachus  ascended  the  Roman 
chair  amid  a  scene  of  blood  and  slaughter,  occasioned  by 
his  election.  The  council  Palmare,  A.  D.  498,  settling 
his  right  to  the  Roman  see,  for  the  first  time  established 
the  position,  by  the  instigation  of  Symmachus,  that  the 
Tope  is  accountable  to  God  only;  by  which  they  exalted  him 
even  above  the  reach  of  councils,  and  laid  the  first  founda- 
tion for  his  future  pretensions  of  infallibility.  Ennodins, 
that  extravagant  flatterer  of  Symmachus,  found  the  opi- 
nions of  Ills  time  so  favourable  to  the  wishes  of  these  lordly 
pontiffs,  that  he  maintained  in  his  apology  for  this  council: 


228     III.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472— TO  522. 

the  Roman  pontiff  was  constituted  judge  in  the  place  of 
God  on  earth.  Thus,  before  the  close  of  this  period,  the 
"Western  Churches  seem  to  have  acknowledged  and  sup- 
ported the  Roman  pontiff  in  his  pretensions  to  spiritual 
supremacy  in  the  Christian  Church  ;  at  least  to  the  extent 
necessary,  in  order  to  produce  the  effects  ascribed  to  his 
fall  by  this  prophecy.  For  these  prophetic  periods  only 
determine  the  commencement  and  progress  of  these  judg- 
ments, until  all  the  features  of  the  images  in  the  prediction 
are  realized  ;  the  consequent  effects  of  them  may  yet  be 
felt,  for  centuries  after  their  accomplishment. 

And  there  fell  a  great  star  from  heaven.  By  the  figure 
of  this  expression  we  are  induced  to  contemplate  the 
Church  of  Christ  in  comparison  with  the  firmament  of 
heaven  ;  and  by  the  term  fc^  piyoc?,  a  star  of  primary 
magnitude,  we  are  invited  to  pre-suppose  other  stars,  of 
the  same  size  and  bulk.  This  was  actually  the  case  with 
the  bishop  of  Rome,  when  compared  with  the  patriarchs  of 
Constantinople,  Antioch  and  Alexandria  ;  who  according 
to  this  passage,  were  not  considered  inferior  in  rank  and 
office,  even  in  the  estimation  of  Heaven.  Kctiouivog  wc 
KaiATtoLsy  should  be  rendered  flaming  like  a  torch,  which  is 
often  the  signification  of  Kap-Tra,?,  Acts  xx.  8.  lxx.  Gen, 
xv.  17.  Jud.  vii.  16.  Zech.  xii.  6;  and  may  refer  to  the 
lustre  of  genuine  Christianity,  and  the  true  spirit  of  the 
gospel  ministry,  as  well  as  the  fame  of  the  bishop  of  Rome 
anterior  to  this  period,  in  which  he  shone  forth  from  his 
eminent  station,  to  great  advantage  until  his  fall. 

"A\J/iv9-<k,  which  we  have  rendered  wormwood,  signifies 
a  thing  poisonously  bitter,  -Deut.  xxix.  18.  and  is  here  put 
in  the  place  of  a  proper  noun  :  as  for  example,  MARA, 
Ruth  i.  20.  and  Jerem.  xx.  3.  MAGUR  MIS  SAB  IB, 
terror  all  about.  It  seems  to  bear  an  allusion  to  Exod. 
xv.  23.  where  Israel  came  panting  to  the  waters  of 
Marah,  and  could  not  drink ;  as  a  representation  of  the 
mournful  situation  of  the  children  of  God  in  the  Western 


III.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  472—TO  522.     229 

churches,  from  the  commencement  of  this  period.  Rivers 
here  signify  the  Evangelical  doctrines  of  the  gospel*  as 
conveyed  by  public  institutions  of  instruction ;  Isa.  xliii. 
20.  Zech.  xiv.  8.  Jer.  xxxi.  9.  Joel  i.  20  ,•  and  fountains 
denote  the  Sacred  Scriptures  and  the  Divine  ordinances, 
from  whence  they  flow.  Isa.  xii.  3.  These  waters  are 
pleasant,  and  salutary  for  the  promotion  of  spiritual  life 
and  happiness  in  themselves,  when  permitted  to  flow  un-> 
corrupted ;  but  the  Roman  pontiff  embittered  these  foun- 
tains, and  wholesome  streams,  to  a  poisonous  degree.  The 
word  of  God  was  clouded  with  false  glosses,  and  perverse 
interpretations  ;  tradition,  and  the  follies  of  council;  wer& 
extolled,  to  an  equal  degree  of  credibility  with  the  Holy 
Scriptures ;  the  divine  precepts  of  religion  adulterated  by 
an  immense  mixture  of  human  inventions,  and  all  clisses 
of  public  teachers  allured,  or  compelled  to  inculcate  hese 
corruptions  into  the  minds  of  the  multitude.  These  wi&ed 
innovations  exasperated  the  intelligent,  and  caused  nucli 
bitterness,  distress,  and  sorrow  in  the  world.  Many  rien 
spiritually  died  of  the  waters,  who  were  beguiled  to  s wil- 
low them  in  their  embittered  sense  with  avidity,  and  trust- 
ed in  the  supplications  of  saints,  pilgrimages  to  their  se- 
pulchres, image-worship,  the  singular  efficacy  attributed 
to  the  bones  of  martyrs,  and  a  torrent  of  superstitioi, 
which  now  began  to  eclipse  the  splendour  of  primitive 
Christianity.  But  a  great  number  also  died  natural  deaths, 
in  consequence  of  the  assassinations,  massacres,  and  civil 
wars,  which  were  waged  in  consequence  of  the  schism,  oc- 
casioned by  the  fall  of  this  Roman  star.  Thus  the  third 
portion  of  the  waters  in  the  western  third  part  of  Chris- 
tendom, became  wormwood,  and  the  other  two  thirds  yet 
remained  wholesome  doctrine,  for  those  who  were  able  to 
distinguish. 


£30    IV.  TRUMPET,  FHOM  A.  D.  522— TO  572 


IV.  TRUMPET  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  522 — TO  572. 

Verse  12.  And  the  fourth  angel  sounded^  and  the  third 
part  of  the  sun  was  smitten,  and  the  third  part 
of  the  moon,  and  the  third  part  of  the  stars ;  so 
as  the  third  part  of  them  was  darkened,  and 
the  day  shone  not  for  a  third  part  of  it,  and  the 
/  night  likewise. 

This  trumpet  is  chiefly  distinguished  from  the  preceding 
one,  by  its  universality,  pourtraying  the  situation  of  the 
whole  Church  of  Christ  under  the  pressure  of  general  ca- 
lamities; the  fountain  of  which  was  now  opened  within 
her  oyn  bosom,  and  threatened  to  deluge  her  for  ever.  I 
see  n*  reason,  why  we  should  not  proceed  to  explain  the 
tiguris  of  this  trumpet,  in  concordance  with  those  of  the 
forejoing;  since  St.  John  continues  this  prophecy  by  the 
sami  class  of  images,  and  in  a  connected  view.  There, 
heaven  signified  the  Church  of  Christ,  and  the  star  an  emi- 
nent bishop ;  and  here  he  proceeds  to  inform  us,  of  the  ef- 
fects of  the  fourth  trumpet  on  all  the  rest  of  the  heavenly 
luhinaries,  and  thus  by  completing  the  whole  scenery, 
finishes  the  representation  of  the  general  state  of  Chris- 
tendom. 

|  The  sun,  the  source  of  all  light  and  nutrition  on  earth, 
signifies  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ,  Mai.  iv.  2.  and  the 
iyoon,  which  only  reflects  the  light  of  the  sun,  the  Chris- 
tian worship  as  comprehending  ceremonies  and  Church 
discipline,  Isa.  xxiv.  23.  the  stars,  the  ministers  of  the 
Church,  Dan.  xii.  3.  the  day,  when  we  enjoy  the  benefit 
and  influence  of  the  sun,  the  state  of  genuine,  practical  re- 
ligion, Rom.  xiii.  12.  and  the  night,  when  only  a  faint 
visage  is  afforded  by  the  borrowed  light  of  the  moon,  de- 
motes the  religious  state  of  the  Jews,  under  their  ceremo- 
nial law,  Rom.  xiii.  12.  Math.  iv.  16.  Luke  i.  79;  or 
le  state  of  letters  and  philosophy. 


IV.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  522— TO  572.    SSI 

Here  we  behold  a  prophetic  representation,  of  that  visible 
decline  of  all  human  and  divine  knowledge,  and  the  ensuing 
profound  darkness  and  ignorance,  which  broke  in  upon  all 
Christendom,  in  consequence  of  the  invasions  of  the  Bar- 
barians, by  historians  called  the  barbarity  of  the  middle  ages. 
Both  religion  and  literature  suffered  a  fatal  shock  by  the 
incursions  of  these  Asiatic  and  German  nations,  who  dur- 
ing their  invasions  sacrificed  the  lives  of  many  geniuses 
and  men  of  science,  razed  the  churches,  destroyed  many 
libraries,  schools  and  academies,  works  of  art,  and  other 
means  for  the  promotion  of  useful  knowledge.  They  had 
no  respect  for  religion,  and  held  arts  and  sciences  in  per- 
fect contempt.  And  though  these  scenes  of  horror  and  de- 
solation were  now  past,  the  Barbarians  had  formed  settle- 
ments in  almost  every  part  of  the  Roman  territories,  and 
divided  the  Western  provinces,  where  they  established 
kingdoms  for  themselves,  and  only  encouraged  military 
skill  and  bravery.  However,  anterior  to  this  period, 
many  of  every  class  of  society  were  yet  living,  who 
had  been  educated  in  more  auspicious  times.  But  now 
when  also  these  worthies  were  locked  up  in  the  chilling 
arms  of  death,  the  celestial  luminaries  of  the  Church  were 
eclipsed,  and  one  third  of  their  light  withdrawn  from  the 
world. 

This  was  equally  the  case  with  divinity,  with  letters  and 
philosophy.  There  were  but  few  divines,  who  possessed 
penetrating  views,  and  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  Holy 
Scriptures,  or  who  were  able  to  give  a  rational  explana- 
tion of  the  Christian  doctrine.  Even  the  sacerdotal  and 
monastic  orders  had  departed  from  their  primitive  simpli- 
city, and  spread  a  thick  cloud  of  fantastic  notions  and  su- 
perstition over  the  evangelical  light  and  worship ;  by  which 
thousands  were  led  from  the  paths  of  sober  faith,  and 
humble  piety,  into  a  round  of  pompous  ceremonies,  only 
capable  of  exciting  the  veneration  of  a  gazing  populace. 
The  councils  enacted  the  observance  of  many  human  rites 
and  institutions,  and  the  bishops  and  patriarchs  inculcated 


232    IV.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  522— TO  572. 

superstitious  fancies  concerning  the  worship  of  images  and 
saints,  the  fire  of  purgatory,  the  efficacy  of  good  w  orks,  the 
power  of  relics  to  heal  the  diseases  of  body  and  mind,  the 
public  supplications,  the  holy  pilgrimages,  and  of  temples, 
altars,  penitential  garments,  &c.  &c.  By  these  corrup- 
tions, the  genuine  lustre  of  Christianity  was  in  a  great 
measure  eclipsed,  and  the  doctrines  of  the  gospel  rendered 
almost  unintelligible  to  the  multitude,  to  whom  it  was  par- 
ticularly preached. 

The  page  of  history  furnishes  conclusive  testimony  of 
the  ignorance,  into  which  all  ranks  of  society  so  evidently 
relapsed,  from  the  commencement  of  this  period.  Many 
bishops  and  the  inferior  clergy,  being  incapable  to  compose: 
their  own  sermons,  read  a  collection  of  Homilies,  made  for 
that  purpose  ;  and  those  who  could  write  exhortations,  or 
the  biographies  of  the  saints,  were  considered  as  men  of 
great  erudition.  So  destitute  of  knowledge  and  true  reli- 
gion was  the  multitude,  that  in  the  East  they  held  those 
religious  fanatics,  the  Stilites,  or  Pillar  Saints,  in  the 
highest  veneration;  and  all  without  exception  tamely  sub- 
mitted to  an  enormous  burden  of  ceremonies,  and  the  pri- 
vate confessions  to  priests,  as  now  for  the  first  time  intro- 
duced by  Leo  the  Great.  This  dark  cloud  of  ignorance 
and  superstition,  which  already  obstructed  every  perspi- 
cuous view  of  heaven,  was  yet  greatly  increased  by  those 
swarms  of  monks  and  holy  virgins,  who  hitherto  had  fol- 
lowed the  rules  of  Augustine,  Basil,  Antony,  Athenasiua 
and  Pachomius,  and  were  now  since  A.  D.  529,  by  a 
strange  enthusiasm,  all  absorbed  by  the  Benedictine  order* 
These  cloistered  idlers,  who  had  retired  from  the  world  on 
account  of  some  sore  disappointments  in  love,  riches  and 
honour,  or  from  misconceptions  of  piety,  were  by  their 
manner  of  life  prejudicial  to  genuine  Christianity.  But 
in  addition  to  this,  they  likewise  excited  a  most  ardent  de- 
sire for  the  relics  of  saints  and  martyrs,  and  the  antiquities 
of  the  Holy  land ;  which,  as  it  proves  the  stupid  devotion 


IV.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  522— TO  572.     23S 

of  a  deluded  multitude,  afforded  the  monks  immense  riches, 
who  sold  them  in  every  country  of  Christendom,  by  recit- 
ing lying  wonders  which  these  relics  should  have  per- 
formed. 

Thus  the  gospel  of  Christ*  the  source  of  all  evangelical 
light  and  knowledge  was  smitten,  by  crushing  letters  and 
philosophy  in  the  West,  banishing  them  in  a  great  mea- 
sure from  the  seminaries  in  the  East,  and  by  introducing 
superstition.  The  moon,  or  Christian  worship  was  eclips- 
ed, by  a  cloud  of  human  rites  and  ceremonies,  through 
which  its  primitive  simplicity  was  no  longer  visible.  The 
stars,  or  ministers  of  the  gospel  lost  one  third  part  of  their 
former  lustre  in  faith,  in  spirit,  in  assiduity  and  usefulness. 
The  day  of  vital  religion  and  practical  piety  was  darken- 
ed, and  the  light  of  the  Church  consisting  in  good  and  ac- 
ceptable works  to  God,  obscured  by  self-righteousness  and 
superstitious  institutions.  The  night,  or  religious  state  of 
the  Jews  under  the  moonlight  of  their  ceremonial  law,  was 
equally  effected  by  this  judgment;  and  could  no  longer 
afford  that  degree  of  faith,  hope  and  confidence,  necessary 
to  dissipate  the  gloom  of  doubt  and  despair,  arising  from 
the  state  of  the  world  in  those  days.  Also  this  remnant  of 
the  Old  Testament  Church,  was  oppressed  by  great  ca- 
lamities during  this  period,  both  in  the  Roman  empire  and 
in  the  East,  towards  the  dissolution  of  the  Persian  monar- 
chy, under  the  reign  of  Cabades  and  Chosroes.  They  ap- 
pear to  have  yet  been  in  a  prosperous  condition,  when  the 
Talmud  of  Babylon  was  completed  A.  D.  500,  and  sealed 
505  ;*.  and  the  dignity  of  Prince  of  the  Jews,  or  the  title 
of  Aechmalotarcha,  was  taken  from  Rab  Pachra  and  con- 
ferred on  Mar  Eutra,  by  the  favour  of  the  Persian  king. 
But  about  the  year  522  the  Persians  commenced  a  dread- 

*  For  the  confirmation  of  these  dates,  Bengelius  refers  to  the  bock- 
Seder  olam  zuta,  and  to  the  book  Juchasin.    See  also  Eichhorn's  Einlei, 
tung  in  V.  T. 

g  g 


234     IV.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  522— TO  572. 

fuh  persecution  against  the  Jews,  by  which  they  were  al- 
most totally  extirpated.  Mar  Rab  Isaac,  president  of  the 
academy,  and  Mar  Eutra,  were  killed,  and  the  house  of 
David  fled.  A.  D.  540,  all  their  academies  were  barred, 
and  so  great  was  the  oppression,  that  they  could  not  elect 
another  president  for  50  years.  R.  Chanan  was  the  first, 
A.  D.  589,  in  whom  commenced  the  line  of  Rabbies,  or 
Jewish  doctors,  called  geonim,  or  excellencies.  By  these 
means  also  the  night,  or  the  Jewish  Church,  shone  not  for 
a  third  part  of  it.  And  thus  this  deluded  people,  by  their 
assiduity  and  obstinacy  in  collecting  and  sealing  the  Tal- 
mud, assisted  their  enemies  in  depriving  themselves  of 
those  celestial  rays  of  light,  which  would  yet  have  diffused 
a  third  part  of  Divine  knowledge  and  comfort  over  their 
shadowy  path  of  life,  for  their  final  recovery. 

Of  these  heavenly  luminaries  it  is  said,  they  were  smitten. 
The  original  7rA>j??&>,  (whence  ttAjj^jj,  a  plague,  a  tor- 
ment) is  often  made  choice  of  by  the  lxx.  interp*  ^ters  to 
signify  i"  take  hurt,  2  Sam.  xi.  15.  become  lame,  2  Sam. 
iv.  4.  may  be  overcome,  Islumb.  xxii.  6.  and  does  not  ap- 
pear to  indicate  an  ordinary  eclipse  according  to  the  course 
of  nature.  Bengelius  explains  it  by  the  Jewish  expression 
likkuth,  percussio,  which  they  used  to  signify  a  common 
eclipse  of  the  sun  or  moon  ;  but  to  me,  this  general  eclipse 
of  all  the  heavenly  bodies  points  out  a  course  of  retributive' 
measures,  by  the  extraordinary  and  sudden  interference  of 
a  superior  power,  different  from  the  natural  train  of  events. 
Thus  both  Pagans,  Christians,  and  Jews  seemed  united, 
by  a  parity  of  Divine  judgments,  to  effect  the  same  object, 
though  from  very  different  motives,  and  with  various  de- 
signs. Ezek.  xxxii.  8.  All  the  bright  lights  of  heaven 
will  I  make  dark  over  thee,  and  set  darkness  upon  thy 
land,  saitli  the  Lord  God» 


PREPARATORY  YISION.  £35 

FIRST  INTERVAL  OB  FIFTY  YEARS. 

.#  preparatory  vision  to  the  subsequent  two  trumpets. 

Verse  13.  And  I  beheld,  and  heard  an  angel  flying  through 
the  midst  of  heaven,  saying  with  a  loud  voice, 
woe,  woe,  woe  to  the  inhabiters  of  the  earth,  by 
reason  of  the  other  voices  of  the  trumpets  of  the 
three  angels,  which  are  yet  to  sound. 
The  three  last  trumpets  are  in  a  particular  manner,  dis- 
tinguished from  the  preceding:  first,  by  being  foretold  as 
to  their  important  contents ;  secondly,  by  being  termed 
wo-trumpets ;    and    thirdly,    by    having    extraordinary 
periods  of  time  annexed  to  them,  by  which  their  calamities 
are  limited.     Though  both  the  Church  and  the  Roman 
empire  had  been  sadly  afflicted  under  the  sound  of  the  for- 
mer, yet  those  distresses  are  not  called  woes ;  which  may 
indicate,  that  the  greatest,  and  by  far  the  most  poignant 
calamities  were  now  to  follow  in  consecution,  before  the 
mystery  of  God  could  be  accomplished. 

St.  John  beheld,  and  heard  an  angel  flying  through  the 
midst  of  heaven.  The  Vulgate,  and  most  ancient  versions 
read  'Atros  here,  an  eagle,  instead  of  "AyyiKos,  an  angel ; 
and  both  Bengelius  and  Griesbach  prefer  this  reading,  as 
being  found  in  the  most  ancient  and  best  copies.  It  is  a 
customary  figure  in  the  Sacred  Scripture,  to  represent  the 
children  of  God  by  the  symbols  of  eagles,  to  denote  their 
heavenly  dispositions,  and  contempt  of  the  world,  Isaiah 
xl.  31.  Ps.  ciii.  5.  and  their  sagacity  to  espy  danger,  and 
penetrate  into  the  deep  councils  of  God.  But  this  eagle 
seemg  to  designate  the  zealous  and  affectionate  testimony 
of  faithful  ministers,  concerning  the  corrupt  state  of  the 
Church,  and  the  approaching  judgments  of  these  woes, 
prior  to  the  commencement  of  the  fifth  trumpet ;  which 
they  bore  in  all  their  ministerial  labours  with  peculiar  en- 
ergy and  effect,  by  means  of  a  Divine  animation.    How- 


236  PREPARATORY  VISION. 

ever,  the  loud  voice  of  this  eagle  seems  to  have  a  particular 
reference  to  those,  who  wrote  on  the  Apocalypse  at  that 
time,  and  thus  made  their  voice  echo  through  the  midst  of 
the  Church,  and  to  distant  countries. 

This  awful  denunciation,  wo,  wo,  wo,  is  made  to  the  in- 
habiters  of  the  earth,  which  expression  comprises  all  the 
countries  formerly  in  the  power  of  the  Romans,  whether 
their  inhabitants  were  Christians,  Jews  or  Heathens; 
though  with  this  distinction,  that  these  calamities  would 
chiefly  affect  the  earthly-minded,'  who  only  live  to  enjoy 
this  world.  Such  an  earnest  and  Divine  declaration  would 
surely  indicate  that  the  happiness,  the  lives  and  salvation 
of  millions  are  concerned  in  the  accomplishment  of  these 
woes  j  the  destructive  consequences  of  which  on  the  pros- 
perity of  Zion,  have  been  experienced  even  to  the  present 
century. 

These  woes  answer  to  ]the  following  trumpets,  and  pre- 
dicting the  peculiarly  distressing  nature  of  their  contents, 
seem  to  have  a  more  particular  relation  to  the  extraordi- 
nary numbers,   annexed  to  the  ordinary  periods  of  the 
trumpets,  by  which  their  commencement  and  duration 
within  the  limits  of  the  Church,  are  circumscribed.     The 
trumpets  themselves  comprise  a  much  larger  scope  than 
the  woes,  and  have  a  more  protracted  time  of  continuance  j 
since  they  require  the  addition  of  both  prophetic  numbers, 
for  their  completion.     Hence  the  woe  under  each  trumpet 
may  begin  sooner,  or  later,  with  the  time  of  that  trumpet, 
but  can  never  exceed  that  period.   My  computation  always 
determines  the  commencement  of  each  trumpet  with  accu- 
racy, and  the  time  when  these  woes  cease  in  the  Churth, 
but  not  the  duration  of  these  judgments  among  the  Pagan 
nations  of  the  earth.     They  are  termed  woes,  oniy  in  re- 
gard to  their  effects  on  Christendom,  and  not  with  respect 
to  their  consequences  among  the  Heathen;  where  they 
may  still  continue,  after  they  have  ceased  to  afflict  the 
Church.     Those  remarkable  forms  of  expression,  prefixed 


1'llEPARATORY  VISION.  237 

to  each  woe  :  ch.  viii.  13.  Woe,  woe,  woe;  and  chap.  ix. 
12.  One  woe  is  past ;  and,  behold  there  come  two  woes 
more  hereafter;  and  cli.  xi.  14.  The  second  woe  is  past; 
and,  behold  the  third  woe  cometh  quickly;  require  three  in- 
tervals, one  hefore  each  trumpet,  of  which  the  third  is  much 
shorter  than  the  two  first,  whose  length  must  he  interca- 
lated before  the  periods  of  the  trumpets,  and  can  only  he 
determined  with  certainty  hy  completion.  After  a  scruti- 
nous  and  careful  review  of  the  whole  system,  I  have  adopt- 
ed fifty  years  for  the  two  first  woes,  and  ten  for  the  third. 

And  here  the  great  imperfection  of  most  former  compu- 
tations of  prophetic  time,  appears  self-evident.  The 
learned  Bengelius,  not  having  discovered  the  ordinary 
numhers  in  this  series  of  prophecies,  could  only  commence 
his  computation  from  the  time  of  the  woes  ;  and  left  all  the 
preceding  predictions  to  be  arranged  by  the  ingenuity  of 
man.  The  defenders  of  the  yeaiiy-day  act  more  arbitra- 
rily still.  Some  adopt  seven  periods,  into  which  they  press 
all,  even  the  most  heterogeneous  matter.  Others  rend  the 
whole  prophecy  into  two,  three,  or  four  prophetic  series  ; 
as  a  man  in  a  large  edifice,  having  lost  the  passage  to  the 
gate,  would  breakthrough  the  wall,  to  save  his  honour. 
Thus  they  commence  so  many  new  courses  of  events  from 
necessity,  neglect  to  notice  the  above  intervals  which  the 
text  loudly  calls  for,  and  totally  slight  the  beautiful  inter- 
nal order  of  this  book,  without  the  most  strict  observance 
of  which,  rio  expositor  can  expect  to  succeed. 

This  admirable  intrinsic  order  of  the  Revelation,  di- 
vides the  prophetic  numbers,  at  the  commencement  of  the 
woes,  into  two  distinct  columns.  The  three  woes  join  ex- 
traordinary numbers  to  the  ordinary  prophetic  chronology, 
by  which  their  periods  arc  protracted  above  the  time  of 
ordinary  periods,  and  run  on  in  a  separate  column  for 
themselves.  And  the  ordinary  prophetic  chronology  ex- 
tends itself  by  a  consecution  of  ordinary  periods,  which 
point  out  the  lineage  of  the  Church  in  a  parallel  column. 
Both  columns  run  on  to  the  commencement  of  the  third 


2S8  PREPARATORY  VISION 

woe;  where  they  determine  the  exact  dates  of  all  the  spe- 
cial lines,  into  which  the  whole  progressive  system  of  pro- 
phecies branches  out  from  this  point.  These  lines  syn- 
chronize with,  and  run  on  during  the  sound  of  the  seventh 
trumpet,  to  the  completion  of  the  seventh  vial,  and  to  the 
glorious  appearance  of  the  woman  in  the  wilderness,  the 
acknowledged  bride  of  the  Lamb. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


V.  TRUMPET,  ACCOMPXISHED  FROM  A,  D.  622 — TO  751. 

Verse  1.  And  the  fifth  angel  sounded,  and  I  saw  a  star 
fall  from  heaven  unto  the  earth :  and  to  him 
was  given  the  key  of  the  hottomless  pit. 

2.  And  he  opened  the  bottomless  pit;  and  there 
arose  a  smoke  out  of  the  pit,  as  the  smoke  of  a 
great  furnace ;  and  the  sun  and  the  air  were 
darkened  by  reason  of  the  smoke  of  the  pit. 

3.  And  there  came  out  of  the  smoke  locusts  upon 
the  earth  ;  and  unto  them  was  given  power,  as 
the  scorpions  of  the  earth  have  power. 

By  this  prophecy  under  the  fifth  trumpet,  wc  are  in- 
formed of  the  contents  of  thejirst  woe,  as  occasioned  by  the 
locusts,  arising  out  of  the  smoke  from  the  bottomless  pit. 
The  prelate  Berigclius  here  beheld  those  dreadful  calami- 
ties of  the  Jews  in  Persia,  part  of  which  have  been  related 
under  the  fourth  trumpet ;  and  professor  Yung  explains 
this  prediction  as  accomplished  by  the  Crusades  to  the. 
Holy  Land.  Though  I  highly  esteem  the  labours  of  these 
justly  renowned  men,  and  have  pondered  their  arguments 
with  caution  and  solicitude ;  yet  my  mind  has  remained  in- 
controvertibly  attached  to  that  more  ancient  opinion,  of 
referring  these  locusts  to  the  Saracens,  for  the  following 
reasons. 


140    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  551. 

1.  This  prediction  most  evidently  represents  the 
rise  and  successful  establishment  of  a  false  re- 
ligion, by  which  the  gospel  of  Christ,  and  even 
reason  itself  is  obscured  in  certain  countries  $• 
which  was  not  the  case  in  Persia. 

4.  The  locusts  designate  the  origin  of  a  new  power 
in  the  world,  which  had  not  existed  before  the 
opening  of  the  bottomless  pit. 

3.  These  locusts  are  represented  like  invading  ar- 
mies in  inarch,  destroying  every  thing  before 
them ;  which  Avas  not  the  case  with  the  Per- 
sians, who  only  persecuted  the  Jews  at  home  in 
their  own  country.  This  might  however  apply 
to  the  Crusades,  but  their  time  is  by  some  cen- 
turies too  late  for  the  period  of  this  prophecy. 

4.  The  star  had  fallen  upon  the  earth,  the  continent 
of  the  Roman  empire,  where  it  had  not  before 
existed,  and  must  for  this  reason  admit  of  being- 
pointed  out  on  the  page  of  history.  This  char- 
acteristic cannot  b©  identified  in  the  persecu- 
tions of  the  Jews  by  the  Persians  j  nor  will  it 
accord  with  the  crusaders,  all  of  which  were 
citizens  of  countries,  formerly  belonging  to  the 
Romans. 

5.  It  has  been  argued  that  Mahomed  never  was  a 
doctor  or  minister  of  the  Church,  and  could 
therefore  not  be  represented  by  a  star.  To 
which  I  answer :  This  emblem  is  used  in  Scrip- 
ture to  designate  men  of  great  talents,  enter- 
prize  and  usefulness,  both  in  Church  and  state, 
Dan.  viii.  10.  Isa.  xiv.  12.  ch.  li.  16.  ch. 
xlix.  13.  ch.  xliv.  23.  Math.  xxiv.  29.  within 
the  limits  of  Christendom ;  which  may  properly 
be  applied  to  Mahomed,  who  himself  was  ac- 
quainted with  the  gospel,  and  lived  in  Arabia, 
where  Christianity  had  been  preached  to  stated 
Churches  for  centuries. 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751.     241 

But  in  order  to  illustrate  this  point  more  minutely  I 
would  observe,  that  the  regular  clergy  of  the  Church  only, 
are  designated  in  Scripture  by  fixed  stars,  and  by  planets 
which  revolve  in  stated  revolutions  through  their  orbits, 
Isa.  xiv.  13.     Dan.  viii.  10 ;  and  false  teachers  by  new  and 
unusual  comets,  or  wandering  stars,    Jude  v.  13.    Job 
xxxviii.  32.  MAGADOTH,  signa  cozlestia  ;  and  such  a  one 
seems  to  be  intended  in  this  place.   These  comets  become  a 
very  striking  figure  of  false  teachers,  when  considered  un 
der  the  general,  and  more  vulgar  conception  of  them  among 
the  ancient  Asiatics  ;  amongst  whom  Chaldea  appears  to 
have  been  the  cradle  of  astronomy,  and  the  guide  of  public 
opinion  on  that  subject,  for  many  centuries.    The  ancient 
Ma"i    or  wise  men,  at  first  considered  comets  a  sort  of 
erratic  meteors,  of  prodigious  size ;  the  combustible  mat* 
ter  of  which,  had  been  collected  by  certain  demons,  who 
aspiring  to  imitate  the  Gods,   concentrated  it  as  their 
bodies  and  habitations.     Thus  embodied  they  soar  aloft  in 
the  air,  rush  blazing  through  the  vast  ether,  until  they 
consume  themselves  or  disperse.     For  they  believed  all 
heavenly  bodies  animated  by  superior  intelligences,  and 
distinguished  their  excellence,  by  the  different  degrees  of 
splendour  and  magnitude   of    those  luminaries.     When 
therefore  false  teachers  are  represented  by  these  wandering 
stars,  they  are  intimated  as  wicked  men  of  great  talents, 
in  the  garb  of  hypocrisy;  as  Satan  himself  is  transformed 
into  an  angel  of  light.     2  Cor.  xi.  14.     Such  an  erratic 
comet  under  this  conception,  seems  to  be  the  figure  in  the 
language  of  the  apostle.    For  how  could  a  key  be  given  to 
a  star  without  hands  ?  Or  how  could  a  star  open  the  bot- 
tomless pit  by  a  key,  if  it  was  not  considered  animated  by 
an  intelligence  ?  These  are  actions  ascribed  to  a  star,  which 
pre-suppose  an  embodied  mind,  capable  of  reflection. 

Verse  1.  I  saw  a  star  fall.  This  is  not  an  accurate 
translation  of  the  original,  TrsTTTautoT*,  which  is  the  part 
of  the  perf.  pro  perf.  inf.  and  should  have  been  rendered, 

h  h 


242    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751. 

which  had  fallen;  for  St.  John  did  not  see  its  fall,  as  our 
common  version  would  induce  us  to  believe.  The  apostle 
seems  to  have  chosen  this  manner  of  expression,  to  inti- 
mate, xthat  the  actual  fall  of  this  star  happened  prior  to  the 
sounding  of  this  trumpet,  and  should  only  be  regarded  as  a 
preparation,  by  which  this  star  became  qualified,  to  be  the 
instrument  of  this  dreadful  woe.  The  appearance  of  such 
a  star  in  prophetic  writings,  indicates  the  rise,  and  suc- 
cessful elevation  of  a  great  character  ;  and  its  fall,  when 
it  is  not  thereby  extinguished,  and  still  remains  a  star  as 
in  this  passage,  and  ch.  viii.  10.  either  denotes  degrada- 
tion, or  degeneracy  from  virtuous  principles  and  a  course 
of  noble  actions,  into  a  state  of  moral  ruin,  and  a  train  of 
base,  corrupt  and  vile  measures.  Thus  St.  Paul  calls  the 
transgression  of  our  first  parents  7rct^^T«jU*,  a  fall, 
Rom.  v.  15.  17;  and  our  Lord  tells  the  unregenerated  Jews 
'TfAii?  £jc  twv  jtcfrTw  e?T£,  ye  are  from  beneath.  John 
viii.  23. 

All  this  has  been  accomplished  in  the  life  of  Mahomed; 
and  this  prophecy  accords  with  no  other  event  so  fully,  as 
with  the  achievements  of  the  Arabian  impostor.  He  is 
stated  by  history  as  of  illustrious  birth,  and  by  nature  emi- 
nently endowed  with  resolution,  penetration  and  a  most  at- 
tractive eloquence  for  his  undertaking.  Being  brought 
up  to  the  mercantile  employment,  he  espoused  the  widow 
of  a  rich  merchant,  and  pursued  a  successful  commerce  in 
Arabia,  and  the  adjacent  countries,  for  many  years.  In 
his  numerous  journies,  he  became  acquainted  with  many 
nations,  countries,  and  religions,^  more  especially  with 
Jewish  worship,  and  the  gospel  of  Christ,  by  which  his 
mind  appears  to  have  been  illuminated,  and  all  the  powers 
of  his  soul  excited  to  action,  for  the  accomplishment  of 
that  glorious  enterprize,  the  conversion  of  his  countrymen 
from  idolatry,  to  the  knowledge  of  the  true  and  living  God. 
Thus  raised  up  by  Providence,  he  felt  a  strong  impulse, 
and  great  courage,  to  make  vigorous  efforts  for  the  salva- 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.D.  622— TO  751.    243 

tion  of  his  brethren,  and  commenced  his  work  of  reforma- 
tion A.  D.  612  in  Arabia,  with  the  best  intentions.  He 
was  forty  years  of  age,  when  he  publicly  professed  in 
the  city  of  Mecca,  that  God  had  sent  him  to  overthrow 
polytheism  and  idolatry,  and  to  restore  the  religion  of  their 
ancestors,  Abraham  and  Ishmael,  in  its  primitive  purity 
among  them.  In  the  prosecution  of  this  laudable  under- 
taking, he  discovered  a  pious  disposition  to  promote  virtue, 
and  suppress  vice ;  and,  for  the  space  of  twelve  years, 
adopted  no  other  than  just  and  righteous  means,  to  further 
his  great  designs.  He  himself  confessed,  that  he  was  not 
invested  with  compulsatory  power,  and  would  not  grant 
his  followers  any  liberty  beyond  instruction,  persuasion 
and  warning  men  of  their  danger.  So  noble  was  the  dis- 
position of  his  mind,  that  when  he  was  persecuted  in  Mecca, 
he  chose  rather  to  leave  his  native  city,  than  oppose  his 
enemies  by  violent  measures,  which  he  had  in  his  power. 

But  this  flight  of  Mahomed  to  Medina,  which  happened 
A.  D.  62*,  and  its  attending  circumstances,  produced  such 
a  total  change  in  this  recently  good  man ;  that  both  the 
disposition  of  his  mind,  and  the  measures  which  he  adopted 
for  the  accomplishment  of  his  objects,  daily  became  more 
violent,  base  and  impious.  The  star  had  fallen  from  hea- 
ven, and  now  degenerated  into  moral  ruin.  He  projected 
schemes  of  conquest  and  self-aggrandizement,  used  impious 
frauds  to  delude  the  credulous  multitude,  and  even  forged 
celestial  visions  to  confirm  his  authority' and  establish  the 
work  he  had  so  happily  begun.  And  to  complete  the  im- 
posture he  pretended  divine  revelations,  exalted  himself 
above  the  inspired  prophets  and  apostles;  and  even  claimed 
a  superiority  to  Christ  the  Son  of  God ;  demanding  im- 
plicit faith  and  obedience  of  all  his  followers.  All  these 
impious  frauds  and  deceptions,  he  preached  with  a  spirit  of 
religious  phrenzy,  and  with  such  a  flow  of  attractive  elo  ] 
quence,  as  to  silence  all  opposition,  and  excite  a  glow  of 
enthusiastic  devotion  among  all  his  audience. 


244    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751. 

Verse  2,  Jind  he  opened  the  bottomless  pit.  Here  our 
version  falls  short  of  the  sense  of  the  original.  ''aj3u?<tos 
is  a  noun,  and  in  itself  already  signifies  a  gulf  of  infinite 
depth,  the  lowest  part  of  creation  ;  and  <$%k&q  is  an  allu- 
sion to  the  wells  of  the  ancient  Asiatics,  and  means  a  deep 
narrow  opening  into  the  earth,  walled  in  at  the  top,  so  that 
it  may  be  secured  by  a  lock.  In  the  sacred  Scriptures  this 
word  *A0u?? o?,  is  used  to  express  the  unfathomable  depths 
of  creation,  such  as  the  depth  of  the  ocean,  the  atmos- 
phere, the  expansion  of  heaven ;  but  more  especially  the 
great  solitary  desert  of  the  dead,  the  world  of  spirits,  Luke 
viii.  31.  Rom.  x.  7.  Job  xxviii.  14.  Job  xxxviii.  16.  17. 
Habak.  iii.  10  ;  where  demons  are  kept  in  confinement, 
and  the  wicked  cease  from  troubling,  until  the  great  day 
of  judgment.  To  this  abyss  there  is  an  aperture  from  the 
human  soul,  where  the  t^o^ov  tJJ?  y«ve?gw?,  the  wheel  of 
generation,  the  first  source  of  all  thoughts  and  actions  in 
man,  may  be  influenced  by  the  invisible  powers  of  darkness, 
James  iii.  6.  But  this  <p%ioi(>,  in  man,  is  locked,  and  none 
can  open  it.  The  key  is  in  the  hand  of  Providence,  and 
was  given  to  Mahomed,  who  thereby  opened  a  communi- 
cation with  the  invisible  powers  of  the  abyss,  and  received 
assistance  from  that  source  to  accomplish  his  purposes. 
This  appears  to  be  the  most  natural  illustration  of  these 
important  figures,  perfectly  warranted  by  the  extraordi- 
narj  events  in  the  life  of  that  impostor,  which  can  never 
be  explained  as  the  effects  of  a  merely  human  agency,  nor 
yet  attributed  to  the  interposition  of  the  Supreme  Being. 
But  by  considering  the  subject  in  this  point  of  view,  I 
would  not  assert  the  truth  of  magic,  that  men  have  power, 
except  by  a  Divine  judgment,  to  form  a  connexion  with 
demons  and  departed  souls,  for  the  purpose  of  producing 
unnatural  and  surprising  effects.  Mahomed  sought  this 
forbidden  intercourse,  as  he  himself  partly  confessed,  in 
the  cave  of  Mount  Hara,  near  Mecca,  in  order  to  accom- 
plish his  ambitious  projects,  against  the  opposition  of  his 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751.     245 

enemies.  He  obtained  it  by  a  Divine  judgment,  on  account 
of  his  relapse  from  grace,  not  only  into  a  state  of  sin,  but 
even  beneath  the  hopes  of  recovery  by  ordinary  means. 
The  Divine  permission  of  this  intercourse,  and  the  conse- 
quent successful  practice  of  those  impious  frauds,  feats  and 
stratagems,  is  this  key  to  the  bottomless  pit ;  and  the  rise 
and  successful  propagation  of  Mahomedism  is  signified  by 
the  smoke,  which  darkened  the  sun,  the  gospel  of  Christ- 
in  many  Christian  countries ;  and  the  air,  i.  e.  reason  it- 
self in  all  his  followers. 

By  the  efficiency  of  this  smoke,  ascending  in  thick  vollies 
through  the  air,  his  reputation  and  authority  soon  extend- 
ed themselves  among  the  ignorant  multitude,  and  daily  in- 
creased in  his  native  country.  The  crowd  of  his  admirers 
was  now  seized  by  the  fire  of  a  religious  fanaticism  and 
enthusiastic  valour,  which  justified  the  most  sanguine 
hopes,  of  seeing  all  his  wishes  realized.  No  sooner  did  he 
observe  these  propitious  symptoms,  than  he  began  to  plan 
military  expeditions,  and  projected  schemes  of  attacks, 
which  were  instantly  executed  against  the  opposers  of  his 
pretensions.  He  began  by  making  successful  sallies  for 
ravage  and  plunder,  in  which  his  small  parties  showed 
that  kind  of  high  courage  and  puissance,  which  in  similar 
circumstances,  proved  invincible.  Elated  by  his  good  for- 
tune, Mahomed  now  collected  an  army,  took  his  native 
city  by  assault,  vanquished  tribe  after  tribe  of  his  own  na- 
tion, rendered  himself  terrible  by  invasions  into  the  adja- 
cent countries,  and  died  A.  D.  632  sole  lord  of  Arabia, 
having  laid  the  basis  of  a  new  religion,  and  a  new  empire 
in  the  world. 

The  spirit  of  the  nation  was  now  roused  to  a  furious  in- 
trepidity, and  excited  to  the  performance  of  great  enter- 
prises. His  followers  led  immense  armies  into  the  neigh- 
bouring kingdoms,  and  into  almost  all  the  countries  of  the 
ancient  Roman  empire;  just  as  the  natural  locusts,  at 
times,  come  forth  from  Arabia  by  innumerable  hosts  and 


246    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751. 

spread  into  the  adjacent  countries,  where  they  devour  all 
vegetables,  and  often  produce  great  distress.  Exod.  x.  13. 
For  this  reason  the  Arabians  are  often  compared  to  locusts, 
and  called  by  this  name  also  in  other  parts  of  Scripture, 
Jud.  vi.  5.  ch.  vii.  12  ;  and  large  invading  armies  are  re- 
presented by  this  threatening  figure,  on  account  of  their 
sudden  and  ruinous  incursions,  Jer.  xlvi.  23.  chap.  li.  14. 
They  conquered  Syria  and  Palestine  with  the  holy  city 
A.  D.  634 ;  Phoenicia,  Mesopotamia,  Armenia  and  the 
great  Persian  empire  from  A.  D.  636 — to  637 ;  and  pene- 
trate into  the  East  of  Asia,  even  beyond  the  river  Ghihoon 
into  Samarkand.  They  also  extended  their  conquests  into 
Africa,  and  subdued  the  islands  of  Cyprus,  Rhodes,  Sicily 
and  Leuca  The  African  Moors,  who,  after  being  van- 
quished, had  also  received  the  Mahomedan  religion,  pass- 
ed with  their  fleets  into  Europe,  where  they  conquered 
Sardinia,  A.  D.  711,  and  the  whole  kingdom  of  Spain 
A.  D.  713.  Thus  in  less  than  a  hundred  years  after  the 
death  of  Mahomed,  the  Saracens  had  extended  their  terri- 
tories and  dominion  into  three  parts  of  the  world,  Asia, 
Africa  and  Europe,  where  they  on  all  sides  opposed  the 
progress  of  Christianity,  and  in  many  places  effected  the 
ruin  of  the  Church.  Their  rapid  course  was  however 
checked  by  Charles  MarteVs  victory,  near  Tours,  A.  D. 
734,  in  which  bloody  engagement  they  lost  370,000  men, 
with  the  general  at  their  head.  This  signal  triumph  on 
the  part  of  Christendom,  seems  to  have  given  a  reverse  of 
fortune  to  the  Mahomedan  invasions ;  at  least  they  soon 
discontinued  their  inroads  into  other  countries,  and  their 
power  ceased  to  be  destructive  to  the  Church  of  Christ. 

Verse  3.  As  the  scorpions  of  the  earth  have  power. 
There  are  three  kinds  of  scorpions ;  the  sea  scorpions  arc 
a  kind  of  fish,  the  scorpions  of  the  air  are  winged,  the 
scorpions  of  the  earth  are  of  the  size  and  form  of  a  crab, 
with  stings  in  their  tails,  which  are  always  prepared  to  do 
mischief,  and  are  found  in  Italy,  Africa,  and  the  meridional 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751.    247 

deserts  of  Asia  and  America.  These  last  are  intended 
here,  as  an  emblem  of  a  treacherous,  furious  people,  who 
unexpectedly  fall  on  others,  and  inflict  tormenting  wounds 
by  surprise ;  which  perfectly  corresponds  with  the  charac- 
ter of  the  Saracens,  and  their  descendants,  the  Arabians. 
The  only  alternative  to  escape  misery,  was  to  fly  from 
their  presence. 

Verse  4.  And  it  was  commanded  them  that  they  should 
not  hurt  the  grass  of  the  earth,  neither  any 
green  thing,  neither  any  tree ;  but  only  those 
men  which  have  not  the  seal  of  God  in  their 
foreheads. 

5.  And  to  them  it  was  given  that  they  should  not 
kill  them,  but  that  they  should  be  tormented 
five  months  :  and  their  torment  was  as  the  tor- 
ment of  a  scorpion,  when  he  striketh  a  man. 

6.  And  in  those  days  shall  men  seek  death,  and 
shall  not  find  it;  and  shall  desire  to  die;  and 
death  shall  flee  from  them. 

Here  St.  John  begins  to  comfort  the  true  Christians  of 
those  days,  who  had  the  seal  of  Almighty  God  in  their 
foreheads,  by  an  assurance,  that  these  calamities  were 
limited  by  Providence  to  a  certain  degree,  beyond  which 
they  should  not  rise.  The  grass  of  the  earth,  green  things, 
and  trees,  must  here  be  taken  in  a  figurative  sense,  as  in 
ch.  viii.  7.  and  in  a  comparative  estimate  with  the  locusts. 
They  signify  the  sanctified  believers,  among  the  different 
classes  of  persons  in  the  Church,  which  according  to  .the 
religious  fanaticism  of  the  Mahometans,  would  otherwise 
have  become  their  first  prey ;  as  all  green  things  are  the 
natural  sustenance  of  locusts,  and  what  they  mostly  desire. 
These,  they  were  commanded  not  to  hurt.  This  word 
'A<JWw,  to  hurt,  also  signifies,  to  infringe  on  another's 
rights  and  privileges,  Acts  xxv.  10.  2  Cor.  vii.  2.  Gal. 
iv.  12.  and,  I  presume  -this  to  be  the  true  acceptation  in 
this  place.    The  Saracens,  for  many  years  treated  the 


248     V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  651. 

private  Christians,  whom  they  found  not  in  arms  to  oppose 
them,  and  especially  those  who  rejected  the  councils  of 
Ephesus  and  Chalcedon,  with  the  utmost  lenity  and  indul- 
gence, and  granted  them  perfect  religious  liberty ;  whilst 
on  the  contrary  they  reduced  the  Pagans  to  slavery,  if 
they  refused  to  become  Mahomedans.  Mahomed  prohi- 
bited his  followers  by  a  Testamentary  Diploma  from  dis- 
turbing the  Christians  in  his  dominions  in  the  enjoyment 
of  their  religion,  or  temporal  possessions,  the  genuineness 
of  which  the  Mahomedans  unanimously  acknowledge. 
This  testament  has  greatly  mollified  the  rigour  of  their 
measures,  and  assisted  to  accomplish  this  prophecy,  by 
interdicting  all  public  persecutions  against  the  Church  of 
Christ. 

As  the  seal  of  God  in  their  foreheads,  here  designates 
the  Christian  character  of  true  believers,  or  their  publicly 
confessed  and  acknowledged  membership  in  the  Church 
of  Christ ;  so  those  wanting  the  seal  of  God,  are  the  Pa- 
gans, and  the  unconverted  Christian  inhabitants  of  the 
Roman  empire.  The  first  would  have  been  the  principal 
sufferers,  during  the  ravages  of  these  locusts,  but  were  re- 
strained by  Providence  from  public  persecution  or  martyr- 
dom ;  and  in  regard  to  the  last,  Ufoy  (I|*?jV)  they  had 
only  received  authority  to  torment,  and  not  to  overwhelm 
wfth  utter  destruction.  This  word  j3<x?av/£ft>,  to  torment, 
however  often  signifies  to  explore,  to  extort  by  numerous 
torments,  and  is  used  to  express  the  pains  of  the  body,  and 
the  anguish  of  souls  in  hell,  Luke  xvi.  23 ;  thus  indicating 
the  greatest  degree  of  misery  human  nature  can  sustain. 
Such  has  actually  been  the  deplorable  condition  of  mil- 
lions, during  the  Mahomedan  invasions.  Elated  by  suc- 
cess and  prosperity,  these  imperious  lords  of  the  East, 
treated  the  Heathens  with  the  greatest  severity,  and  at 
last,  many  Christians  without  moderation  They  made 
them  feel  all  the  rigour  of  despotism,  by  loading  them 
with  insupportable  taxes,  and  obliging  them,  like  slaves, 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751.    240 

to  suffer  a  variety  of  vexatious  and  oppressive  measures* 
Fines,  confiscation  of  goods  and  banishments  were  the  or- 
der  of  the  day,  whilst  those  who  remained  inflexibly  firm 
to  their  Pagan  idolatry,  were  maimed  and  tormented  in  va- 
rious  ways.  When  the  kingdom  of  Spain  A.  D.  713,  fell 
a  prey  to  their  invasions,  the  sufferings  of  the  Church 
were  incomparably  smaller,  than  the  torments  of  the  vota- 
resses of  chastity  in  the  power  of  those  brutal  violators. 
Thousands  would  have  preferred  death,  to  the  pangs  of 
such  a  vile  defloration  of  their  families,  or  to  being  made 
the  subservient  victims  of  such  violence  in  their  own  per- 
sons. And  yet,  this  lamentable  state  of  sufferings  prevail- 
ed for  many  years,  more  or  less,  in  every  country  con- 
quered  by  the  Saracens,  without  amelioration  or  redress* 
These  poignant  distresses  are  here  compared  to  the  tor- 
ment, occasioned  by  the  poisonous  stings  of  terrestrial 
scorpions ;  which  is  said  to  consist  in  great  bodily  pain*, 
and  inexpressible  anguish  of  soul,  when  the  poison  con- 
tracts the  heart. 

Verse  7.  And  the  shapes  of  the  locusts  were  like  unto 
horses  prepared  unto  battle ;  and  on  their  heads 
were  as  it  were  crowns  like  gold,  and  their 
faces  were  as  the  faces  of  men. 

8.  And  they  .had  hair  as  the  hair  of  Women,  and 
their  teeth  were  as  the  teeth  of  lions. 

9.  And  they  had  breastplates,  as  it  were  breast- 
plates of  iron ;  and  the  sound  of  their  wings 
was  as  the  sound  of  chariots  of  many  horses 
running  to  battle. 

10.  And  they  had  tails  like  unto  scorpions ;  and 
there  were  stings  in  their  tails :  and  their  power 
was  to  hurt  men  five  months. 

This  description  of  locusts,  contains  the  distinguishing 
characteristics  of  these  invading  hosts,  which  so  perfectly 
accord  with  no  other  nation,  as  with  the  Saracens*  They 
are  here  delineated  as  vigorous  and  swift,  Uke  horses  of 

i  i 


250    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751. 

war;  with  crowns,  or  turbans,  like  geld,  as  Laving  enriched 
themselves  by  their  invasions.  Their  faces  were  like  the 
faces  of  men,  by  which  are  indicated  their  humane  preten- 
sions, of  waging  all  their  wars  for  the  purpose  of  bringing 
the  nations  of  the  world  to  the  knowledge  of  the  only  true 
God,  and  to  the  enjoyment  of  happiness.  They  had  the 
hair  of  women,  a  strong  desire  after  carnal  pleasures  j 
teeth  of  lions,  were  much  inclined  to  rage  and  plunder ; 
breastplates  of  iron,  great  courage  in  war ;  high  sounding 
wings,  a  boisterous  and  terrible  behaviour  during  their  in- 
vasions ;  tails  like  scorpions,  subjecting  the  vanquished  to 
great  oppression  and  innumerable  sufferings,  by  the  execu- 
tion of  rigorous  and  inhuman  laws. 

Verse  11.  And  they  had  a  king  over  them,  which  is  the 
angel  of  the  bottomless  pit,  whose  name  in  the 
Hebrew  tongue  is  Abaddon,  but  in  the  Greek 
tongue  hath  his  name  Apollyon. 
Natural  locusts  have  no  king,  Prov.  xxx.  27.  but  these 
Saracens  had  a  powerful  leader,  the  angel  of  the  bottom- 
less pit.  According  to  the  tenets  of  the  Chaldean  philoso- 
phy, and  the  generally  received  opinion  of  the  ancient 
Asiatics,  who  assigned  a  ruling  angel  for  every  important 
enterprize,  this  was  a  mighty  being  from  the  regions  of 
the  abyss,  by  whom  they  were  rallied,  urged  them  on,  and 
directing  all  their  movements.  He  is  designedly  mention- 
ed by  both  his  Hebrew  and  Greek  name,  in  order  to  inti- 
mate, that  he  would  bring  great  calamities  on  those,  who 
worship  in  both  these  languages ;  and  by  his  own  name, 
to  distinguish  him  from  Satan,  who  has  his  angels,  and  is 
never  called  an  angel  himself.  Rev.  xii.  7.  Math.  xxv.  41." 
Some  expositors  have  considered  the  fallen  star  in  the  be- 
ginning of  this  chapter,  and  this  Jlpollijon  to  denote  the 
same  object ;  but  they  are  evidently  two  distinct  beings— 
Apollyon  the  cause,  and  Mahomed  his  instrument.  Both 
names,  Abaddon  and  Apollyon,  signify  a  destroyer,  and 
jnay  be  regarded  as  an  opposition  to  the  r.araes  of  oirr 


V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  62a— TO  751.    251 

Lord.  His  name  Abaddon,  being  his  chief  character  by 
the  instrumentality  of  Mahomed,  as  opposed  to  our  Sa- 
viour's name  Jesus  j  and  Apollyon,  as  directly  adverse  to 
his  name  Christ,  since  Antichrist  is  termed  0  v*o«-  r^g 
diruhii&g,  the  son  of  perdition,  the  son  of  Apollyon. 
2  Thess.  ii.  3. 

Their  power  teas  to  hurt  men  Jive  months.    This  is  a 
prophetic  number,  which  according  to  that  most  probable 
system  of  computation  by  the  pious  and  learned  Bengelius, 
comprises  a  period  of  79 — 1-3  years  of  our  time.  And  here 
is  another  strong  proof,  for  the  justness  and  confirmation 
of  my  ordinary  system  of  calculating  this  series  of  pro- 
phecies.   -Bengelius'  system,  though  just  in  itself,  as  re- 
ferring to  the  extraordinary  time  of  particular  predictions, 
stands  unconnected  with  the  preceding  numbers,  and  thus 
loudly  calls  for  the  ordinary  series  of  calculation,  to  deter- 
mine the  commencement  of  his  periods,  which  are  uncon- 
nected links  in  his  chain  of  computation,  and  only  settled 
a  posteriori,  from  the  page  of  history.     The  ordinary  sys- 
tem of  calculation  refers  to  the  periods  of  the  trumpets, 
and  the  extraordinary  numbers  comprise  the  time  of  the 
woes,  as  a  protraction  of  those  periods ;  for  the  calamities 
under  the  trumpets  are^  called  woes,  from  that  time,  and  so 
Jong  only  as  they  materially  affect  the  Church.    If  we  now 
add  the  ordinary  time  of  the  trumpet,  50  years,  and  the 
extraordinary  time  of  this  woe,  79 — 1-3  to  the  preceding 
chain  A.  D.  622,  we  have  the  year  A.  D.  751,  when  the 
power  of  the  Saracens  ceased  to  endanger  the  existence 
and  prosperity  of  the  Church  in  their  dominions,  and  they 
made  no  more  excursions  of  consequence.     At  least,  the 
fury  of  their  religious  fanaticism  had  abated,  when  the  city 
of  Bagdad  was  built  A.  D.  762,  and  their  daring  intrepidity 
had  settled  itself  into  a  more  rational  calm,  where  they  held 
the  sceptre.     In  Spain  and  Portugal  at  least,  the  Christians 
in  a  few  years  regained  Gallicia,  Leon,  a  part  of  Ohl  Cas- 
tile and  of  Portugal,  and  since  778,  also  Navarre  and  Ca- 


£52    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  622— TO  751. 

talonia,  which  they  kept  in  constant  possession ;  while  in 
other  parts,  they  met  with  no  considerable  loss  from  this 
time. 


SECOND    INTERVAL   OF   FIFTY    YEARS. 

Verse  12,  One  woe  is  past ;  andy  behold,  there  come  two 
woes  more  hereafter. 
To  facilitate  a  more  perfect  knowledge  of  these  prophe- 
cies, the  Church  of  Christ  should  be  considered  the  centre 
of  the  prophetic  horizon  in  these  visions,  and  the  most  en- 
dearing object  of  divine  solicitude,  to  which  every  predic- 
tion has  a  principal  reference.  This  is  more  particularly 
necessary  in  regard  to  these  woes,  and  the  three  preceding 
intervals,  in  which  the  woes  are  anticipated.  The  word 
etTr^ASgv,  it  is  past,  gone  by,  expired,  does  not  necessarily 
require,  that  the  calamities  of  the  former  woe  must  have 
totally  ceased  every  where,  even  among  Pagan  nations.  It 
only  informs  us  of  a  pause,  during  which  these  poignant 
distresses  to  the  amount  of  a  woe,  shall  cease  to  affect  the 
Church  in  essential  parts,  and  no  new  enemy  suffered  to 
rise  up  against  her,  and  cause  fresh  disasters  within  her 
pales.  This,  in  my  opinion,  is  an  elucidation  of  the  true 
sense  here,  and  ch.  xi.  14.  where  the  third  pause  or  cessa- 
tion is  intimated,  by  a  similar  form  of  expression. 


Vt.  TRUMPET  ACCOMPLISHED  FROM  A.  D.  801 — TO  1062. 

Vere  13.  And  the  sixth  angel  sounded,  and  I  heard  a  voice 
from  the  four  horns  of  the  golden  altar  which  is 
before  God, 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1062.    253 

14.  Saying  to  the  sixth  angel  which  had  the  trum- 
pet, Loose  the  four  angels  which  are  bound  in 
the  river  Euphrates. 

15.  And  the  four  angels  were  loosed,  which  were 
prepared  for  an  hour,  and  a  day,  and  a  month, 
and  a  year,  for  to  slay  the  third  part  of  men. 

16.  And  the  number  of  the  army  of  the  horsemen 
were  two  hundred  thousand  thousand :  and  I 
heard  the  number  of  them. 

This  prophecy  refers  to  an  event  of  such  importance 
and  distinction,  that  it  cannot  be  considered  a  difficult 
task,  to  point  out  its  accomplishment  with  perfect  assu- 
rance, on  the  ensanguined  page  of  history.  The  astonish- 
ing number  of  horsemen  here  mentioned,  at  once  desig- 
nates Asia  as  the  theatre  of  these  murderous  armies ; 
whose  military  forces,  at  all  times,  consisted  chiefly  of  ca- 
valry. But  they  would  not  have  obtained  a  place  in  this 
prophetic  journal  of  Providence,  if  they  had  only  been  the 
scourge  of  Pagans,  and  not  also  brought  great  distresses 
on  the  Church  of  Christ.  This  trumpet  proclaims  the 
judgments  of  God  against  the  nations  of  Jlsia,  and  more 
especially  against  the  great  empire  of  the  Saracens  upon 
the  waters  of  Euphrates,  and  the  Asiatic  provinces  of  the 
Grecian  empire.  In  all  these  countries  Christianity  had 
made  great  progress ;  and  though  many  had  been  induced 
by  the  Saracens  to  apostatize,  and  turn  Mahomedansj  yet 
there  were  many  thousand  Christians  living  among  the 
Heathens  in  those  countries,  whose  lives  and  fortunes 
were  essentially  involved  in  their  fate.  St.  John  seems  to 
consider  these  judgments  as  a  further  effect  of  the  efficacy 
of  the  prayers  of  the  saints,  chap.  viii.  3. 4. ;  to  indicate 
which,  he  heard  a  voice  from  the  four  horns  of  the  same 
altar,  upon  which  the  prayers  of  all  saints  had  been  placed. 
These  four  angels  are  neither  four  great  conquerors,  nor 
even  so  many  rulers  of  nations.  Though  of  universal  ce- 
lebrity, yet  these  legitimate  and  ingenious  cut-throaty 


254  VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1062. 

Called  most  consummate  heroes,  are  nevertheless  far  too 
insignificant  to  be  thus  represented,  even  by  evil  spirits 
like  these.  I  conceive  them,  to  be  the  military  geniuses 
of  those  four  great  and  warlike  nations :  The-  Arabians, 
the  Turks,  the  Tartars  and  the  Persians,  who  during  this 
period  rent  the  empire  of  the  Saracens  into  many  distinct 
kingdoms  and  principalities  where  they  now  established 
dynasties  for  themselves.  Though  all  these  nations  re- 
ceived the  Mahomedan  religion,  and  united  into  one  reli- 
gious community ;  they  yet  waged  tremendous  and  most 
bloody  wars  among  themselves,  and  in  other  countries, 
where  the  Christians  were  largely  involved  in  these  revo- 
lutionary contests.  Perhaps  there  also  were  invisible 
powers  of  darkness  engaged,  in  the  performance  of  this 
sanguinary  and  dreadful  tragedy,  in  which  so  many  tribes 
and  nations,  disputed  with  each  other  for  centuries,  to  gain 
the  government  of  the  world.  For  a  similar  case,  I  would 
refer  the  reader  to  Dan.  x.  20.  and  ch.  xi.  1.  where  the 
fatal  plans  and  machinations  of  evil  spirits,  have  been 
overruled  by  the  powerful  exertions  of  good  angels,  and 
the  people  of  God  preserved  from  impending  destruction. 
2  Kings  vi.  15.  17.  These  four  angels  of  war  had  been 
bound  upon  the  great  river  Euphrates.  That  is,  Provi- 
dence prohibited  them  from  bursting  the  barrier  of  na- 
tions, hitherto  preserved  among  the  various  and  numerous 
tribes  of  inhabitants  upon  the  vast  banks  of  the  waters  of 
that  noted  river ;  who  otherwise,  long  before  this  time, 
would  have  been  willing  to  execute  their  revolutionary 
purposes  from  that  part  of  the  world. 

The  ordinary  period  of  this  trumpet  is  protracted  by 
the  following  expressions  of  time :  which  were  prepared 
for  an  hour,  and  a  day,  and  a  month,  and  a  year.  If  unne- 
cessary quibbles  are  avoided  in  exploring  the  true  sense  of 
these  words,  they  will  be  found  to  contain  the  extraordi- 
nary numbers,  by  which  the  spirit  of  prophecy  has  here 
determined  the  commencement  and  different  degrees  df 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1062.    255 

this  woe ;  or  that  measure  of  time  in  which  this  woe  is  to 
be  accomplished.  During  the  time  of  a  prophetic  hour, 
day,  month,  and  year,  these  four  nations  would  all  be  en- 
gaged upon  the  stage  of  action  in  succession,  and  accom- 
plish the  judgments  of  God  here  intimated ;  but  after  the 
expiration  of  this  prophetic  term,  the  calamities  occasion- 
ed by  the  wars  of  these  nations,  though  they  might  con- 
tinue with  great  severity  in  Pagan  countries,  would  no 
longer  amount  to  the  measure  of  u  woe  in  Christendom. 
According  to  the  system  of  computation,  most  assuredly 
displayed  under  the  direction  of  Providence,  by  the  pious 
prelate  Bengelius,  the  sum  total  of -these  prophetic  num- 
bers will  amount  to  212 1  years.  And  no  doubt,  it  requir- 
ed centuries  in  an  ordinary  course  of  Providence,  where 
nothing  is  forced  by  a  miraculous  power,  for  so  many  na- 
tions to  join  into  one  religious  community ;  to  raise  em- 
pires and  kingdoms  upon  the  ruin  of  empires,  and  exalt 
one  nation  to  dominion  and  glory  after  the  other ;  and  to 
bring  so  many  nations  and  armies  upon  the  great  theatre 
of  the  world,  as  would  amount  to  two  hundred  millions  of 
horsemen.  This  amazing  number  JVo  juugiatTg?  pv^im, 
St.  John  supposed,  might  appear  almost  incredible  to  some 
readers,  he  therefore  expressly  affirms,  I  heard  the  num- 
ber of  them.  But1  when  we  consider  the  immense  theatre 
and  periphery  of  these  nations,  and  of  the  Saracen  empire 
at  the  commencement  of  this  period,  upon  which  all  these 
nations  and  tribes  of  nations  were  in  continual  motion,  to 
invade  and  subdue  each  other,  as  the  waves  upon  a  tem- 
pestuous sea;  if  we  credit  the  accounts  given  in  profane 
history,  of  the  astonishing  armies,  and  trains  of  armies, 
which  these  Asiatics  were  accustomed  to  bring  into  the 
fields  of  battle  ;  this  number  will  by  no  means  appear  so 
improbable,  during  a  period  of  262  years,  and  amidst  such 
general  revolutions  in  the  world.  Bajazet  is  said  to  have 
had  an  army  of  fourteen,  and  Tamerlane  of  sixteen  hun- 
dred thousand  men ;  and.  what  amazing  armies  must  Irove 


256    V.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1062. 

been  those  of  Temudschin,  who  often  cut  down  three  and 
four  hundred  thousand  of  his  prisoners  of  war,  in  a  day  ! 
But  this  period  of  212  f  years  only  determines  this  woe, 
and  the  armies  may  be  counted  to  the  destruction  of  these 
dynasties. 

This  trumpet  commences  at  the  close  of  the  second  in- 
terval, called  for  in  the  text,  A.  D.  801.  If  we  now  add 
the  ordinary  time  of  this  trumpet,  h.  e.  50  years,  which 
has  a  more  particular  reference  to  the  preparation  of  the 
angels,  this  second  woe  will  commence  A.  D.  851,  and  ter- 
minate A.  D.  1063;  all  which  perfectly  corresponds  with 
the  dates  of  the  remarkable  events  alluded  to,  on  the  page 
of  profane  history. 

The  empire  of  the  Saracens  had  attained  the  zenith  of 
glory  and  grandeur,  when  the  Khalif  M  Raschid  died  in 
the  beginning  of  this  period,  and  divided  his  vast  do- 
minions among  his  three  sons.  M  Jlmin  obtained  Syria, 
Erak,  Arabia,  Mesopotamia,  Assyria,  Media,  Palestine, 
Egypt,  and  what  we  now  call  the  states  of  Barbary.  M 
Mamun  took  possession  of  Persia,  Kerman,  India,  Kho- 
rasan,  Tabresta,  Zablestan,  and  the  enormous  province  of 
Mawarennahr.  M  Kasem  was  to  govern  Armenia,  Nato- 
lia,  Georgia,  Circassia  and  the  large  countries  along  the 
Black  Sea.  What  an  enormous  empire  in  circumference — 
what  a  stupendous  power,  almost  capable  of  engrossing 
the  whole  earth ,-  and  yet  by  this  division,  the  Khalif  M 
Raschid  laid  the  foundation  for  its  downfall,  and  the  ruin 
of  his  Khalifat  for  ever.  His  three  sons  waged  intestine 
wars  against  each  other,  for  the  right  of  succession ;  and 
the  last  of  them  who  maintained  his  throne,  governed  by 
his  prime  ministers,  with  an  unsteady  hand,  from  813  to 
833.  During  his  reign,  Ibrahim,  one  of  his  governors, 
laid  the  foundation  for  the  government  of  the  Aglabido  at 
Kairwan,  whilst  he  lost  the  Easterly  provinces  by  the  im- 
prudence of  his  general  Taher.  In  short,  the  whole  Kha- 
lifat, from  this  time  gradually  lost  its  bond  of  union  and 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1063.    257 

tliis  once  mighty  fabric  assumed  the  appearance  of  an  an- 
tiquated castle,  tottering  to  ruin.  Hamuli  M  Raschid  was 
the  last  Khalif  who  possessed  this  vast  empire  entire;  and 
a  hundred  years  after  his  death,  his  successors  had  lost  all 
these  countries,  and  merely  retained  a  Papal  power  in  the 
Mahomedan  community ,with  the  city  and  province  of  Bag- 
dad. These  four  nations,  the  Arabians,  the  Turks,  the  Tar- 
tars and  the  Persians,  divided  the  empire  among  themselves, 
established  kingdoms  and  principalities  upon  its  ruins,  by 
immense  wars,  blood  and  slaughter.  As  they  had  all  re- 
ceived Mahomedism,  and  discarded  Polytheism  and  idola- 
try, the  former  religion  of  these  nations ;  they  joined  a  fa- 
natic fury  against  the  Church  of  Christ,  with  a  flaming  en- 
thusiasm for  the  propagation  of  the  religion  of  Mahomed, 
to  their  thirst  for  dominion  and  glory.  So  numerous  were 
the  martyrs,  and  so  many  the  apostates  from  the  Christian 
faith,  that  these  infidels  had  almost  crushed  the  religion  of 
Jesus  in  Asia. 

In  order  to  trace  these  four  angels  in  their  progress, 
and  to  bring  their  several  exploits  into  a  more  immediate 
and  distinct  view ;  1  will  here  mark  the  different  dynasties 
established  by  each  of  these  nations  in  the  Asiatic  part  of 
the  Khalifat,  as  regarding  their  geographical  and  chrono- 
logical existence,  within  the  limits  of  the  Saracen  empire 
in  Asia. 

I.   ARABIAN  DYNASTIES, 

1.  Of  the  Taherides  in  Khorasan  820*— 8?2. 

2.  Of  the  Hamadanides   in  Syria   and   Mesopotamia 
892—1014. 

3.  Of  the  Fatimides  in  Syria  969— 1  in* 

4.  Of  the  Okailides  in  Erak  or  Chaldea  990—1086, 

5.  Of  the  Mardasides  in  Syria  and  Mesopotamia  10l4«^ 
1084. 

6.  Of  the  Asadites  in  Chaldea  1026—1150., 

k k 


258    VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1063. 

7.  Many  inferior  dynasties  have  been  established,  more 
especially  by  the  house  of  Ali  in  Arabia,  and  in  other 
parts  of  the  Saracen  empire  during  this  period. 

II.   PERSIAN   DYNASTIES, 

1.  Founded  by  the  Barmakides  in  Persia  801. 

2.  Soffarides  in  Khorasan,  Tabarestan,  Sedschestan, 
Fars  and  Dschebal  872 — 902. 

3.  Samanides  in  Mawarennahr,  and  in  Persian  coun- 
tries    874 — 1000. 

4.  Dailemites  in  Dailem,  Gilan,  Dechordschan,  Taba- 
restan, and  in  almost  all  Persia,  927 — 1012. 

5.  Buides  in  Persia,  Bagdad,  (in  the  character  of  Emir 
Al  Omrah)  Erak,  Kuzistan,  Oman,  Mosul,  Diar- 
bekr,  933 — 1055. 

6.  Merwanish  Kurdes  in  Syria  and  Mesopotamia  984— ~ 

1085. 

III.  TtJRKISJI  DYNASTIES, 

1.  Founded  by  the  Telunides  in  Syria  868 — 905.  Dur- 
ing the  reign  of  the  Khaliff  Motassem  841,  the  Turks 
made  their  first  successful  efforts  against  the  Khali- 
fat. Motawdkkel  lost  his  life  by  his  Turkish  life- 
guard 861,  and  Mostain  by  the  same  A.  D.  862,  his 
throne.  Jlchmed  was  the  first  Turkish  governor, 
who  made  himself  sovereign  lord  in  the  empire  and 
founded  the  Telunidan  state  in  Egypt  and  in  part  of 
Syria,  A.  D.  868. 

2.  Ichschidides  in  Syria  935 — 968. 

3.  Gaznevids  in  a  part  of  India,  in  Persia  and  Mawa- 
rennahr, 975—1183. 

IV.    TARTAR  DYNASTY. 

That  fierce  and  warlike  people,  which  under  the  com- 
mand of  Togrul  Bek,  or  Tangrolipix,  established  a  great 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1063.    259 

and  powerful  empire  in  Asia  since  A.  D.  1037,  upon  the 
ruins  of  the  Arabian  Khalifat,  have  been  incorrectly  called 
Hungars,  Huns,  and  Turks.  Their  native,  country  is  not 
the  province  Turkestan,  to  the  East  of  the  Caspian  Sea^ 
properly  the  country  of  the  Turks ;  but  their  country  is 
that  'vast  region  between  the  rivers  Irtisch  and  Sihoii. 
They  are  a  Tartar  tribe,  who  were  compelled  by  the  per- 
petual invasions  of  the  Chinese  and  the  people  of  Cathay, 
to  leave  upper  Asia,  and  remove  to  the  South  ,•  which  they 
accomplished  under  their  great  commander  Seldschuk,  by 
whose  name  they  distinguished  themselves  and  their  dy- 
nasty in  succeeding  times.  At  first  they  acted  as  auxilia- 
ries to  the  Khan  of  Turkestan,  but  soon  after  an  open  rup- 
ture, invaded  his  country  with  fire  and  sword.  They,  at 
last,  settled  themselves  near  the  city  Bochara  in  Mawa- 
rennahr,  and  received  the  Mahomedan  religion.  Here 
Mahmud  found  them  A.  D.  999.  when  he  established  the 
Gaznevids  dynasty  upon  the  ruins  of  the  Samanides,  and 
permitted  them  to  settle  in  Khorasan  against  the  advice  of 
his  ministers,  which  he  soon  regretted  as  an  impolitic 
measure.  Togrul  Bek  began  his  heroic  career  A.  D. 
1034,  at  the  head  of  his  warlike  Tartars,  and  by  a  number 
of  well  improved  victories,  subdued  all  the  countries  from 
the  little  Buckharia  and  the  Indus,  ta  Jerusalem  and  Nice 
in  Bythynia,  and  died  A.  D.  1063,  #ole  lord  of  this  vast 
and  well  established  empire. 

Here  we  stop.  This  trumpet  only  refers  to  the  judg- 
ments of  God  against  the  nations  of  Asia,  and  the  seventh 
trumpet  proclaims  the  judgments  against  the  nations  in  Eu- 
rope. The  conquests  and  establishments  of  the  Ottoman 
empire,  are  not  included  in  this  trumpet ;  we  shall  meet 
with  it  in  ch.  xii.  under  the  emblem  of  a  flood  of  water, 
which  the  serpent  cast  forth  after  the  woman,  in  order  to" 
carry  her  away.  i 

If  we  now  take  a  retrospective  view  of  this  tremendous 
scene  of  revolutions  in  Asia,  during  a  time  of  more  than 


,«60    VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801—TO  1063. 

two  centuries,  in  which  so  many  kingdoms  and  dynasties 
have  heen  established,  destroyed,  and  founded  anew,  and 
all  this  upon  the  wrecks  of  a  well  organized  empire ;  we 
may  perhaps  not  find  the  armies  of  all  these  Asiatic  na- 
tions much  inferior,  to  the  number  expressed  in  this  pro- 
phecy. For  the  amount  of  these  armies  and  roaming  tribes 
of  nations,  should  be  taken,  from  the  commencement  of 
their  preparation  for  these  bloody  scenes,  to  the  extinction 
of  their  dynasties,  beyond  the  close  of  this  prophetic  period, 
determining  only  the  duration  of  this  woe,  which  will,  no 
doubt,  rise  to  an  amazing  sum.  And  if  we  consider  all 
the  blood  and  slaughter  in  battles,  the  lives  lost,  by  that 
dreadful  train  of  consequences  attending  such  a  warfare, 
the  sanguinary  persecutions  of  these  furious  fanatics 
against  Christians  and  Pagans,  if  they  refused  to  become 
Mahomedans ;  we  shall  be  ready  to  grant,  that  the  third 
part  of  men,  immediately  concerned  in  these  terrible  scenes 
during  this  period,  may  not  have  died  natural  deaths,  but 
by  means  of  these  judgments.  The  expression,  "the 
third  part  of  men,''9  does  not  refer  to  all  the  inhabitants  of 
the  world,  but  only  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  Asiatic  part  of 
the  Saracen  empire,  and  to  the  Christian  provinces  in  Asia. 
Verse  17.  And  thus  I  saw  the  horses  in  the  vision,  and 
them  that^at  on  them,  having  breastplates  of 
lire,  and  orjacinth,  and  of  brimstone :  and  the 
heads  of  the  horses  were  as  the  heads  of  lions ; 
and  out  of  their  mouths  issued  fire,  and  smoke, 
and  brimstone. 

18.  By  these  three  was  the  third  part  of  men  killed, 
by  the  fire,  and  by  the  smoke,  and  by  the  brim- 
stone, which  issued  out  of  their  mouths. 

19.  For  their  power  is  in  their  mouth,  and  in  their 
tails :  for  their  tails  were  like  unto  serpents,  and 
had  heads,  and  with  them  they  do  hurt. 

This  is  an  emblematical  representation  of  this  terrible 
mrmy  of  horsemen,  in  which  their  distinguishing  charac- 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  I*.  801— TO  1063.     261 

teristics  from  other  armies,  are  professedly  delineated; 
that  the  believer  in  this  prophecy  might  take  notice  and 
warning,  when  it  should  actually  appear  upon  the  stage  of 
action.  St.  John  beheld  them,  full  of  martial  fire  and 
courage,  as  indicated  by  their  breastplates;  which  accord- 
ing to  the  different  customs  of  these  nations,  actually  were 
of  the  three  colours  here  mentioned.  They  appeared 
fierce  and  powerful,  as  lions,  roaring  for  their  prey  ;  and 
from  their  mouths  proceeded  most  severe  and  peremptory 
commands,  orders  and  sentences,  for  plunder,  torment, 
death,  and  heinous  destruction.  Their  power  was  in  their 
mouths.  For  it  had  been  given  to  these  commanders  to 
inflame  their  whole  armies  with  a  cruel?  ferocious,  and  fre- 
netic spirit  of  war,  for  the  execution  of  plans,  which  < 
humanity  would  otherwise  have  shuddered  to  accomplish. 
What  such  a  general,  at  the  head  of  a  nation,  will  be  able 
to  achieve,  we  have  but  lately  witnessed  in  France.  Their 
tails  signify  both  the  pillaging  trains  of  their  armies,  who 
immediately  took  possession  of  the  whole  country,  and  of 
every  thing  in  it;  and  the  successors  to  the  thrones  of 
these  conquerors,  whose  governments  were  like  unto  ser- 
pents, full  of  crafty,  subtle  policy  and  of  a  poisonous, 
deadly  effect  to  the  prosperity  of  their  conquered  countries. 
History  testifies  these  to  have  been  the  distinguishing  fea- 
tures in  the  character  of  these  nations,  and  the  dreadful 
complexion  of  their  wars,  during  this  period.  Thus  the 
Christians  in  those  countries  received  solemn  warning  of 
the  wrath  to  come  :  in  order  that  they  might  either  with- 
draw from  the  field  of  battle,  or  join  in  with  the  divine  pur- 
poses, and  prepare  to  meet  the  enemy  in  a  becoming  manner. 
Verse  20.  And  the  rest  of  the  men,  which  were  not  killed 
by  these  plagues,  yet  repented  not  of  the  works 
of  their  hands,  that  they  should  not  worship 
devils,  and  idols  of  gold,  and  silver,  and  brass, 
and  stone,  and  of  wood ;  which  neither  can  see, 
nor  hear,  nor  walk. 


2§8    VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1063. 

21.  Neither  repented  they  of  their  murders,  nor  of 
their  sorceries,  nor  of  their  fornication,  nor  of 
their  thefts. 
The  Saracens  then  caused  the  first  woe  in  Christendom, 
in  propagating  Mahomedism  by  a  tormenting  war  of  con* 
quest,  with  all  its  attending  train  of  persecutions  and  vexa- 
tious measures;  and  these  four  nations  were  the  agents  of 
the  second  rvoey  in  estahlishing  it,  by  still  more  severe  mea- 
sures of  torture  and  death  in  every  shape.  We  may  ex- 
pect, that  only  crimes  of  general  prevalence,  and  these  too 
of  the  blackest  die,  could  be  sufficient  to  induce  the  Lord 
to  permit  such  heavy  judgments  on  his  Church,  as  are  con- 
tained in  this  second  woe.  And  such  is  truly  the  nature 
of  the  offences,  laid  to  the  charge  of  both  Heathens  and 
Christians,  as  the  causes  of  these  dreadful  calamities. 
They  were  idolatry,  murder,  sorcery,  fornication,  and 
thefts,  which  kindled  the  anger  of  the  Lord  to  inflict  these 
judgments.  And  these  crimes  being  the  distinguishing 
characteristics  of  the  nations,  alluded  to  in  this  prophecy, 
may  also  enable  us  to  know  and  determine  them,  among 
the  nations  of  the  world. 

I.  They  worship  devils,  and  idols  of  gold,  and  silver, 
and  brass,  and  stone,  and  of  wood.  The  word  r»  ixi- 
uovtoiy  in  the  original,  should  not  be  rendered  devils, 
which  does  not  convey  the  same  idea  to  an  English  reader; 
and  as  we  have  no  appropriate  word  in  our  language,  bet- 
ter adapted  to  express  that  idea,  the  word  demon  might 
have  remained.  This  expression  in  Holy  Scripture  always 
refers  to  Pagan  idolatry,  1  Cor.  x.  20. 21.  because  the  first 
Church  of  Christ  knew  nothing  of  image-worship;  the 
Revelation  excepted,  in  which  also  Christians  are  accused 
of  this  irrational  worship  of  demons.  But  as  the  text  be- 
fore us  distinguishes  between  the  worship  of  demons,  and 
the  worship  of  idols,  I  would  consider  the  first  as  referring 
to  Pagans,  and  the  last  to  Christians.  Demons  are  ima- 
ginary deities,  who  once  were  mortals  of  renown  on  earth, 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  106S.    2&3 

such  as  heroes,  inventors  of  arts  and  sciences,  or  who  had 
otherwise  been  a  blessing  to  cities,  countries,  tribes,  or  na- 
tions in  their  time.  These  after  death  the  Heathens  wor- 
shipped as  Deities,  and  mediators  between  the  superior 
Gods  and  men,  under  the  title  of  demons.  1  Tim.  iv.  1.  Acts 
xvii.  18.  All  the  nations  of  Asia  were  worshippers  of  de- 
mons, except  the  Mahomedans  and  Persians,,  which  last 
adore  God  under  the  emblem  of  fire,  and  the  sun.  It  Is 
worthy  of  remark,  that  the  instruments  of  this  woe,  were 
not  properly  worshippers  of  demons,  though  they  other- 
wise have  been  guilty  of  many  crimes ;  and,  to  the  eternal 
shame  of  idolatrous  Christians,  are  most  inveterate  ene- 
mies to  the  worship  of  images  and  saints,  to  this  day. 

II.  They  worship  idols  of  gold,  and  silver,  and  brass, 
and  stone,  and  of  wood.  These  words  evidently  allude  to 
image  ivorship,  and  to  that  stupid  veneration  for  the  bones 
and  carcasses  of  saints,  which  was  first  begun  in  Greece, 
about  the  year  590.  After  a  terrible  flame  of  controversy, 
attended  with  such  fatal  consequences  to  religion  and  go- 
vernment, both  in  the  Eastern  and  Western  part  of  the  em- 
pire, this  idolatrous  worship  was  firmly  established  by  two 
councils  assembled  at  Constantinople,  in  the  years  863 
and  871.  Since  that  time,  this  superstitious  phrenzy  be- 
came universal  in  the  Greek  Church ;  and  that  deluded 
people,  to  express  their  most  signal  approbation  of  the 
frenetic  enthusiasm  of  this  council  for  the  introduction  of 
this  species  of  gross  idolatry,  have  instituted  the  feast  of 
orthodoxy,  as  an  anniversary  festival  to  commemorate  this 
decree.  The  abettors  of  image  worship  were  also  trium- 
phant in  the  Romish  Church,  loud  and  powerful  as. the 
testimony  of  European  Christians  has  been  against  it, 
since  the  time  of  Charlemagne ;  wherefore  the  third  woe 
is  suffered  to  fall  on  them  with  equal  severity,  and  during 
a  much  longer  period  of  time. 

III.  They  are  also  charged  with  murders,  sorceries, 
fornication  and  thefte>    Mirders  of  the  saints  and  martyrs 


264    VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801— TO  1063. 

of  Jesus,  as  evinced  by  their  oppressive  conduct  against 
many  seceding  Christians,  especially  iri^those  sanguinary 
persecutions  of  the  Paulicians,  between  A.  D.  845 — 950, 
by  the  Creek  Church  ,•  when  these  firm  and  faithful  servants 
of  the  Lord  fled  before  the  brutal  rage  of  their  persecutors 
from  Asia  to  the  Danube.  (pxQpocKita,  sorcery,  siguifies 
the  art  of  poisoning  in  a  clandestine  manner,  as  it  here 
stands  united  to  notorious  murder.  But  the  most  pernicious 
mode  ot  poisoning  is  performed  by  arts  of  magic,  and  John 
lias  here  used  a  Greek  word,  which  ch.  xviii.  23,  properly 
signifies  sorcery.  History  also  informs  us,  tbat  necroman- 
cy and  the  magic  art  was  very  much  in  vogue  in  the  East, 
and  practised  to  great  extent  about  this  time.  Fornication 
here  signifies  all  unlawful  and  unnatural  lusts ;  and  theft, 
robbing  men  of  their  estates.  History  abounds  with  in- 
stances of  these  wicked  and  abominable  practices  in  the 
Grecian  empire,  and  more  especially  in  the  Eastern  pro- 
vinces, during  the  seventh,  eighth  and  ninth  centuries;  by 
which  they  challenged  the  Lord  to  their  own  destruction. 
Though  they  were  guilty  of  such  heinous  crimes  against 
the  dictates  of  religion,  and  the  remonstrances  of  con- 
science, and  had  thus  violated  their  most  sacred  obliga- 
tions towards  God  and  society; — Though  already  scourg- 
ed and  severely  reprehended  by  the  judgments  of  this  woe ; 
yet  they  might  have  repented  of  their  sins  at  the  feet  of 
Jesus,  and  would  have  found  pardon  with  a  merciful  Sa- 
viour, and  the  aids  of  his  Holy  Spirit,  in  order  to  break 
their  criminal  connexions  with  sin  and  sinners,  and  attain 
to  a  new  life.  But  such  as  remained  impenitent,  and 
would  not  abstain  from  their  presumtuous  sins,  and  insol- 
lent  practices,  are  threatened  .with  the  third  woe,  2  Thes. 
ii.  10.  12.  and  in  case  of  further  obduracy,  with  still  se- 
verer judgments  under  the  vials  of  wrath. 

The  authorities,    for  the  historical  facts  alledged  in  the 
explanation  of  these  woes,  are  Gibbon,  Moskeim,  Shrceck, 


VI.  TRUMPET,  FROM  A.  D.  801—TO  1063.    265 

Gatterer,  Walch,  Arnold,  some  historical  dictionaries, 
and  the  Encyclopaedia,  under  the  different  articles  treated 
of  in  this  chapter;  where  the  learned  reader  may  also 
meet  with  references  to  still  more  ancient  authors  than 
these,  to  satisfy  himself  on  every  subject.     , 


P.  S.  If  this  volume,  under  the  auspices  of  an  all  ruling  Providence, 
should  meet  the  approbation  of  the  Christian  public,  the  Author  is  pre- 
pared,  and  will  furnish  his  indulgent  readers  with  the  second  volume  in 
3  short  time. 


FINIS, 


£ 


■ 


'  ■■<:i.i,-»-(,  * ->j-^-i 


